礼敬彼世尊、阿拉汉、正自觉者
在《相应部》中· 《因缘品》义注巴利
Namo tassa bhagavato arahato sammāsambuddhassa · Saṃyuttanikāye · Nidānavagga-aṭṭhakathā
1. 因缘相应义注
475 段
《缘起经》的注释巴利
1. Paṭiccasamuppādasuttavaṇṇanā
1 “如是我闻”这句话,是《因缘品》中第一部经《缘起经》的开头。下面按顺序逐词解释。经文说“那时,世尊对比丘们说”,这里的“那时”是在交代地点和时间。因为它说明:“在他安住的时刻,就是那个时间;在他住在祇园的时候,就是在祇园那里。”或者说,它指出适合说法的地点和时间。因为世尊不会在不合适的地点、不合适的时间说法。《优陀那》里“婆醯,现在还不是时候”等话,就是这里的证明。
“确实”这个词,只是用来补足音节,或者表示强调、起始时间等意思。
“世尊”,是表明他是世间所敬重的人。
“比丘们”,是指适合来听法的人。另外,这里“比丘”这个词的含义,应该按照《波罗夷》45和《分别》510等处的解释来理解:“因为乞食,所以叫比丘;因为已经奉行乞食的生活,所以叫比丘。”等等。
“说”,就是呼唤、讲话、使对方知道,这里是这个意思。但在别的地方,这个词也有“告知”的意思。比如经中说:“比丘们,我告诉你们;比丘们,我向你们宣告。”也有“召唤”的意思。比如经中说:“来吧,比丘,你替我传话,叫舍利弗来。”(《增支部》9.11)
“比丘们”这个称呼,是在表明呼唤的方式。之所以这样称呼,是因为他们具备了以乞食为生的戒行等功德。通晓语言的人认为:具足以乞食为生的戒行功德的人,是“比丘”;具足依乞食而行的法性功德的人,也是“比丘”;在乞食这件事上做得好的人,也是“比丘”。
世尊用这个表明他们具足乞食戒行等功德的称呼,揭示他们为高低各种人所追随的生活方式,以此来制止他们心中可能生起的浮躁或消沉。
而“比丘们”这个称呼,带着世尊的悲悯、柔和的心,以及先用目光注视他们的亲切,这样称呼让他们面向自己,既表达了他想说法的愿望,也激起了他们想听的兴趣;同时,由于“唤醒”的含义,也促使他们好好作意。因为教法的成就,正取决于好好作意。巴利
1.Evaṃme sutanti – nidānavagge paṭhamaṃ paṭiccasamuppādasuttaṃ. Tatrāyaṃ anupubbapadavaṇṇanā – tatra kho bhagavā bhikkhū āmantesīti, ettha tatrāti desakālaparidīpanaṃ. Tañhi ‘‘yaṃ samayaṃ viharati, tatra samaye, yasmiñca jetavane viharati, tatra jetavane’’ti dīpeti. Bhāsitabbayutte vā desakāle dīpeti. Na hi bhagavā ayutte dese kāle ca dhammaṃ bhāsati. ‘‘Akālo kho tāva bāhiyā’’tiādi (udā. 10) cettha sādhakaṃ. Khoti padapūraṇamatte, avadhāraṇe ādikālatthe vā nipāto. Bhagavāti lokagarudīpanaṃ. Bhikkhūti kathāsavanayuttapuggalavacanaṃ. Apicettha ‘‘bhikkhakoti bhikkhu, bhikkhācariyaṃ ajjhūpagatoti bhikkhū’’tiādinā (pārā. 45; vibha. 510) nayena vacanattho veditabbo. Āmantesīti ālapi, abhāsi, sambodhesi, ayamettha attho. Aññatra pana ñāpanepi hoti. Yathāha – ‘‘āmantayāmi vo, bhikkhave, paṭivedayāmi vo, bhikkhave’’ti. Pakkosanepi. Yathāha – ‘‘ehi tvaṃ, bhikkhu, mama vacanena sāriputtaṃ āmantehī’’ti (a. ni. 9.11). Bhikkhavoti āmantanākāradīpanaṃ. Tañca bhikkhanasīlatādiguṇayogasiddhattā vuttaṃ. Bhikkhanasīlatāguṇayuttopi hi bhikkhu, bhikkhanadhammatāguṇayuttopi bhikkhane sādhukāritāguṇayuttopīti saddavidū maññanti. Tena ca tesaṃ bhikkhanasīlatādiguṇayogasiddhena vacanena hīnādhikajanasevitavuttiṃ pakāsento uddhatadīnabhāvaniggahaṃ karoti. ‘‘Bhikkhavo’’ti iminā ca karuṇāvipphārasommahadayanayananipātapubbaṅgamena vacanena te attano abhimukhe karonto teneva kathetukamyatādīpakena nesaṃ vacanena sotukamyataṃ janeti, teneva ca sambodhanatthena sādhukaṃ manasikārepi niyojeti. Sādhukaṃ manasikārāyattā hi sāsanasampatti.
如果有人问:其他天人和人类明明也在场,为什么世尊只招呼比丘们呢?因为他们地位最高、最为殊胜、离世尊最近、又常随侍在世尊身边。世尊的说法虽然普遍面向一切大众,但在大众之中,比丘地位最高,因为他们是最早出现的;最为殊胜,因为他们以出家生活为本,跟随导师的修行,并且能领受整个教法;离世尊最近,因为在座中他们就坐在世尊附近;常随侍在世尊身边,因为他们总是住在世尊附近。再者,他们正是适合接受说法的容器,因为他们能按照教导去实修。而且这次说法也特别针对某些比丘。所以世尊这样招呼他们。巴利
Aparesupi devamanussesu vijjamānesu kasmā bhikkhūyeva āmantesīti ce? Jeṭṭhaseṭṭhāsannasadāsannihitabhāvato. Sabbaparisasādhāraṇā hi bhagavato dhammadesanā, parisāya jeṭṭhā bhikkhū paṭhamaṃ uppannattā, seṭṭhā anagāriyabhāvaṃ ādiṃ katvā satthucariyānuvidhāyakattā sakalasāsanapaṭiggāhakattā ca, āsannā tattha nisinnesu satthusantikattā, sadāsannihitā satthusantikāvacarattāti. Apica te dhammadesanāya bhājanaṃ yathānusiṭṭhaṃ paṭipattisabbhāvato. Visesato ca ekacce bhikkhūyeva sandhāya ayaṃ desanāpīti evaṃ āmantesi.
那么,世尊在说法时,为什么先招呼比丘们,而不是直接就开始说法呢?这是为了让他们提起正念。比丘们坐在那里的时候,有的可能在想着别的事,有的可能心已经散了,有的可能在反复思惟法义,有的可能正在对自己修行的业处用心。如果不先招呼他们就直接说法,他们可能没办法注意到:“这个开示是以什么为根据、以什么为缘由、是依什么因缘而说的?”这样他们要么理解错了,要么根本记不住。所以,世尊为了让他们提起正念,先招呼他们,然后才说法。巴利
Kimatthaṃ pana bhagavā dhammaṃ desento paṭhamaṃ bhikkhū āmantesi, na dhammameva desesīti? Satijananatthaṃ. Bhikkhū aññaṃ cintentāpi vikkhittacittāpi dhammaṃ paccavekkhantāpi kammaṭṭhānaṃ manasikarontāpi nisinnā honti. Te anāmantetvā dhamme desiyamāne ‘‘ayaṃ desanā kiṃnidānā kiṃpaccayā katamāya aṭṭhuppattiyā desitā’’ti sallakkhetuṃ asakkontā duggahitaṃ vā gaṇheyyuṃ, na vā gaṇheyyuṃ, tena nesaṃ satijananatthaṃ bhagavā paṭhamaṃ āmantetvā pacchā dhammaṃ deseti.
“尊者”这个称呼是表达恭敬的话,或者是对导师的回应。这里,世尊说“诸比库”是在招呼比库们;他们说“尊者”是在回应世尊。就像这样:世尊呼唤“诸比库”,他们回应“尊者”;世尊让他们应答“诸比库”,他们应答“尊者”。那些比库,就是世尊所招呼的那些人。回应世尊,就是对世尊的招呼作出回应,也就是面向世尊聆听、接受、领纳的意思。世尊这样说,就是世尊现在说出了这整部应当宣说的经。到这里为止,具寿阿难为了让这部具足义理与文句、显示诸佛说法智慧甚深的经容易理解,而说出的序分——它以时间、地点、说法者和听众、处所来庄严——其义理解释已经圆满。巴利
Bhadanteti gāravavacanametaṃ, satthuno paṭivacanadānaṃ vā. Apicettha ‘‘bhikkhavo’’ti vadamāno bhagavā bhikkhū ālapati. ‘‘Bhadante’’ti vadamānā te bhagavantaṃ paccālapanti. Tathā hi ‘‘bhikkhavo’’ti bhagavā ābhāsati, ‘‘bhadante’’ti paccābhāsanti. ‘‘Bhikkhavo’’ti paṭivacanaṃ dāpeti, ‘‘bhadante’’ti paṭivacanaṃ denti. Te bhikkhūti ye bhagavā āmantesi, te. Bhagavato paccassosunti bhagavato āmantanaṃ patiassosuṃ, abhimukhā hutvā suṇiṃsu sampaṭicchiṃsu paṭiggahesunti attho. Bhagavā etadavocāti, bhagavā etaṃ idāni vattabbaṃ sakalasuttaṃ avoca. Ettāvatā yaṃ āyasmatā ānandena atthabyañjanasampannassa buddhānaṃ desanāñāṇagambhīrabhāvasaṃsūcakassa imassa suttassa sukhāvagāhaṇatthaṃ kāladesadesakaparisāpadesappaṭimaṇḍitaṃ nidānaṃ bhāsitaṃ, tassa atthavaṇṇanā samattā.
现在到了注释世尊所安立的这部经的时候了,这部经是以“缘起……我将为你们说”这样的方式开头的。不过,这部经的注释,要先审察经的安立方式才能说得清楚,所以我们先来审察经的安立方式。经的安立方式有四种:自发意乐、随顺他意、随问而说、因事而说。其中,有些经是世尊没有受人祈请,纯粹出于自己的意乐而说的,比如:十力经、月喻经、琵琶喻经、正勤经、神足经、根经、力经、觉支经、道支经等等。这些经的安立方式就是“自发意乐”。巴利
Idāni paṭiccasamuppādaṃ votiādinā nayena bhagavatā nikkhittassa suttassa saṃvaṇṇanāya okāso anuppatto. Sā panesā suttavaṇṇanā yasmā suttanikkhepaṃ vicāretvā vuccamānā pākaṭā hoti, tasmā suttanikkhepaṃ tāva vicāressāma. Cattāro hi suttanikkhepā – attajjhāsayo, parajjhāsayo, pucchāvasiko, aṭṭhuppattikoti. Tattha yāni suttāni bhagavā parehi anajjhiṭṭho kevalaṃ attano ajjhāsayeneva katheti, seyyathidaṃ – dasabalasuttantahārako candopama-vīṇopama-sammappadhāna-iddhipāda-indriyabala-bojjhaṅgamaggaṅga-suttantahārakoti evamādīni, tesaṃ attajjhāsayo nikkhepo.
不过,还有一些经是世尊看到别人内心的意乐、堪忍、审察能力、心的倾向以及觉悟的潜能之后,随顺他人的意乐而说的,比如“罗睺罗令解脱成熟之法已成熟,让我进一步引导罗睺罗至漏尽”这样,随顺他人的意乐而说的有《小罗睺罗教诫经》《大罗睺罗教诫经》《转法轮经》《无我相经》《蛇喻经》《界分别经》等等。这些经的安立方式就是“随顺他意”。巴利
Yāni pana ‘‘paripakkā kho rāhulassa vimuttiparipācanīyā dhammā. Yaṃnūnāhaṃ rāhulaṃ uttariṃ āsavānaṃ khaye vineyya’’nti (saṃ. ni. 4.121; ma. ni. 3.416) evaṃ paresaṃ ajjhāsayaṃ khantiṃ nijjhānakkhamaṃ manaṃ abhinīhāraṃ bujjhanabhāvañca apekkhitvā parajjhāsayavasena kathitāni, seyyathidaṃ – cūḷarāhulovādasuttaṃ, mahārāhulovādasuttaṃ, dhammacakkappavattanaṃ, anattalakkhaṇasuttaṃ, āsīvisopamasuttaṃ, dhātuvibhaṅgasuttanti, evamādīni, tesaṃ parajjhāsayo nikkhepo.
此外,四众弟子、四种姓、龙、金翅鸟、干闼婆、阿修罗、夜叉、四大王天、三十三天等诸天,乃至大梵天等,他们来到世尊面前,用这样的方式提问:“世尊,人们说觉支、觉支;世尊,人们说盖、盖——这些就是五取蕴吗?世间最上等的财富是什么?”如此等等。世尊被这样问到时,所宣说的《觉支相应》等经典,以及《天相应》《魔相应》《梵天相应》《帝释问经》《小吠陀罗经》《大吠陀罗经》《沙门果经》《旷野夜叉经》《针毛夜叉经》《粗毛夜叉经》等其他经典,这些经典的安立方式就是随问而说。巴利
Bhagavantaṃ pana upasaṅkamitvā catasso parisā cattāro vaṇṇā nāgā supaṇṇā gandhabbā asurā yakkhā mahārājāno tāvatiṃsādayo devā mahābrahmāti evamādayo ‘‘bojjhaṅgā bojjhaṅgāti, bhante, vuccanti – (saṃ. ni. 5.202) nīvaraṇā nīvaraṇāti, bhante, vuccanti – ime nu kho, bhante, pañcupādānakkhandhā, kiṃsūdha vittaṃ purisassa seṭṭha’’ntiādinā (saṃ. ni. 1.246; su. ni. 183) nayena pañhaṃ pucchanti. Evaṃ puṭṭhena bhagavatā yāni kathitāni bojjhaṅgasaṃyuttādīni, yāni vā panaññānipi devatāsaṃyutta, mārasaṃyutta, brahmasaṃyutta, sakkapañha, cūḷavedalla, mahāvedalla, sāmaññaphalaāḷavaka, sūciloma, kharalomasuttādīni, tesaṃ pucchāvasiko nikkhepo.
不过,那些是依已生起的因缘而宣说的,比如《法嗣经》《小狮子吼经》《子肉喻经》《木桩喻经》《火堆喻经》《泡沫喻经》《波利质多罗树喻经》等,这些经典的安立方式就是因事而说。巴利
Yāni pana tāni uppannaṃ kāraṇaṃ paṭicca kathitāni, seyyathidaṃ – dhammadāyādaṃ. Cūḷasīhanādasuttaṃ puttamaṃsūpamaṃ dārukkhandhūpamaṃ aggikkhandhūpamaṃ pheṇapiṇḍūpamaṃ pāricchattakūpamanti evamādīni, tesaṃ aṭṭhuppattiko nikkhepo.
在这四种安立方式中,这部《缘起经》属于“随顺他人意向”的安立。世尊确实是随顺他人的意向而宣说此经的。是随顺哪些人的意向呢?是随顺顿悟者的意向。人有四种:顿悟者、广说悟者、可引导者、文句最胜者。其中,有人在说法刚宣说的当下就证悟佛法,这种人称为顿悟者。有人听到简要的说法后,在法义被详细分析时证悟佛法,这种人称为广说悟者。有人要通过听闻、提问、如理作意,亲近、结交、侍奉善知识,才逐步证悟佛法,这种人称为可引导者。有人即使多听、多记、多读诵,也无法在这一生证悟佛法,这种人称为文句最胜者。在这四种人当中,世尊正是随顺顿悟者的意向而宣说了这部经。巴利
Evametesu catūsu nikkhepesu imassa paṭiccasamuppādasuttassa parajjhāsayo nikkhepo. Parapuggalajjhāsayavasena hidaṃ bhagavatā nikkhittaṃ. Katamesaṃ puggalānaṃ ajjhāsayavasenāti? Ugghaṭitaññūnaṃ. Cattāro hi puggalā ugghaṭitaññū vipañcitaññū neyyo padaparamoti. Tattha yassa puggalassa saha udāhaṭavelāya dhammābhisamayo hoti, ayaṃ vuccati puggalo ugghaṭitaññū. Yassa puggalassa saṃkhittena bhāsitassa vitthārena atthe vibhajiyamāne dhammābhisamayo hoti, ayaṃ vuccati puggalo vipañcitaññū. Yassa puggalassa uddesato paripucchato yoniso manasikaroto, kalyāṇamitte sevato, bhajato, payirupāsato, anupubbena dhammābhisamayo hoti, ayaṃ vuccati puggalo neyyo. Yassa puggalassa bahumpi suṇato, bahumpi dhārayato, bahumpi vācayato na tāya jātiyā dhammābhisamayo hoti, ayaṃ vuccati puggalo padaparamo. Iti imesu catūsu puggalesu ugghaṭitaññūpuggalānaṃ ajjhāsayavasena idaṃ suttaṃ nikkhittaṃ.
据说,那时候有五百位住在乡下的比丘,他们全都是或者一人独行,或者两人同行、三人同行、四人同行、五人同行,行持一致,受持头陀支,精进努力,专心修习止观,修观。他们渴望那微细、微妙、空性的缘起教说。傍晚时分,他们来到世尊面前,顶礼之后,就像被一张红色毛毯围拢一样,怀着对说法的期待,围绕在世尊身边坐下。世尊就随顺他们的意向,开始讲这部经。就像一位善巧的画师,拿到一面还没处理过的墙壁,不会一上来就画图案,而是先用大量黏土等把墙面处理好,等墙面处理好了,才在上面画图案;但如果拿到的是已经处理好的墙壁,他就不用再做墙面处理的工作,而是调好各种颜料,拿起墨线笔或画笔,直接画图案。同样,世尊如果遇到一个还没有确立修行方向、刚开始修行的善男子,不会一上来就对他讲那邻近阿罗汉果的、微细、微妙、空性的观的特征,而是先教导他戒、定、业所成慧的正见等前行道路,把他引导进去。正是针对这个,才这样说:巴利
Tadā kira pañcasatā janapadavāsikā bhikkhū sabbeva ekacarā dvicarā ticarā catucarā pañcacarā sabhāgavuttino dhutaṅgadharā āraddhavīriyā yuttayogā vipassakā saṇhaṃ sukhumaṃ suññataṃ paccayākāradesanaṃ patthayamānā sāyanhasamaye bhagavantaṃ upasaṅkamitvā, vanditvā, rattakambalasāṇiyā parikkhipamānā viya desanaṃ paccāsīsamānā parivāretvā nisīdiṃsu. Tesaṃ ajjhāsayavasena bhagavā idaṃ suttaṃ ārabhi. Yathā hi cheko cittakāro aparikammakatabhittiṃ labhitvā, na āditova rūpaṃ samuṭṭhāpesi, mahāmattikalepādīhi pana bhittiparikammaṃ tāva katvā , kataparikammāya bhittiyā rūpaṃ samuṭṭhāpeti, kataparikammaṃ pana bhittiṃ labhitvā, bhittiparikammabyāpāraṃ akatvā, raṅgajātāni yojetvā, vaṭṭikaṃ vā tūlikaṃ vā ādāya rūpameva samuṭṭhāpeti, evameva bhagavā akatābhinivesaṃ ādikammikakulaputtaṃ labhitvā nāssa āditova arahattapadaṭṭhānaṃ saṇhaṃ sukhumaṃ suññataṃ vipassanālakkhaṇaṃ ācikkhati, sīlasamādhikammassakatādiṭṭhisampadāya pana yojento pubbabhāgapaṭipadaṃ tāva ācikkhati. Yaṃ sandhāya vuttaṃ –
比丘,所以你要从一开始就净化善法。什么是善法的开端?就是戒完全清净,见正直。比丘,当你的戒完全清净、见正直时,你就要依靠戒、安住在戒上,以三种方式修习四念处。哪四种呢?比丘,在这里,你要于内身随观身而住,热诚、正知、具念,除去对世间的贪欲和忧恼;或于外身随观身……或于内外身随观身……于诸法中随观诸法而住,热诚、正知、具念,除去对世间的贪欲和忧恼。比丘,当你依靠戒、安住在戒上,这样以三种方式修习这四念处时,那么,比丘,此后无论黑夜或白天到来,你所期待的就是善法增长,而不是退减。巴利
‘‘Tasmātiha tvaṃ, bhikkhu, ādimeva visodhehi kusalesu dhammesu. Ko cādi kusalānaṃ dhammānaṃ? Sīlañca suvisuddhaṃ diṭṭhi ca ujukā. Yato kho te, bhikkhu, sīlañca suvisuddhaṃ bhavissati diṭṭhi ca ujukā. Tato tvaṃ, bhikkhu, sīlaṃ nissāya sīle patiṭṭhāya cattāro satipaṭṭhāne tividhena bhāveyyāsi. Katame cattāro? Idha tvaṃ, bhikkhu, ajjhattaṃ vā kāye kāyānupassī viharāhi ātāpī sampajāno satimā vineyya loke abhijjhādomanassaṃ. Bahiddhā vā kāye…pe… ajjhattabahiddhā vā kāye…pe… dhammesu dhammānupassī viharāhi ātāpī sampajāno satimā vineyya loke abhijjhādomanassaṃ. Yato kho tvaṃ, bhikkhu, sīlaṃ nissāya sīle patiṭṭhāya ime cattāro satipaṭṭhāne evaṃ tividhena bhāvessasi, tato tuyhaṃ, bhikkhu, yā ratti vā divaso vā āgamissati, vuddhiyeva pāṭikaṅkhā kusalesu dhammesu, no parihānī’’ti (saṃ. ni. 5.369).
就这样,先为初学的善男子讲了以戒为主题的预备修法,然后直接开示那趋向阿罗汉果的、微细、微妙、空性的观禅特征。巴利
Evaṃ ādikammikakulaputtassa sīlakathāya parikammaṃ kathetvā, arahattapadaṭṭhānaṃ saṇhaṃ sukhumaṃ suññataṃ vipassanālakkhaṇaṃ ācikkhati.
对于戒行清净、已经发起精进、专心修行观禅的人,导师就不再为他讲说前行阶段的方法,而是直接讲说那直捷的、作为阿罗汉果近因的、微细、微妙、空性的观禅特征。这五百位比丘已经净除了前行阶段的修行而安住,就像经过精炼的黄金,又像打磨得极为光洁的宝石堆,只差出世间道还没有生起。于是,为了让他们生起这道,导师观察他们的意乐,便开始讲说这部经。巴利
Parisuddhasīlaṃ pana āraddhavīriyaṃ yuttayogaṃ vipassakaṃ labhitvā, nāssa pubbabhāgapaṭipadaṃ ācikkhati, ujukameva pana arahattapadaṭṭhānaṃ saṇhaṃ sukhumaṃ suññataṃ vipassanālakkhaṇaṃ ācikkhati. Ime pañcasatā bhikkhū pubbabhāgapaṭipadaṃ parisodhetvā ṭhitā sudhantasuvaṇṇasadisā suparimajjitamaṇikkhandhasannibhā, eko lokuttaramaggova nesaṃ anāgato. Iti tassāgamanatthāya satthā tesaṃ ajjhāsayaṃ apekkhamāno idaṃ suttaṃ ārabhi.
在这里,“缘起”指的是因缘的运行方式。因为因缘的运行方式让诸法互相依赖、共同生起,所以称为“缘起”。这是此处的简要说明,详细的解释应当从《清净道论》中获取。巴利
Tattha paṭiccasamuppādanti paccayākāraṃ. Paccayākāro hi aññamaññaṃ paṭicca sahite dhamme uppādeti. Tasmā paṭiccasamuppādoti vuccati. Ayamettha saṅkhepo, vitthāro pana visuddhimaggato gahetabbo.
“vo”这个词,可以在反身、目的格、作具格、与格、属格和补足音节这几种用法中见到。比如在“Kacci pana vo anuruddhā samaggā sammodamānā”(阿那律们!你们是否和合、欢喜?)(《中部》1.326;《大品》466)这类句子里,是反身用法。在“Gacchatha, bhikkhave, paṇāmemi vo”(去吧,比丘们!我送别你们)(《中部》2.157)这类句子里,是目的格。在“Na vo mama santike vatthabba”(你们不可住在我这里)这类句子里,是作具格。在“Vanapatthapariyāyaṃ vo, bhikkhave, desessāmi”(比丘们!我将为你们讲述林薮法门)(《中部》1.190)这类句子里,是与格。在“Sabbesaṃ vo, sāriputta, subhāsita”(舍利弗!你们的一切所说都是善说)(《中部》1.345)这类句子里,是属格。在“Ye hi vo ariyā parisuddhakāyakammantā”(那些圣者,他们的身业清净)这类句子里,只是补足音节。但在这里,应当看作与格。“比丘们”是应诺之后,对已经面向世尊的人再次称呼。“我将讲述”是承诺要说法。“你们要听”是:你们要听我正说的那个缘起、那个说法。巴利
Voti ayaṃ vo-saddo paccatta-upayogakaraṇa-sampadāna-sāmivacana-padapūraṇesu dissati. ‘‘Kacci pana vo anuruddhā samaggā sammodamānā’’tiādīsu (ma. ni. 1.326; mahāva. 466) hi paccatte dissati. ‘‘Gacchatha, bhikkhave, paṇāmemi vo’’tiādīsu (ma. ni. 2.157) upayoge. ‘‘Na vo mama santike vatthabba’’ntiādīsu (ma. ni. 2.157) karaṇe. ‘‘Vanapatthapariyāyaṃ vo, bhikkhave, desessāmī’’tiādīsu (ma. ni. 1.190) sampadāne. ‘‘Sabbesaṃ vo, sāriputta, subhāsita’’ntiādīsu (ma. ni. 1.345) sāmivacane. ‘‘Ye hi vo ariyā parisuddhakāyakammantā’’tiādīsu (ma. ni. 1.35) padapūraṇamatte. Idha panāyaṃ sampadāne daṭṭhabbo. Bhikkhaveti patissavena abhimukhībhūtānaṃ puna ālapanaṃ. Desessāmīti desanāpaṭijānanaṃ. Taṃ suṇāthāti taṃ paṭiccasamuppādaṃ taṃ desanaṃ mayā vuccamānaṃ suṇātha.
“好好作意”这句话里,“好好”和“善哉”是同一个意思。而“善哉”这个词,出现在祈请、领受、令欢喜、美好、坚固等用法中。比如在“善哉,尊者,愿世尊为我简要说法”这类句子里,是祈请。在“善哉,尊者”那位比丘欢喜信受世尊所说之后随喜这类句子里,是领受。在“善哉,善哉,舍利弗”这类句子里,是令欢喜。巴利
Sādhukaṃ manasi karothāti ettha pana sādhukaṃ sādhūti ekatthametaṃ. Ayañca sādhusaddo āyācana-sampaṭicchana-sampahaṃsana-sundara-daḷhīkammādīsu dissati. ‘‘Sādhu me, bhante, bhagavā saṃkhittena dhammaṃ desetū’’tiādīsu (a. ni. 4.257; saṃ. ni. 4.65; 5.381) hi āyācane dissati. ‘‘Sādhu, bhanteti kho so bhikkhu bhagavato bhāsitaṃ abhinanditvā anumoditvā’’tiādīsu (ma. ni. 3.86) sampaṭicchane. ‘‘Sādhu sādhu, sāriputtā’’tiādīsu (dī. ni. 3.349) sampahaṃsane.
乐于正法的人王真好,有智慧的人真好。
不欺骗朋友是好事,不作恶是快乐。巴利
‘‘Sādhu dhammarucī rājā, sādhu paññāṇavā naro; Sādhu mittānamaddubbho, pāpassa akaraṇaṃ sukha’’nti. –
在《本生经》2.18.101等处的“sādhu”是“美好”的意思。在《增支部》5.192的“Tena hi, brāhmaṇa, sādhukaṃ suṇāhi”(那么,婆罗门,请好好听)等句子中,“sādhuka”这个词也用来表示坚固和命令。在这里,应当知道它正是在坚固和命令这两个意义上使用,同时也可以通于“美好”的意思。以坚固之义来说,就是“请坚固地听此法,好好地执持”;以命令之义来说,就是“听从我的命令来听”;以美好之义来说,就是“请听这美妙善好的法”——这样就表达出来了。“作意”就是转向、注意的意思。“等持”就是专注。意思是:心不散乱地倾听,放在心里。巴利
Ādīsu (jā. 2.18.101) sundare. ‘‘Tena hi, brāhmaṇa, sādhukaṃ suṇāhī’’tiādīsu (a. ni. 5.192) sādhukasaddoyeva daḷhīkamme āṇattiyantipi vuccati. Idha panāyaṃ ettheva daḷhīkamme āṇattiyā ca attho veditabbo, sundaratthepi vaṭṭati. Daḷhīkaraṇatthena hi ‘‘daḷhaṃ imaṃ dhammaṃ suṇātha, suggahitaṃ gaṇhantā’’, āṇattiatthena ‘‘mama āṇattiyā suṇātha’’ sundaratthena ‘‘sundaramimaṃ bhaddakaṃ dhammaṃ suṇāthā’’ti etaṃ dīpitaṃ hoti. Manasi karothāti āvajjetha. Samannāharathāti attho. Avikkhittacittā hutvā nisāmetha, citte karothāti adhippāyo.
现在在这里,你们要听好这个——这句话是为了防止耳根的散乱。要好好作意——这是通过让作意变得坚固,来防止意根的散乱。其中,前一句是防止执取文句上的颠倒,后一句是防止执取义理上的颠倒。前一句把人引向闻法,后一句把人引向对已闻之法的受持和审察。前一句表明:这个法文句圆满,所以值得听闻;后一句表明:这个法有实义,所以应当作意。或者,也可以把“好好”这个词同时连到前后两句上,这样理解它们的关联:因为这个法既是法甚深,也是教说甚深,所以你们要听好;又因为义甚深、证悟甚深,所以要好好作意。“我将说”就是“我将开示”。在“你们要听好这个”这里,并不是只简略地开示所承诺的法,而是说我要把它详细地讲出来。因为这些话正是表示略说和广说的用语。正如鹏耆舍长老所说:巴利
Idānettha taṃ suṇāthāti sotindriyavikkhepanivāraṇametaṃ. Sādhukaṃ manasi karothāti manasikāre daḷhīkammaniyojanena manindriyavikkhepanivāraṇaṃ. Purimañcettha byañjanavipallāsagāhanivāraṇaṃ, pacchimaṃ atthavipallāsagāhanivāraṇaṃ. Purimena ca dhammassavane niyojeti, pacchimena sutānaṃ dhammānaṃ dhāraṇūpaparikkhāsu. Purimena ca ‘‘sabyañjano ayaṃ dhammo, tasmā savanīyo’’ti dīpeti, pacchimena ‘‘sāttho, tasmā manasi kātabbo’’ti. Sādhukapadaṃ vā ubhayapadehi yojetvā, ‘‘yasmā ayaṃ dhammo dhammagambhīro ca desanāgambhīro ca, tasmā suṇātha sādhukaṃ. Yasmā atthagambhīro ca paṭivedhagambhīro ca, tasmā sādhukaṃ manasi karothā’’ti evaṃ yojanā veditabbā. Bhāsissāmīti desessāmi. ‘‘Taṃ suṇāthā’’ti ettha paṭiññātaṃ desanaṃ saṃkhittatova na desessāmi, apica kho vitthāratopi naṃ bhāsissāmīti vuttaṃ hoti. Saṅkhepavitthāravācakāni hi etāni padāni. Yathāha vaṅgīsatthero –
他既能简要地宣说,也能详细地讲说;
他的辩才像鹎鸟的鸣声一样宣发出来。巴利
‘‘Saṃkhittenapi deseti, vitthārenapi bhāsati; Sāḷikāyiva nigghoso, paṭibhānaṃ udīrayī’’ti. (saṃ. ni. 1.214; theragā. 1241);
听到这话后,那些比丘生起踊跃之心,回应世尊说:“是的,尊者。”这即是说,他们接受了导师的教言,领受了下来。巴利
Evaṃ vutte ussāhajātā hutvā evaṃ, bhanteti kho te bhikkhū bhagavato paccassosuṃ satthu vacanaṃ sampaṭicchiṃsu, paṭiggahesunti vuttaṃ hoti.
于是,世尊这样说——现在要说的就是“诸比丘,什么是缘起?”等,世尊由此开示了整部经。其中,“诸比丘,什么是缘起?”属于想开示而问。提问确实有五种:未见而问、已见而问、断疑而问、同意而问、想开示而问。它们之间的差别如下:巴利
Atha nesaṃ bhagavā etadavoca – etaṃ idāni vattabbaṃ ‘‘katamo ca, bhikkhave, paṭiccasamuppādo’’tiādiṃ sakalaṃ suttaṃ avoca. Tattha katamo ca, bhikkhave, paṭiccasamuppādoti kathetukamyatāpucchā. Pañcavidhā hi pucchā adiṭṭhajotanāpucchā diṭṭhasaṃsandanāpucchā vimaticchedanāpucchā anumatipucchā kathetukamyatāpucchāti, tāsaṃ idaṃ nānattaṃ –
什么是“未见而令明之问”?对于某个特征,本来并不知道、没有看见、没有衡量、没有审察、没有显现、没有阐明。为了了知它、看见它、衡量它、审察它、使它显现、阐明它,而提出问题。这就是“未见而令明之问”。巴利
Katamā adiṭṭhajotanā pucchā (mahāni. 150; cūḷani. puṇṇakamāṇavapucchāniddesa 12)? Pakatiyā lakkhaṇaṃ aññātaṃ hoti adiṭṭhaṃ atulitaṃ atīritaṃ avibhūtaṃ avibhāvitaṃ. Tassa ñāṇāya dassanāya tulanāya tīraṇāya vibhūtāya vibhāvanatthāya pañhaṃ pucchati. Ayaṃ adiṭṭhajotanāpucchā.
什么是已见对照问?对于自己本来已经知道、已经见到、已经衡量、已经审察、已经显现、已经明了的特征,为了和其他有智慧的人一起对照讨论而提出问题。这就是已见对照问。巴利
Katamā diṭṭhasaṃsandanāpucchā? Pakatiyā lakkhaṇaṃ ñātaṃ hoti diṭṭhaṃ tulitaṃ tīritaṃ vibhūtaṃ vibhāvitaṃ. So aññehi paṇḍitehi saddhiṃ saṃsandanatthāya pañhaṃ pucchati. Ayaṃ diṭṭhasaṃsandanāpucchā.
什么是断疑之问?一个人本性上就陷入疑惑、陷入犹豫,心中生起两种念头:“是这样吗?不是这样吗?到底是怎么回事?”为了断除疑惑,他提出问题。这就是断疑之问。巴利
Katamā vimaticchedanāpucchā? Pakatiyā saṃsayapakkhando hoti vimatipakkhando dveḷhakajāto – ‘‘evaṃ nu kho, na nu kho, kathaṃ nu kho’’ti, so vimaticchedanatthāya pañhaṃ pucchati, ayaṃ vimaticchedanāpucchā.
什么是同意问?世尊征询比丘们的同意而提问:“比丘们,你们怎么想?色是常的还是无常的?”“尊者,是无常的。”“那么,无常的东西是苦还是乐?”“尊者,是苦。”“那么,凡是无常、苦、会变坏的东西,适合这样看待吗:‘这是我的,这就是我,这是我的自我’?”“尊者,不适合。”这就是同意问。巴利
Katamā anumatipucchā? Bhagavā bhikkhūnaṃ anumatiyā pañhaṃ pucchati – ‘‘taṃ kiṃ maññatha, bhikkhave, rūpaṃ niccaṃ vā aniccaṃ vā’’ti, aniccaṃ, bhante. Yaṃ panāniccaṃ dukkhaṃ vā taṃ sukhaṃ vāti, dukkhaṃ, bhante. Yaṃ panāniccaṃ dukkhaṃ vipariṇāmadhammaṃ, kallaṃ nu taṃ samanupassituṃ – ‘‘etaṃ mama esohamasmi eso me attā’’ti, no hetaṃ bhanteti (saṃ. ni. 3.79). Ayaṃ anumatipucchā.
什么是想开示问?世尊因为自己想对比丘们宣说而提问:“比丘们,有四种念处。是哪四种呢?”这就是想开示问。巴利
Katamā kathetukamyatāpucchā? Bhagavā bhikkhūnaṃ kathetukamyatāya pañhaṃ pucchati – ‘‘cattārome, bhikkhave, satipaṭṭhānā. Katame cattāro’’ti? Ayaṃ kathetukamyatāpucchāti.
在这里,诸佛没有前三种提问。为什么呢?因为对诸佛来说,在三世之中,没有任何有为法或离三世的无为法是他们未曾见、未曾照亮、未曾衡量、未曾审察、未曾明辨、未曾显现、未曾阐明的。因此,他们没有“未见解明问”。而世尊以自身智慧所通达的,不需要与其他沙门、婆罗门、天、魔或梵天一起商议核对。因此,他没有“已见商议问”。又因为世尊是无犹豫者、已超越疑惑者、对一切法都已断除疑惑。因此,他没有“断疑问”。但另外两种提问,世尊是有的。其中,这里所说的应当理解为“想开示问”。巴利
Tattha buddhānaṃ purimā tisso pucchā natthi. Kasmā? Buddhānañhi tīsu addhāsu kiñci saṅkhataṃ addhāvimuttaṃ vā asaṅkhataṃ adiṭṭhaṃ ajotitaṃ atulitaṃ atīritaṃ avibhūtaṃ avibhāvitaṃ nāma natthi. Tena nesaṃ adiṭṭhajotanāpucchā natthi. Yaṃ pana bhagavatā attano ñāṇena paṭividdhaṃ, tassa aññena samaṇena vā brāhmaṇena vā devena vā mārena vā brahmunā vā saddhiṃ saṃsandanakiccaṃ natthi. Tenassa diṭṭhasaṃsandanāpucchā natthi. Yasmā panesa akathaṃkathī tiṇṇavicikiccho sabbadhammesu vihatasaṃsayo. Tenassa vimaticchedanāpucchā natthi. Itarā pana dve pucchā bhagavato atthi. Tāsu ayaṃ kathetukamyatā pucchāti veditabbā.
现在,世尊先针对提问所涉及的缘起模式加以分析,说道:“诸比丘,以无明为缘而有行……”等等。在这里,就好比一个人本来打算说“我要讲父亲的事”,结果却先讲了儿子:“提舍的父亲,首那的父亲”——同样地,世尊本来要讲缘,却以“以无明为缘而有行”这样的方式,在讲述行等法的缘——即无明等法时,也一并讲了缘所生起的法。而在《食集》的末尾,世尊则说“诸比丘,我要为你们讲说缘起以及缘所生法”,同时提出这两者,并且两者都加以解说。现在,在“以无明为缘而有行”等语句中,无明本身就是那个缘,所以叫“无明缘”。因此,应当这样理解其含义:“以无明为缘,诸行生起。”以上就是此处的简要说明。至于详细具足一切方面的顺观缘起解说,已经在《清净道论》中讲过了,所以应当依照那里所讲的方式来理解。巴利
Idāni tāva pucchāya puṭṭhaṃ paccayākāraṃ vibhajanto avijjāpaccayā, bhikkhave, saṅkhārātiādimāha. Ettha ca yathā nāma ‘‘pitaraṃ kathessāmī’’ti āraddho ‘‘tissassa pitā soṇassa pitā’’ti paṭhamataraṃ puttampi katheti, evameva bhagavā paccayaṃ kathetuṃ āraddho ‘‘avijjāpaccayā saṅkhārā’’tiādinā nayena saṅkhārādīnaṃ paccaye avijjādidhamme kathento paccayuppannampi kathesi. Āhāravaggassa pana pariyosāne ‘‘paṭiccasamuppādañca vo, bhikkhave, desessāmi paṭiccasamuppanne ca dhamme’’ti (saṃ. ni. 2.20) ubhayaṃ ārabhitvā ubhayampi kathesi. Idāni avijjāpaccayā saṅkhārātiādīsu pana avijjā ca sā paccayo cāti avijjāpaccayo. Tasmā avijjāpaccayā saṅkhārā sambhavantīti iminā nayena attho veditabbo. Ayamettha saṅkhepo, vitthārena pana sabbākārasampannā anulomapaṭiccasamuppādakathā visuddhimagge kathitā, tasmā sā tattha kathitavaseneva gahetabbā.
在逆观的解说里,“avijjāya tveva”就是“avijjāya tu eva”,意思是确实因为无明。“asesavirāganirodhā”是说:通过被称为离贪的道而彻底灭尽。“saṅkhāranirodho”是说:诸行达到不再生起的灭。为了说明这些如此灭尽的诸行一旦灭尽,识等也随之灭尽,名色等也就确实已经灭尽,世尊先说了“由行灭而识灭”等话,然后说“如此,这整个苦蕴便灭尽了”。其中,“kevalassa”是整个的、纯粹的,或者说不含众生的意思。“dukkhakkhandhassa”是苦的积聚。“nirodho hoti”是不再生起。就这样,世尊先以顺观的十二支讲了流转的教法,然后把那流转翻转过来,以逆观的十二支讲还灭,并以阿罗汉道作为这次开示的顶点。开示结束时,那五百位已经开始修观、属于略说即悟类型的修行者,就像被阳光照到而完全成熟的莲花一样,觉悟了诸圣谛,安立在阿罗汉果中。巴利
Paṭilomakathāyaṃ pana avijjāya tvevāti avijjāya tu eva. Asesavirāganirodhāti virāgasaṅkhātena maggena asesanirodhā. Saṅkhāranirodhoti saṅkhārānaṃ anuppādanirodho hoti. Evaṃnirodhānaṃ pana saṅkhārānaṃ nirodhā viññāṇādīnañca nirodhā nāmarūpādīni niruddhāniyeva hontīti dassetuṃ saṅkhāranirodhā viññāṇanirodhotiādīni vatvā, evametassa kevalassa dukkhakkhandhassa nirodho hotīti āha. Tattha kevalassāti sakalassa, suddhassa vā, sattavirahitassāti attho. Dukkhakkhandhassāti dukkharāsissa. Nirodho hotīti anuppādo hoti. Iti bhagavā anulomato dvādasahi padehi vaṭṭakathaṃ kathetvā tameva vaṭṭaṃ vinivaṭṭetvā paṭilomato dvādasahi padehi vivaṭṭaṃ kathento arahattena desanāya kūṭaṃ gaṇhi. Desanāpariyosāne te pañcasatā āraddhavipassakā ugghaṭitaññūpuggalā sūriyarasmisamphuṭṭhāni paripākagatāni padumāni viya saccāni bujjhitvā arahattaphale patiṭṭhahiṃsu.
世尊说了这部经,也就是按流转与还灭的方式宣说了整部经。那五百位比丘心满意足,他们都是诸漏已尽的人。世尊说法时,声音如迦陵频伽鸟鸣般悦耳,让智者听了心里像被甘露浇灌一样。比丘们对世尊的话心生欢喜、随喜,并且完全接受。巴利
Idamavoca bhagavāti idaṃ vaṭṭavivaṭṭavasena sakalasuttaṃ bhagavā avoca. Attamanā te bhikkhūti tuṭṭhacittā te pañcasatā khīṇāsavā bhikkhū. Bhagavato bhāsitaṃ abhinandunti karavīkarutamañjunā kaṇṇasukhena paṇḍitajanahadayānaṃ amatābhisekasadisena brahmassarena bhāsato bhagavato vacanaṃ abhinandiṃsu, anumodiṃsu ceva sampaṭicchiṃsu cāti attho. Tenetaṃ vuccati –
善说、善语,对如如者说“善哉、善哉”;
比丘们心生欢喜,以头顶礼,全都信受认可。巴利
‘‘Subhāsitaṃ sulapitaṃ, sādhu sādhūti tādino; Anumodamānā sirasā, sampaṭicchiṃsu bhikkhavo’’ti.
2. 《分别经》的注释巴利
2. Vibhaṅgasuttavaṇṇanā
2 第二部经也同样按照前面所说的方式,来理解其经文的安立。不过这里有一个差别:第一部经是为了略解即悟的人,用简略的方式显示;这一部则是为了广解乃悟的人,用详细的方式显示。另外,在这部经中,应当讲述四种寻藤人的譬喻,这些在《清净道论》中已经说过。就像寻藤人先看到藤尖,然后顺着它去寻找根部,看到根部后,从根上将藤砍断,取来用于工作。同样地,世尊在详细说法时,从缘起的顶端老死开始,一直追溯到作为根本的无明,将教法引导下来,然后再开示流转与还灭,从而结束说法。巴利
2. Dutiyepi vuttanayeneva suttanikkhepo veditabbo. Ayaṃ pana viseso – paṭhamaṃ ugghaṭitaññūpuggalānaṃ vasena saṅkhepato dassitaṃ, idaṃ vipañcitaññūnaṃ vasena vitthāratoti. Imasmiñca pana sutte catasso vallihārakapurisūpamā vattabbā, tā visuddhimagge vuttā eva. Yathā hi vallihārako puriso valliyā aggaṃ disvā tadanusārena mūlaṃ pariyesanto taṃ disvā valliṃ mūle chetvā ādāya kamme upaneyya, evaṃ bhagavā vitthāradesanaṃ desento paṭiccasamuppādassa aggabhūtā jarāmaraṇā paṭṭhāya yāva mūlabhūtaṃ avijjāpadaṃ, tāva desanaṃ āharitvā puna vaṭṭavivaṭṭaṃ desento niṭṭhapesi.
在这里,对于老死等详细教说的义理抉择如下:在老死的解说中,先说“那些、那些”,应当理解为对众多有情的简略共通解说。因为即使花一整天说“提婆达多的老、某甲的老”,有情也说不完。但通过这两个词,就没有任何一位有情被遗漏在外。所以说:“这是对众多有情的简略共通解说。”“于种种处、于种种处”,这是依趣和生类,对众多有情群体的共通解说。“有情群体”一词,是对通过共通解说所指明的具体形态的举例说明。在“老、老化”等解说中,“老”是从自性上说明;“老化”是从行相上说明;“牙齿脱落”等三者,是在时间推移中从作用上说明;最后两者,是从本性上说明。因为“此老”这个词,是从自性上说明的,所以这是自性解说。“老化”是从行相上说明的,所以这是行相解说。以“牙齿脱落”,说明的是在时间推移中,牙齿、指甲碎裂的作用;以“头发变白”,说明的是头发、身毛变白的作用;以“皮肤起皱”,说明的是肌肉萎缩、皮肤起皱的作用。因此,牙齿脱落等三者,是依于时间推移的作用解说。通过这些,显现出种种变异的、明显可见的老就被显示出来了。正如水、风或火,通过草木等被折断破碎或烧焦的状态,其经过的路径得以显现,但那条路径并不是水等本身;同样地,老通过牙齿脱落等状态,其经过的路径得以显现,即使睁开眼也能被察觉到,但老并不是牙齿脱落等本身。因为老不是眼识所能认知的对象。巴利
Tatrāyaṃ jarāmaraṇādīnaṃ vitthāradesanāya atthanicchayo – jarāmaraṇaniddese tāva tesaṃ tesanti ayaṃ saṅkhepato anekesaṃ sattānaṃ sādhāraṇaniddesoti viññātabbo. Yā devadattassa jarā, yā somadattassāti evañhi divasampi kathentassa neva sattā pariyādānaṃ gacchanti. Imehi pana dvīhi padehi na koci satto apariyādinno hoti. Tasmā vuttaṃ, ‘‘ayaṃ saṅkhepato anekesaṃ sattānaṃ sādhāraṇaniddeso’’ti. Tamhi tamhīti ayaṃ gatijātivasena anekesaṃ sattanikāyānaṃ sādhāraṇaniddeso. Sattanikāyeti sādhāraṇaniddesena niddiṭṭhassa sarūpanidassanaṃ. Jarā jīraṇatātiādīsu pana jarāti sabhāvaniddeso. Jīraṇatāti ākāraniddeso. Khaṇḍiccantiādayo tayo kālātikkame kiccaniddesā, pacchimā dve pakatiniddesā. Ayañhi jarāti iminā padena sabhāvato dīpitā, tenassāyaṃ sabhāvaniddeso . Jīraṇatāti iminā ākārato, tenassāyaṃ ākāraniddeso. Khaṇḍiccanti iminā kālātikkame dantanakhānaṃ khaṇḍitabhāvakaraṇakiccato. Pāliccanti iminā kesalomānaṃ palitabhāvakaraṇakiccato. Valittacatāti iminā maṃsaṃ milāpetvā tacavalibhāvakaraṇakiccato dīpitā. Tenassā ime khaṇḍiccantiādayo tayo kālātikkame kiccaniddesā. Tehi imesaṃ vikārānaṃ dassanavasena pākaṭībhūtā pākaṭajarā dassitā. Yatheva hi udakassa vā vātassa vā aggino vā tiṇarukkhādīnaṃ saṃbhaggapalibhaggatāya vā jhāmatāya vā gatamaggo pākaṭo hoti, na ca so gatamaggo tāneva udakādīni, evameva jarāya dantādīsu khaṇḍiccādivasena gatamaggo pākaṭo, cakkhuṃ ummīletvāpi gayhati na ca khaṇḍiccādīneva jarā. Na hi jarā cakkhuviññeyyā hoti.
通过“寿命的减损”和“诸根的成熟”这两个词,所说明的是随时间推移而显现出来的、被称为寿尽和眼等诸根成熟的那种本性。因此应当知道,后面这两个是对本性的解说。其中,因为到了衰老的人寿命会减损,所以以果来代称因的方式,把老说为“寿命的减损”。又因为年轻时极为清净明净、连微细的所缘也能轻松取到的眼等诸根,到了衰老时变得成熟、混乱、不清明,连粗大的所缘也无法取到,所以同样以果来代称因的方式,说为“诸根的成熟”。巴利
Āyuno saṃhāni indriyānaṃ paripākoti imehi pana padehi kālātikkameyeva abhibyattāya āyukkhaya-cakkhādiindriya-paripākasaññitāya pakatiyā dīpitā. Tenassime pacchimā dve pakatiniddesāti veditabbā. Tattha yasmā jaraṃ pattassa āyu hāyati, tasmā jarā ‘‘āyuno saṃhānī’’ti phalūpacārena vuttā. Yasmā ca daharakāle suppasannāni sukhumampi attano visayaṃ sukheneva gaṇhanasamatthāni cakkhādīni indriyāni jaraṃ pattassa paripakkāni āluḷitāni avisadāni, oḷārikampi attano visayaṃ gahetuṃ asamatthāni honti, tasmā ‘‘indriyānaṃ paripāko’’ti phalūpacāreneva vuttā.
这里所说的老,整体上又可以分为两种:明显的老和隐蔽的老。其中,在牙齿等色法上能看出破碎等变化,这叫明显的老;而在非色法上,因为看不到那样的变化,所以叫隐蔽的老。这里所见的破碎等状态,其实只是牙齿等色法本身,因为它们很容易辨认。人们用眼睛看到之后,再通过意门去思维:“这些牙齿已经被老破坏了”,由此知道有老存在。就像看到绑在水中的牛头等标志,就知道下面有水一样。另外,老还可以分为无间断的老和有间断的老两种。其中,像宝石、黄金、白银、珊瑚、月亮、太阳等,或者像处于童蒙期等人生阶段的有情,或者像花、果、嫩叶等没有生命的东西,它们中间颜色等特殊变化很难察觉,所以这种老叫无间断的老,意思是一直持续、没有间断的老化。而在前面所说的其他事物中,颜色等特殊变化很容易察觉,所以那种老应当理解为有间断的老。巴利
Sā panāyaṃ evaṃ niddiṭṭhā sabbāpi jarā pākaṭā paṭicchannāti duvidhā hoti. Tattha dantādīsu khaṇḍādibhāvadassanato rūpadhammesu jarā pākaṭajarā nāma, arūpadhammesu pana jarā tādisassa vikārassa adassanato paṭicchannajarā nāma. Tattha yvāyaṃ khaṇḍādibhāvo dissati, so tādisānaṃ dantādīnaṃ suviññeyyattā vaṇṇoyeva, taṃ cakkhunā disvā manodvārena cintetvā ‘‘ime dantā jarāya pahaṭā’’ti jaraṃ jānāti udakaṭṭhāne baddhāni gosīsādīni oloketvā heṭṭhā udakassa atthibhāvaṃ jānanaṃ viya. Puna avīci savīcīti evampi duvidhā hoti. Tattha maṇi-kanaka-rajata-pavāḷacandasūriyādīnaṃ viya mandadasakādīsu pāṇīnaṃ viya ca pupphaphalapallavādīsu ca apāṇīnaṃ viya antarantarā vaṇṇavisesādīnaṃ duviññeyyattā jarā avīcijarā nāma, nirantarajarāti attho. Tato aññesu pana yathāvuttesu antarantarā vaṇṇavisesādīnaṃ suviññeyyattā jarā savīcijarā nāmāti veditabbā.
从这里往后,“他们的”“那些的”等等,都应按照前面所说的方式来理解。但在“死、死去性”等说法中,“死”是就死亡这一动作而说的,这是对一蕴、四蕴、五蕴有情的通称。用表示状态的词“死去性”,是为了显示它的特征。“破坏”是说明死亡所涉诸蕴的坏灭。“消失”是说明死亡所涉诸蕴,就像破碎的瓦罐一样,无论如何都不再存在。“死亡、死”是指被称为“能杀者”的死,由此排除了断灭死等其他种类的死。所谓“时”,就是终结者,它的作用称为“寿尽”。这样,他以世间共许的说法阐述了死。巴利
Ito paraṃ tesaṃ tesantiādi vuttanayeneva veditabbaṃ. Cuti cavanatātiādīsu pana cutīti cavanakavasena vuccati, ekacatupañcakkhandhasāmaññavacanametaṃ. Cavanatāti bhāvavacanena lakkhaṇanidassanaṃ . Bhedoti cutikkhandhānaṃ bhaṅguppattiparidīpanaṃ. Antaradhānanti ghaṭasseva bhinnassa bhinnānaṃ cutikkhandhānaṃ yena kenaci pariyāyena ṭhānābhāvaparidīpanaṃ. Maccu maraṇanti maccusaṅkhātaṃ maraṇaṃ, tena samucchedamaraṇādīni nisedheti. Kālo nāma antako, tassa kiriyā kālakiriyā. Evaṃ tena lokasammutiyā maraṇaṃ dīpeti.
现在,为了从究竟意义上说明,就说了“诸蕴的破坏”等话。因为从究竟意义上说,只有诸蕴在坏灭,并没有哪个叫“有情”的东西在死。不过,当诸蕴坏灭时,就说“有情死了”;诸蕴已经坏灭,就通称为“已死”。在这里,按四蕴有和五蕴有来说,是“诸蕴的破坏”;按一蕴有来说,是“身体的舍弃”。按四蕴有来说,是“诸蕴的破坏”;按其余两种有来说,应当理解为“身体的舍弃”。为什么?因为在后两种有里,也存在叫作“色身”的身体。或者也可以说,在四大天王天等处的众生,诸蕴只是坏灭,什么也不留下,所以就他们而言是“诸蕴的破坏”;而在人类等处,则是“身体的舍弃”。在这里,因为死是舍弃身体的原因,所以说死就是“身体的舍弃”,应当这样理解其含义。如此,这个老和这个死,比丘们,这两者合在一起,就称为“老死”。巴利
Idāni paramatthena dīpetuṃ khandhānaṃ bhedotiādimāha. Paramatthena hi khandhāyeva bhijjanti, na satto nāma koci marati. Khandhesu pana bhijjamānesu satto marati, bhinnesu matoti vohāro hoti. Ettha ca catupañcavokāravasena khandhānaṃ bhedo, ekavokāravasena kaḷevarassa nikkhepo. Catuvokāravasena ca khandhānaṃ bhedo, sesadvayavasena kaḷevarassa nikkhepo veditabbo. Kasmā? Bhavadvayepi rūpakāyasaṅkhātassa kaḷevarassa sabbhāvato. Atha vā yasmā cātumahārājikādīsu khandhā bhijjanteva, na kiñci nikkhipati, tasmā tesaṃ vasena khandhānaṃ bhedo, manussādīsu kaḷevarassa nikkhepo. Ettha ca kaḷevarassa nikkhepakāraṇato maraṇaṃ ‘‘kaḷevarassa nikkhepo’’ti vuttanti evamattho daṭṭhabbo. Iti ayañca jarā idañca maraṇaṃ, idaṃ vuccati, bhikkhaveti idaṃ ubhayampi ekato katvā jarāmaraṇanti kathīyati.
在解释“生”的部分,说到“生”“出生”等词时:以“产生”这个含义来说,“生”适合用来指诸根尚未具足的情况。“出生”以“产生出来”为含义,适合用来指诸根已经具足的情况。“入胎”以“进入”为含义,适合卵生和胎生。因为它们进入、穿透卵壳和胎膜,就像钻进去一样而结生。“再生”以“完全产生出来”为含义,适合湿生和化生。因为它们直接显现而生出来。以上是从世俗说法的角度来教导的。巴利
Jātiniddese jāti sañjātītiādīsu jāyanaṭṭhena jāti, sā aparipuṇṇāyatanavasena yuttā. Sañjāyanaṭṭhena sañjāti, sā paripuṇṇāyatanavasena yuttā. Okkamanaṭṭhena okkanti, sā aṇḍajajalābujavasena yuttā. Te hi aṇḍakosañca vatthikosañca okkamantā pavisantā viya paṭisandhiṃ gaṇhanti. Abhinibbattanaṭṭhena abhinibbatti, sā saṃsedajaopapātikavasena yuttā. Te hi pākaṭāyeva hutvā nibbattanti. Ayaṃ tāva vohāradesanā.
现在开示的是究竟义的教法。因为从究竟义来看,只有诸蕴显现,并没有“有情”。其中,“诸蕴”这个词,要理解为:在一蕴有的情况下指一个蕴,在四蕴有的情况下指四个蕴,在五蕴有的情况下指五个蕴。“显现”就是生起。“诸处”在这里要理解为:按照各处各自生起的处来归类。“获得”就是在相续中显现。因为正是那些显现的,才被称为“获得”。通过“诸比丘,这称为生”这句话,对从世俗说法和从究竟义两方面所教导的“生”作了总结。巴利
Idāni paramatthadesanā hoti. Khandhāyeva hi paramatthato pātubhavanti, na satto. Tattha ca khandhānanti ekavokārabhave ekassa, catuvokārabhave catunnaṃ, pañcavokārabhave pañcannampi gahaṇaṃ veditabbaṃ. Pātubhāvoti uppatti. Āyatanānanti ettha tatra tatra uppajjamānāyatanavasena saṅgaho veditabbo. Paṭilābhoti santatiyaṃ pātubhāvoyeva. Pātubhavantāneva hi tāni paṭiladdhāni nāma honti. Ayaṃ vuccati, bhikkhave, jātīti iminā padena vohārato paramatthato ca desitāya jātiyā nigamanaṃ karotīti.
在解说“有”的时候,“欲有”包括业有和生有。其中,业有就是指能投生到欲界的那种业。因为它是那里生有的原因,所以就像“诸佛出世是乐,恶业积聚是苦”这类说法一样,是依果报来称呼而说为“有”。生有则是由那种业所产生、已被执取的五蕴。因为它在那里存在,所以说为“有”。总之,在这里,业和生这两者都称为“欲有”。色有和无色有也是同样的道理。巴利
Bhavaniddese kāmabhavoti kammabhavo ca upapattibhavo ca. Tattha kammabhavo nāma kāmabhavūpagakammameva. Tañhi tattha upapattibhavassa kāraṇattā ‘‘sukho buddhānaṃ uppādo (dha. pa. 194) dukkho pāpassa uccayo’’tiādīni (dha. pa. 117) viya phalavohārena bhavoti vuttaṃ. Upapattibhavo nāma tena kammena nibbattaṃ upādiṇṇakkhandhapañcakaṃ. Tañhi tattha bhavatīti katvā bhavoti vuttaṃ. Sabbathāpi idaṃ kammañca upapattiñca ubhayampetamidha ‘‘kāmabhavo’’ti vuttaṃ. Esa nayo rūpārūpabhavesūti.
在解释“取”的部分,说到“欲取”等时:人们通过它来执取欲乐的对象,或者它本身就执取欲乐,所以叫“欲取”;又因为它既是欲又是取,所以叫“欲取”。“取”指的是强烈的执持。这里的前缀“upa-”有“强烈”的意思,就像在“恼害”“近住”等词中那样。这是对五种欲乐之贪的同义词。这是简要说明。详细来说,应该按照“其中,什么是欲取?就是对诸欲的欲贪”这样的教导方式来理解。巴利
Upādānaniddese kāmupādānantiādīsu vatthukāmaṃ upādiyanti etena, sayaṃ vā taṃ upādiyatīti kāmupādānaṃ, kāmo ca so upādānañcāti kāmupādānaṃ. Upādānanti daḷhaggahaṇaṃ vuccati. Daḷhattho hi ettha upasaddo upāyāsaupakaṭṭhādīsu viya. Pañcakāmaguṇikarāgassetaṃ adhivacanaṃ. Ayamettha saṅkhepo. Vitthārato panetaṃ, ‘‘tattha katamaṃ kāmupādānaṃ? Yo kāmesu kāmacchando’’ti (dha. sa. 1220; vibha. 938) vuttanayeneva veditabbaṃ.
同样地,它既是见又是取,所以叫“见取”。或者,它执取见,或者人们用它来执取见,所以叫“见取”。因为后起的见会执取先前的见,人们也会通过那个见来执取见。正如经中所说:“我和世间是常住的,只有这是真实的,其他都是虚妄的”等等。这是除戒禁取和我语取之外一切邪见的同义词。这是简要说明。详细来说,应当依照《法集论》所说的方式来了知:“其中,什么是见取?就是‘没有布施的果报’……”等等。巴利
Tathā diṭṭhi ca sā upādānañcāti diṭṭhupādānaṃ. Atha vā diṭṭhiṃ upādiyati, upādiyanti vā etena diṭṭhinti diṭṭhupādānaṃ. Upādiyati hi purimadiṭṭhiṃ uttaradiṭṭhi, upādiyanti ca tāya diṭṭhiṃ. Yathāha – ‘‘sassato attā ca loko ca idameva saccaṃ moghamañña’’ntiādi (ma. ni. 3.27). Sīlabbatupādānaattavādupādānavajjassa sabbadiṭṭhigatassetaṃ adhivacanaṃ. Ayamettha saṅkhepo, vitthārato panetaṃ, ‘‘tattha katamaṃ diṭṭhupādānaṃ? Natthi dinna’’nti (dha. sa. 1221) vuttanayeneva veditabbaṃ.
同样地,他们以此执取戒禁;或者它自己就执取戒禁;又或者它既是戒禁又是执取,所以叫戒禁取。因为像牛戒、牛行这一类,人们固执地认为“这样就能清净”,所以它们本身就是执取。这是这里的简要说明。若要详细展开,就应当依照这样的教导来理解:“其中,什么是戒禁取?就是在此之外,沙门、婆罗门认为通过戒就能清净……”巴利
Tathā sīlabbatamupādiyanti etena, sayaṃ vā taṃ upādiyati, sīlabbatañca taṃ upādānañcāti vā sīlabbatupādānaṃ. Gosīlagovatādīni hi ‘‘evaṃ suddhī’’ti (dha. sa. 1222; vibha. 938) abhinivesato sayameva upādānānīti. Ayamettha saṅkhepo, vitthārato panetaṃ, ‘‘tattha katamaṃ sīlabbatupādānaṃ? Ito bahiddhā samaṇabrāhmaṇānaṃ sīlena suddhī’’ti vuttanayeneva veditabbaṃ.
现在有人这样说,所以叫“说”;有人这样执取,所以叫“取”。他们说什么、执取什么呢?说“我”、执取“我”。对自己之说的执取,就是我语取。或者,仅仅是对“我”这一说法的执取本身,他们借此执取“我”,所以叫我语取。这是以二十种事为基础的身见的同义词。这里是简要说明。若要详细展开,则应按照“其中,什么是我语取?在此,未听闻正法的凡夫,不见诸圣者……”这样的说法来理解。巴利
Idāni vadanti etenāti vādo, upādiyanti etenāti upādānaṃ, kiṃ vadanti upādiyanti vā? Attānaṃ. Attano vādupādānaṃ attavādupādānaṃ. Attavādamattameva vā attāti upādiyanti etenāti attavādupādānaṃ. Vīsativatthukāya sakkāyadiṭṭhiyā etaṃ adhivacanaṃ. Ayamettha saṅkhepo, vitthārato panetaṃ, ‘‘tattha katamaṃ attavādupādānaṃ? Idha assutavā puthujjano ariyānaṃ adassāvī’’ti vuttanayeneva veditabbaṃ.
在讲渴爱的地方,从色爱到法爱:这是在眼门等处的速行路中生起的渴爱,就像在“富翁之子”“婆罗门之子”这类称呼中,依父亲来命名一样,它是依据与父亲相似的所缘来命名的。这里,以色为所缘的渴爱,或者说对色的渴爱,就是色爱。当它以欲贪的方式生起、对色感到滋味时,是欲爱;当它以与常见相应的贪的方式生起,认为“色是常的、恒久的、常住的”而感到滋味时,是有爱;当它以与断见相应的贪的方式生起,认为“色会断灭、会坏灭,死后就不存在了”而感到滋味时,是非有爱。这样,色爱就有三种。色爱如此,声爱等也是如此。这样就有十八种渴爱的行相。这些在内色等上有十八种,在外色等上有十八种,共三十六种。过去有三十六种,未来有三十六种,现在有三十六种,这样共有一百零八种渴爱的行相。或者,像“依于内的,有‘我是’、有‘我是这样’”(《分别论》973)等所说的那样,依内色等有十八种;像“依于外的,有‘以此,我是’、有‘以此,我是这样’”(《分别论》975)等所说的那样,依外色等有十八种,共三十六种;过去有三十六种,未来有三十六种,现在有三十六种,这样也共有一百零八种渴爱的行相。再者,归纳起来说,在色等所缘中,只有六种渴爱身,只有欲爱等三种。如此——巴利
Taṇhāniddese rūpataṇhā…pe… dhammataṇhāti etaṃ cakkhudvārādīsu javanavīthiyā pavattāya taṇhāya ‘‘seṭṭhiputto brāhmaṇaputto’’ti evamādīsu pitito nāmaṃ viya pitisadisārammaṇato nāmaṃ. Ettha ca rūpārammaṇā taṇhā, rūpe taṇhāti rūpataṇhā. Sā kāmarāgabhāvena rūpaṃ assādentī pavattamānā kāmataṇhā, sassatadiṭṭhisahagatarāgabhāvena ‘‘rūpaṃ niccaṃ dhuvaṃ sassata’’nti evaṃ assādentī pavattamānā bhavataṇhā, ucchedadiṭṭhisahagatarāgabhāvena ‘‘rūpaṃ ucchijjati vinassati pecca na bhavatī’’ti evaṃ assādentī pavattamānā vibhavataṇhāti rūpataṇhā evaṃ tividhā hoti. Yathā ca rūpataṇhā, tathā saddataṇhādayopīti evaṃ tāni aṭṭhārasa taṇhāvicaritāni honti. Tāni ajjhattarūpādīsu aṭṭhārasa, bahiddhārūpādīsu aṭṭhārasāti chattiṃsa. Iti atītāni chattiṃsa, anāgatāni chattiṃsa, paccuppannāni chattiṃsāti evaṃ aṭṭhasataṃ taṇhāvicaritāni honti. ‘‘Ajjhattikassa upādāya asmīti hoti, itthasmīti hotī’’ti (vibha. 973) vā evamādīni ajjhattikarūpādinissitāni aṭṭhārasa, ‘‘bāhirassa upādāya iminā asmīti hoti, iminā itthasmīti hotī’’ti (vibha. 975) vā evamādīni bāhirarūpādinissitāni aṭṭhārasāti chattiṃsa, iti atītāni chattiṃsa, anāgatāni chattiṃsa, paccuppannāni chattiṃsāti evampi aṭṭhasataṃ taṇhāvicaritāni honti. Puna saṅgahe kariyamāne rūpādīsu ārammaṇesu chaḷeva taṇhākāyā tissoyeva kāmataṇhādayo hontīti. Evaṃ –
以解说的意义称为解说,以详细广说的意义称为详细;
再者,有智慧的人应当从归纳的角度来了知渴爱。巴利
‘‘Niddesatthena niddesa, vitthārā vitthārassa ca; Puna saṅgahato taṇhā, viññātabbā vibhāvinā’’ti.
在受的解说里,“受身”就是受的集合。“眼触所生受”……一直到“意触所生受”:因为《分别论》里说“眼触所生受有善的、有不善的、有无记的”,所以这是在眼门等处生起的善、不善、无记受,依它所依之处来命名,就像“舍利弗”“满慈子”等是依母亲来取名一样。这里字面上的意思是:以眼触为因而生起的受,就是“眼触所生受”。一切处都按这个方式类推。以上是这里总括一切的说法。不过,从果报的角度来说,在眼门有两种眼识、两种意界、三种意识界,应当按与这些识相应来了知受。耳门等也是这样。在意门,则只与意识界相应。巴利
Vedanāniddese vedanākāyāti vedanāsamūhā. Cakkhusamphassajā vedanā…pe… manosamphassajāvedanāti etaṃ ‘‘cakkhusamphassajāvedanā atthi kusalā, atthi akusalā, atthi abyākatā’’ti evaṃ vibhaṅge (vibha. 34) āgatattā cakkhudvārādīsu pavattānaṃ kusalākusalābyākatavedanānaṃ ‘‘sāriputto mantāṇiputto’’ti evamādīsu mātito nāmaṃ viya mātisadisato vatthuto nāmaṃ. Vacanattho panettha – cakkhusamphassahetu jātā vedanā cakkhusamphassajā vedanāti. Eseva nayo sabbattha. Ayaṃ tāvettha sabbasaṅgāhikā kathā. Vipākavasena pana cakkhudvāre dve cakkhuviññāṇāni, dve manodhātuyo, tisso manoviññāṇadhātuyoti etāhi sampayuttavasena vedanā veditabbā. Eseva nayo sotadvārādīsu. Manodvāre manoviññāṇadhātusampayuttāva.
在解释触的时候,“眼触”就是眼处的触。其余各处也按这个方式类推。眼触……乃至身触:说到这里,就已经讲了善的、不善的果报,以五种处为依的十种触。“意触”:用这一项,则是指与其余二十二种世间果报意相应的触。巴利
Phassaniddese cakkhusamphassoti cakkhumhi samphasso. Esa nayo sabbattha. Cakkhusamphasso…pe… kāyasamphassoti ettāvatā ca kusalākusalavipākā pañcavatthukā dasa phassā vuttā honti. Manosamphassoti iminā sesabāvīsatilokiyavipākamanasampayuttā phassā.
在讲六处时,关于“眼处”等应当说明的内容,在《清净道论》的蕴解说和处解说里都已经讲过了。巴利
Saḷāyatananiddese cakkhāyatanantiādīsu yaṃ vattabbaṃ, taṃ visuddhimagge khandhaniddese ceva āyatananiddese ca vuttameva.
在名色的解说中,“名”以朝向为特征,“色”以变坏为特征。在分别解说时,其中的“受”就是受蕴,“想”就是想蕴,“思、触、作意”应当知道是行蕴。虽然行蕴中还包含其他法,但即使在最微弱的心中也都有这三种,所以这里就只以它们来显示行蕴。“四大种”这里,“四”是数量上的限定。“大种”是地、水、火、风的同义词。至于它们为什么被称为大种,以及这里其他的判定方式,这些在《清净道论》的色蕴解说中都已经讲过了。“及依四大种而存”这里,“四”是表示对象关系的属格,也就是说“四大种”。“依”就是取过来、执取的意思,也有人解释为依止。这里还应补上“存在”这个词。或者,这个属格表示集合的意思,应当理解为:依于四大种的集合而存在的色。总之,地等四大种,以及依四大种而生起、在阿毗达摩教法中分为眼处等二十三类的色,这一切都应当知道是“色”。巴利
Nāmarūpaniddese namanalakkhaṇaṃ nāmaṃ. Ruppanalakkhaṇaṃ rūpaṃ. Vibhajane panassa vedanāti vedanākkhandho, saññāti saññākkhandho, cetanā phasso manasikāroti saṅkhārakkhandho veditabbo. Kāmañca aññepi saṅkhārakkhandhasaṅgahitā dhammā santi, ime pana tayo sabbadubbalesupi cittesu santi, tasmā etesaṃyeva vasenettha saṅkhārakkhandho dassito. Cattāro ca mahābhūtāti ettha cattāroti gaṇanaparicchedo. Mahābhūtāti pathavīāpatejavāyānametaṃ adhivacanaṃ. Yena pana kāraṇena tāni mahābhūtānīti vuccanti, yo cettha añño vinicchayanayo, so sabbo visuddhimagge rūpakkhandhaniddese vutto. Catunnañca mahābhūtānaṃ upādāyāti ettha pana catunnanti upayogatthe sāmivacanaṃ, cattāri mahābhūtānīti vuttaṃ hoti. Upādāyāti upādiyitvā, gahetvāti attho. Nissāyātipi eke. ‘‘Vattamāna’’nti ayañcettha pāṭhaseso. Samūhatthe vā etaṃ sāmivacanaṃ, catunnaṃ mahābhūtānaṃ samūhaṃ upādāya vattamānaṃ rūpanti ettha attho veditabbo. Evaṃ sabbathāpi yāni ca cattāri pathavīādīni mahābhūtāni, yañca catunnaṃ mahābhūtānaṃ upādāya vattamānaṃ cakkhāyatanādibhedena abhidhammapāḷiyameva vuttaṃ tevīsatividhaṃ rūpaṃ, taṃ sabbampi rūpanti veditabbaṃ.
在识的解说中,“眼识”就是眼里的识,或者说是从眼生起的识,所以叫眼识。耳识、鼻识、舌识、身识也是这样。另外那个,“意”本身就是识,所以叫“意识”。这是对除了双五识以外的三地异熟心的称呼。巴利
Viññāṇaniddese cakkhuviññāṇanti cakkhumhi viññāṇaṃ, cakkhuto vā jātaṃ viññāṇanti cakkhuviññāṇaṃ. Evaṃ sotaghānajivhākāyaviññāṇāni. Itaraṃ pana manoyeva viññāṇanti manoviññāṇaṃ. Dvipañcaviññāṇavajjitatebhūmakavipākacittassetaṃ adhivacanaṃ.
在行的解说中,行以造作为特相。分别解说时,“身行”就是从身生起的行。这是从身门以推动方式生起的二十种身思的异名——来自欲界善的八种,以及来自不善的十二种。“语行”就是从语言生起的行,这是从语门以言语差别方式生起的同样二十种语思的异名。“心行”就是从心生起的行,这是不通过身门和语门推动,而是独自坐在隐秘处思考时所生起的、属于世间善与不善的二十九种意思的异名。巴利
Saṅkhāraniddese abhisaṅkharaṇalakkhaṇo saṅkhāro. Vibhajane panassa kāyasaṅkhāroti kāyato pavattasaṅkhāro. Kāyadvāre copanavasena pavattānaṃ kāmāvacarakusalato aṭṭhannaṃ, akusalato dvādasannanti vīsatiyā kāyasañcetanānametaṃ adhivacanaṃ. Vacīsaṅkhāroti vacanato pavattasaṅkhāro, vacīdvāre vacanabhedavasena pavattānaṃ vīsatiyā eva vacīsañcetanānametaṃ adhivacanaṃ. Cittasaṅkhāroti cittato pavattasaṅkhāro, kāyavacīdvāre copanaṃ akatvā raho nisīditvā cintentassa pavattānaṃ lokiyakusalākusalavasena ekūnatiṃsamanosañcetanānametaṃ adhivacanaṃ.
在解释无明时,“于苦无知”就是指对苦谛的无知,这是愚痴的另一个名称。“于苦集无知”等说法也应同样理解。在这里,应当从四个方面来理解对苦的无知:被包含、作为依处、作为所缘、以及覆盖。也就是说,它因为属于苦谛的范围,所以被包含在苦中;苦谛以依止缘的方式成为它的依处;苦谛以所缘缘的方式成为它的所缘;它阻碍对苦谛真实相的如实通达,并使智慧无法在那里生起,因此覆盖了苦谛。巴利
Avijjāniddese dukkhe aññāṇanti dukkhasacce aññāṇaṃ, mohassetaṃ adhivacanaṃ. Esa nayo dukkhasamudaye aññāṇantiādīsu. Tattha catūhi kāraṇehi dukkhe aññāṇaṃ veditabbaṃ antogadhato vatthuto ārammaṇato paṭicchādanato ca. Tathā hi taṃ dukkhasaccapariyāpannattā dukkhe antogadhaṃ, dukkhasaccañcassa nissayapaccayabhāvena vatthu, ārammaṇapaccayabhāvena ārammaṇaṃ, dukkhasaccaṃ etaṃ paṭicchādeti tassa yāthāvalakkhaṇapaṭivedhanivāraṇena ñāṇappavattiyā cettha appadānena.
对苦集的无知,要从三个方面来理解:所依、所缘和遮蔽。对灭和道的无知,则只从一个方面来理解,就是遮蔽。因为对灭谛和道谛来说,无知就是遮蔽——它阻碍对这两个真理的真实面貌如实通达,也不让智慧在其中生起。但是,无知并不包含在灭谛和道谛之中,因为它不属于这两个真理的范畴;这两个真理也不是它的所依,因为它们不是同时生起的;这两个真理也不是它的所缘,因为它不能以这两个真理为对象而生起。这是因为:后两个真理极其深奥,很难看清,对于像盲人一样的无知来说,它无法在那里生起。而前两个真理,虽然自性特征可以被言说,但因为难以洞见而显得深奥,无知就以颠倒执取的方式在那里生起。巴利
Dukkhasamudaye aññāṇaṃ tīhi kāraṇehi veditabbaṃ vatthuto ārammaṇato paṭicchādanato ca. Nirodhe paṭipadāya ca aññāṇaṃ ekeneva kāraṇena veditabbaṃ paṭicchādanato. Nirodhapaṭipadānañhi paṭicchādakameva aññāṇaṃ tesaṃ yāthāvalakkhaṇapaṭivedhanivāraṇena tesu ca ñāṇappavattiyā appadānena. Na pana taṃ tattha antogadhaṃ tasmiṃ saccadvaye apariyāpannattā, na tassa taṃ saccadvayaṃ vatthu asahajātattā, nārammaṇaṃ, tadārabbha appavattanato. Pacchimañhi saccadvayaṃ gambhīrattā duddasaṃ, na tattha andhabhūtaṃ aññāṇaṃ pavattati. Purimaṃ pana vacanīyattena sabhāvalakkhaṇassa duddasattā gambhīraṃ, tattha vipallāsagāhavasena pavattati.
另外,仅仅通过“苦”这一句,就已经从摄持、所依、所缘和作用四个方面说明了无明。仅仅通过“苦集”这一句,就已经从所依、所缘和作用三个方面说明了它。仅仅通过“苦灭”和“趣向苦灭之道”这两句,则只从作用方面说明了它。而从总体上说,通过“无知”这个词,应当知道是从无明自身的本质来加以说明的。巴利
Apica ‘‘dukkhe’’ti ettāvatā saṅgahato vatthuto ārammaṇato kiccato ca avijjā dīpitā. ‘‘Dukkhasamudaye’’ti ettāvatā vatthuto ārammaṇato kiccato ca. ‘‘Dukkhanirodhe dukkhanirodhagāminiyā paṭipadāyā’’ti ettāvatā kiccato. Avisesato pana ‘‘aññāṇa’’nti etena sabhāvato niddiṭṭhāti ñātabbā.
“确实如此,比丘们”这句话的意思就是:“正是这样,比丘们。”“成为灭”的意思是“成为不再生起”。而在这里,世尊其实是用所有这些关于“灭”的说法来开示涅槃。因为那些法正是依靠涅槃才得以灭尽,所以涅槃就被称为那些法的“灭”。这样,世尊在这部经里,用十二句话开示了轮回与出离,并以阿拉汉果为顶点结束了这次开示。开示结束时,正如前面所说的那样,那五百位比丘都安住于阿拉汉果。巴利
Iti kho, bhikkhaveti evaṃ kho, bhikkhave. Nirodho hotīti anuppādo hoti. Apicettha sabbeheva tehi nirodhapadehi nibbānaṃ desitaṃ. Nibbānañhi āgamma te te dhammā nirujjhanti, tasmā taṃ tesaṃ tesaṃ nirodhoti vuccati. Iti bhagavā imasmiṃ sutte dvādasahi padehi vaṭṭavivaṭṭaṃ desento arahattanikūṭeneva desanaṃ niṭṭhapesi. Desanāpariyosāne vuttanayeneva pañcasatā bhikkhū arahatte patiṭṭhahiṃsūti.
《道次第经》的注释巴利
3. Paṭipadāsuttavaṇṇanā
3 第三经。“邪道”首先是指不能导向解脱的道。难道不是以无明为缘,也有福行和不动行吗?那它为什么成为邪道呢?回答说:因为它属于轮回的顶端。凡是希求三有、也就是希求轮回而造作的,哪怕只是五神通或八等至,这一切都属于轮回一边,都是轮回的顶端。正因为属于轮回的顶端,所以就是邪道。反过来,凡是希求出离轮回、希求涅槃而造作的,哪怕只是布施一勺粥、布施一把树叶,这一切都属于出离一边,都依止于出离。正因为属于出离一边,所以就是正道。因为,哪怕只是像一把树叶那么微小的布施善行,或者像毗罗摩大施那样广大的善行,如果是为了希求轮回的圆满,以依止轮回的方式被错误安立,那它就只能带来轮回,不能带来出离。然而,如果是以“愿我这布施能导致烦恼彻底灭尽”这样的方式希求出离,以依止出离的方式被正确安立,那它就能带来阿罗汉果、辟支菩提智乃至一切知智,而且不会在还没证得阿罗汉果时就走到尽头。因此应当知道:顺着轮回的方向说是邪道,逆着轮回的方向说是正道。这里难道不是问的是“道”,而分别解释的却是“涅槃”吗?在回答中也说的是“道”能导向。而且“涅槃”并不是“道”的名称,带有观智的四种圣道才是这个名称。所以,问题和回答与逐词解释并不一致。并非不一致。为什么呢?因为是用果来显示道。这里确实是用果来显示道。“由于无明的无余离贪灭尽,而有行的灭尽”,这个被称为灭的涅槃,是哪种道的果呢?这种道就叫作正道。这就是这里的含义。在这个含义中,“无余离贪灭尽”这里的“离贪”只是“灭”的另一种说法,“无余离贪”就是“无余灭尽”,这是这里的意趣。或者,为了显示通过被称为离贪的道而有无余灭尽,才说了这段逐词解释。这样,道就被连同它的威力一起分别解释了。因此,在这部经里,说的正是轮回与出离。第三。巴利
3. Tatiye micchāpaṭipadanti ayaṃ tāva aniyyānikapaṭipadā. Nanu ca avijjāpaccayā puññābhisaṅkhāropi atthi āneñjābhisaṅkhāropi, so kathaṃ micchāpaṭipadā hotīti. Vaṭṭasīsattā. Yañhi kiñci bhavattayasaṅkhātaṃ vaṭṭaṃ patthetvā pavattitaṃ, antamaso pañcābhiññā aṭṭha vā pana samāpattiyo, sabbaṃ taṃ vaṭṭapakkhiyaṃ vaṭṭasīsanti vaṭṭasīsattā micchāpaṭipadāva hoti. Yaṃ pana kiñci vivaṭṭaṃ nibbānaṃ patthetvā pavattitaṃ, antamaso uḷuṅkayāgumattadānampi paṇṇamuṭṭhidānamattampi, sabbaṃ taṃ vivaṭṭapakkhiyaṃ vivaṭṭanissitaṃ, vivaṭṭapakkhikattā sammāpaṭipadāva hoti. Appamattakampi hi paṇṇamuṭṭhimattadānakusalaṃ vā hotu mahantaṃ velāmadānādikusalaṃ vā, sace vaṭṭasampattiṃ patthetvā vaṭṭanissitavasena micchā ṭhapitaṃ hoti, vaṭṭameva āharituṃ sakkoti, no vivaṭṭaṃ. ‘‘Idaṃ me dānaṃ āsavakkhayāvahaṃ hotū’’ti evaṃ pana vivaṭṭaṃ patthentena vivaṭṭavasena sammā ṭhapitaṃ arahattampi paccekabodhiñāṇampi sabbaññutaññāṇampi dātuṃ sakkotiyeva, na arahattaṃ appatvā pariyosānaṃ gacchati. Iti anulomavasena micchāpaṭipadā, paṭilomavasena sammāpaṭipadā desitāti veditabbā. Nanu cettha paṭipadā pucchitā, nibbānaṃ bhājitaṃ, niyyātanepi paṭipadāva niyyātitā. Na ca nibbānassa paṭipadāti nāmaṃ, savipassanānaṃ pana catunnaṃ maggānametaṃ nāmaṃ, tasmā pucchāniyyātanehi padabhājanaṃ na sametīti. No na sameti, kasmā? Phalena paṭipadāya dassitattā. Phalena hettha paṭipadā dassitā. ‘‘Avijjāya tveva asesavirāganirodhā saṅkhāranirodho’’ti etaṃ nirodhasaṅkhātaṃ nibbānaṃ yassā paṭipadāya phalaṃ, ayaṃ vuccati, bhikkhave, sammāpaṭipadāti ayamettha attho. Imasmiñca atthe asesavirāganirodhāti ettha virāgo nirodhasseva vevacanaṃ, asesavirāgā asesanirodhāti ayañhettha adhippāyo. Yena vā virāgasaṅkhātena maggena asesanirodho hoti, taṃ dassetuṃ etaṃ padabhājanaṃ vuttaṃ. Evañhi sati sānubhāvā paṭipadā vibhattā hoti. Iti imasmimpi sutte vaṭṭavivaṭṭameva kathitanti. Tatiyaṃ.
第四部《毗婆尸经》的注释。巴利
4. Vipassīsuttavaṇṇanā
4 第四项。「毗婆尸」:据说,这位菩萨不像世间人那样。世间人因为微弱的业所生的业生色很虚弱,所以眼睛会颤动;而菩萨的眼睛并不这样颤动。因为他由强有力的业所生起的业生色力量强大,所以眼睛不颤动,他目不转睛地看,就像三十三天的天人一样。因此经中说:「比丘们,这位童子因为目不转睛地看,毗婆尸童子就得到了『毗婆尸、毗婆尸』这个名称。」(《长部》2.40)这里的意思是:因为不时时眨眼所造成的黑暗已经远离,所以看得清楚;或者说,他睁着眼睛看,所以叫「毗婆尸」。在这里,虽然一切最后生菩萨都因为强有力的业所生起的业生色力量强大,眼睛都不颤动,但这位菩萨正是因为这个因缘而得到了这个名字。巴利
4. Catutthe vipassissāti tassa kira bodhisattassa yathā lokiyamanussānaṃ kiñcideva passantānaṃ parittakammābhinibbattassa kammajapasādassa dubbalattā akkhīni vipphandanti , na evaṃ vipphandiṃsu. Balavakammanibbattassa pana kammajapasādassa balavattā avipphandantehi animisehi eva akkhīhi passi seyyathāpi devā tāvatiṃsā. Tena vuttaṃ – ‘‘animisanto kumāro pekkhatīti kho, bhikkhave, vipassissa kumārassa ‘vipassī vipassī’tveva samaññā udapādī’’ti (dī. ni. 2.40). Ayañhettha adhippāyo – antarantarā nimisajanitandhakāravirahena visuddhaṃ passati, vivaṭehi vā akkhīhi passatīti vipassī. Ettha ca kiñcāpi pacchimabhavikānaṃ sabbabodhisattānaṃ balavakammanibbattassa kammajapasādassa balavattā akkhīni na vipphandanti, so pana bodhisatto eteneva nāmaṃ labhi.
另外,“毗婆尸”的意思是:择了又择、反复观察而见,也就是经过反复审查、反复辨别而看见。据说有一天,国王坐在裁决事务的地方教导人们处理事情时,大臣们把一个装扮好的大人带来,放在国王的膝上。当国王把他放在膝上逗弄时,大臣们却把属于主人的东西判给了不是主人的人。菩萨发出了不高兴的声音。国王说:“你们查一查,这是怎么回事?”大臣们仔细查看后,没发现别的原因,就说:“因为这件案子没有判好,他才会这样。”于是他们重新把东西判还给真正的主人,然后又想:“这位童子是知道情况才这样做的吗?”为了试探,他们又把属于主人的东西判给了不是主人的人。菩萨又发出了同样的声音。这时国王知道:“这位大人是知道内情的。”从那以后,国王处理事务就不再放逸了。因此经中说:“比丘们,因为这位童子择了又择,以正理来决断事务,所以毗婆尸童子越来越得到‘毗婆尸、毗婆尸’这个称呼。”(《长部》2.41)巴利
Apica viceyya viceyya passatīti vipassī, vicinitvā vicinitvā passatīti attho. Ekadivasaṃ kira vinicchayaṭṭhāne nisīditvā atthe anusāsantassa rañño alaṅkatapaṭiyattaṃ mahāpurisaṃ āharitvā aṅke ṭhapayiṃsu. Tassa taṃ aṅke katvā palāḷayamānasseva amaccā sāmikaṃ assāmikaṃ akaṃsu. Bodhisatto anattamanasaddaṃ nicchāresi. Rājā ‘‘kimetaṃ upadhārethā’’ti āha. Upadhārayamānā aññaṃ adisvā ‘‘aṭṭassa dubbinicchitattā evaṃ kataṃ bhavissatī’’ti puna sāmikameva sāmikaṃ katvā ‘‘ñatvā nu kho kumāro evaṃ karotī’’ti? Vīmaṃsantā puna sāmikaṃ assāmikamakaṃsu. Puna bodhisatto tatheva saddaṃ nicchāresi. Atha rājā ‘‘jānāti mahāpuriso’’ti tato paṭṭhāya appamatto ahosi. Tena vuttaṃ ‘‘viceyya viceyya kumāro atthe panāyati ñāyenāti kho, bhikkhave, vipassissa kumārassa bhiyyosomattāya ‘vipassī vipassī’tveva samaññā udapādī’’ti (dī. ni. 2.41).
“世尊”,是指具足祥福的人。“阿拉汉”,是因为贪等敌人已被杀灭,或者因为轮回之轮的轮辐已被毁坏,或者因为值得资具等供养,所以称为阿拉汉——这样依功德而得到的名称。“正自觉者”,是指以正确的方法和因由,自己亲身精勤觉悟了四圣谛的人。“正觉之前”,所谓正觉,是指四道中的智慧,就在那之前。“正是菩萨存在时”,这里菩提指智慧,以菩提为所缘的有情就是菩萨,意思是有智慧、具慧、贤明的人。因为从过去诸佛足下发愿那时起,这位有情就是贤明的人,而不是愚痴的人,所以叫菩萨。又好像从水中长出、已经成熟饱满的莲花,因接触到阳光而必定会绽放,所以被称为“将要绽放的莲花”;同样,因为在诸佛面前得到了授记,必定会无障碍地圆满波罗蜜而觉悟,所以“将要觉悟的有情”也叫菩萨。再者,他追求那称为四道智的菩提而不断努力,因此“执着于菩提、系念于菩提的有情”也是菩萨。这样,依功德而得到的名称,正是菩萨存在时。“苦”,就是痛苦。“到达”,就是已经来到。这话是说:唉!这众生界已经到达痛苦了。“死而又结生”,这是就一次又一次地死亡与结生而说的。“出离”,就是涅槃。因为它从老死之苦中出离,所以说是它的出离。“何时呢”,就是在哪个时候。巴利
Bhagavatoti bhāgyasampannassa. Arahatoti rāgādiarīnaṃ hatattā, saṃsāracakkassa vā arānaṃ hatattā, paccayānaṃ vā arahattā arahāti evaṃ guṇato uppannanāmadheyyassa. Sammāsambuddhassāti sammā nayena hetunā sāmaṃ paccattapurisakārena cattāri saccāni buddhassa. Pubbeva sambodhāti sambodho vuccati catūsu maggesu ñāṇaṃ, tato pubbeva. Bodhisattasseva satoti ettha bodhīti ñāṇaṃ, bodhimā satto bodhisatto, ñāṇavā paññavā paṇḍitoti attho. Purimabuddhānañhi pādamūle abhinīhārato paṭṭhāya paṇḍitova so satto, na andhabāloti bodhisatto. Yathā vā udakato uggantvā ṭhitaṃ paripākagataṃ padumaṃ sūriyarasmisamphassena avassaṃ bujjhissatīti bujjhanakapadumanti vuccati, evaṃ buddhānaṃ santike byākaraṇassa laddhattā avassaṃ anantarāyena pāramiyo pūretvā bujjhissatīti bujjhanakasattotipi bodhisatto. Yā ca esā catumaggañāṇasaṅkhātā bodhi, taṃ patthayamāno pavattatīti bodhiyaṃ satto āsattotipi bodhisatto. Evaṃ guṇato uppannanāmavasena bodhisattasseva sato. Kicchanti dukkhaṃ. Āpannoti anuppatto. Idaṃ vuttaṃ hoti – aho ayaṃ sattaloko dukkhaṃ anuppattoti. Cavati ca upapajjati cāti idaṃ aparāparaṃ cutipaṭisandhivasena vuttaṃ. Nissaraṇanti nibbānaṃ. Tañhi jarāmaraṇadukkhato nissaṭattā tassa nissaraṇanti vuccati. Kudāssu nāmāti katarasmiṃ nu kho kāle.
通过如理作意,也就是以方法性的作意、根本的作意。“慧的现观生起了”:意思是,与慧一起,对老死之因的现观、结合、相应发生了,也就是“以生为缘而有老死”——这是他当时所见的。或者,“由如理作意,慧的现观生起”:意思是,通过如理作意和慧,现观发生了,也就是“有生时,就有老死”——这样通达了老死之因。这个道理适用于一切处。巴利
Yoniso manasikārāti upāyamanasikārena pathamanasikārena. Ahu paññāya abhisamayoti paññāya saddhiṃ jarāmaraṇakāraṇassa abhisamayo samavāyo samāyogo ahosi, ‘‘jātipaccayā jarāmaraṇa’’nti idaṃ tena diṭṭhanti attho. Atha vā yoniso manasikārā ahu paññāyāti yoniso manasikārena ca paññāya ca abhisamayo ahu. ‘‘Jātiyā kho sati jarāmaraṇa’’nti, evaṃ jarāmaraṇakāraṇassa paṭivedho ahosīti attho. Esa nayo sabbattha.
“如是此”就是“如此”。“集、集”:在十一个处中,把行等的集总合起来加以说明。“于前所未闻”:即“以无明为缘,行之集生起”。如此,在此前未曾听闻的诸法中,或在四圣谛法中。“眼”等只是智的异名。在这里,智以能见之义为“眼”,以了知之义为“智”,以遍知之义为“慧”,以通达之义为“明”,以照亮之义为“光”。应当知道,这是就四谛中间杂地宣说了世间与出世间。在灭的环节,也应以同样的方式了知义理。第四。巴利
Iti hidanti evamidaṃ. Samudayo samudayoti ekādasasu ṭhānesu saṅkhārādīnaṃ samudayaṃ sampiṇḍetvā niddisati. Pubbe ananussutesūti ‘‘avijjāpaccayā saṅkhārānaṃ samudayo hotī’’ti. Evaṃ ito pubbe ananussutesu dhammesu, catūsu vā ariyasaccadhammesu. Cakkhuntiādīni ñāṇavevacanāneva. Ñāṇameva hettha dassanaṭṭhena cakkhu, ñātaṭṭhena ñāṇaṃ, pajānanaṭṭhena paññā, paṭivedhanaṭṭhena vijjā, obhāsanaṭṭhena ālokoti vuttaṃ . Taṃ panetaṃ catūsu saccesu lokiyalokuttaramissakaṃ niddiṭṭhanti veditabbaṃ. Nirodhavārepi imināva nayena attho veditabbo. Catutthaṃ.
第五至第十部经的注释,从《尸弃经》开始。巴利
5-10. Sikhīsuttādivaṇṇanā
5-10 第五至第十部经的注释中,“尸弃的,比丘们”这类词句,不应该拆开来理解成“尸弃的也,比丘们”。为什么呢?因为这些经文不是在同一场合说的。它们是在不同地方分别宣说的,但含义到处都一样。因为一切菩萨坐在菩提座上时,没有哪个沙门、婆罗门、天人、魔罗或梵天会来告诉他:“过去的菩萨是观照缘起之后成佛的。”就像初劫时天降大雨,后来的雨水都沿着先前水流过的路走;同样,后来的佛也都沿着过去诸佛走过的路走。一切菩萨都是从入出息念第四禅出定,把智慧投向缘起,顺观逆观缘起之后成佛。这样,在七部经里依次讲述了所谓“佛陀的观照”。巴利
5-10. Pañcamādīsu sikhissa, bhikkhavetiādīnaṃ padānaṃ ‘‘sikhissapi, bhikkhave’’ti na evaṃ yojetvā attho veditabbo. Kasmā? Ekāsane adesitattā. Nānāṭhānesu hi etāni desitāni, attho pana sabbattha sadisoyeva. Sabbabodhisattānañhi bodhipallaṅke nisinnānaṃ na añño samaṇo vā brāhmaṇo vā devo vā māro vā brahmā vā ācikkhati – ‘‘atīte bodhisattā paccayākāraṃ sammasitvā buddhā jātā’’ti. Yathā pana paṭhamakappikakāle deve vuṭṭhe udakassa gatamaggeneva aparāparaṃ vuṭṭhiudakaṃ gacchati, evaṃ tehi tehi purimabuddhehi gatamaggeneva pacchimā pacchimā gacchanti. Sabbabodhisattā hi ānāpānacatutthajjhānato vuṭṭhāya paccayākāre ñāṇaṃ otāretvā taṃ anulomapaṭilomaṃ sammasitvā buddhā hontīti paṭipāṭiyā sattasu suttesu buddhavipassanā nāma kathitāti.
《食经》的注释巴利
1. Āhārasuttavaṇṇanā
11 11. 在《食经》第一经的注释中,“食”指的是缘。因为缘能带来自己的果,所以被称为“食”。在“已生的有情……”等语句中,“已生”指已经出生、已经产生的。 “求有者”指那些寻求、寻找生、出生、产生的人。其中,在四生中,卵生和胎生的有情,只要还没有破开卵壳和胎膜,就称为“求有者”;破开卵壳和胎膜而出来后,就称为“已生”。湿生和化生的有情,在第一个心识刹那称为“求有者”,从第二个心识刹那起称为“已生”。或者,依他们出生时所处的姿势来说,只要还没有达到另一种姿势,就称为“求有者”,此后则称为“已生”。又或者,“已生”指已经出生、已经完全产生的;那些已经出生、已经完全产生,而不再被算作“还会再生”的,这是指漏尽者。“寻求生”就是“求有者”。由于尚未断除有的结缚,所以还在寻求未来的生,这是指有学凡夫。这样,用这两个词就从一切方面涵盖了所有有情。这里“vā”这个词有集合的意思,因此应理解为“已生的和求有者的”。巴利
11. Āhāravaggassa paṭhame āhārāti paccayā. Paccayā hi āharanti attano phalaṃ, tasmā āhārāti vuccanti. Bhūtānaṃ vā sattānantiādīsu bhūtāti jātā nibbattā. Sambhavesinoti ye sambhavaṃ jātiṃ nibbattiṃ esanti gavesanti. Tattha catūsu yonīsu aṇḍajajalābujā sattā yāva aṇḍakosaṃ vatthikosañca na bhindanti, tāva sambhavesino nāma, aṇḍakosaṃ vatthikosañca bhinditvā bahi nikkhantā bhūtā nāma. Saṃsedajā opapātikā ca paṭhamacittakkhaṇe sambhavesino nāma, dutiyacittakkhaṇato pabhuti bhūtā nāma. Yena vā iriyāpathena jāyanti, yāva tato aññaṃ na pāpuṇanti, tāva sambhavesino nāma, tato paraṃ bhūtā nāma. Atha vā bhūtāti jātā abhinibbattā, ye bhūtā abhinibbattāyeva, na puna bhavissantīti saṅkhaṃ gacchanti, tesaṃ khīṇāsavānaṃ etaṃ adhivacanaṃ. Sambhavamesantīti sambhavesino. Appahīnabhavasaṃyojanattā āyatimpi sambhavaṃ esantānaṃ sekkhaputhujjanānametaṃ adhivacanaṃ. Evaṃ sabbathāpi imehi dvīhi padehi sabbasatte pariyādiyati. Vāsaddo cettha sampiṇḍanattho, tasmā bhūtānañca sambhavesīnañcāti ayamattho veditabbo.
“为住”的意思是“为了住”。“为资助”的意思是“为了资助”。这只是说法上的差别,两个词的意思其实是同一个。或者也可以说,“为住”是指让各个有情已生起的法以相续不断的方式不中断;“为资助”是指让未生起的法得以生起。这两者应当在这两种情形中都这样理解:对已生者,为住与为资助;对求有者,为住与为资助。巴利
Ṭhitiyāti ṭhitatthaṃ. Anuggahāyāti anuggahatthaṃ. Vacanabhedoyeva cesa, attho pana dvinnampi padānaṃ ekoyeva. Atha vā ṭhitiyāti tassa tassa sattassa uppannadhammānaṃ anuppabandhavasena avicchedāya. Anuggahāyāti anuppannānaṃ uppādāya. Ubhopi cetāni ‘‘bhūtānaṃ vā ṭhitiyā ceva anuggahāya ca, sambhavesīnaṃ vā ṭhitiyā ceva anuggahāya cā’’ti evaṃ ubhayattha daṭṭhabbānīti.
段食,是指做成团状再吞下去的食物,这是对以米饭、粥等为依托的食素的称呼。所谓粗或细,是就依托物的粗而言为粗,就依托物的细而言为细。但从真实本性来说,段食属于细色所摄,所以本身就是细的。它的粗与细,应当依照依托物来理解。比如,比起鳄鱼的食物,孔雀的食物更细。据说鳄鱼会吞下石头,石头到了它们肚子里就融化;孔雀则吃蛇、蝎等动物。比起孔雀的食物,鬣狗的食物更细。据说鬣狗吃丢弃了三年的角和骨头,那些东西只要被它们的唾液润湿,就像块根一样变软。比起鬣狗的食物,大象的食物更细,因为大象吃各种树枝等。比起大象的食物,野牛、大瞪羚等鹿类的食物更细,据说它们吃各种没有实质的树叶等。比起这些动物的食物,牛的食物更细,牛吃鲜草和干草。比起牛的食物,兔子的食物更细。比起兔子的食物,鸟的食物更细。比起鸟的食物,边地居民的食物更细。比起边地居民的食物,村落首领的食物更细。比起村落首领的食物,国王和大臣们的食物更细。比起他们的食物,转轮王的食物更细。比起转轮王的食物,地居天人的食物更细。比起地居天人的食物,四大王天众的食物更细。这样一直推展到他化自在天众的食物。不过,他们的食物最终都归结为细的。巴利
Kabaḷīkāro āhāroti kabaḷaṃ katvā ajjhoharitabbako āhāro, odanakummāsādivatthukāya ojāyetaṃ adhivacanaṃ. Oḷāriko vā sukhumo vāti vatthuoḷārikatāya oḷāriko, sukhumatāya sukhumo. Sabhāvena pana sukhumarūpapariyāpannattā kabaḷīkāro āhāro sukhumova hoti. Sāpi cassa vatthuto oḷārikatā sukhumatā ca upādāyupādāya veditabbā. Kumbhīlānañhi āhāraṃ upādāya morānaṃ āhāro sukhumo. Kumbhīlā kira pāsāṇe gilanti, te ca nesaṃ kucchippattā vilīyanti. Morā sappavicchikādipāṇe khādanti. Morānaṃ pana āhāraṃ upādāya taracchānaṃ āhāro sukhumo. Te kira tivassachaḍḍitāni visāṇāni ceva aṭṭhīni ca khādanti, tāni ca nesaṃ kheḷena temitamattāneva kandamūlaṃ viya mudukāni honti. Taracchānaṃ āhāraṃ upādāya hatthīnaṃ āhāro sukhumo. Te hi nānārukkhasākhādayo khādanti. Hatthīnaṃ āhārato gavayagokaṇṇamigādīnaṃ āhāro sukhumo. Te kira nissārāni nānārukkhapaṇṇādīni khādanti. Tesampi āhārato gunnaṃ āhāro sukhumo. Te allasukkhatiṇāni khādanti. Tesaṃ āhārato sasānaṃ āhāro sukhumo. Sasānaṃ āhārato sakuṇānaṃ āhāro sukhumo. Sakuṇānaṃ āhārato paccantavāsīnaṃ āhāro sukhumo. Paccantavāsīnaṃ āhārato gāmabhojakānaṃ āhāro sukhumo. Gāmabhojakānaṃ āhārato rājarājamahāmattānaṃ āhāro sukhumo. Tesampi āhārato cakkavattino āhāro sukhumo. Cakkavattino āhārato bhummānaṃ devānaṃ āhāro sukhumo. Bhummānaṃ devānaṃ āhārato cātumahārājikānaṃ. Evaṃ yāva paranimmitavasavattīnaṃ āhārā vitthāretabbā. Tesaṃ panāhāro sukhumotveva niṭṭhaṃ patto.
在这里,如果依托物粗重,食素就少而弱;如果依托物细柔,食素就强而有力。就像有人喝下满满一钵粥,没过多久就又饿了,什么都想吃;可是只喝下一掬左右的酥油,一整天都不想再吃东西。其中,依托物能消除被称为“业生火”的损害,却不能维持滋养;食素能维持滋养,却不能消除损害。两者合在一起,既能消除损害,也能维持滋养。巴利
Ettha ca oḷārike vatthusmiṃ ojā parittā hoti dubbalā, sukhume balavatī. Tathā hi ekapattapūrampi yāguṃ pīto muhutteneva jighacchito hoti yaṃkiñcideva khāditukāmo, sappiṃ pana pasatamattaṃ pivitvā divasaṃ abhottukāmo hoti. Tattha vatthu kammajatejasaṅkhātaṃ parissayaṃ vinodeti, na pana sakkoti pāletuṃ. Ojā pana pāleti, na sakkoti parissayaṃ vinodetuṃ. Dve pana ekato hutvā parissayañceva vinodenti pālenti cāti.
“触是第二”,应当知道:眼触等六种触,在这四种食当中就是第二种食。这只是说法上的排列顺序,所以在这里不必追问“凭什么理由说它是第二、第三”。 “意思”说的就是思。“识”说的就是心。这样,世尊在这个地方,把有执受的和没有执受的合为一类,开示了四种食。因为段食既有有执受的,也有没有执受的;触等也是这样。其中,被蛇等吞下去的青蛙之类,应当看作有执受的段食。因为青蛙等被蛇等吞下、进入腹中之后,还能活一段时间。它们只要还处在有执受的状态,就不能起到食的作用;等到身体破散、进入没有执受的状态,才能起到食的作用。那时它们也被称为有执受的食。不过这种说法并不被诸位导师认可,注释书里就否定了它,而这样说:这些有情,无论是正在吃的、没有吃的,正在受用的、没有受用的,都有一种与结生心同时生起、由业所生、名为食素的东西,它能维持到第七天,应当知道这正是有执受的段食。至于触等,则应按照三地的异熟来理解为有执受,按照三地的善、不善、唯作来理解为没有执受。至于出世间法,则是依照惯用的说法来讲的。巴利
Phasso dutiyoti cakkhusamphassādi chabbidhopi phasso etesu catūsu āhāresu dutiyo āhāroti veditabbo. Desanānayo eva cesa, tasmā iminā nāma kāraṇena dutiyo tatiyo cāti idamettha na gavesitabbaṃ. Manosañcetanāti cetanāva vuccati. Viññāṇanti cittaṃ. Iti bhagavā imasmiṃ ṭhāne upādiṇṇakaanupādiṇṇakavasena ekarāsiṃ katvā cattāro āhāre dassesi. Kabaḷīkārāhāro hi upādiṇṇakopi atthi anupādiṇṇakopi, tathā phassādayo. Tattha sappādīhi gilitānaṃ maṇḍūkādīnaṃ vasena upādiṇṇakakabaḷīkārāhāro daṭṭhabbo. Maṇḍūkādayo hi sappādīhi gilitā antokucchigatāpi kiñci kālaṃ jīvantiyeva. Te yāva upādiṇṇakapakkhe tiṭṭhanti, tāva āhāratthaṃ na sādhenti . Bhijjitvā pana anupādiṇṇakapakkhe ṭhitā sādhenti. Tadāpi upādiṇṇakāhāroti vuccantīti. Idaṃ pana ācariyānaṃ na ruccatīti aṭṭhakathāyameva paṭikkhipitvā idaṃ vuttaṃ – imesaṃ sattānaṃ khādantānampi akhādantānampi bhuñjantānampi abhuñjantānampi paṭisandhicitteneva sahajātā kammajā ojā nāma atthi, sā yāvapi sattamā divasā pāleti, ayameva upādiṇṇakakabaḷīkārāhāroti veditabbo. Tebhūmakavipākavasena pana upādiṇṇakaphassādayo veditabbā, tebhūmakakusalākusalakiriyavasena anupādiṇṇakā. Lokuttarā pana ruḷhīvasena kathitāti.
这里有人问:如果“缘”的意思就是“食”的意思,那为什么在其他有情的各种缘都存在的情况下,只说了这四种食呢?回答是:因为它们是内在相续的特殊缘。具体来说,对于以段食为食的有情,段食是色身的特殊缘;触是名身中受的特殊缘;意思是识的特殊缘;识是名色的特殊缘。正如经中所说:“诸比丘,就像这个身体依靠食而住,缘食而存,没有食就不能住。”同样,“缘触而有受,缘行而有识,缘识而有名色。”巴利
Etthāha – ‘‘yadi paccayaṭṭho āhāraṭṭho, atha kasmā aññesupi sattānaṃ paccayesu vijjamānesu imeyeva cattāro vuttā’’ti? Vuccate – ajjhattikasantatiyā visesapaccayattā. Visesapaccayo hi kabaḷīkārāhārabhakkhānaṃ sattānaṃ rūpakāyassa kabaḷīkāro āhāro, nāmakāye vedanāya phasso, viññāṇassa manosañcetanā, nāmarūpassa viññāṇaṃ. Yathāha – ‘‘seyyathāpi, bhikkhave, ayaṃ kāyo āhāraṭṭhitiko āhāraṃ paṭicca tiṭṭhati, anāhāro no tiṭṭhati (saṃ. ni. 5.183), tathā phassapaccayā vedanā, saṅkhārapaccayā viññāṇaṃ, viññāṇapaccayā nāmarūpa’’nti (saṃ. ni. 2.1; vibha. 225).
那么,这里什么是食?它又带来什么?段食带来以食素为第八法的诸色;触食带来三种受;意思食带来三种有;识食带来结生时的名色。巴利
Ko panettha āhāro kiṃ āharatīti? Kabaḷīkārāhāro ojaṭṭhamakarūpāni āharati phassāhāro tisso vedanā, manosañcetanāhāro tayo bhave, viññāṇāhāro paṭisandhināmarūpanti.
怎么带来的呢?先说段食:食物刚放进嘴里时,就已经生起了八种色法;被牙齿嚼碎、正在咽下去的时候,每一粒饭都各自生起八种色法。这样,段食带来的是以食素为第八法的诸色。再说触食:能引生乐受的触,一生起就带来乐受;能引生苦受的触,就带来苦受;能引生不苦不乐受的触,就带来不苦不乐受。这样,触食在一切情况下都带来三种受。巴利
Kathaṃ? Kabaḷīkārāhāro tāva mukhe ṭhapitamatteyeva aṭṭha rūpāni samuṭṭhāpeti, dantavicuṇṇitaṃ pana ajjhohariyamānaṃ ekekaṃ sitthaṃ aṭṭhaṭṭharūpāni samuṭṭhāpetiyeva. Evaṃ kabaḷīkārāhāro ojaṭṭhamakarūpāni āharati. Phassāhāro pana sukhavedanīyo phasso uppajjamānoyeva sukhaṃ vedanaṃ āharati, dukkhavedanīyo dukkhaṃ, adukkhamasukhavedanīyo adukkhamasukhanti evaṃ sabbathāpi phassāhāro tisso vedanā āharati.
意思食把导向欲有的业带来欲有,把导向色有和无色有的业分别带来那一种有。这样,意思食从一切方面带来三种有。而识食则是在结生刹那,把与结生识相应的三个蕴,以及依三组相续生起的三十种色法,通过俱生缘等方式带来,所以称为食。这样,识食带来结生时的名色。这里说“意思食带来三种有”,指的只是有漏的善思或不善思;说“识食带来结生名色”,指的只是结生识。但总的来说,因为它们能带来相应法和由它们生起的法,所以应当知道它们被称为食。巴利
Manosañcetanāhāro kāmabhavūpagaṃ kammaṃ kāmabhavaṃ āharati, rūpārūpabhavūpagāni taṃ taṃ bhavaṃ. Evaṃ sabbathāpi manosañcetanāhāro tayo bhave āharati. Viññāṇāhāro pana ye ca paṭisandhikkhaṇe taṃsampayuttakā tayo khandhā, yāni ca tisantativasena tiṃsa rūpāni uppajjanti, sahajātādipaccayanayena tāni āharatīti vuccati. Evaṃ viññāṇāhāro paṭisandhināmarūpaṃ āharatīti. Ettha ca ‘‘manosañcetanā tayo bhave āharatī’’ti sāsavakusalākusalacetanāva vuttā. ‘‘Viññāṇaṃ paṭisandhināmarūpaṃ āharatī’’ti paṭisandhiviññāṇameva vuttaṃ. Avisesena pana taṃsampayuttataṃsamuṭṭhānadhammānaṃ āharaṇatopete ‘‘āhārā’’ti veditabbā.
在这四种食当中,段食通过支持来达成食的作用;触只是通过接触,意思只是通过造作,识只是通过认知。怎么理解呢?段食正是通过支持、也就是维持身体,让众生得以安住。这个身体虽然是业所生的,但只要得到段食的支持,就能住立十年、一百年,乃至活到寿命的极限。就像什么呢?就像母亲生下的婴儿,要靠乳母喂乳汁等来养育,才能长久存活;又像一栋房子靠支撑物撑住一样。对此也有这样的说法:巴利
Etesu catūsu āhāresu kabaḷīkārāhāro upatthambhento āhārakiccaṃ sādheti, phasso phusantoyeva manosañcetanā āyūhamānāva, viññāṇaṃ vijānantameva. Kathaṃ? Kabaḷīkārāhāro hi upatthambhentoyeva kāyaṭṭhapanena sattānaṃ ṭhitiyā hoti. Kammajanitopi hi ayaṃ kāyo kabaḷīkārāhārena upatthaddho dasapi vassāni vassasatampi yāva āyuparimāṇā tiṭṭhati. Yathā kiṃ ? Yathā mātuyā janitopi dārako dhātiyā thaññādīni pāyetvā posiyamāno ciraṃ tiṭṭhati, yathā ca upatthambhena upatthambhitaṃ gehaṃ. Vuttampi cetaṃ –
大王,就像房屋要倒塌时,用另一根木头把它撑住,这房屋就不会倒。同样地,大王,这个身体依靠食物而维持,因为依赖食物才能存续。巴利
‘‘Yathā, mahārāja, gehe papatante aññena dārunā upatthambhitaṃ santaṃ eva taṃ gehaṃ na patati. Evameva kho, mahārāja, ayaṃ kāyo āhāraṭṭhitiko āhāraṃ paṭicca tiṭṭhatī’’ti.
段食就是这样通过支撑来达成食的作用。巴利
Evaṃ kabaḷīkāro āhāro upatthambhento āhārakiccaṃ sādheti.
段食这样起作用时,会成为两种色相续的缘:一是食所生的色,二是已被执取的色。它对业所生的色只是起支持作用而成为缘,对食所生的色则是起产生作用而成为缘。触只是接触作为乐、苦等基础的所缘,就通过让乐受等生起,使众生得以维持。意思通过造作善业或不善业、产生存在的根本,使众生得以维持。识只是在了知,就通过让名色生起,使众生得以维持。巴利
Evaṃ sādhentopi ca kabaḷīkāro āhāro dvinnaṃ rūpasantatīnaṃ paccayo hoti āhārasamuṭṭhānassa ca upādiṇṇakassa ca. Kammajānaṃ anupālako hutvā paccayo hoti, āhārasamuṭṭhānānaṃ janako hutvāti. Phasso pana sukhādivatthubhūtaṃ ārammaṇaṃ phusantoyeva sukhādivedanāpavattanena sattānaṃ ṭhitiyā hoti. Manosañcetanā kusalākusalakammavasena āyūhamānāyeva bhavamūlanipphādanato sattānaṃ ṭhitiyā hoti. Viññāṇaṃ vijānantameva nāmarūpappavattanena sattānaṃ ṭhitiyā hotīti.
当这些食以支持等方式正在完成食的作用时,应当看出有四种恐惧。也就是:在段食上,贪爱本身就是恐惧;在触食上,趋近本身就是恐惧;在意思食上,造作本身就是恐惧;在识食上,投生本身就是恐惧。为什么呢?因为对段食生起贪爱之后,被寒热等逼迫的众生为了食物而做算账、量谷等种种工作,遭受许多痛苦。有些人即使在这教法中出家,却以行医等不正当方式谋生、寻求食物,不但现世就受人呵责,来世也会像《相应部》里所说“他的僧伽帝衣燃烧、炽燃……”那样,依照这段经文所说的情况,成为沙门饿鬼。单凭这个理由,就该知道:在段食上,贪爱本身就是恐惧。巴利
Evaṃ upatthambhanādivasena āhārakiccaṃ sādhayamānesu panetesu cattāri bhayāni daṭṭhabbāni. Seyyathidaṃ – kabaḷīkārāhāre nikantiyeva bhayaṃ, phasse upagamanameva, manosañcetanāya āyūhanameva, viññāṇe abhinipātoyeva bhayanti. Kiṃ kāraṇā? Kabaḷīkārāhāre hi nikantiṃ katvā sītādīnaṃ purakkhatā sattā āhāratthāya muddāgaṇanādikammāni karontā anappakaṃ dukkhaṃ nigacchanti. Ekacce ca imasmiṃ sāsane pabbajitvāpi vejjakammādikāya anesanāya āhāraṃ pariyesantā diṭṭheva dhamme gārayhā honti, samparāyepi, ‘‘tassa saṅghāṭipi ādittā sampajjalitā’’tiādinā lakkhaṇasaṃyutte (saṃ. ni. 2.218) vuttanayena samaṇapetā honti. Iminā tāva kāraṇena kabaḷīkāre āhāre nikanti eva bhayanti veditabbā.
那些靠近触食的人,因为贪著触的滋味,就会去侵犯别人守护看重的妻子、财物等东西。物主连同财物一起把他们抓住后,或者把他们砍成一块一块的,扔到垃圾堆里,或者交给国王。然后国王就让他们遭受各种刑罚。身体毁坏之后,他们必定会堕入恶趣。这样一来,以贪著触的滋味为根源,现世和来世的恐怖全都降临了。由于这个原因,应当知道:靠近触食本身就是恐怖。巴利
Phassaṃ upagacchantāpi phassassādino paresaṃ rakkhitagopitesu dārādīsu bhaṇḍesu aparajjhanti, te saha bhaṇḍena bhaṇḍasāmikā gahetvā khaṇḍākhaṇḍikaṃ vā chinditvā saṅkārakūṭe chaḍḍenti , rañño vā niyyādenti. Tato te rājā vividhā kammakāraṇā kārāpeti. Kāyassa ca bhedā duggati tesaṃ pāṭikaṅkhā hoti. Iti phassassādamūlakaṃ diṭṭhadhammikampi samparāyikampi bhayaṃ sabbamāgatameva hoti. Iminā kāraṇena phassāhāre upagamanameva bhayanti veditabbaṃ.
至于造作善业和不善业,以它为根源,在三有中的一切恐惧就全都随之而来。由于这个原因,应当知道:在意思食中,造作本身就是恐惧。巴利
Kusalākusalakammāyūhane pana tammūlakaṃ tīsu bhavesu bhayaṃ sabbaṃ āgatameva hoti. Iminā kāraṇena manosañcetanāhāre āyūhanameva bhayanti veditabbaṃ.
结生识无论投生到哪一处,就在那一处执取结生名色而再生。而一旦在那里再生,一切怖畏也就随之生起了,因为怖畏都以它为根源。因此应当知道:在识食当中,投生本身就是怖畏。巴利
Paṭisandhiviññāṇañca yasmiṃ yasmiṃ ṭhāne abhinipatati, tasmiṃ tasmiṃ ṭhāne paṭisandhināmarūpaṃ gahetvāva nibbattati. Tasmiñca nibbatte sabbabhayāni nibbattāniyeva honti tammūlakattāti iminā kāraṇena viññāṇāhāre abhinipātoyeva bhayanti veditabboti.
在“以什么为因”等说法里,“因”“集”“生”“发生”这些词全都是用来表示原因的。为什么叫“因”?因为结果靠它而生起,就像招呼人说“来,拿这个”,促使对方去取一样,所以称为“因”。因为结果从它那里生起、出生、发生,所以称为“集”“生”“发生”。这里每个词的具体含义是:什么是它们的因,就是“以何为因”;什么是它们的集,就是“以何为集”;什么是它们的生,就是“以何为生”;什么是它们的发生,就是“以何为发生”。而按照前面所说的含义,渴爱正是它们的因、集、生、发生,所以经文说“以渴爱为因”等等。一切词句都应这样理解其含义。巴利
Kiṃnidānātiādīsu nidānādīni sabbāneva kāraṇavevacanāni. Kāraṇañhi yasmā phalaṃ nideti, ‘‘handa naṃ gaṇhathā’’ti appeti viya, tasmā nidānanti vuccati. Yasmā taṃ tato samudeti jāyati pabhavati, tasmā samudayo jāti pabhavoti vuccati. Ayaṃ panettha padattho – kiṃnidānaṃ etesanti kiṃnidānā. Ko samudayo etesanti kiṃsamudayā. Kā jāti etesanti kiṃjātikā. Ko pabhavo etesanti kiṃpabhavā. Yasmā pana tesaṃ taṇhā yathāvuttena atthena nidānañceva samudayo ca jāti ca pabhavo ca, tasmā ‘‘taṇhānidānā’’tiādimāha. Evaṃ sabbapadesu attho veditabbo.
在这里,这四种食都以渴爱为因。应当这样理解:从结生那一刻开始算起,那些被称为“有身”的食,其因就是前世渴爱的力量。怎么理解呢?在结生的刹那,对于六根完备的有情来说,依着七种相续而存在;对于其他有情来说,则依着依次递减的相续而存在。在他们所生起的色聚内部,都有食素存在,这就是以渴爱为因的执受段食。而与结生心相应的触和思,再加上结生心本身即识,这三者就是以渴爱为因的执受触食、执受意思食、执受识食。像这样,前世的渴爱作为因,生起了这些结生阶段的食。正如结生时一样,此后从第一个有分心刹那等所生起的诸食,也应当同样理解。巴利
Ettha ca ime cattāro āhārā taṇhānidānāti paṭisandhiṃ ādiṃ katvā attabhāvasaṅkhātānaṃ āhārānaṃ purimataṇhānaṃ vasena nidānaṃ veditabbaṃ. Kathaṃ? Paṭisandhikkhaṇe tāva paripuṇṇāyatanānaṃ sattānaṃ sattasantativasena, sesānaṃ tato ūnaūnasantativasena uppannarūpabbhantaraṃ jātā ojā atthi, ayaṃ taṇhānidāno upādiṇṇakakabaḷīkārāhāro. Paṭisandhicittasampayuttā pana phassacetanā sayañca cittaṃ viññāṇanti ime taṇhānidānā upādiṇṇaka-phassamanosañcetanā-viññāṇāhārāti evaṃ tāva purimataṇhānidānā paṭisandhikā āhārā. Yathā ca paṭisandhikā, evaṃ tato paraṃ paṭhamabhavaṅgacittakkhaṇādinibbattāpi veditabbā.
世尊并不只是知道诸食的因,也知道作为食之因的渴爱的因,并且确实知道渴爱的因——受等诸法的因。因此,世尊用“比丘们,这渴爱以什么为因”这样的方式,先开示了轮回,然后开示了还灭。而在这个地方,世尊把开示面向过去,用过去来显示轮回。怎么显示呢?因为正是依于食,这个有身才被执取。巴利
Yasmā pana bhagavā na kevalaṃ āhārānameva nidānaṃ jānāti, āhāranidānabhūtāya taṇhāyapi, taṇhāya nidānānaṃ vedanādīnampi nidānaṃ jānātiyeva, tasmā taṇhā cāyaṃ, bhikkhave, kiṃnidānātiādinā nayena vaṭṭaṃ dassetvā vivaṭṭaṃ dassesi. Imasmiñca pana ṭhāne bhagavā atītābhimukhaṃ desanaṃ katvā atītena vaṭṭaṃ dasseti. Kathaṃ? Āhāravasena hi ayaṃ attabhāvo gahito.
渴爱,是指能产生这个有身的业。而受、触、六处、名色、识这些,是为了显示那个有身——也就是众生安住其中、造作诸业的那个有身——才说的。无明和行,则是能产生那个有身的业。这样一来,在两处说的是有身,在两处说的是能产生那个有身的业,简要来说,就是业和业果。世尊阐明这两法时,是把开示面向过去而说,借过去来显示轮回。巴利
Taṇhāti imassattabhāvassa janakaṃ kammaṃ, vedanāphassasaḷāyatananāmarūpaviññāṇāni yasmiṃ attabhāve ṭhatvā kammaṃ āyūhitaṃ, taṃ dassetuṃ vuttāni, avijjāsaṅkhārā tassattabhāvassa janakaṃ kammaṃ. Iti dvīsu ṭhānesu attabhāvo, dvīsu tassa janakaṃ kammanti saṅkhepena kammañceva kammavipākañcāti, dvepi dhamme dassentena atītābhimukhaṃ desanaṃ katvā atītena vaṭṭaṃ dassitaṃ.
在这里,不应该因为这次开示没有显示未来,就认为它不完整;而应该从理则上认定它是完整的。就像一个有眼睛的人看见一条鳄鱼趴在水面上,他观察鳄鱼的上方时,能看见脖子;从这一侧,能看见背;到最后,能看见尾根;但当他往下看肚子时,却看不到没入水中的尾尖和四只脚。他不会因此就认定“这条鳄鱼不完整”,而是从理则上认定它是完整的。这个道理也应该这样理解。巴利
Tatrāyaṃ desanā anāgatassa adassitattā aparipuṇṇāti na daṭṭhabbā. Nayato pana paripuṇṇātveva daṭṭhabbā. Yathā hi cakkhumā puriso udakapiṭṭhe nipannaṃ suṃsumāraṃ disvā tassa parabhāgaṃ olokento gīvaṃ passeyya, orato piṭṭhiṃ, pariyosāne naṅguṭṭhamūlaṃ, heṭṭhā kucchiṃ olokento pana udakagataṃ agganaṅguṭṭhañceva cattāro ca hatthapāde na passeyya, so na ettāvatā ‘‘aparipuṇṇo suṃsumāro’’ti gaṇhāti, nayato pana paripuṇṇotveva gaṇhāti, evaṃsampadamidaṃ veditabbaṃ.
就像鳄鱼趴在水面上,这是三界轮回的比喻。站在岸上的明眼人,好比是修行的瑜伽行者。那个人看见鳄鱼趴在水面上的时候,就好比瑜伽行者从食物方面看清了这个生命体的真相。接着看见鳄鱼的脖子,就好比瑜伽行者看清了这个生命体出生的根源——渴爱。看见鳄鱼的背,就好比从感受等方面,看清了在那个生命体中以渴爱为名所造的业。看见鳄鱼尾巴根部,就好比看清了那个生命体出生的根源——无明和行。不过,当这个人往下看鳄鱼的肚子时,即使没看到尾尖和四只脚,他也不会因此就说“这条鳄鱼不完整”,而是按照道理认定它就是完整的。同样,经典中哪些地方没有讲到缘起的轮转,就不该在那里说“这个开示不完整”,而应该按照道理认定它就是完整的。其中,食与渴爱之间有一个连接,渴爱与受之间有一个,识与行之间有一个——这样,就显示了有三个连接、四个要点的轮回。第一。巴利
Udakapiṭṭhe nipannasuṃsumāro viya hi tebhūmakavaṭṭaṃ. Tīre ṭhito cakkhumā puriso viya yogāvacaro. Tena purisena udakapiṭṭhe suṃsumārassa diṭṭhakālo viya yoginā āhāravasena imassattabhāvassa diṭṭhakālo. Parato gīvāya diṭṭhakālo viya imassattabhāvassa janikāya taṇhāya diṭṭhakālo. Piṭṭhiyā diṭṭhakālo viya yasmiṃ attabhāve taṇhāsaṅkhātaṃ kammaṃ kataṃ, vedanādivasena tassa diṭṭhakālo. Naṅguṭṭhamūlassa diṭṭhakālo viya tassattabhāvassa janakānaṃ avijjāsaṅkhārānaṃ diṭṭhakālo. Heṭṭhā kucchiṃ olokentassa pana agganaṅguṭṭhañceva cattāro ca hatthapāde adisvāpi ‘‘aparipuṇṇo suṃsumāro’’ti agahetvā nayato paripuṇṇotveva gahaṇaṃ viya yattha yattha paccayavaṭṭaṃ pāḷiyaṃ na āgataṃ, tattha tattha ‘‘desanā aparipuṇṇā’’ti agahetvā nayato paripuṇṇātveva gahaṇaṃ veditabbaṃ. Tattha ca āhārataṇhānaṃ antare eko sandhi, taṇhāvedanānaṃ antare eko, viññāṇasaṅkhārānaṃ antare ekoti evaṃ tisandhicatusaṅkhepameva vaṭṭaṃ dassitanti. Paṭhamaṃ.
2. 《牟利破群那经》的注释巴利
2. Moḷiyaphaggunasuttavaṇṇanā
12 12. 在第二部经里,世尊就在“或为了护持寻求投生的众生”这个地方结束了开示。为什么?因为有个持邪见的人坐在那里。当时在那个集会中,确实坐着一位名叫牟利破群那的比丘,他是持邪见的。于是导师心想:“他会站起来问我问题,到时我就为他解答。”为了给他提问的机会,世尊就结束了开示。牟利破群那,“牟利”指的是顶髻。正如所说的——巴利
12. Dutiye sambhavesīnaṃ vā anuggahāyāti imasmiṃyeva ṭhāne bhagavā desanaṃ niṭṭhāpesi. Kasmā? Diṭṭhigatikassa nisinnattā. Tassañhi parisati moḷiyaphagguno nāma bhikkhu diṭṭhigatiko nisinno. Atha satthā cintesi – ‘‘ayaṃ uṭṭhahitvā maṃ pañhaṃ pucchissati, athassāhaṃ vissajjessāmī’’ti pucchāya okāsadānatthaṃ desanaṃ niṭṭhāpesi. Moḷiyaphaggunoti moḷīti cūḷā vuccati. Yathāha –
斩断了那用殊胜妙香熏染过的发髻,
释迦族的雄牛把它抛向空中;
帝释天王用殊胜的宝珠篮,
千眼者以头顶礼接受。巴利
‘‘Chetvāna moḷiṃ varagandhavāsitaṃ Vehāyasaṃ ukkhipi sakyapuṅgavo; Ratanacaṅkoṭavarena vāsavo, Sahassanetto sirasā paṭiggahī’’ti.
他的发髻在家时非常高大,因此得了“髻发福军”这个名字。即使出家以后,人们还是用这个名字称呼他。所谓“说了这话”,是指他为了衔接世尊说法的脉络,而说出这句话:“尊者,到底是谁吃下识食呢?”这句话的意思是:尊者,那个吃下、享用这识食的,究竟是谁呢?巴利
Sā tassa gihikāle mahantā ahosi. Tenassa ‘‘moḷiyaphagguno’’ti saṅkhā udapādi. Pabbajitampi naṃ teneva nāmena sañjānanti. Etadavocāti desanānusandhiṃ ghaṭento etaṃ ‘‘ko nu kho, bhante, viññāṇāhāraṃ āhāretī’’ti vacanaṃ avoca. Tassattho – bhante, ko nāma so, yo etaṃ viññāṇāhāraṃ khādati vā bhuñjati vāti?
为什么他不问其他三种食,只问这一种呢?因为他执着自己“知道”。他看到人们把食物捏成一大团才吃,就认定那是段食,于是对段食生起“我知道”的执见。他又看到鹧鸪、鹌鹑、孔雀、鸡等靠与母体接触而存活,便认定“这些众生靠触食存活”,这就成了他的执见。而海龟到了合适的季节,从大海里出来,在海岸的沙中产卵,用沙盖住后又回到大海。那些卵因为忆念母亲而不腐烂,他便认定它们靠意思食存活,这就成了他的执见。这位长老虽然有这些执见,但他并不是基于这些执见来问这个问题。因为执持邪见的人就像疯子一样。好比疯子提着篮子走进街巷,不管是牛粪、石头、粪便还是食物碎屑,不管合意不合意,他都捡起来往篮子里扔。同样,执持邪见的人不管合理不合理都会问。不该责备他“你为什么问这个”,只应在他发问的地方制止他执取。因此,世尊没有说“你为什么这样问”,而是为了解除他的执取,才说“这个问题不合适”等等。巴利
Kasmā panāyaṃ itare tayo āhāre apucchitvā imameva pucchatīti? Jānāmīti laddhiyā. So hi mahante piṇḍe katvāva kabaḷīkārāhāraṃ bhuñjante passati, tenassa taṃ jānāmīti laddhi. Tittiravaṭṭakamorakukkuṭādayo pana mātusamphassena yāpente disvā ‘‘ete phassāhārena yāpentī’’ti tassa laddhi. Kacchapā pana attano utusamaye mahāsamuddato nikkhamitvā samuddatīre vālikantare aṇḍāni ṭhapetvā vālikāya paṭicchādetvā mahāsamuddameva otaranti. Tāni mātuanussaraṇavasena na pūtīni honti. Tāni manosañcetanāhārena yāpentīti tassa laddhi. Kiñcāpi therassa ayaṃ laddhi, na pana etāya laddhiyā imaṃ pañhaṃ pucchati . Diṭṭhigatiko hi ummattakasadiso. Yathā ummattako pacchiṃ gahetvā antaravīthiṃ otiṇṇo gomayampi pāsāṇampi gūthampi khajjakhaṇḍampi taṃ taṃ manāpampi amanāpampi gahetvā pacchiyaṃ pakkhipati. Evameva diṭṭhigatiko yuttampi ayuttampi pucchati. So ‘‘kasmā imaṃ pucchasī’’ti na niggahetabbo, pucchitapucchitaṭṭhāne pana gahaṇameva nisedhetabbaṃ. Teneva naṃ bhagavā ‘‘kasmā evaṃ pucchasī’’ti avatvā gahitagāhameva tassa mocetuṃ no kallo pañhotiādimāha.
在这里,“不合适”就是不相配。我说“吃”并不是说有个众生或人在吃。如果我说“吃”,那么当我这样说的时候,这个问题才算问得恰当。尊者,什么是识食?意思是:尊者,这个识食是哪种法的缘?在这种情况下,恰当的解答是:对于这样提出的问题,这个解答才相配——“识食是未来后有再生的缘”。这里,“识食”指结生心。“未来后有再生”指与那个识一同生起的名色。当那个被称为后有再生的名色生起时,就有六处,这就是它的含义。巴利
Tattha no kalloti ayutto. Āhāretīti ahaṃ na vadāmīti ahaṃ koci satto vā puggalo vā āhāretīti na vadāmi. Āhāretīti cāhaṃ vadeyyanti yadi ahaṃ āhāretīti vadeyyaṃ. Tatrassa kallo pañhoti tasmiṃ mayā evaṃ vutte ayaṃ pañho yutto bhaveyya. Kissa nu kho, bhante, viññāṇāhāroti, bhante, ayaṃ viññāṇāhāro katamassa dhammassa paccayoti attho. Tatra kallaṃ veyyākaraṇanti tasmiṃ evaṃ pucchite pañhe imaṃ veyyākaraṇaṃ yuttaṃ ‘‘viññāṇāhāro āyatiṃ punabbhavābhinibbattiyā paccayo’’ti. Ettha ca viññāṇāhāroti paṭisandhicittaṃ. Āyatiṃ punabbhavābhinibbattīti teneva viññāṇena sahuppannanāmarūpaṃ. Tasmiṃ bhūte sati saḷāyatananti tasmiṃ punabbhavābhinibbattisaṅkhāte nāmarūpe jāte sati saḷāyatanaṃ hotīti attho.
“以六处为缘而有触”:在这里,世尊也是为更进一步的问题留出空间,才结束了开示。因为持邪见的人没办法提出新的问题,只会抓住已经指出的内容来问,所以世尊给了他机会。至于所有词句的含义,都应当按前面所说的方式理解。“尊者,到底谁存在?”——他为什么不这样问呢?因为持邪见的人认为,所谓众生就是已经生起的存在,所以他不问与自己见解相冲突的问题。而且,他在很多地方已经听过“因为这个缘而有这个,因为那个缘而有那个”,已经生起了信解,所以也不问。导师心想:“这个人就算再问很多,也不会满足,只会问些空洞无意义的问题。”于是从这时起,就把开示连贯地宣说下去。“只是六”等等:从开示承接的地方开始,他抓住这一句,把开示展开来说。在这部经里,识与名色之间有一处衔接,受与爱之间有一处衔接,有与生之间有一处衔接。第二。巴利
Saḷāyatanapaccayāphassoti idhāpi bhagavā uttari pañhassa okāsaṃ dento desanaṃ niṭṭhāpesi. Diṭṭhigatiko hi navapucchaṃ uppādetuṃ na sakkoti, niddiṭṭhaṃ niddiṭṭhaṃyeva pana gaṇhitvā pucchati, tenassa bhagavā okāsaṃ adāsi. Attho panassa sabbapadesu vuttanayeneva gahetabbo. ‘‘Ko nu kho, bhante, bhavatī’’ti kasmā na pucchati? Diṭṭhigatikassa hi satto nāma bhūto nibbattoyevāti laddhi, tasmā attano laddhiviruddhaṃ idanti na pucchati. Apica idappaccayā idaṃ idappaccayā idanti bahūsu ṭhānesu kathitattā saññattiṃ upagato, tenāpi na pucchati. Satthāpi ‘‘imassa bahuṃ pucchantassāpi titti natthi, tucchapucchameva pucchatī’’ti ito paṭṭhāya desanaṃ ekābaddhaṃ katvā desesi. Channaṃ tvevāti yato paṭṭhāya desanāruḷhaṃ, tameva gahetvā desanaṃ vivaṭṭento evamāha. Imasmiṃ pana sutte viññāṇanāmarūpānaṃ antare eko sandhi, vedanātaṇhānaṃ antare eko, bhavajātīnaṃ antare ekoti. Dutiyaṃ.
《沙门婆罗门经》的注释巴利
3. Samaṇabrāhmaṇasuttavaṇṇanā
13 第十三。在第三部经中,“沙门、婆罗门”指的是那些没有能力通达诸谛的外道沙门、婆罗门。“不了知老死”等语句中:不了知老死,是就苦谛而言;不了知老死集,是指伴随渴爱而有生,生就是老死的集,是就集谛而言;不了知老死灭,是就灭谛而言;不了知趣向灭的道路,是就道谛而言。不了知生,是就苦谛而言;不了知生集,是指伴随渴爱而有有,有就是生的集,是就集谛而言。这样把集与渴爱连结起来,一切语句的含义都应依四谛来理解。“沙门义、婆罗门义”:在这里,圣道既是沙门义,也是婆罗门义。而这两者的义,应知就是指圣果。就这样,世尊在这部经中,于十一处宣说了四谛。第三。巴利
13. Tatiye samaṇā vā brāhmaṇā vāti saccāni paṭivijjhituṃ asamatthā bāhirakasamaṇabrāhmaṇā. Jarāmaraṇaṃ nappajānantītiādīsu jarāmaraṇaṃ na jānanti dukkhasaccavasena , jarāmaraṇasamudayaṃ na jānanti saha taṇhāya jāti jarāmaraṇassa samudayoti samudayasaccavasena, jarāmaraṇanirodhaṃ na jānanti nirodhasaccavasena, paṭipadaṃ na jānanti maggasaccavasena. Jātiṃ na jānanti dukkhasaccavasena, jātisamudayaṃ na jānanti saha taṇhāya bhavo jātisamudayoti samudayasaccavasena. Evaṃ saha taṇhāya samudayaṃ yojetvā sabbapadesu catusaccavasena attho veditabbo. Sāmaññatthaṃ vā brahmaññatthaṃ vāti ettha ariyamaggo sāmaññañceva brahmaññañca. Ubhayatthāpi pana attho nāma ariyaphalaṃ veditabbaṃ. Iti bhagavā imasmiṃ sutte ekādasasu ṭhānesu cattāri saccāni kathesīti. Tatiyaṃ.
《第二沙门婆罗门经》的注释巴利
4. Dutiyasamaṇabrāhmaṇasuttavaṇṇanā
14 第十四。在第四部经里,先展开说明了“这些法具体是哪些法”这一大段内容,然后针对那些有能力通达这一开示的人们的意乐,说出了“不了知这些法”等话。其余部分和前面一样。第四。巴利
14. Catutthe ime dhamme katame dhammeti ettakaṃ papañcaṃ katvā kathitaṃ, desanaṃ paṭivijjhituṃ samatthānaṃ puggalānaṃ ajjhāsayena ime dhamme nappajānantītiādi vuttaṃ. Sesaṃ purimasadisameva. Catutthaṃ.
《迦旃延族姓经》的注释巴利
5. Kaccānagottasuttavaṇṇanā
15 15. 在第五经中,“正见、正见”——智者、天与人无论在什么场合所说的如实见解,他把这一切概括成两个词来发问。“依于二者”:就是依于两个部分。“大部分”:用这个词指出除了圣者以外的其余大众。“有”:指常见。“无”:指断灭见。“世间集”:所谓世间,就是行世间,这是它的生起。“以正慧观见”:所谓正慧,就是与观相应的道慧,意思是用这种慧去观见的人。“世间中无”:在行世间中,当诸法正在生起显现时,如果认为“这些不存在”而起了断灭见,这种情况不会发生。“世间灭”:指诸行的坏灭。“世间中有”:在行世间中,当诸法正在坏灭显现时,如果认为“这些存在”而起了常见,这种情况不会发生。巴利
15. Pañcame sammādiṭṭhi sammādiṭṭhīti yaṃ paṇḍitā devamanussā tesu tesu ṭhānesu sammādassanaṃ vadanti, sabbampi taṃ dvīhi padehi saṅkhipitvā pucchati. Dvayanissitoti dve koṭṭhāse nissito. Yebhuyyenāti iminā ṭhapetvā ariyapuggale sesamahājanaṃ dasseti. Atthitanti sassataṃ. Natthitanti ucchedaṃ. Lokasamudayanti loko nāma saṅkhāraloko, tassa nibbatti. Sammappaññāya passatoti sammāpaññā nāma savipassanā maggapaññā, tāya passantassāti attho. Yā loke natthitāti saṅkhāraloke nibbattesu dhammesu paññāyantesveva yā natthīti ucchedadiṭṭhi uppajjeyya, sā na hotīti attho. Lokanirodhanti saṅkhārānaṃ bhaṅgaṃ. Yāloke atthitāti saṅkhāraloke bhijjamānesu dhammesu paññāyantesveva yā atthīti sassatadiṭṭhi uppajjeyya , sā na hotīti attho.
另外,“世间集”是指顺向的缘起模式,“世间灭”是指逆向的缘起模式。因为,当一个人观察世间的所依(即诸缘)时,他看见诸缘不灭,也就看见缘所生之法不灭;此时,那种会让他生起“什么都没有”的断灭见的想法,不会产生。同样,当一个人观察诸缘的灭尽时,他看见诸缘灭尽,也就看见缘所生之法灭尽;此时,那种会让他生起“确实存在”的常见,也不会产生。这就是这段话在这里的意思。巴利
Apica lokasamudayanti anulomapaccayākāraṃ. Lokanirodhanti paṭilomapaccayākāraṃ. Lokanissaye passantassāpi hi paccayānaṃ anucchedena paccayuppannassa anucchedaṃ passato yā natthīti ucchedadiṭṭhi uppajjeyya, sā na hoti. Paccayanirodhaṃ passantassāpi paccayanirodhena paccayuppannanirodhaṃ passato yā atthīti sassatadiṭṭhi uppajjeyya, sā na hotīti ayampettha attho.
被依著、取和执向所系缚,意思就是被依著、取和执向绑住。这里,“依著”有两种:爱依著和见依著。“取”等等也是同样的道理。因为爱和见以“这是我”“这是我的”等方式,靠近、执取三界内的诸法,所以称为“依著”。又因为它们对这些法执取不放、深深执向,所以也称为“取”和“执向”。这个世间就是被这些爱和见所系缚的。因此说“被依著、取、执向所系缚”。巴利
Upayupādānābhinivesavinibandhoti upayehi ca upādānehi ca abhinivesehi ca vinibandho. Tattha upayāti dve upayā taṇhupayo ca diṭṭhupayo ca. Upādānādīsupi eseva nayo. Taṇhādiṭṭhiyo hi yasmā ahaṃ mamantiādīhi ākārehi tebhūmakadhamme upenti upagacchanti, tasmā upayāti vuccanti. Yasmā pana te dhamme upādiyanti ceva abhinivisanti ca, tasmā upādānāti ca abhinivesāti ca vuccanti. Tāhi cāyaṃ loko vinibandho. Tenāha ‘‘upayupādānābhinivesavinibandho’’ti.
那位圣弟子对那种依著和取也是如此。心的安住处,就是心得以站稳、依靠的地方。强烈倾向与潜伏烦恼,就是变成强烈执取和潜伏状态的东西。因为不善心确实安住在贪爱和邪见里,而贪爱和邪见又对那不善心紧抓不放,并且像烦恼一样潜伏在里面,所以说这两者是心的安住处,也是强烈倾向与潜伏烦恼。不接近,就是不再靠近。不抓取,就是不再执持。不执立,就是不再认定,怎么认定呢?认为这是我的我。唯是苦,就是指除了五取蕴这一点点之外,别无其他。不疑惑,就是不会生起这样的疑惑:只有苦在生起,只有苦在灭去,这里并没有另一个可称为众生的东西。不犹豫,就是不会生起犹豫。巴利
Tañcāyanti tañca upayupādānaṃ ayaṃ ariyasāvako. Cetaso adhiṭṭhānanti cittassa patiṭṭhānabhūtaṃ. Abhinivesānusayanti abhinivesabhūtañca anusayabhūtañca. Taṇhādiṭṭhīsu hi akusalacittaṃ patiṭṭhāti, tā ca tasmiṃ abhinivisanti ceva anusenti ca, tasmā tadubhayaṃ cetaso adhiṭṭhānaṃ abhinivesānusayanti ca āha. Na upetīti na upagacchati. Na upādiyatīti na gaṇhāti. Nādhiṭṭhātīti na adhiṭṭhāti, kinti? Attā meti. Dukkhamevāti pañcupādānakkhandhamattameva. Na kaṅkhatīti ‘‘dukkhameva uppajjati, dukkhaṃ nirujjhati, na añño ettha satto nāma atthī’’ti kaṅkhaṃ na karoti. Na vicikicchatīti na vicikicchaṃ uppādeti.
不依靠他人,意思是:不是靠别人,不是靠别人证悟了才接受,在这里,完全是他自己亲证的智慧。迦旃延,到此为止就是正见。因为已经舍弃了“有众生”的想法,到这个程度,就叫做正见,这里说的是混合的正见。这是一端,意思是:这是第一种极端、低劣的边见,也就是常见。这是第二端,意思是:这是第二种极端、低劣的边见,也就是认为“一切都不存在”的断灭见。其余内容在这里都很浅显易懂。第五。巴利
Aparappaccayāti na parappaccayena, aññassa apattiyāyetvā attapaccakkhañāṇamevassa ettha hotīti. Ettāvatākho, kaccāna, sammādiṭṭhi hotīti evaṃ sattasaññāya pahīnattā ettakena sammādassanaṃ nāma hotīti missakasammādiṭṭhiṃ āha. Ayameko antoti esa eko nikūṭanto lāmakanto paṭhamakaṃ sassataṃ. Ayaṃ dutiyoti esa dutiyo sabbaṃ natthīti uppajjanakadiṭṭhisaṅkhāto nikūṭanto lāmakanto dutiyako ucchedoti attho. Sesamettha uttānamevāti. Pañcamaṃ.
《说法者经》的注释巴利
6. Dhammakathikasuttavaṇṇanā
16 第六个问题。“为了厌离”:是为了厌离的目的。“为了离贪”:是为了离染的目的。“为了灭”:是为了灭尽的目的。“是行道者”:这里应当知道,从持戒开始,一直到阿拉汉道,都称为行道者。“法随法行道者”:意思是所行的道与出世间涅槃法相随顺。“成为随法”:意思是成为随顺、相应之法。“由于厌离、离贪、灭”:即由厌离、由离贪、由灭尽。“不取着而解脱”:不执取任何一法,从四种取中完全解脱出来。“见法涅槃者”:指的是在现法中就证得涅槃的人。“值得被称说”:意思是,他堪能这样被称说,是恰如其分的、相应的。如此,这里以单一方式说明了说法者的提问,又以两种方式加以区分,开示了有学与无学的阶段。第六个问题结束。巴利
16. Chaṭṭhe nibbidāyāti nibbindanatthāya. Virāgāyāti virajjanatthāya. Nirodhāyāti nirujjhanatthāya. Paṭipanno hotīti ettha sīlato paṭṭhāya yāva arahattamaggā paṭipannoti veditabbo. Dhammānudhammappaṭipannoti lokuttarassa nibbānadhammassa anudhammabhūtaṃ paṭipadaṃ paṭipanno. Anudhammabhūtanti anurūpasabhāvabhūtaṃ. Nibbidā virāgā nirodhāti nibbidāya ceva virāgena ca nirodhena ca. Anupādā vimuttoti catūhi upādānehi kiñci dhammaṃ anupādiyitvā vimutto. Diṭṭhadhammanibbānappattoti diṭṭheva dhamme nibbānappatto. Alaṃ vacanāyāti, evaṃ vattabbataṃ arahati, yutto anucchavikoti attho . Evamettha ekena nayena dhammakathikassa pucchā kathitā, dvīhi taṃ visesetvā sekkhāsekkhabhūmiyo niddiṭṭhāti. Chaṭṭhaṃ.
《裸行者迦叶经》的注释巴利
7. Acelakassapasuttavaṇṇanā
17 17. 在第七个问题中,“裸体者迦叶”是指:从外形上看,他是个不穿衣服的裸体者;从名字上看,他叫迦叶。“从远处”:他远远地就看见了被大比丘僧团簇拥着走来的世尊。“某件事”:指某个理由、某个原因。“机会”:指回答问题时的时间、时机。“屋内”:在“我不支肘坐在屋内”这条学处里,指的是住所内部;在“我将垂下眼帘行走于屋内”这条学处里,指的是从门槛开始直到村落内部的范围。这里指的也是后者。“当你想问的时候”:就是当你想问的时候。巴利
17. Sattame acelo kassapoti liṅgena acelo niccelo, nāmena kassapo. Dūratovāti mahatā bhikkhusaṅghena parivutaṃ āgacchantaṃ dūrato eva addasa. Kiñcideva desanti kiñcideva kāraṇaṃ. Okāsanti pañhabyākaraṇassa khaṇaṃ kālaṃ. Antaragharanti ‘‘na pallatthikāya antaraghare nisīdissāmī’’ti ettha antonivesanaṃ antaragharaṃ. ‘‘Okkhittacakkhu antaraghare gamissāmī’’ti ettha indakhīlato paṭṭhāya antogāmo. Idhāpi ayameva adhippeto. Yadākaṅkhasīti yaṃ icchasi.
世尊明明想说,为什么还要一连拒绝三次呢?是为了让他们生起恭敬心。因为那些执持邪见的人,如果很快就为他们说法,他们不会生起恭敬心,反而会想:“要亲近沙门乔达摩、向他提问,也太容易了,只要一问,他马上就说法。”他们连这样的话也不会相信。可是被拒绝两三次之后,他们就会生起恭敬心,会想:“要亲近沙门乔达摩、向他提问,可真不容易啊。”这样恳请到第三次,世尊才说法时,他们就会认真听、就会相信。所以世尊知道“这个人会认真听、会相信了”,就让他们恳请三次,然后才说法。再说,就像一位医生熬油或熬糖浆时,会等着它软熟或硬熟的火候,不会错过恰到好处的时机才把药取出来。同样,世尊在等待众生智慧成熟,他知道“经过这么一段时间,这个人的智慧就会成熟”,所以才让他们恳请三次。巴利
Kasmā pana bhagavā kathetukāmo yāvatatiyaṃ paṭikkhipīti? Gāravajananatthaṃ. Diṭṭhigatikā hi khippaṃ kathiyamāne gāravaṃ na karonti, ‘‘samaṇaṃ gotamaṃ upasaṅkamitumpi pucchitumpi sukaraṃ, pucchitamatteyeva kathetī’’ti vacanampi na saddahanti. Dve tayo vāre paṭikkhitte pana gāravaṃ karonti, ‘‘samaṇaṃ gotamaṃ upasaṅkamitumpi pañhaṃ pucchitumpi dukkara’’nti yāvatatiyaṃ yācite kathiyamānaṃ sussūsanti saddahanti. Iti bhagavā ‘‘ayaṃ sussūsissati saddahissatī’’ti yāvatatiyaṃ yācāpetvā kathesi. Apica yathā bhisakko telaṃ vā phāṇitaṃ vā pacanto mudupākakharapākānaṃ pākakālaṃ āgamayamāno pākakālaṃ anatikkamitvāva otāreti. Evaṃ bhagavā sattānaṃ ñāṇaparipākaṃ āgamayamāno ‘‘ettakena kālena imassa ñāṇaṃ paripākaṃ gamissatī’’ti ñatvāva yāvatatiyaṃ yācāpesi.
“不要这样说,迦叶!”——迦叶,你不该这样说。因为说“苦是自己造的”是不对的,这其实是在表明:并没有什么所谓的“我”在造作苦。对“是别人造的”这种说法,道理也是一样。“无因生”是指没有原因、随随便便就生起的。被这样问了之后,他为什么还这么说呢?据说他心里是这样想的:“我问他‘苦是自己造的吗’这些问题时,他却说‘不要这样说’;我说‘没有’时,他又说‘有’;我问‘难道乔达摩尊师不知不见苦吗’,他又说‘我确实知道’。是不是我问的方式有什么不对?”于是他从头到尾检讨自己的提问,就这样说了。“请为我解说,尊者!世尊!”——这里,迦叶对导师生起了恭敬心,所以不再称“尊师”,而称“世尊”。巴利
Mā hevaṃ, kassapāti, kassapa, mā evaṃ bhaṇi. Sayaṃkataṃ dukkhanti hi vattuṃ na vaṭṭati, attā nāma koci dukkhassa kārako natthīti dīpeti. Paratopi eseva nayo. Adhiccasamuppannanti akāraṇena yadicchāya uppannaṃ. Iti puṭṭho samānoti kasmā evamāha? Evaṃ kirassa ahosi – ‘‘ayaṃ ‘sayaṃkataṃ dukkha’ntiādinā puṭṭho ‘mā heva’nti vadati, ‘natthī’ti puṭṭho ‘atthī’ti vadati. ‘Bhavaṃ gotamo dukkhaṃ na jānāti na passatī’ti puṭṭho ‘jānāmi khvāha’nti vadati. Kiñci nu kho mayā virajjhitvā pucchito’’ti mūlato paṭṭhāya attano pucchameva sodhento evamāha. Ācikkhatu ca me, bhante, bhagavāti idha satthari sañjātagāravo ‘‘bhava’’nti avatvā ‘‘bhagavā’’ti vadati.
“他造作”等这些话,是为了否定“苦是自己所造”这种见解而说的。这里“sato”这个词形式上虽然是属格,表达的却是处格的意思,所以应该这样理解:他造作,他感受——迦叶,正因为一开始就有这种说法,后来才形成了“苦是自己所造”这种见解。这里说的“苦”,指的是轮回之苦。而“这样说”中的“这样”,和前文的“等”以及紧跟着的“常见”一词相关联。“宣示、执取”是这里需要补上的省略成分。这段话的意思是:如果这样说,那从一开始就宣示常见、执取常见。为什么?因为这种见解会让人把造作者和感受者执为同一个,于是就落入了常见。巴利
So karotītiādi, ‘‘sayaṃkataṃ dukkha’’nti laddhiyā paṭisedhanatthaṃ vuttaṃ. Ettha ca satoti idaṃ bhummatthe sāmivacanaṃ, tasmā evamattho daṭṭhabbo – so karoti so paṭisaṃvedayatīti kho, kassapa, ādimhiyeva evaṃ sati pacchā sayaṃkataṃ dukkhanti ayaṃ laddhi hoti. Ettha ca dukkhanti vaṭṭadukkhaṃ adhippetaṃ. Iti vadanti etassa purimena ādisaddena anantarena ca sassatasaddena sambandho hoti. ‘‘Dīpeti gaṇhātī’’ti ayaṃ panettha pāṭhaseso. Idañhi vuttaṃ hoti – iti evaṃ vadanto āditova sassataṃ dīpeti, sassataṃ gaṇhāti. Kasmā? Tassa hi taṃ dassanaṃ etaṃ pareti, kārakañca vedakañca ekameva gaṇhantaṃ etaṃ sassataṃ upagacchatīti attho.
“他人造作”等语,则是为了否定“苦是他人所造”这一主张而说的。“从最初就存在”这一句,在这里也应当一并引用过来。这里的意思是:迦叶,如果从一开始就认定“一个人造作,另一个人感受”,那么后来就会生起这样的断灭见——“造作者就在这里断灭了,他所造的业由另一个人来感受”。当一个人被与这种断灭见相应的感受所击中、所刺透时,就会形成“苦是他人所造”的主张。至于“如此说”等语,应按前面所说的方式连接理解。这里的连接是:这样说的同时,从一开始就在显示断灭、执取断灭。为什么?因为那种见解会让人走向这个结论,也就是落入断灭见。巴利
Añño karotītiādi pana ‘‘paraṃkataṃ dukkha’’nti laddhiyā paṭisedhanatthaṃ vuttaṃ. ‘‘Ādito sato’’ti idaṃ pana idhāpi āharitabbaṃ. Ayañhettha attho – añño karoti añño paṭisaṃvediyatīti kho pana, kassapa, ādimhiyeva evaṃ sati, pacchā ‘‘kārako idheva ucchijjati, tena kataṃ añño paṭisaṃvediyatī’’ti evaṃ uppannāya ucchedadiṭṭhiyā saddhiṃ sampayuttāya vedanāya abhitunnassa viddhassa sato ‘‘paraṃkataṃ dukkha’’nti ayaṃ laddhi hotīti. Iti vadantiādi vuttanayeneva yojetabbaṃ. Tatrāyaṃ yojanā – evañca vadanto āditova ucchedaṃ dīpeti, ucchedaṃ gaṇhāti. Kasmā? Tassa hi taṃ dassanaṃ etaṃ pareti, etaṃ ucchedaṃ upagacchatīti attho.
“这二者”就是指被称为常见和断灭见的两种极端。如来不靠近、不执取这两种极端,而是舍离它们、不黏着它们,站在中道来说法,也就是依中道而说法。若问:说的是什么法?就是“无明缘行”等。这里,如来是从因来显示果,也通过因的息灭来说明果的息灭,完全没有指出任何造作者或感受者。到这里,其余的问题就都被否定了。要知道,正是用“不靠近两种极端”这句话,否定了第三个问题;而用“无明缘行”这一说明,否定了无因生和不知的主张。巴利
Ete teti ye sassatucchedasaṅkhāte ubho ante (anupagamma tathāgato dhammaṃ deseti, ete te, kassapa, ubho ante) anupagamma pahāya anallīyitvā majjhena tathāgato dhammaṃ deseti, majjhimāya paṭipadāya ṭhito desetīti attho. Kataraṃ dhammanti ce? Yadidaṃ avijjāpaccayā saṅkhārāti. Ettha hi kāraṇato phalaṃ, kāraṇanirodhena cassa nirodho dīpito, na koci kārako vā vedako vā niddiṭṭho. Ettāvatā sesapañhā paṭisedhitā honti. Ubho ante anupagammāti iminā hi tatiyapañho paṭikkhitto. Avijjāpaccayā saṅkhārāti iminā adhiccasamuppannatā ceva ajānanañca paṭikkhittanti veditabbaṃ.
“愿我得到”这句话,是他渴望在世尊身边获得比丘身份时说的。当时,世尊依据《犍度》中制定的外道别住规定——凡是先前是外道的人,处在沙弥阶段时,要这样领受并别住:“尊者,我叫某某,先前是外道,如今在这个法和律中想求受具足戒。尊者,我向僧团请求四个月的别住。”——世尊就是针对这个规定,才说了“迦叶,凡是先前是外道的人……”这段话。这里说“出家”,只是顺着语言表达的习惯来说的。实际上,不经过别住也能出家。但想受具足戒的人,在圆满履行八项义务期间,不能过早进入村落等地,然后才能别住。“心已发起”,是指因为圆满履行了八项义务而心生欢喜。这是这里的简要说明。详细来说,这个外道别住,应当依照《一切善见》律注中《出家犍度》注释里所说的方法来理解。巴利
Labheyyanti idaṃ so bhagavato santike bhikkhubhāvaṃ patthayamāno āha. Atha bhagavā yonena khandhake titthiyaparivāso (mahāva. 86) paññatto, yaṃ aññatitthiyapubbo sāmaṇerabhūmiyaṃ ṭhito ‘‘ahaṃ, bhante, itthannāmo aññatitthiyapubbo imasmiṃ dhammavinaye ākaṅkhāmi upasampadaṃ. Svāhaṃ, bhante, saṅghaṃ cattāro māse parivāsaṃ yācāmī’’tiādinā nayena samādiyitvā parivasati, taṃ sandhāya yo kho, kassapa, aññatitthiyapubbotiādimāha. Tattha pabbajjanti vacanasiliṭṭhatāvasena vuttaṃ. Aparivasitvāyeva hi pabbajjaṃ labhati. Upasampadatthikena pana nātikālena gāmappavesanādīni aṭṭha vattāni pūrentena parivasitabbaṃ. Āraddhacittāti aṭṭhavattapūraṇena tuṭṭhacittā. Ayamettha saṅkhepo, vitthārato panesa titthiyaparivāso samantapāsādikāya vinayaṭṭhakathāya pabbajjakkhandhakavaṇṇanāyaṃ (mahāva. aṭṭha. 86) vuttanayeneva veditabbo.
另外,这里经文写作“apica mayā”(还有,我……),在其他地方则写作“apica mettha”(还有,我在这里……)。“了知人之差别”,就是了知个人的种种不同。这是在显示:“此人是应受别住的,此人是不应受别住的”——这一点对我而言是清楚明白的。于是迦叶心想:“啊,真是奇妙啊,佛陀的教法!在这里,经过这样反复研磨、推敲,只取合适的,舍弃不合适的。”因此,他对出家产生了更强的意欲,便说:“若蒙允许,尊者……”等等。那时,世尊知道他的意愿非常强烈,也知道迦叶其实不需要别住,就叫来一位比丘:“去吧,比丘,为迦叶沐浴、剃度,让他出家,然后带他来。”那位比丘照办,为他剃度出家后,带他来到世尊面前。世尊在僧众中坐下,为他授具足戒。因此经中说:“裸形者迦叶确实在世尊座下出家,确实得到具足戒。”至于“受具足戒不久……”等剩余内容,就如《婆罗门相应》(相应部1.187)中所说。第七。巴利
Apica mayāti ayamettha pāṭho, aññattha pana ‘‘apica metthā’’ti. Puggalavemattatā viditāti puggalanānattaṃ viditaṃ. ‘‘Ayaṃ puggalo parivāsāraho, ayaṃ na parivāsāraho’’ti idaṃ mayhaṃ pākaṭanti dasseti. Tato kassapo cintesi – ‘‘aho acchariyaṃ buddhasāsanaṃ, yattha evaṃ ghaṃsitvā koṭṭetvā yuttameva gaṇhanti, ayuttaṃ chaḍḍentī’’ti. Tato suṭṭhutaraṃ pabbajjāya sañjātussāho sace, bhantetiādimāha. Atha bhagavā tassa tibbacchandataṃ viditvā ‘‘na kassapo parivāsaṃ arahatī’’ti aññataraṃ bhikkhuṃ āmantesi – ‘‘gaccha, bhikkhu, kassapaṃ nahāpetvā pabbājetvā ānehī’’ti. So tathā katvā taṃ pabbājetvā bhagavato santikaṃ agamāsi. Bhagavā gaṇe nisīditvā upasampādesi. Tena vuttaṃ alattha kho acelo kassapo bhagavato santike pabbajjaṃ, alattha upasampadanti. Acirūpasampannotiādi sesaṃ brāhmaṇasaṃyutte (saṃ. ni. 1.187) vuttamevāti. Sattamaṃ.
第八 丁跋路迦经的注释巴利
8. Timbarukasuttavaṇṇanā
18 在第八经里,“那受”等话,是为了否定“苦乐是自作”这种见解而说的。这里“sato”这个词,形式上虽然是属格,但意思其实是处格。对此可以这样说明:丁跋路迦,如果一开始就认为“那受,就是那感受者”,那么“苦乐是自作”这种见解就会产生。因为这样一来,受就成了由受自己所造作的。而这样说的人,等于承认这个受在过去也已经存在,也就是在宣扬常见、执取常见。为什么呢?因为他那种见解就是“这是恒常的”,也就是落入常见的意思。其实世尊这句话应该是针对前面那种观点说的,所以注释书里把它这样连接起来,才说明了它的意思。“我不这样说”,意思是:我不说“那受就是那感受者”,也不说“苦乐是自作”。巴利
18. Aṭṭhame sā vedanātiādi ‘‘sayaṃkataṃ sukhadukkha’’nti laddhiyā nisedhanatthaṃ vuttaṃ. Etthāpi satoti bhummattheyeva sāmivacanaṃ. Tatrāyaṃ atthadīpanā – ‘‘sā vedanā, so vediyatī’’ti kho, timbaruka, ādimhiyeva evaṃ sati ‘‘sayaṃkataṃ sukhadukkha’’nti ayaṃ laddhi hoti. Evañhi sati vedanāya eva vedanā katā hoti. Evañca vadanto imissā vedanāya pubbepi atthitaṃ anujānāti, sassataṃ dīpeti sassataṃ gaṇhāti. Kasmā? Tassa hi taṃ dassanaṃ etaṃ pareti, etaṃ sassataṃ upagacchatīti attho. Purimañhi atthaṃ sandhāyevetaṃ bhagavatā vuttaṃ bhavissati, tasmā aṭṭhakathāyaṃ taṃ yojetvāvassa attho dīpito. Evampāhaṃ na vadāmīti ahaṃ ‘‘sā vedanā, so vediyatī’’ti evampi na vadāmi. ‘‘Sayaṃkataṃ sukhadukkha’’nti evampi na vadāmīti attho.
“受是一者,感受者是另一者”这类说法,是为了否定“苦乐是他作”这一见解而说的。这里也应这样理解其义:丁跋路迦,如果一开始就认为“受是一者,感受者是另一者”,那么先前那一方作为造作者的受就已经断灭了。然而,认为“由它所造的,由另一者感受”,这样生起的断见与相应、结合的受所击中的人,就会产生“苦乐是他作”的见解。这样说的人,其实是在显示造作者已断灭,而由另一者执取了结生,也就是在宣说断灭、执取断灭。为什么呢?因为他的这种见解就是“这是其他”,意思是他趋入了这种断灭。这里这些文句也是从注释书中引出来加以连缀解释的。这部经讲的是与受相关的苦乐,而这里所说的苦乐,只适用于异熟果报的苦乐。第八。巴利
Aññā vedanātiādi ‘‘paraṃkataṃ sukhadukkha’’nti laddhiyā paṭisedhanatthaṃ vuttaṃ. Idhāpi ayaṃ atthayojanā –‘‘aññā vedanā añño vediyatī’’ti kho, timbaruka, ādimhiyeva evaṃ sati pacchā yā purimapakkhe kārakavedanā, sā ucchinnā. Tāya pana kataṃ añño vediyatīti evaṃ uppannāya ucchedadiṭṭhiyā saddhiṃ sampayuttāya vedanāya abhitunnassa sato ‘‘paraṃkataṃ sukhadukkha’’nti ayaṃ laddhi hoti. Evañca vadanto kārako ucchinno, aññena paṭisandhi gahitāti ucchedaṃ dīpeti, ucchedaṃ gaṇhāti. Kasmā? Tassa hi taṃ dassanaṃ etaṃ pareti, etaṃ ucchedaṃ upagacchatīti attho. Idhāpi hi imāni padāni aṭṭhakathāyaṃ āharitvā yojitāneva. Imasmiṃ sutte vedanāsukhadukkhaṃ kathitaṃ. Tañca kho vipākasukhadukkhameva vaṭṭatīti vuttaṃ. Aṭṭhamaṃ.
第九 愚者与智者经的注释巴利
9. Bālapaṇḍitasuttavaṇṇanā
19 19. 在第九个部分里,“被无明所障碍”指的是被无明挡住。“这个身体就是这样产生的”——意思是说,这个身体之所以能生成,正是因为被无明挡住、又和渴爱结合在一起。“而且这个身体”说的是他自己这个有意识的身体;“以及外在的名色”说的是外面其他众生的有意识的身体。自己这边和别人那边,这层意思都应该通过五蕴和六处来说明。所以“这就是所谓的二法”,意思是:这样就成了两种东西。“因为依赖这二法,触才生起”——在其他地方,是依据眼和色等两种东西来说眼触等,但在这里,指的是内在的处和外在的处。据说这就叫“大二法”。“就是六触处”,意思是这六处就是触的处所,也就是触的因缘。“被那些所触”——是指被由这些作为因缘的处所生起的触所接触。“由其中任何一种”——在这里,应该理解为从圆满的意义上说的“任何一种”。“在此”——是指在愚者和智者的身体如何产生等这个话题上。“什么是过分的努力”——就是问:怎样的用功才算过度。巴利
19. Navame avijjānīvaraṇassāti avijjāya nivāritassa. Evamayaṃ kāyo samudāgatoti evaṃ avijjāya nivāritattā taṇhāya ca sampayuttattāyeva ayaṃ kāyo nibbatto. Ayañceva kāyoti ayañcassa attano saviññāṇako kāyo. Bahiddhā ca nāmarūpanti bahiddhā ca paresaṃ saviññāṇako kāyo. Attano ca parassa ca pañcahi khandhehi chahi āyatanehi cāpi ayaṃ attho dīpetabbova. Itthetaṃ dvayanti evametaṃ dvayaṃ. Dvayaṃ paṭicca phassoti aññattha cakkhurūpādīni dvayāni paṭicca cakkhusamphassādayo vuttā, idha pana ajjhattikabāhirāni āyatanāni. Mahādvayaṃ nāma kiretaṃ. Saḷevāyatanānīti saḷeva phassāyatanāni phassakāraṇāni. Yehi phuṭṭhoti yehi kāraṇabhūtehi āyatanehi uppannena phassena phuṭṭho. Aññatarenāti ettha paripuṇṇavasena aññataratā veditabbā. Tatrāti tasmiṃ bālapaṇḍitānaṃ kāyanibbattanādimhi. Ko adhippayāsoti ko adhikapayogo.
“以世尊为根本”的意思是:世尊是这些法的根本,所以这些法就是“以世尊为根本”。这里说的是:尊者,我们这些法,过去是由迦叶正自觉者所生起的。那位佛般涅槃之后,在整整一个佛与佛之间的空档期里,没有哪个沙门或婆罗门有能力生起这些法。而这些法,是世尊为我们生起的。我们正是依靠世尊,才能了知、证悟这些法。所以,尊者,我们的这些法是“以世尊为根本”。
“以世尊为导引者”的意思是:世尊是诸法的引导者、调御者、善巧的带领者,他如实按照每一法各自的特性,一一取它的名称并指示出来。因此,这些法就叫作“以世尊为导引者”。
“以世尊为依止处”的意思是:四地的法在进入一切知智的领域时,就依止于世尊,所以叫“以世尊为依止处”。“依止”就是汇聚、融入的意思。另外还有一种说法:当世尊坐在大菩提树下时,以证悟的力量,触来到他面前,好像在问:“世尊,我叫什么名字?”世尊说:“你以接触为义,所以叫触。”受、想、行、识也各自来到他面前,问:“世尊,我叫什么名字?”世尊说:“你了别为义,所以叫识。”就这样,世尊为四地的法,如实按照每一法各自的特性,一一取它的名称,所以世尊依止于诸法,这些法也就叫“以世尊为依止处”。
“愿世尊为我们阐明”的意思是:愿世尊亲自为我们显现这段开示的义理,请您为我们讲解开示,不必由我们自己来说。巴利
Bhagavaṃmūlakāti bhagavā mūlaṃ etesanti bhagavaṃmūlakā. Idaṃ vuttaṃ hoti – ime, bhante, amhākaṃ dhammā pubbe kassapasammāsambuddhena uppāditā, tasmiṃ parinibbute ekaṃ buddhantaraṃ añño samaṇo vā brāhmaṇo vā ime dhamme uppādetuṃ samattho nāma nāhosi, bhagavatā pana no ime dhammā uppāditā. Bhagavantañhi nissāya mayaṃ ime dhamme ājānāma paṭivijjhāmāti evaṃ bhagavaṃmūlakā no, bhante, dhammāti. Bhagavaṃnettikāti bhagavā hi dhammānaṃ netā vinetā anunetā, yathāsabhāvato pāṭiyekkaṃ pāṭiyekkaṃ nāmaṃ gahetvā dassetāti dhammā bhagavaṃnettikā nāma honti. Bhagavaṃpaṭisaraṇāti catubhūmakadhammā sabbaññutaññāṇassa āpāthaṃ āgacchamānā bhagavati paṭisaranti nāmāti bhagavaṃpaṭisaraṇā. Paṭisarantīti samosaranti. Apica mahābodhimaṇḍe nisinnassa bhagavato paṭivedhavasena phasso āgacchati ‘‘ahaṃ bhagavā kinnāmo’’ti? Tvaṃ phusanaṭṭhena phasso nāma. Vedanā, saññā, saṅkhārā, viññāṇaṃ āgacchati ‘‘ahaṃ bhagavā kinnāma’’nti, tvaṃ vijānanaṭṭhena viññāṇaṃ nāmāti evaṃ catubhūmakadhammānaṃ yathāsabhāvato pāṭiyekkaṃ pāṭiyekkaṃ nāmaṃ gaṇhanto bhagavā dhamme paṭisaratīti bhagavaṃpaṭisaraṇā. Bhagavantaṃyeva paṭibhātūti bhagavatova etassa bhāsitassa attho upaṭṭhātu, tumheyeva no kathetvā dethāti attho.
这里说“那也就是无明”:虽然那无明和渴爱在推动业、牵引结生之后就已经灭了,但就像人们今天还会说“昨天喝的药,今天吃的还是那顿饭”一样,因为前后相似,所以仍然用“那”来指称。这里也是一样,因为相似,所以说“那也就是无明,那也就是渴爱”。“梵行”:指道梵行。“为了苦的灭尽”:为了灭尽轮回之苦。“成为有身的托负者”:指还会进入另一个结生之身。 “也就是所谓的梵行住”:指安住于道梵行,以此显示贤者相对于愚者的优胜。这样,在这部经中,所有还会结生的凡夫都被称为“愚者”,不再结生的漏尽者被称为“贤者”。至于入流者、一来者、不来者,既不能说他们是“贤者”,也不能说他们是“愚者”,不过他们亲近贤者一方,就归属于贤者一边。第九。巴利
Sāceva avijjāti ettha kiñcāpi sā avijjā ca taṇhā ca kammaṃ javāpetvā paṭisandhiṃ ākaḍḍhitvā niruddhā, yathā pana ajjāpi yaṃ hiyyo bhesajjaṃ pītaṃ, tadeva bhojanaṃ bhuñjāti sarikkhakattena tadevāti vuccati, evamidhāpi sā ceva avijjā sā ca taṇhāti idampi sarikkhakattena vuttaṃ. Brahmacariyanti maggabrahmacariyaṃ. Dukkhakkhayāyāti vaṭṭadukkhassa khayatthāya. Kāyūpago hotīti aññaṃ paṭisandhikāyaṃ upagantā hoti. Yadidaṃ brahmacariyavāsoti yo ayaṃ maggabrahmacariyavāso, ayaṃ bālato paṇḍitassa visesoti dasseti. Iti imasmiṃ sutte sabbopi sapaṭisandhiko puthujjano ‘‘bālo’’ti, appaṭisandhiko khīṇāsavo ‘‘paṇḍito’’ti vutto. Sotāpannasakadāgāmianāgāmino pana ‘‘paṇḍitā’’ti vā ‘‘bālā’’ti vā na vattabbā, bhajamānā pana paṇḍitapakkhaṃ bhajanti. Navamaṃ.
第10篇 《缘经》的注释巴利
10. Paccayasuttavaṇṇanā
20 第20段。导师在这部经里说“比丘们,我要为你们讲说缘起,也要讲说缘所生之法”,这是同时着手讲两方面:缘,以及从缘生起的自性之法。“无论如来们出现与否”——即使如来出现,即使诸佛出现或不出现,生就是老死的缘,生本身就是老死的缘。“那界就是安住的”——那个缘的自性就是安住的,生在任何时候都不可能不是老死的缘。“法住性、法定性”这两个词,说的也只是缘本身。因为缘所生的诸法依靠缘而安住,所以缘本身被称为“法住性”。缘决定诸法,所以被称为“法定性”。“此缘性”——这些老死等的缘就是此缘,此缘本身就是此缘性。那(缘)就是那个缘。正觉,即以智慧正觉。现观,即以智慧现观。说,即讲述。示,即显示。施设,即令人知晓。安立,即安置于智慧的门前。开阐,即打开后显示。分别,即从各方面显示。令明了,即使之清楚明显。并且说“看吧”,即说“你们看”。怎样呢?比丘们,以生为缘而有老死等。巴利
20. Dasame paṭiccasamuppādañca vo bhikkhave, desessāmi paṭiccasamuppanne ca dhammeti satthā imasmiṃ sutte paccaye ca paccayanibbatte ca sabhāvadhamme desessāmīti ubhayaṃ ārabhi. Uppādā vā tathāgatānanti tathāgatānaṃ uppādepi, buddhesu uppannesu anuppannesupi jātipaccayā jarāmaraṇaṃ, jātiyeva jarāmaraṇassa paccayo. Ṭhitāva sā dhātūti ṭhitova so paccayasabhāvo, na kadāci jāti jarāmaraṇassa paccayo na hoti. Dhammaṭṭhitatā dhammaniyāmatāti imehipi dvīhi paccayameva katheti. Paccayena hi paccayuppannā dhammā tiṭṭhanti, tasmā paccayova ‘‘dhammaṭṭhitatā’’ti vuccati. Paccayo dhamme niyameti, tasmā ‘‘dhammaniyāmatā’’ti vuccati. Idappaccayatāti imesaṃ jarāmaraṇādīnaṃ paccayā idappaccayā, idappaccayāva idappaccayatā. Tanti taṃ paccayaṃ. Abhisambujjhatīti ñāṇena abhisambujjhati. Abhisametīti ñāṇena abhisamāgacchati. Ācikkhatīti katheti. Desetīti dasseti. Paññāpetīti jānāpeti. Paṭṭhapetīti ñāṇamukhe ṭhapeti. Vivaratīti vivaritvā dasseti. Vibhajatīti vibhāgato dasseti. Uttānīkarotīti pākaṭaṃ karoti. Passathāti cāhāti passatha iti ca vadati. Kinti? Jātipaccayā, bhikkhave, jarāmaraṇantiādi.
“诸比丘,如是”的意思是:比丘们,就是这样。“彼处所有”指的是在“以生为缘而有老死”等语句中所说的那些。“如性”等词,都是缘相本身的同义词。因为每一种法都是依靠那些不多不少、恰好如此的诸缘而生起,所以叫“如性”;当诸缘聚合时,由它们所产生的法即便是一刹那也绝不会不产生,所以叫“不虚如性”;不会由其他法的缘生起另一种法,所以叫“不异如性”;又因为它是老死等的缘,或者是诸缘的集合,所以叫“此缘性”。这里的词义是:这些法的缘就是“此缘”,“此缘”本身就是“此缘性”;或者说,这众多缘的集合就是“此缘性”。不过,这里的特征应当依据声论书来了解。巴利
Itikho, bhikkhaveti evaṃ kho, bhikkhave. Yā tatrāti yā tesu ‘‘jātipaccayā jarāmaraṇa’’ntiādīsu. Tathatātiādīni paccayākārasseva vevacanāni. So tehi tehi paccayehi anūnādhikeheva tassa tassa dhammassa sambhavato tathatāti, sāmaggiṃ upagatesu paccayesu muhuttampi tato nibbattānaṃ dhammānaṃ asambhavābhāvato avitathatāti, aññadhammapaccayehi aññadhammānuppattito anaññathatāti, jarāmaraṇādīnaṃ paccayato vā paccayasamūhato vā idappaccayatāti vutto. Tatrāyaṃ vacanattho – imesaṃ paccayā idappaccayā, idappaccayā eva idappaccayatā, idappaccayānaṃ vā samūho idappaccayatā. Lakkhaṇaṃ panettha saddasatthato veditabbaṃ.
无常,是从“曾经存在而后消失”这个意义上说的。这里说的无常,并不是老死本身叫无常,而是因为具有无常性质的诸蕴有老死,所以才叫作无常。有为等词也是同样的道理。这里的有为,是指由各种缘聚合而成;缘生,是指依靠缘而生起;灭法,是指具有坏灭的性质;衰灭法,是指具有消散的性质;离染法,是指具有离染的性质;寂灭法,是指具有息灭的性质。对于生,也应当按前面所说的方式来了知无常性。再者,因为能生的诸缘在发挥作用的当下就能被观察到,所以从这一角度来说,这里用无常等词也是说得通的。有等也是同样,它们本身就具有无常等性质。巴利
Aniccanti hutvā abhāvaṭṭhena aniccaṃ. Ettha ca aniccanti na jarāmaraṇaṃ aniccaṃ, aniccasabhāvānaṃ pana khandhānaṃ jarāmaraṇattā aniccaṃ nāma jātaṃ. Saṅkhatādīsupi eseva nayo. Ettha ca saṅkhatanti paccayehi samāgantvā kataṃ. Paṭiccasamuppannanti paccaye nissāya uppannaṃ. Khayadhammanti khayasabhāvaṃ. Vayadhammanti vigacchanakasabhāvaṃ. Virāgadhammanti virajjanakasabhāvaṃ. Nirodhadhammanti nirujjhanakasabhāvaṃ. Jātiyāpi vuttanayeneva aniccatā veditabbā. Janakapaccayānaṃ vā kiccānubhāvakkhaṇe diṭṭhattā ekena pariyāyenettha aniccātiādīni yujjantiyeva. Bhavādayo aniccādisabhāvāyeva.
以正慧:就是与观相应的道慧。前际:就是过去,意思是过去的时间。在“我曾经存在吗?我不曾存在吗?”这些问题里,他是依于常见和无因生的观念,对过去自己的存在与不存在生起疑惑。至于“是什么原因”,这不必说,愚痴的凡夫就像疯子一样,怎么想就怎么说。“我曾经是什么?”他是依于出身、性别、投生处,疑惑“我曾经是刹帝利吗?还是婆罗门、吠舍、首陀罗、在家者、出家者、天人、人当中的某一种?”“我曾经是怎样的?”他是依于形态相貌,疑惑“我曾经是高的吗?还是矮的、白的、黑的、有限的、无限的等等当中的某一种?”也有人依于自在天创造等,疑惑“我曾经是由什么原因而有的?”也就是从原因上起疑。“成为什么之后,又成为什么?”他是依于出身等,对自己的相续疑惑“成为刹帝利之后,又成为婆罗门吗?……成为天人之后,又成为人吗?”在所有这些地方,“时”都是指时间。“后际”就是未来的尽头。“我将来会有吗?没有吗?”他是依于常见和断灭见,对未来自己的存在与不存在生疑。这里其余的内容,也应当按前面所说的方式来理解。巴利
Sammappaññāyāti savipassanāya maggapaññāya. Pubbantanti purimaṃ atītanti attho. Ahosiṃ nu khotiādīsu ‘‘ahosiṃ nu kho nanu kho’’ti sassatākārañca adhiccasamuppattiākārañca nissāya atīte attano vijjamānatañca avijjamānatañca kaṅkhati. Kiṃ kāraṇanti na vattabbaṃ, ummattako viya bālaputhujjano yathā vā tathā vā pavattati. Kiṃ nu kho ahosinti jātiliṅgupapattiyo nissāya ‘‘khattiyo nu kho ahosiṃ, brāhmaṇavessasuddagahaṭṭhapabbajitadevamanussānaṃ aññataro’’ti kaṅkhati. Kathaṃ nu khoti saṇṭhānākāraṃ nissāya ‘‘dīgho nu kho ahosiṃ rassaodātakaṇhapamāṇikaappamāṇikādīnaṃ aññataro’’ti kaṅkhati. Keci pana ‘‘issaranimmānādīni nissāya ‘kena nu kho kāraṇena ahosi’nti hetuto kaṅkhatī’’ti vadanti. Kiṃ hutvā kiṃ ahosinti jātiādīni nissāya ‘‘khattiyo hutvā nu kho brāhmaṇo ahosiṃ…pe… devo hutvā manusso’’ti attano paramparaṃ kaṅkhati. Sabbattheva pana addhānanti kālādhivacanametaṃ. Aparantanti anāgataṃ antaṃ. Bhavissāmi nu kho nanu khoti sassatākārañca ucchedākārañca nissāya anāgate attano vijjamānatañca avijjamānatañca kaṅkhati. Sesamettha vuttanayameva.
所谓“现在时”,就是指从结生开始直到死亡为止的整个当下时间。在自身之中生起犹豫,就是对自己的诸蕴生起疑惑。他会怀疑自己的存在:“我究竟存在吗?”这合不合适呢?合不合适,这有什么好想的呢?这里还可以举一个例子:据说,小母的儿子是剃了头的,大母的儿子没有剃头。人们给那个孩子剃了头,他起来后心想:“我是小母的儿子吗?”这样就有了“我存在吗?”的疑惑。“我不存在吗?”就是对自己的不存在生疑。关于这一点也有一个例子:据说有个人在抓鱼时,因为在水里站久了,自己的大腿变冷了,他以为那是鱼,就打了一下。另一个人在坟场旁边看守田地,因为害怕而蜷缩着睡觉,醒来后把自己的两个膝盖当成了两个夜叉,就打了一下。这样就有了“我不存在吗?”的疑惑。巴利
Etarahivā paccuppannaṃ addhānanti idāni vā paṭisandhimādiṃ katvā cutipariyantaṃ sabbampi vattamānakālaṃ gahetvā. Ajjhattaṃ kathaṃkathī bhavissatīti attano khandhesu vicikicchī bhavissati. Ahaṃ nu khosmīti attano atthibhāvaṃ kaṅkhati. Yuttaṃ panetanti? Yuttaṃ ayuttanti kā ettha cintā. Apicettha idaṃ vatthumpi udāharanti – cūḷamātāya kira putto muṇḍo, mahāmātāya putto amuṇḍo, taṃ puttaṃ muṇḍesuṃ, so uṭṭhāya ‘‘ahaṃ nu kho cūḷamātāya putto’’ti cintesi. Evaṃ ahaṃ nu khosmīti kaṅkhā hoti. No nu khosmīti attano natthibhāvaṃ kaṅkhati. Tatrāpi idaṃ vatthu – eko kira macche gaṇhanto udake ciraṭṭhānena sītibhūtaṃ attano ūruṃ macchoti cintetvā pahari. Aparo susānapasse khettaṃ rakkhanto bhīto saṅkuṭito sayi, so paṭibujjhitvā attano jaṇṇukāni dve yakkhāti cintetvā pahari. Evaṃ no nu khosmīti kaṅkhati.
“我到底是什么?”明明自己是刹帝利,却对自己的刹帝利身份产生怀疑。其余几种身份也是这样。不过,身为天人却不知道自己是天人,这是不可能的;但他还是会以“我是有色的吗?还是无色的呢?”这样的方式产生怀疑。为什么刹帝利等不知道自己的身份呢?因为他们投生到各种不同的家族中,这不是现量可知的。在家人像布商等人,会误以为自己是出家人;出家人也会以“我的戒是不是破了?”这样的方式,误以为自己是在家人。人们也会像国王那样,对自己生起“我是天人”的想法。“我到底是什么?”如前所说。这里有人执取内在有个命我,依它的形态相貌而怀疑:“我是长的吗?短的?四方的?六方的?八方的?十六方的?还是其他某种形态?”应当知道,这就是“我到底是什么?”的怀疑。不过,没有人不知道当下身体的形态。“他从哪里来?将往哪里去?”就是对有身的来处和去处产生怀疑,这样来怀疑。圣弟子,这里指的是入流者,其余三种圣者也不在此障碍之列。第十。巴利
Kiṃ nu khosmīti khattiyova samāno attano khattiyabhāvaṃ kaṅkhati. Eseva nayo sesesupi. Devo pana samāno devabhāvaṃ ajānanto nāma natthi, sopi pana ‘‘ahaṃ rūpī nu kho arūpī nu kho’’tiādinā nayena kaṅkhati. Khattiyādayo kasmā na jānantīti ce? Apaccakkhā tesaṃ tattha tattha kule uppatti. Gahaṭṭhāpi ca potthalikādayo pabbajitasaññino, pabbajitāpi ‘‘kuppaṃ nu kho me kamma’’ntiādinā nayena gahaṭṭhasaññino. Manussāpi ca rājāno viya attani devasaññino honti. Kathaṃ nu khosmīti vuttanayameva. Kevalañhettha abbhantare jīvo nāma atthīti gahetvā tassa saṇṭhānākāraṃ nissāya ‘‘dīgho nu khosmi rassacaturassachaḷaṃsaaṭṭhaṃsasoḷasaṃsādīnaṃ aññatarappakāro’’ti kaṅkhanto kathaṃ nu khosmīti? Kaṅkhatīti veditabbo. Sarīrasaṇṭhānaṃ pana paccuppannaṃ ajānanto nāma natthi. Kuto āgato so kuhiṃ gāmī bhavissatīti attabhāvassa āgatigatiṭṭhānaṃ kaṅkhanto evaṃ kaṅkhati. Ariyasāvakassāti idha sotāpanno adhippeto, itarepi pana tayo avāritāyevāti. Dasamaṃ.
第三品:十力品巴利
3. Dasabalavaggo
《十力经》的注释巴利
1. Dasabalasuttavaṇṇanā
21 《十力品》第一经的简要说明,其实就是第二经的概要。巴利
21. Dasabalavaggassa paṭhamaṃ dutiyasseva saṅkhepo.
第二部《十力经》的注释巴利
2. Dutiyadasabalasuttavaṇṇanā
22 第二部经是世尊按照自己的意乐而说的。其中,“具足十力”就是具足十种力。而这力有两种:身力和智力。在这两者当中,如来的身力应当依照象的族类来理解。古人也确实这样说过:巴利
22. Dutiyaṃ bhagavatā attano ajjhāsayassa vasena vuttaṃ. Tattha dasabalasamannāgatoti dasahi balehi samannāgato. Balañca nāmetaṃ duvidhaṃ kāyabalañca ñāṇabalañca. Tesu tathāgatassa kāyabalaṃ hatthikulānusārena veditabbaṃ. Vuttañhetaṃ porāṇehi –
迦罗婆迦象、恒河象、般荼罗象、昙跋象、宾伽罗象、
香象、吉祥象、雪山象、布萨象和六牙象,这十种。巴利
‘‘Kāḷāvakañca gaṅgeyyaṃ, paṇḍaraṃ tambapiṅgalaṃ; Gandhamaṅgalahemañca, uposathachaddantime dasā’’ti.(ma. ni. aṭṭha. 1.148; vibha. aṭṭha. 760); –
这就是十种象族。其中,“黑象族”应当理解为普通象族。十个男子的体力,等于一头黑象的体力;十头黑象的体力,等于一头恒河象的体力;十头恒河象的体力,等于一头白象的体力;十头白象的体力,等于一头铜色象的体力;十头铜色象的体力,等于一头黄褐色象的体力;十头黄褐色象的体力,等于一头香象的体力;十头香象的体力,等于一头吉祥象的体力;十头吉祥象的体力,等于一头雪山象的体力;十头雪山象的体力,等于一头布萨象的体力;十头布萨象的体力,等于一头六牙象的体力;十头六牙象的体力,等于一位如来的体力。这也叫做那罗延坚固力。如果按普通象的数量来算,这相当于千亿头象的体力;如果按男子的数量来算,相当于十万亿男子的体力。这就是如来的身力。不过,“具足十力”这个说法并不包括这种身力,因为这是外在的、低劣的,连畜生道里的狮子等也有。依靠这种身力,既不能遍知苦,也不能断除集,不能修习道,不能证得果。另外,还有一种在十种层面上以不可动摇、能作支撑之义而称为“力”的十种智力。正是针对这种智力,才说“具足十力”。巴利
Imāni dasa hatthikulāni. Tattha kāḷāvakanti pakatihatthikulaṃ daṭṭhabbaṃ. Yaṃ dasannaṃ purisānaṃ kāyabalaṃ, taṃ ekassa kāḷāvakassa hatthino. Yaṃ dasannaṃ kāḷāvakānaṃ balaṃ, taṃ ekassa gaṅgeyyassa. Yaṃ dasannaṃ gaṅgeyyānaṃ, taṃ ekassa paṇḍarassa. Yaṃ dasannaṃ paṇḍarānaṃ, taṃ ekassa tambassa. Yaṃ dasannaṃ tambānaṃ, taṃ ekassa piṅgalassa. Yaṃ dasannaṃ piṅgalānaṃ, taṃ ekassa gandhahatthino. Yaṃ dasannaṃ gandhahatthīnaṃ, taṃ ekassa maṅgalassa. Yaṃ dasannaṃ maṅgalānaṃ, taṃ ekassa hemavatassa. Yaṃ dasannaṃ hemavatānaṃ, taṃ ekassa uposathassa. Yaṃ dasannaṃ uposathānaṃ, taṃ ekassa chaddantassa. Yaṃ dasannaṃ chaddantānaṃ, taṃ ekassa tathāgatassa. Nārāyanasaṅghātabalantipi idameva vuccati. Tadetaṃ pakatihatthigaṇanāya hatthīnaṃ koṭisahassānaṃ, purisagaṇanāya dasannaṃ purisakoṭisahassānaṃ balaṃ hoti. Idaṃ tāva tathāgatassa kāyabalaṃ. ‘‘Dasabalasamannāgato’’ti ettha pana etaṃ saṅgahaṃ na gacchati. Etañhi bāhirakaṃ lāmakaṃ tiracchānagatānaṃ sīhādīnampi hoti. Etañhi nissāya dukkhapariññā vā samudayappahānaṃ vā maggabhāvanā vā phalasacchikiriyā vā natthi. Aññaṃ pana dasasu ṭhānesu akampanatthena upatthambhanatthena ca dasavidhaṃ ñāṇabalaṃ nāma atthi. Taṃ sandhāya vuttaṃ ‘‘dasabalasamannāgato’’ti.
那么,什么是这十种智力呢?就是如实了知处与非处等。具体来说:如实了知处是处、非处是非处,这是第一种;如实了知过去、未来、现在所造诸业的果报,依处与因如实了知,这是第二种;了知通向一切处的行道,这是第三种;了知种种界、种种差异的世间,这是第四种;了知其他众生、其他个人的种种意乐,这是第五种;了知那些众生、那些个人的根器优劣,这是第六种;了知禅那、解脱、定、等至的杂染、清净与出离,这是第七种;了知宿命,这是第八种;了知众生的死与生,这是第九种;了知漏尽,这是第十种。而在阿毗达摩中——巴利
Katamaṃ pana tanti? Ṭhānāṭṭhānādīnaṃ yathābhūtaṃ jānanaṃ. Seyyathidaṃ – ṭhānañca ṭhānato aṭṭhānañca aṭṭhānato jānanaṃ ekaṃ, atītānāgatapaccuppannānaṃ kammasamādānānaṃ ṭhānaso hetuso yathābhūtaṃ vipākajānanaṃ ekaṃ, sabbatthagāminipaṭipadājānanaṃ ekaṃ, anekadhātunānādhātulokajānanaṃ ekaṃ, parasattānaṃ parapuggalānaṃ nānādhimuttikatājānanaṃ ekaṃ, tesaṃyeva indriyaparopariyattajānanaṃ ekaṃ, jhānavimokkhasamādhisamāpattīnaṃ saṃkilesavodānavuṭṭhānajānanaṃ ekaṃ, pubbenivāsajānanaṃ ekaṃ, sattānaṃ cutūpapātajānanaṃ ekaṃ, āsavakkhayajānanaṃ ekanti. Abhidhamme pana –
在这里,如来如实了知处为处、非处为非处。如来如实了知处为处、非处为非处——这也是如来的一种如来之力。依靠这种力,如来宣称自己安住于如牛王般的境地,在众人中发出狮子吼,转动梵轮。巴利
‘‘Idha tathāgato ṭhānañca ṭhānato aṭṭhānañca aṭṭhānato yathābhūtaṃ pajānāti. Yampi tathāgato ṭhānañca ṭhānato aṭṭhānañca aṭṭhānato yathābhūtaṃ pajānāti. Idampi tathāgatassa tathāgatabalaṃ hoti, yaṃ balaṃ āgamma tathāgato āsabhaṃ ṭhānaṃ paṭijānāti , parisāsu sīhanādaṃ nadati, brahmacakkaṃ pavattetī’’ti.
这些内容本来就是依照开头(《分别论》760)所说的方法详细展开的。它们的义释,在《分别论注释》(《分别论注》760)和《中部注释》(《破除迷执》,中部注1.148)里,也已经从各个方面完整说明了。应当按照那里所讲的方法来理解。巴利
Ādinā (vibha. 760) nayena vitthārato āgatāneva. Atthavaṇṇanāpi nesaṃ vibhaṅgaṭṭhakathāyañceva (vibha. aṭṭha. 760) papañcasūdaniyā ca majjhimaṭṭhakathāya (ma. ni. aṭṭha. 1.148) sabbākārato vuttā. Sā tattha vuttanayeneva gahetabbā.
“以四无畏”这句话里,“无畏”是畏惧的反面;这是指一位修行者反复观察自己在四种情况下确实无所畏惧时,所生起的那种伴随喜悦的智慧,这个名称就是指它。是哪四种情况呢?就是面对“你自称是正自觉者,但这些法你并没有真正觉悟”这类诘难的时候。关于这些,下面有经文——巴利
Catūhi ca vesārajjehīti ettha sārajjapaṭipakkhaṃ vesārajjaṃ, catūsu ṭhānesu vesārajjabhāvaṃ paccavekkhantassa uppannasomanassamayañāṇassetaṃ nāmaṃ. Katamesu catūsu? ‘‘Sammāsambuddhassa te paṭijānato ime dhammā anabhisambuddhā’’tiādīsu codanāvatthūsu. Tatrāyaṃ pāḷi –
比丘们,如来有这四种无畏……哪四种呢?
“你自称是正等正觉者,但这些法你并没有真正觉悟。”——比丘们,在这一点上,我看不到世间有任何沙门、婆罗门、天人、魔罗、梵天或任何人能如法地来指责我。比丘们,我看不到这样的迹象,所以安住在安稳、无所畏惧、获得无畏的状态中。
“你自称是漏已尽者,但这些漏你并没有彻底尽除。”——比丘们,在这一点上,我看不到……(任何能如法指责我的迹象。)
“你说的那些构成障碍的法,若去修习它们,并不能真正构成障碍。”——比丘们,在这一点上,我看不到……
“你为了这个目的而说的法,并不能引导实践它的人正确地走向苦的彻底灭尽。”——比丘们,在这一点上,我看不到世间有任何沙门、婆罗门……(能如法地来指责我。)……我安住在获得无畏的状态中。巴利
‘‘Cattārimāni, bhikkhave, tathāgatassa vesārajjāni…pe…. Katamāni cattāri? ‘Sammāsambuddhassa te paṭijānato ime dhammā anabhisambuddhā’ti tatra vata maṃ samaṇo vā brāhmaṇo vā devo vā māro vā brahmā vā koci vā lokasmiṃ saha dhammena paṭicodessatīti nimittametaṃ, bhikkhave, na samanupassāmi. Etamahaṃ, bhikkhave, nimittaṃ asamanupassanto khemappatto abhayappatto vesārajjappatto viharāmi. ‘Khīṇāsavassa te paṭijānato ime āsavā aparikkhīṇā’ti tatra vata maṃ…pe… ‘ye kho pana te antarāyikā dhammā vuttā, te paṭisevato nālaṃ antarāyāyā’ti tatra vata maṃ…pe… ‘yassa kho pana te atthāya dhammo desito, so na niyyāti takkarassa sammā dukkhakkhayāyā’ti tatra vata maṃ samaṇo vā brāhmaṇo vā…pe… vesārajjappatto viharāmī’’ti (a. ni. 4.8).
“牛王般的立足处”,就是最殊胜的立足处、最上的立足处。或者说,过去诸佛就是牛王,这是他们所在之处。再者,统领一百头牛的最胜者叫usabha(牛王),统领一千头牛的最胜者叫vasabha(牛王);或者在一百头牛群中最胜的叫usabha,在一千头牛群中最胜的叫vasabha。而在一切牛中最胜、能忍受一切艰难、白色、庄严、能背负大重担、即使听到上百声雷鸣也不动摇的,叫nisabha(牛王)。这里“牛王般的”(āsabha)意思是“属于usabha(牛王)的”;“立足处”是指以四足压住大地而安立。然而,这里所说的是“像牛王一样的”,所以叫āsabha。正如被称为nisabha的牛王具足牛王之力,以四足压住大地,以不动的立足处而站立;同样,如来也具足十种如来之力,以四无畏足压住八众大地,在包括天人的世间中,不被任何敌对者、怨敌所动摇,以不动的立足处而站立。如此站立时,他承认、接受那个牛王般的立足处,不否认,将其归于自己。因此说“承认牛王般的立足处”。巴利
Āsabhaṃ ṭhānanti seṭṭhaṭṭhānaṃ uttamaṭṭhānaṃ. Āsabhā vā pubbabuddhā, tesaṃ ṭhānanti attho. Apica gavasatajeṭṭhako usabho, gavasahassajeṭṭhako vasabho, vajasatajeṭṭhako vā usabho, vajasahassajeṭṭhako vasabho, sabbagavaseṭṭho sabbaparissayasaho seto pāsādiko mahābhāravaho asanisatasaddehipi asampakampiyo nisabho, so idha usabhoti adhippeto. Idampi hi tassa pariyāyavacanaṃ. Usabhassa idanti āsabhaṃ. Ṭhānanti catūhi pādehi pathaviṃ uppīḷetvā avaṭṭhānaṃ (ma. ni. 1.150). Idaṃ pana āsabhaṃ viyāti āsabhaṃ. Yatheva hi nisabhasaṅkhāto usabho usabhabalena samannāgato catūhi pādehi pathaviṃ uppīḷetvā acalaṭṭhānena tiṭṭhati, evaṃ tathāgatopi dasahi tathāgatabalehi samannāgato catūhi vesārajjapādehi aṭṭhaparisapathaviṃ uppīḷetvā sadevake loke kenaci paccatthikena paccāmittena akampiyo acalaṭṭhānena tiṭṭhati. Evaṃ tiṭṭhamāno ca taṃ āsabhaṃ ṭhānaṃ paṭijānāti upagacchati na paccakkhāti, attani āropeti. Tena vuttaṃ ‘‘āsabhaṃ ṭhānaṃ paṭijānātī’’ti.
“于众中”:这里的“众”指八种众。舍利弗,有八种众。哪八种?刹帝利众、婆罗门众、居士众、沙门众、四大王天众、三十三天众、魔众、梵天众——就是在这八种众当中。“作狮子吼”:就是发出最殊胜的吼声、无所畏惧的吼声,或者发出像狮子吼一样的声音。这个意思要依据《狮子吼经》来说明。又,就像狮子因为能承受、能击杀而被称为狮子,如来也因为能承受世间法、能摧毁外道的说法而被称为狮子。这样所称的狮子的吼声,就是狮子吼。其中,就像狮子具足狮子之力,在任何地方都无所畏惧、毫无恐惧、毛发不竖,发出狮子吼;同样,如来狮子也具足如来的种种力,在八种众中无所畏惧、毫无恐惧、毛发不竖,以“色是这样”等方式,发出具足种种说法庄严的狮子吼。因此说“于众中作狮子吼”。巴利
Parisāsūti ‘‘aṭṭha kho imā, sāriputta, parisā. Katamā aṭṭha? Khattiyaparisā brāhmaṇaparisā gahapatiparisā samaṇaparisā cātumahārājikaparisā tāvatiṃsaparisā māraparisā brahmaparisā’’ti, imāsu aṭṭhasu parisāsu. Sīhanādaṃ nadatīti seṭṭhanādaṃ abhītanādaṃ nadati, sīhanādasadisaṃ vā nādaṃ nadati. Ayamattho sīhanādasuttena dīpetabbo. Yathā vā sīho sahanato ceva hananato ca sīhoti vuccati, evaṃ tathāgato lokadhammānaṃ sahanato parappavādānañca hananato sīhoti vuccati. Evaṃ vuttassa sīhassa nādaṃ sīhanādaṃ. Tattha yathā sīho sīhabalena samannāgato sabbattha visārado vigatalomahaṃso sīhanādaṃ nadati, evaṃ tathāgatasīhopi tathāgatabalehi samannāgato aṭṭhasu parisāsu visārado vigatalomahaṃso, ‘‘iti rūpa’’ntiādinā nayena nānāvidhadesanāvilāsasampannaṃ sīhanādaṃ nadati. Tena vuttaṃ ‘‘parisāsu sīhanādaṃ nadatī’’ti.
“转梵轮”这句话里,“梵”是指最殊胜、最上等的,这是对清净法轮的一个称呼。这个法轮有两种:证悟智和教说智。其中,由智慧所培育、能让自己证得圣果的,是证悟智;由悲心所培育、能让弟子们证得圣果的,是教说智。证悟智又分两种:正在生起和已经生起。从出家开始,一直到阿拉汉道,这期间属于正在生起;在证果那一刹那,就叫已经生起。或者从兜率天开始,一直到菩提座上的阿拉汉道,这期间属于正在生起;在证果那一刹那,就叫已经生起。或者从燃灯佛那时开始,一直到阿拉汉道,这期间属于正在生起;在证果那一刹那,就叫已经生起。教说智也分两种:正在转动和已经转动。一直到阿若憍陈如证入流道,这期间属于正在转动;在证果那一刹那,就叫已经转动。这两者当中,证悟智是出世间的,教说智是世间的。不过这两种智都是诸佛独有的亲证之智,不是其他人所能共有的。巴利
Brahmacakkaṃ pavattetīti ettha brahmanti seṭṭhaṃ uttamaṃ, visuddhassa dhammacakkassetaṃ adhivacanaṃ. Taṃ pana dhammacakkaṃ duvidhaṃ hoti paṭivedhañāṇañca desanāñāṇañca. Tattha paññāpabhāvitaṃ attano ariyaphalāvahaṃ paṭivedhañāṇaṃ, karuṇāpabhāvitaṃ sāvakānaṃ ariyaphalāvahaṃ desanāñāṇaṃ. Tattha paṭivedhañāṇaṃ uppajjamānaṃ uppannanti duvidhaṃ. Tañhi abhinikkhamanato paṭṭhāya yāva arahattamaggā uppajjamānaṃ, phalakkhaṇe uppannaṃ nāma. Tusitabhavanato vā yāva mahābodhipallaṅke arahattamaggā uppajjamānaṃ, phalakkhaṇe uppannaṃ nāma. Dīpaṅkarato vā paṭṭhāya yāva arahattamaggā uppajjamānaṃ , phalakkhaṇe uppannaṃ nāma. Desanāñāṇampi pavattamānaṃ pavattanti duvidhaṃ. Tañhi yāva aññāsikoṇḍaññassa sotāpattimaggā pavattamānaṃ, phalakkhaṇe pavattaṃ nāma. Tesu paṭivedhañāṇaṃ lokuttaraṃ, desanāñāṇaṃ lokiyaṃ. Ubhayampi panetaṃ aññehi asādhāraṇaṃ buddhānaṃyeva orasañāṇaṃ.
现在,为了说明具足这种智慧的人怎样发出狮子吼,他开始说“色是这样”等等。其中,“色是这样”的意思是:这就是色,色只有这么多,超过这个就没有色了。这是从变坏的性质以及大种和所造色的分类入手,按照相、味、现起、足处,把一切色毫无遗漏地把握了。“色的集起是这样”:就是通过这种方式,说明如此把握的色的集起。这里的“这样”是“集起是这样发生的”的意思。它的详细解释应当这样理解:“由无明集起而有色集起,由渴爱集起、业集起、食集起而有色集起;见到生起相的人,就见到色蕴的生起。”(《无碍解道》1.50)关于灭也一样:“由无明灭而有色灭……见到变坏相的人,就见到色蕴的灭。”这是详细解释。巴利
Idāni yaṃ iminā ñāṇena samannāgato sīhanādaṃ nadati, taṃ dassetuṃ iti rūpantiādimāha. Tattha iti rūpanti idaṃ rūpaṃ ettakaṃ rūpaṃ, ito uddhaṃ rūpaṃ natthīti ruppanasabhāvañceva bhūtupādāyabhedañca ādiṃ katvā lakkhaṇarasapaccupaṭṭhānapadaṭṭhānavasena anavasesarūpapariggaho vutto. Iti rūpassa samudayoti iminā evaṃ pariggahitassa rūpassa samudayo vutto. Tattha itīti evaṃ samudayo hotīti attho. Tassa vitthāro ‘‘avijjāsamudayā rūpasamudayo taṇhāsamudayā, kammasamudayā āhārasamudayā rūpasamudayoti nibbattilakkhaṇaṃ passantopi rūpakkhandhassa udayaṃ passatī’’ti (paṭi. ma. 1.50) evaṃ veditabbo. Atthaṅgamepi ‘‘avijjānirodhā rūpanirodho…pe… vipariṇāmalakkhaṇaṃ passantopi rūpakkhandhassa nirodhaṃ passatī’’ti ayaṃ vitthāro.
“受是这样”等处也是如此:这是受,受只有这么多,超过这个就没有受了;这是想,这些是行,这是识,识只有这么多,超过这个就没有识了。这是从感受、认知、造作、了别的自性入手,以及从乐等、色想等、触等、眼识等分类入手,依照相、味、现起、足处,把受、想、行、识毫无遗漏地统摄起来说的。而“受的集是这样”等,则是说明这样统摄的受、想、行、识的集起。这里“这样”也是“集起是这样”的意思。对它们的详细说明,应当像讲色时那样,以“由无明集而有受集”等方式来了知。不过这里有一点不同:在三蕴中,不说“由食集”,而要说“由触集”;在识蕴中,则要说“由名色集”。“灭”这个词也应当依它们来配合。这是这里的简要说明。至于生灭的详细抉择,已在《清净道论》中以一切行相圆满地宣说了。巴利
Iti vedanātiādīsupi ayaṃ vedanā ettakā vedanā, ito uddhaṃ vedanā natthi, ayaṃ saññā, ime saṅkhārā, idaṃ viññāṇaṃ ettakaṃ viññāṇaṃ , ito uddhaṃ viññāṇaṃ natthīti vedayitasañjānanaabhisaṅkharaṇavijānanasabhāvañceva sukhādirūpasaññādiphassādicakkhuviññāṇādibhedañca ādiṃ katvā lakkhaṇarasapaccupaṭṭhānapadaṭṭhānavasena anavasesavedanāsaññāsaṅkhāraviññāṇapariggaho vutto. Iti vedanāya samudayotiādīhi pana evaṃ pariggahitānaṃ vedanāsaññāsaṅkhāraviññāṇānaṃ samudayo vutto. Tatrāpi itīti evaṃ samudayo hotīti attho. Tesampi vitthāro ‘‘avijjāsamudayā vedanāsamudayo’’ti (paṭi. ma. 1.50) rūpe vuttanayeneva veditabbo. Ayaṃ pana viseso – tīsu khandhesu ‘‘āhārasamudayā’’ti avatvā ‘‘phassasamudayā’’ti vattabbaṃ, viññāṇakkhandhe ‘‘nāmarūpasamudayā’’ti. Atthaṅgamapadampi tesaṃyeva vasena yojetabbaṃ. Ayamettha saṅkhepo. Vitthārato pana udayabbayavinicchayo sabbākāraparipūro visuddhimagge vutto.
“此有故彼有”,这也是另一种狮子吼。它的意思是:当无明等这些缘存在时,行等这些果就存在。“由此生起故彼生起”:由于无明等这些缘的生起,行等这些果就生起。“此无故彼无”:当无明等这些缘不存在时,行等这些果就不存在。“由此灭故彼灭”:由于无明等这些缘的灭去,行等这些果就灭去。现在,为了详细说明它如何存在、如何灭去,他宣说了“即无明缘而行”等。巴利
Imasmiṃsati idaṃ hotīti ayampi aparo sīhanādo. Tassattho – imasmiṃ avijjādike paccaye sati idaṃ saṅkhārādikaṃ phalaṃ hoti. Imassuppādā idaṃ uppajjatīti imassa avijjādikassa paccayassa uppādā idaṃ saṅkhārādikaṃ phalaṃ uppajjati. Imasmiṃ asati idaṃ na hotīti imasmiṃ avijjādike paccaye asati idaṃ saṅkhārādikaṃ phalaṃ na hoti. Imassa nirodhā idaṃ nirujjhatīti imassa avijjādikassa paccayassa nirodhā idaṃ saṅkhārādikaṃ phalaṃ nirujjhati. Idāni yathā taṃ hoti ceva nirujjhati ca, taṃ vitthārato dassetuṃ yadidaṃ avijjāpaccayā saṅkhārātiādimāha.
“善说”的意思是:像这样,通过分析五蕴等方式,已经妥善地宣说、讲说了。“法”是指五蕴和缘起之法。“坦露”是指没有被遮盖。“敞开”是指打开之后放置。“显明”是指被照亮、被照亮、被阐明。“已断碎布”中,所谓碎布,是指破烂、碎裂、到处缝补打结的旧衣服;谁没有这样的碎布,而是穿着八肘或九肘长、没有割截过的布,他就叫作“已断碎布者”。这里的法也是这样。因为在这里,并没有以欺诈等方式造成的破裂、碎裂、缝补打结的状态。另外,小块布也叫作碎布;谁没有这样的碎布,而有八肘或九肘的大布,他也是“已断碎布者”,意思是已经脱离了碎布。这里的法就是这样。就像一个人拿了一块四肘长的布来受用,左拉右扯,弄得自己很疲惫;同样,外道时期的出家人对自己那一点点法,不断构想“这样存在时,就会这样”,不断把它扩大,弄得自己很疲惫。而就像有人用八肘或九肘的布来受用,可以随自己的意愿披着,不会疲惫,那里没有拉扯扩大的事;同样,在这个法里,也没有不断构想、不断分析的事。这个法是我以种种理由善加分析、善加广说的,就是针对这一点,才说“已断碎布”。另外,垃圾也叫作碎布,而在这个教法里,所谓沙门的垃圾是不能站住脚的。因此说:巴利
Evaṃ svākkhātoti evaṃ pañcakkhandhavibhajanādivasena suṭṭhu akkhāto kathito. Dhammoti pañcakkhandhapaccayākāradhammo. Uttānoti anikujjito. Vivaṭoti vivaritvā ṭhapito. Pakāsitoti dīpito jotito. Chinnapilotikoti pilotikā vuccati chinnaṃ bhinnaṃ tattha tattha sibbitagaṇṭhitaṃ jiṇṇavatthaṃ, taṃ yassa natthīti aṭṭhahatthaṃ navahatthaṃ vā ahatasāṭakaṃ nivattho, so chinnapilotiko nāma. Ayampi dhammo tādiso. Na hettha kohaññādivasena chinnabhinnasibbitagaṇṭhitabhāvo atthi. Apica khuddakasāṭakopi pilotikāti vuccati, sā yassa natthi, aṭṭhanavahattho mahāpaṭo atthi, sopi chinnapilotiko, apagatapilotikoti attho. Tādiso ayaṃ dhammo. Yathā hi catuhatthaṃ sāṭakaṃ gahetvā pariggahaṇaṃ karonto puriso ito cito ca añchanto kilamati, evaṃ bāhirakasamaye pabbajitā attano parittakaṃ dhammaṃ ‘‘evaṃ sati evaṃ bhavissatī’’ti kappetvā kappetvā vaḍḍhentā kilamanti. Yathā pana aṭṭhahatthanavahatthena pariggahaṇaṃ karonto yathāruci pārupati na kilamati, natthi tattha añchitvā vaḍḍhanakiccaṃ; evaṃ imasmimpi dhamme kappetvā kappetvā vibhajanakiccaṃ natthi, tehi tehi kāraṇehi mayāva ayaṃ dhammo suvibhatto suvitthāritoti idampi sandhāya ‘‘chinnapilotiko’’ti āha. Apica kacavaropi pilotikāti vuccati, imasmiñca sāsane samaṇakacavaraṃ nāma patiṭṭhātuṃ na labhati. Tenevāha –
把稗子清出去,把烂牙似的人赶走;
接着要把那些像秕糠一样的假沙门吹走——他们根本不是沙门,却自以为是个沙门。
把那些怀着恶欲、行为恶劣、常与恶行恶境为伍的人清除出去之后,
你们要保持正念,与清净的人一起过清净的生活。
从那时起,你们和合一致、具足明智,就能终结苦。巴利
‘‘Kāraṇḍavaṃ niddhamatha, kasambuṃ apakassatha; Tato palāpe vāhetha, assamaṇe samaṇamānine. ‘‘Niddhamitvāna pāpicche, pāpaācāragocare; Suddhā suddhehi saṃvāsaṃ, kappayavho patissatā; Tato samaggā nipakā, dukkhassantaṃ karissathā’’ti. (a. ni. 8.10);
就这样,因为沙门垢秽已被断除,这个法就叫作“已断碎布”。巴利
Iti samaṇakacavarassa chinnattāpi ayaṃ dhammo chinnapilotiko nāma hoti.
“足够”就是确实合适。“以信出家”是指凭着信心出家。“善男子”有两种:行为上的善男子和出身上的善男子。其中,不管从什么家族出家,能圆满戒等五法蕴的,叫行为上的善男子;而像耶舍善男子那样,从出身高贵的家族出家的,叫出身上的善男子。这里指的是行为上的善男子。不过,如果出身上的善男子也有德行,那他就是最上等的。就是这样一位善男子。“发起精进”是指修习具备四支的精进。为了说明这四支,接着就说“即使只剩皮肤……”等。这里,皮肤是一支,筋是一支,骨是一支,肉和血合起来是一支。另外,当决意修习这具备四支的精进时,应当在九种情况下保持专注:食前、食后、初夜、中夜、后夜、行走时、站立时、坐着时、躺卧时。巴利
Alamevāti yuttameva. Saddhāpabbajitenāti saddhāya pabbajitena. Kulaputtenāti dve kulaputtā ācārakulaputto jātikulaputto ca. Tattha yo yato kutoci kulā pabbajitvā sīlādayo pañca dhammakkhandhe pūreti, ayaṃ ācārakulaputto nāma. Yo pana yasakulaputtādayo viya jātisampannakulā pabbajito, ayaṃ jātikulaputto nāma. Tesu idha ācārakulaputto adhippeto. Sace pana jātikulaputto ācāravā hoti, ayaṃ uttamoyeva. Evarūpena kulaputtena. Vīriyaṃ ārabhitunti caturaṅgasamannāgataṃ vīriyaṃ kātuṃ. Idānissa caturaṅgaṃ dassento kāmaṃ taco cātiādimāha. Ettha hi taco ekaṃ aṅgaṃ, nhāru ekaṃ, aṭṭhi ekaṃ, maṃsalohitaṃ ekanti. Idañca pana caturaṅgasamannāgataṃ vīriyaṃ adhiṭṭhahantena navasu ṭhānesu samādhātabbaṃ purebhatte pacchābhatte purimayāme majjhimayāme pacchimayāme gamane ṭhāne nisajjāya sayaneti.
比丘们,“懈怠者住于苦”:在这个教法里,凡是懈怠的人,他就住于苦。但在外道那边,懈怠的人却住于乐。“混杂”就是混在一起。“自利”指殊胜的利益,或自身的利益,两种说法都是指阿拉汉果。“退失”就是失去、得不到。因为懈怠的人不守护六根门,三种业不清净,以正命为第八支的戒不清净,活命不正,成了亲近俗家的人。他就像掉进同梵行者眼里的灰尘一样,成为损害者,住于苦,既是压坏座位的人,也是满肚子粪秽的人,不能领会导师的心意,错失难得的机会,因此他受用的国土施食也没有大果报。巴利
Dukkhaṃ, bhikkhave, kusīto viharatīti imasmiṃ sāsane yo kusīto puggalo, so dukkhaṃ viharati. Bāhirasamaye pana yo kusīto, so sukhaṃ viharati. Vokiṇṇoti missībhūto. Sadatthanti sobhanaṃ vā atthaṃ sakaṃ vā atthaṃ, ubhayenāpi arahattameva adhippetaṃ. Parihāpetīti hāpeti na pāpuṇāti. Kusītapuggalassa hi cha dvārāni aguttāni honti, tīṇi kammāni aparisuddhāni, ājīvaṭṭhamakaṃ sīlaṃ apariyodātaṃ, bhinnājīvo kulūpako hoti. So sabrahmacārīnaṃ akkhimhi patitarajaṃ viya upaghātakaro hutvā dukkhaṃ viharati, pīṭhamaddano ceva hoti laṇḍapūrako ca, satthu ajjhāsayaṃ gahetuṃ na sakkoti, dullabhaṃ khaṇaṃ virādheti, tena bhutto raṭṭhapiṇḍopi na mahapphalo hoti.
比丘们,精进者确实如此:精进的人就在这教法里住于安乐。而在外道那边,精进的人却住于苦。远离就是出离、超脱而住。圆满自利就是证得阿罗汉果。精进的人六根门守护得好,三种业清净,以正命为第八的戒行极为清净,在同梵行者眼中就像极清凉的眼药,又像涂身的栴檀,令人欢喜,住于安乐,能够把握导师的心意。导师确实……巴利
Āraddhavīriyo ca kho, bhikkhaveti āraddhavīriyo puggalo imasmiṃyeva sāsane sukhaṃ viharati. Bāhirasamaye pana yo āraddhavīriyo, so dukkhaṃ viharati. Pavivittoti vivitto viyutto hutvā. Sadatthaṃ paripūretīti arahattaṃ pāpuṇāti. Āraddhavīriyassa hi cha dvārāni suguttāni honti, tīṇi kammāni parisuddhāni, ājīvaṭṭhamakaṃ sīlaṃ pariyodātaṃ sabrahmacārīnaṃ akkhimhi susītalañjanaṃ viya dhātugatacandanaṃ viya ca manāpo hutvā sukhaṃ viharati, satthu ajjhāsayaṃ gahetuṃ sakkoti. Satthā hi –
大雄啊,愿你长久活着!大牟尼啊,愿你住世一劫!巴利
‘‘Ciraṃ jīva mahāvīra, kappaṃ tiṭṭha mahāmunī’’ti –
乔达弥这样礼敬之后,如来拒绝了,说:“乔达弥,不该这样礼敬如来。”接着应她的请求,如来开示了应当礼敬的方式,这样说道:巴利
Evaṃ gotamiyā vandito, ‘‘na kho, gotami, tathāgatā evaṃ vanditabbā’’ti paṭikkhipitvā tāya yācito vanditabbākāraṃ ācikkhanto evamāha –
那些已发起精进、心向解脱、始终坚定努力的人,
看那些和睦相处的弟子们,这就是对诸佛的礼敬。巴利
‘‘Āraddhavīriye pahitatte, niccaṃ daḷhaparakkame; Samagge sāvake passa, esā buddhāna vandanā’’ti. (apa. therī 2.2.171);
这样发起精进的人,就能领会导师的心意,不会错过难得的机会。因为对他来说,佛陀出世、说法开示、僧伽的良好修行才有成果、才有意义,他吃到的国土布施之食也因此有大果报。巴利
Evaṃ āraddhavīriyo satthu ajjhāsayaṃ gahetuṃ sakkoti, dullabhaṃ khaṇaṃ na virādheti. Tassa hi buddhuppādo dhammadesanā saṅghasuppaṭipatti saphalā hoti saudrayā, raṭṭhapiṇḍopi tena bhutto mahapphalo hoti.
用低劣的信、低劣的精进、低劣的念、低劣的定、低劣的慧,是不可能证得那被称为最上的阿罗汉果的。而用最上的信等,才能证得最上的阿罗汉果。所谓“精华可饮”:从令人净信的角度叫“精华”,从应当饮用的角度叫“可饮”。因为喝了某种东西之后,倒在路中间,神志不清,连自己的衣服等物是谁的都不知道,那么这种东西即使清净,也不该喝;而我的教法既这样清净,又应当饮用。为了说明这一点,才说“精华可饮”。巴利
Hīnenaaggassāti hīnāya saddhāya hīnena vīriyena hīnāya satiyā hīnena samādhinā hīnāya paññāya aggasaṅkhātassa arahattassa patti nāma na hoti. Aggena ca khoti aggehi saddhādīhi aggassa arahattassa patti hoti. Maṇḍapeyyanti pasannaṭṭhena maṇḍaṃ, pātabbaṭṭhena peyyaṃ. Yañhi pivitvā antaravīthiyaṃ patito visaññī attano sāṭakādīnampi assāmiko hoti, taṃ pasannampi na pātabbaṃ, mayhaṃ pana sāsanaṃ evaṃ pasannañca pātabbañcāti dassento ‘‘maṇḍapeyya’’nti āha.
在这里,精华有三种:开示精华、接受者精华、梵行精华。什么是开示精华?就是宣说、开示、安立、揭示、分别、阐明四圣谛;宣说……乃至……阐明四念处;宣说……乃至……阐明圣八支道。这就是开示精华。什么是接受者精华?就是比丘、比丘尼、近事男、近事女、天人、人,或者其他任何能够了知的人。这就是接受者精华。什么是梵行精华?就是这圣八支道本身,也就是:正见……乃至……正定。这就是梵行精华。此外,还可以通过“信根是胜解精华,不信是渣滓;舍弃不信的渣滓,饮用信根的胜解精华”等这样的方式来了知这里的含义。这里“世尊现前”是说明理由的话。因为世尊现前,所以应当努力精进,饮下这精华。外面的药精华,如果不在医生面前饮用,就会担心不知道剂量、不知道会引发什么作用、不知道会排出什么;但在医生面前,他们就没有顾虑,心想“医生会知道的”而饮用。同样地,“我们的法主世尊现前”,为了让他们努力精进而饮用,在劝导他们饮用精华时,便说了“因此,诸比丘”等话。其中,“有果”就是有利益,“有增长”就是有增进。现在,为了按照劝导相应地指出应当学习的事,说了“为了自己的利益,诸比丘”等话。其中,“自己的利益”就是属于自己的利益,也就是阿罗汉果。“以不放逸完成”就是以不放逸去做一切应做的事。“他人的利益”就是给施主们带来大果大利益。其余各处都只是显明而已。第二。巴利
Tattha tividho maṇḍo – desanāmaṇḍo, paṭiggahamaṇḍo, brahmacariyamaṇḍoti. Katamo desanāmaṇḍo? Catunnaṃ ariyasaccānaṃ ācikkhanā desanā paññāpanā paṭṭhapanā vivaraṇā vibhajanā uttānīkammaṃ, catunnaṃ satipaṭṭhānānaṃ…pe… ariyassa aṭṭhaṅgikassa maggassa ācikkhanā…pe… uttānīkammaṃ, ayaṃ desanāmaṇḍo. Katamo paṭiggahamaṇḍo? Bhikkhū bhikkhuniyo upāsakā upāsikāyo devā manussā ye vā panaññepi keci viññātāro, ayaṃ paṭiggahamaṇḍo. Katamo brahmacariyamaṇḍo? Ayameva ariyo aṭṭhaṅgiko maggo, seyyathidaṃ – sammādiṭṭhi…pe… sammāsamādhi, ayaṃ brahmacariyamaṇḍo. Apica adhimokkhamaṇḍo saddhindriyaṃ, assaddhiyaṃ kasaṭo, assaddhiyaṃ kasaṭaṃ chaḍḍetvā saddhindriyassa adhimokkhamaṇḍaṃ pivatīti maṇḍapeyyantiādināpi (paṭi. ma. 1.238) nayenettha attho veditabbo. Satthā sammukhībhūtoti idamettha kāraṇavacanaṃ. Yasmā satthā sammukhībhūto, tasmā vīriyasampayogaṃ katvā pivatha etaṃ maṇḍaṃ. Bāhirakañhi bhesajjamaṇḍampi vejjassa asammukhā pivantānaṃ pamāṇaṃ vā uggamanaṃ vā niggamanaṃ vā na jānāmāti āsaṅkā hoti. Vejjasammukhā pana ‘‘vejjo jānissatī’’ti nirāsaṅkā pivanti. Evameva amhākaṃ dhammassāmi satthā sammukhībhūtoti vīriyaṃ katvā pivathāti maṇḍapāne nesaṃ niyojento tasmātiha, bhikkhavetiādimāha. Tattha saphalāti sānisaṃsā. Saudrayāti savaḍḍhi. Idāni niyojanānurūpaṃ sikkhitabbataṃ niddisanto attatthaṃ vā hi, bhikkhavetiādimāha. Tattha attatthanti attano atthabhūtaṃ arahattaṃ. Appamādena sampādetunti appamādena sabbakiccāni kātuṃ. Paratthanti paccayadāyakānaṃ mahapphalānisaṃsaṃ. Sesaṃ sabbattha uttānamevāti. Dutiyaṃ.
3. 《近依经》的注释巴利
3. Upanisasuttavaṇṇanā
23 在第三经的“我知”等语句中,“知”是指了知者的知。“见”是指看见者的见。这两个词意思相同,只是文字表达上有差别。即便如此,说“知”是依据智慧的特征来指称这个人,因为智慧的特征就是了知。说“见”则是依据智慧的作用来指称,因为智慧的作用就是看见——具足智慧的人,就像有眼睛的人用眼睛看见色法一样,用智慧看见已经显现的诸法。这里的“诸漏的灭尽”:诸漏的断除、不再生起、灭尽的状态、不存在,这也称为漏尽;甚至坏灭,以及道、果、涅槃,也都可以称为漏尽。因为在“诸漏灭尽故,无漏心解脱”等语句中,所说的就是灭尽的状态。而在“诸漏的灭尽、衰亡、破坏、溃散、无常、消失”中,则是指坏灭。巴利
23. Tatiye ‘‘jānato aha’’ntiādīsu jānatoti jānantassa. Passatoti passantassa. Dvepi padāni ekatthāni, byañjanameva nānaṃ. Evaṃ santepi ‘‘jānato’’ti ñāṇalakkhaṇaṃ upādāya puggalaṃ niddisati. Jānanalakkhaṇañhi ñāṇaṃ. ‘‘Passato’’ti ñāṇappabhāvaṃ upādāya. Passanappabhāvañhi ñāṇaṃ, ñāṇasamaṅgīpuggalo cakkhumā viya cakkhunā rūpāni , ñāṇena vivaṭe dhamme passati. Āsavānaṃ khayanti ettha āsavānaṃ pahānaṃ asamuppādo khīṇākāro natthibhāvoti ayampi āsavakkhayoti vuccati, bhaṅgopi maggaphalanibbānānipi. ‘‘Āsavānaṃ khayā anāsavaṃ cetovimutti’’ntiādīsu (ma. ni. 1.438; vibha. 831) hi khīṇākāro āsavakkhayoti vuccati. ‘‘Yo āsavānaṃ khayo vayo bhedo paribhedo aniccatā antaradhāna’’nti (vibha. 354) ettha bhaṅgo.
正在修学的有学者,沿着正直的道路随行。
在漏尽中,最初生起的是智,从那之后紧接着就是正智。巴利
‘‘Sekkhassa sikkhamānassa, ujumaggānusārino; Khayasmiṃ paṭhamaṃ ñāṇaṃ, tato aññā anantarā’’ti. (itivu. 62); –
在这里,道就是“漏尽”。因为道是在断除、止息诸漏时生起的,所以被称为“漏尽”。而在“由漏尽而为沙门”这句话里,“漏尽”指的是果。因为果是在诸漏灭尽时生起的,所以被称为“漏尽”。巴利
Ettha maggo. So hi āsave khepento vūpasamento uppajjati, tasmā āsavānaṃ khayoti vutto. ‘‘Āsavānaṃ khayā samaṇo hotī’’ti ettha phalaṃ. Tañhi āsavānaṃ khīṇante uppajjati, tasmā āsavānaṃ khayoti vuttaṃ.
‘‘Āsavā tassa vaḍḍhanti, ārā so āsavakkhayā’’ti; (Dha. pa. 253) –
这里说的是涅槃。因为依靠涅槃,诸漏才会灭尽,所以才说“漏尽”。不过在这里,真正指的是道和果。“不是对不了知的人、不是对不见的人”——意思是:对于不了知、不见的人,我们不说。这样一来,那些主张即使不了知、不见,只靠轮回等就能得到清净的说法,就被否定了。前面两个词说明了方法,这个词则否定了不是方法的东西。巴利
Ettha nibbānaṃ. Tañhi āgamma āsavā khīyanti, tasmā āsavānaṃ khayoti vuttaṃ. Idha pana maggaphalāni adhippetāni. No ajānato no apassatoti yo pana na jānāti na passati, tassa no vadāmīti attho. Etena ye ajānato apassatopi saṃsārādīhiyeva suddhiṃ vadanti, te paṭikkhittā honti. Purimena padadvayena upāyo vutto, iminā anupāyaṃ paṭisedheti.
现在,为了说明“了知什么,诸漏才会灭尽”,世尊开始提问:“比丘们,了知什么?”
在这里,“了知”有很多种。比如,有的比丘天生就会做伞,有的会做衣服等物品。但如果一个比丘在做这些事的时候,心里想的是“这是戒律规定的义务”,那么这种了知并不能成为生天、证果的基础,这话不能这么说。可是,如果有人出家之后,懂得行医之类的事情,对于这样了知的人,诸漏只会增长。
因此,为了显示“了知且见到什么,诸漏才会灭尽”,世尊才说了“如是色”等这一段。
“比丘们,如此了知”:就是像这样了知五蕴的生起与坏灭。
“诸漏灭尽”:因为是在诸漏灭尽时生起的,所以得到“诸漏灭尽”这个名字,也就是阿拉汉果。巴利
Idāni yaṃ jānato āsavānaṃ khayo hoti, taṃ dassetukāmo kiñca, bhikkhave, jānatoti pucchaṃ ārabhi. Tattha jānanā bahuvidhā. Dabbajātiko eva hi koci bhikkhu chattaṃ kātuṃ jānāti, koci cīvarādīnaṃ aññataraṃ, tassa īdisāni kammāni vattasīse ṭhatvā karontassa sā jānanā saggamaggaphalānaṃ padaṭṭhānaṃ na hotīti na vattabbaṃ. Yo pana sāsane pabbajitvā vejjakammādīni kātuṃ jānāti, tassevaṃ jānato āsavā vaḍḍhantiyeva. Tasmā yaṃ jānato passato ca āsavānaṃ khayo hoti, tadeva dassento iti rūpantiādimāha. Evaṃ kho, bhikkhave, jānatoti evaṃ pañcannaṃ khandhānaṃ udayabbayaṃ jānantassa. Āsavānaṃ khayo hotīti āsavānaṃ khayante jātattā ‘‘āsavānaṃ khayo’’ti laddhanāmaṃ arahattaṃ hoti.
这样,以阿罗汉果为顶点结束说法之后,现在为了显示漏尽者所应遵循的前分行道,说了“诸比丘,而彼……”等话。其中,“于漏尽中有漏尽智”:就是在证得被称为漏尽的阿罗汉果时,生起的省察智。因为那智是在被称为阿罗汉果的漏尽中先于第一刹那生起之后才生起的,所以称为“漏尽智”。“有近因”:就是有原因、有条件的。“解脱”:指阿罗汉果的解脱。那解脱对他来说是依亲依止缘而成为缘的。同样,从这里往后,对于所获得的诸法,也应当以可得的方式了知这种缘的关系。巴利
Evaṃ arahattanikūṭena desanaṃ niṭṭhapetvā idāni khīṇāsavassa āgamanīyaṃ pubbabhāgapaṭipadaṃ dassetuṃ yampissa taṃ, bhikkhavetiādimāha. Tattha khayasmiṃ khayeñāṇanti āsavakkhayasaṅkhāte arahattaphale paṭiladdhe sati paccavekkhaṇañāṇaṃ. Tañhi arahattaphalasaṅkhāte khayasmiṃ paṭhamavāraṃ uppanne pacchā uppannattā khayeñāṇanti vuccati. Saupanisanti sakāraṇaṃ sappaccayaṃ. Vimuttīti arahattaphalavimutti. Sā hissa upanissayapaccayena paccayo hoti. Evaṃ ito paresupi labbhamānavasena paccayabhāvo veditabbo.
离染:就是道。因为道在使烦恼褪去、灭尽时生起,所以称为离染。厌离:指厌离智。以此显示强力观。强力观是以下四种智的统称:怖畏现起智、过患随观智、欲解脱智、行舍智。如实知见:指如实了知自性的见。以此显示弱力观。因为弱力观是强力观的助缘。弱力观是以下四种智的统称:名色限定智、度疑智、思惟智、道非道智。定:指基础禅那之定。因为它是弱力观的助缘。乐:指安止之前行乐。因为它是基础禅那的助缘。轻安:指不安的平息。因为它是安止前分乐的助缘。喜:指强力喜,因为它是不安平息的助缘。欢悦:指弱力喜,因为它是强力喜的助缘。信:指数数生起之信,因为它是弱力喜的助缘。苦:指轮回之苦,因为它是数数生起信的助缘。生:指带有变异的蕴之生,因为它是轮回之苦的助缘。有:指业有,因为它是变异之生的助缘。以此方法,其余诸句也应理解。巴利
Virāgoti maggo. So hi kilese virājento khepento uppanno, tasmā virāgoti vuccati. Nibbidāti nibbidāñāṇaṃ. Etena balavavipassanaṃ dasseti. Balavavipassanāti bhayatūpaṭṭhāne ñāṇaṃ ādīnavānupassane ñāṇaṃ muñcitukamyatāñāṇaṃ saṅkhārupekkhāñāṇanti catunnaṃ ñāṇānaṃ adhivacanaṃ. Yathābhūtañāṇadassananti yathāsabhāvajānanasaṅkhātaṃ dassanaṃ. Etena taruṇavipassanaṃ dasseti. Taruṇavipassanā hi balavavipassanāya paccayo hoti. Taruṇavipassanāti saṅkhāraparicchede ñāṇaṃ kaṅkhāvitaraṇe ñāṇaṃ sammasane ñāṇaṃ maggāmagge ñāṇanti catunnaṃ ñāṇānaṃ adhivacanaṃ. Samādhīti pādakajjhānasamādhi. So hi taruṇavipassanāya paccayo hoti. Sukhanti appanāya pubbabhāgasukhaṃ. Tañhi pādakajjhānassa paccayo hoti. Passaddhīti darathapaṭippassaddhi. Sā hi appanāpubbabhāgassa sukhassa paccayo hoti. Pītīti balavapīti. Sā hi darathapaṭippassaddhiyā paccayo hoti. Pāmojjanti dubbalapīti. Sā hi balavapītiyā paccayo hoti. Saddhāti aparāparaṃ uppajjanasaddhā. Sā hi dubbalapītiyā paccayo hoti. Dukkhanti vaṭṭadukkhaṃ. Tañhi aparāparasaddhāya paccayo hoti. Jātīti savikārā khandhajāti . Sā hi vaṭṭadukkhassa paccayo hoti. Bhavoti kammabhavo. (So hi savikārāya jātiyā paccayo hoti.) Etenupāyena sesapadānipi veditabbāni.
在“粗大雨滴”中,指的是大颗的雨滴。在“山、山洞、裂缝、支流”这些词里,所谓山洞,是指被名为“迦”的水冲开、被水割裂的山间地带,也叫“山腰”或“河坑”。所谓裂缝,是指八个月不下雨时地面裂开的地方。所谓支流,是指汇入溪流的小水沟。小池,是指小水坑。大池,是指大水坑。小溪,是指小河。大河,是指恒河、耶牟那河等大河流。同样地,比丘们,在“以无明为近因,生起诸行”等句中,应当把无明看作山,把诸行看作云,把识等轮回看作山洞等,把解脱看作大海。巴利
Thullaphusitaketi mahāphusitake. Pabbatakandarapadarasākhāti ettha kandaraṃ nāma ‘ka’ntiladdhanāmena udakena dārito udakabhinno pabbatapadeso, yo ‘‘nitambo’’tipi ‘‘nadīkuñcho’’tipi vuccati. Padaraṃ nāma aṭṭhamāse deve avassante phalito bhūmippadeso. Sākhāti kusumbhagāminiyo khuddakamātikāyo. Kusobbhāti khuddakaāvāṭā. Mahāsobbhāti mahāāvāṭā. Kunnadiyoti khuddakanadiyo. Mahānadiyoti gaṅgāyamunādikā mahāsaritā. Evameva kho, bhikkhave, avijjūpanisā saṅkhārātiādīsu avijjā pabbatoti daṭṭhabbā. Abhisaṅkhārā meghoti, viññāṇādivaṭṭaṃ kandarādayoti, vimutti sāgaroti.
就像雨水落在山顶,先填满山间的沟壑、裂缝等处,然后一步步把大海填满;同样要知道,无明这座山的山顶上,首先降下的是行云之雨。因为未受教导的愚痴凡夫,被无明所障而不知真相,被渴爱驱使而生起欲求,于是造作善业和恶业;这些善业和恶业成为结生识的缘,结生识等又成为名色等的缘。这样一来,就像雨水落在山顶,填满沟壑等处,最终抵达并充满大海一样;从无明山顶降下的行云之雨,通过辗转相续的缘起关系,一步步填满识等轮回的支分而安住。不过,即使佛语在巴利经文中没有直接收录,也应知道,依“在此世间,如来出现于世,从在家生活出家修行”这段经文,佛语其实已经被包含在内了。因为他在自己家中的投生,就是由业有之缘所生的、带有种种变化的生。他亲近佛陀或佛弟子,听闻揭示轮回过患、具备种种相状的佛法开示后,被轮回所逼迫;这样,他带有变化的有蕴之生就成为轮回苦的缘。他被轮回苦所逼迫,一再生起信心,从在家生活出家修行;这样,他的轮回苦就成为他不断生起信心的缘。他并不以仅仅出家为满足,在未满五年的期间里,依止师长,履行义务和修行,精通两部戒本,学习应作与不应作,直到为证得阿罗汉果而解开一切缠缚,取得业处,住在林中,开始修习地遍等。由于他的业处,微弱的喜生起。这喜对他来说是依信心为近因的欢喜,这欢喜成为强盛喜的缘。强盛喜成为身心躁动的止息,那止息成为近行定前分快乐的缘,那快乐成为根本定之定的缘。他以定使心变得柔软堪用,然后修习初阶观。这样,他的根本定之定成为初阶观的缘,初阶观成为强盛观的缘,强盛观成为道智的缘,道智成为果解脱的缘,果解脱成为省察智的缘。应当知道,就像雨水一步步填满大海而安住一样,漏尽者的解脱大海也是一步步填满而安住。第三。巴利
Yathā pabbatamatthake devo vassitvā pabbatakandarādīni pūrento anupubbena mahāsamuddaṃ sāgaraṃ pūreti, evaṃ avijjāpabbatamatthake tāva abhisaṅkhārameghassa vassanaṃ veditabbaṃ. Assutavā hi bālaputhujjano avijjāya aññāṇī hutvā taṇhāya abhilāsaṃ katvā kusalākusalakammaṃ āyūhati, taṃ kusalākusalakammaṃ paṭisandhiviññāṇassa paccayo hoti, paṭisandhiviññāṇādīni nāmarūpādīnaṃ. Iti pabbatamatthake vuṭṭhadevassa kandarādayo pūretvā mahāsamuddaṃ āhacca ṭhitakālo viya avijjāpabbatamatthake vuṭṭhassa abhisaṅkhārameghassa paramparapaccayatāya anupubbena viññāṇādivaṭṭaṃ pūretvā ṭhitakālo. Buddhavacanaṃ pana pāḷiyaṃ agahitampi ‘‘idha tathāgato loke uppajjati, agārasmā anagāriyaṃ pabbajatī’’ti imāya pāḷiyā vasena gahitamevāti veditabbaṃ. Yā hi tassa kulagehe nibbatti, sā kammabhavapaccayā savikārā jāti nāma. So buddhānaṃ vā buddhasāvakānaṃ vā sammukhībhāvaṃ āgamma vaṭṭadosadīpakaṃ lakkhaṇāhaṭaṃ dhammakathaṃ sutvā vaṭṭavasena pīḷito hoti, evamassa savikārā khandhajāti vaṭṭadukkhassa paccayo hoti. So vaṭṭadukkhena pīḷito aparāparaṃ saddhaṃ janetvā agārasmā anagāriyaṃ pabbajati, evamassa vaṭṭadukkhaṃ aparāparasaddhāya paccayo hoti. So pabbajjāmatteneva asantuṭṭho ūnapañcavassakāle nissayaṃ gahetvā vattapaṭipattiṃ pūrento dvemātikā paguṇaṃ katvā kammākammaṃ uggahetvā yāva arahattā nijjaṭaṃ katvā kammaṭṭhānaṃ gahetvā araññe vasanto pathavīkasiṇādīsu kammaṃ ārabhati, tassa kammaṭṭhānaṃ nissāya dubbalapīti uppajjati. Tadassa saddhūpanisaṃ pāmojjaṃ, taṃ balavapītiyā paccayo hoti. Balavapīti darathapaṭippassaddhiyā, sā appanāpubbabhāgasukhassa, taṃ sukhaṃ pādakajjhānasamādhissa. So samādhinā cittakallataṃ janetvā taruṇavipassanāya kammaṃ karoti. Iccassa pādakajjhānasamādhi taruṇavipassanāya paccayo hoti, taruṇavipassanā balavavipassanāya, balavavipassanā maggassa, maggo phalavimuttiyā, phalavimutti paccavekkhaṇañāṇassāti . Evaṃ devassa anupubbena sāgaraṃ pūretvā ṭhitakālo viya khīṇāsavassa vimuttisāgaraṃ pūretvā ṭhitakālo veditabboti. Tatiyaṃ.
《外道经》的注释巴利
4. Aññatitthiyasuttavaṇṇanā
24 第四项中“pāvisī”的意思是“已进入”。但他并不是那时才进入,而是因为想着“我要进入”就出发了,所以才这样说。好比什么呢?好比一个人想着“我要去村里”就出发了,虽然还没到达那个村子,但被人问起“某某人在哪里”时,人们会说“去村里了”,就是这样。“Atippago”:据说那时长老出发的日子实在太早,那些一早出发的比丘们在菩提场、塔庙场、穿衣处这些地方,一直到乞食时间到来之前,都在做些琐碎的事。长老心想:“在乞食时间到来之前,我要和游方者们进行一两次交谈。”于是他心里想:“我何不……?”“游方者的园”:据说那座园位于南门和竹林精舍之间。“在此处”:指在这四种论说中。“持何论、宣说何法?”:意思是问“沙门乔达摩主张什么?宣说什么?对沙门乔达摩的见解怎么看?”“我们应宣说与法相应、随顺于法之理”:我们应当讲述与乔达摩尊者所说的道理相应、随顺的道理。“与法相应的论随转”:以他人所说的道理为自己的道理,使沙门乔达摩的论说得以随转、展开,这样又怎会招来任何哪怕极小的可指责之处呢?这里说的是:怎样才能使沙门乔达摩的论说在一切方面都没有可指责的地方呢?巴利
24. Catutthe pāvisīti paviṭṭho. So ca na tāva paviṭṭho, ‘‘pavisissāmī’’ti nikkhantattā pana evaṃ vutto. Yathā kiṃ? Yathā ‘‘gāmaṃ gamissāmī’’ti nikkhantapuriso taṃ gāmaṃ appattopi ‘‘kahaṃ itthannāmo’’ti vutte ‘‘gāmaṃ gato’’ti vuccati, evaṃ. Atippagoti tadā kira therassa atippagoyeva nikkhantadivaso ahosi, atippagoyeva nikkhantabhikkhū bodhiyaṅgaṇe cetiyaṅgaṇe nivāsanapārupanaṭṭhāneti imesu ṭhānesu yāva bhikkhācāravelā hoti, tāva papañcaṃ karonti. Therassa pana ‘‘yāva bhikkhācāravelā hoti, tāva paribbājakehi saddhiṃ ekadvekathāvāre karissāmī’’ti cintayato yaṃnūnāhanti etadahosi. Paribbājakānaṃ ārāmoti so kira ārāmo dakkhiṇadvārassa ca veḷuvanassa ca antarā ahosi. Idhāti imesu catūsu vādesu. Kiṃvādī kimakkhāyīti kiṃ vadati kiṃ ācikkhati, kiṃ ettha samaṇassa gotamassa dassananti pucchanti. Dhammassa cānudhammaṃ byākareyyāmāti, bhotā gotamena yaṃ vuttaṃ kāraṇaṃ, tassa anukāraṇaṃ katheyyāma. Sahadhammiko vādānupātoti parehi vuttakāraṇena sakāraṇo hutvā samaṇassa gotamassa vādānupāto vādappavatti viññūhi garahitabbaṃ kāraṇaṃ koci appamattakopi kathaṃ nāgaccheyya? Idaṃ vuttaṃ hoti – kathaṃ sabbākārenapi samaṇassa gotamassa vāde gārayhaṃ kāraṇaṃ na bhaveyyāti?
他们说“以触为缘而有苦”,意思就是他们这样主张。其中“在那里”,指的是在四种主张当中。“他们确实除了触之外……”这句话,是为了论证他们所承认的“那也是以触为缘”这一主张。因为离开了触,就不可能感受苦,所以应当知道:“那也是以触为缘”,这就是这里要表达的核心意思。巴利
Itivadanti phassapaccayā dukkhanti evaṃ vadantoti attho. Tatrāti tesu catūsu vādesu. Te vata aññatra phassāti idaṃ ‘‘tadapi phassapaccayā’’ti paṭiññāya sādhakavacanaṃ. Yasmā hi na vinā phassena dukkhapaṭisaṃvedanā atthi, tasmā jānitabbametaṃ yathā ‘‘tadapi phassapaccayā’’ti ayamettha adhippāyo.
“善哉,善哉,阿难!”这一声赞叹是给舍利弗长老的,但世尊同时也对阿难长老说。在“有一次”这句话里,“这里”只是一个虚词,意思是“一时”。说这句话是为了表明:“并不是只有舍利弗进入过王舍城,我也进入过;并不是只有他生起过这样的想法,我也生起过;并不是只有他和那些游方者有过那样的对话,我以前也有过。”巴利
Sādhu, sādhu, ānandāti ayaṃ sādhukāro sāriputtattherassa dinno, ānandattherena pana saddhiṃ bhagavā āmantesi. Ekamidāhanti ettha idhāti nipātamattaṃ, ekaṃ samayanti attho. Idaṃ vacanaṃ ‘‘na kevalaṃ sāriputtova rājagahaṃ paviṭṭho, ahampi pāvisiṃ. Na kevalañca tassevāyaṃ vitakko uppanno, mayhampi uppajji. Na kevalañca tasseva sā titthiyehi saddhiṃ kathā jātā, mayhampi jātapubbā’’ti dassanatthaṃ vuttaṃ.
“稀有!未曾有!”这两种都是在表达惊叹。不过这里的词义是:值得合掌赞叹,所以叫“稀有”;以前没有而现在有了,所以叫“未曾有”。以一句:就是以“触为缘而有苦”这一句。因为这一句已经说出了否定一切论说的意思。就是这个意思:就是“触为缘而有苦”这个缘起的道理。这个意义应该在这里显现出来:意思是这个意义应当在这里呈现。现在,长老为了让关于老死等的缘起说法既义理甚深又显现甚深,说了“如果我,尊者……”等之后,抓住这些话所依的根本语句,开示还灭的道理,说“只是六……”等。其余的内容都浅显易懂。第四。巴利
Acchariyaṃabbhutanti ubhayampetaṃ vimhayadīpanameva. Vacanattho panettha accharaṃ paharituṃ yuttanti acchariyaṃ. Abhūtapubbaṃ bhūtanti abbhutaṃ. Ekena padenāti ‘‘phassapaccayā dukkha’’nti iminā ekena padena. Etena hi sabbavādānaṃ paṭikkhepattho vutto. Esevatthoti esoyeva phassapaccayā dukkhanti paṭiccasamuppādattho. Taññevettha paṭibhātūti taññevettha upaṭṭhātu. Idāni thero jarāmaraṇādikāya paṭiccasamuppādakathāya taṃ atthagambhīrañceva gambhīrāvabhāsañca karonto sace maṃ, bhantetiādiṃ vatvā yaṃmūlakā kathā uppannā, tadeva padaṃ gahetvā vivaṭṭaṃ dassento channaṃtvevātiādimāha. Sesaṃ uttānamevāti. Catutthaṃ.
第五 浮弥经的注释巴利
5. Bhūmijasuttavaṇṇanā
25-26 25-26.“浮弥佐”是那位长老的名字。剩下的内容,这里也应当按前面那部经所讲的方式来理解。不过这里有一个不同之处:因为这种苦和乐并不只是以触为缘才生起,它也可以通过身体造作,通过语言、通过心意造作;可以由自己造作,也可以由别人造作;可以由有正知的人造作,也可以由没有正知的人造作。因此,为了显示它还有其他不同的缘,才说了“阿难,如果在身上……”等等。
“以身思为因”,意思是以通过身门生起的思为因。语思和意思也是这样。在这里,通过身门,按欲界善和不善来算,有二十种思;通过语门也一样有二十种。通过意门,加上九种色界和无色界的思,一共二十九种。这样,三个门加起来共有六十九种思。以这些思为缘,就显示了果报的苦和乐。“以无明为缘”这句话,是为了说明那些思也是以无明为缘的。
然而,那些如上所说由各种思构成的身行、语行、意行,在没有人催促时,自己以无行的心来造作;在受人催促时,也会以有行的心来造作。又比如,知道“他造了这样的业,这业的果报将会如此这般”,既知道业也知道果报而造作;就像父母在礼敬佛塔等时,孩子们跟着模仿,只知道造业本身,却不知道“这个业的果报是这样”,在不知道果报的情况下也会造作。因此,为了显示这一点,才说了“阿难,或者自己造作那身行……”等等。巴利
25-26. Pañcame bhūmijoti tassa therassa nāmaṃ. Sesamidhāpi purimasutte vuttanayeneva veditabbaṃ. Ayaṃ pana viseso – yasmā idaṃ sukhadukkhaṃ na kevalaṃ phassapaccayā uppajjati, kāyenapi kariyamānaṃ karīyati, vācāyapi manasāpi, attanāpi kariyamānaṃ karīyati, parenapi kariyamānaṃ karīyati, sampajānenapi kariyamānaṃ karīyati, asampajānenapi, tasmā tassa aparampi paccayavisesaṃ dassetuṃ kāye vā hānanda, satītiādimāha. Kāyasañcetanāhetūti kāyadvāre uppannacetanāhetu. Vacīsañcetanāmanosañcetanāsupi eseva nayo. Ettha ca kāyadvāre kāmāvacarakusalākusalavasena vīsati cetanā labbhanti, tathā vacīdvāre. Manodvāre navahi rūpārūpacetanāhi saddhiṃ ekūnatiṃsāti tīsu dvāresu ekūnasattati cetanā honti, tappaccayaṃ vipākasukhadukkhaṃ dassitaṃ. Avijjāpaccayā cāti idaṃ tāpi cetanā avijjāpaccayā hontīti dassanatthaṃ vuttaṃ. Yasmā pana taṃ yathāvuttacetanābhedaṃ kāyasaṅkhārañceva vacīsaṅkhārañca manosaṅkhārañca parehi anussāhito sāmaṃ asaṅkhārikacittena karoti, parehi kāriyamāno sasaṅkhārikacittenāpi karoti, ‘‘idaṃ nāma kammaṃ karoti, tassa evarūpo nāma vipāko bhavissatī’’ti, evaṃ kammañca vipākañca jānantopi karoti, mātāpitūsu cetiyavandanādīni karontesu anukarontā dārakā viya kevalaṃ kammameva jānanto ‘‘imassa pana kammassa ayaṃ vipāko’’ti vipākaṃ ajānantopi karoti, tasmā taṃ dassetuṃ sāmaṃ vā taṃ, ānanda, kāyasaṅkhāraṃ abhisaṅkharotītiādi vuttaṃ.
阿难,所谓“在这些法中”,是指在“阿难,或者自己造作那身行”等四种场合里所说的二百七十六种思——在这些法中,无明以亲依止的方式贯穿其中。因为所有这些思,都归入“以无明为缘而有行”这一句里。现在为了显示还灭,就说了“无明灭尽……”等话。
“那个身不存在”:当某个身存在时,以身思为缘,内心的苦乐就会生起;当那个身不存在时,就不会生起。语和意也是这样。另外,这里的“身”也可以指由思构成的行为之身,“语”指由思构成的语言,“意”指就是业的意念。或者,“身”也可以理解为作为门的身体。语和意也是这样。
那么,漏尽者也会礼敬塔庙、讲说佛法、作意业处,为什么说他的身、语、意不存在呢?因为不感果报。漏尽者所造的业,既不是善,也不是不善,它不产生果报,只停留在唯作的状态,因此说他的身、语、意不存在。巴利
Imesu, ānanda, dhammesūti ye ime ‘‘sāmaṃ vā taṃ, ānanda, kāyasaṅkhāra’’ntiādīsu catūsu ṭhānesu vuttā chasattati dvesatā cetanādhammā, imesu dhammesu avijjā upanissayakoṭiyā anupatitā. Sabbepi hi te ‘‘avijjāpaccayā saṅkhārā’’ti ettheva saṅgahaṃ gacchanti. Idāni vivaṭṭaṃ dassento avijjāya tvevātiādimāha. So kāyo na hotīti yasmiṃ kāye sati kāyasañcetanāpaccayaṃ ajjhattaṃ sukhadukkhaṃ uppajjati, so kāyo na hoti. Vācāmanesupi eseva nayo. Apica kāyoti cetanākāyo, vācāpi cetanāvācā, manopi kammamanoyeva. Dvārakāyo vā kāyo. Vācāmanesupi eseva nayo. Khīṇāsavo cetiyaṃ vandati, dhammaṃ bhaṇati, kammaṭṭhānaṃ manasi karoti, kathamassa kāyādayo na hontīti? Avipākattā. Khīṇāsavena hi kataṃ kammaṃ neva kusalaṃ hoti nākusalaṃ. Avipākaṃ hutvā kiriyāmatte tiṭṭhati, tenassa te kāyādayo na hontīti vuttaṃ.
在“那并不是田”等说法里,从生长的意义上说,那不是田;从依止的意义上说,那不是事;从缘的意义上说,那不是处;从因由的意义上说,那不是诤事。因为以思为根本的内在苦乐会生起,但由于那些思不具备生长等意义,所以对那种苦乐来说,它既不是田,也不是事,不是处,不是诤事。在这部经里,讲到感受等时,只说了苦乐,而且那只是指果报。第五。巴利
Khettaṃ taṃ na hotītiādīsupi viruhanaṭṭhena taṃ khettaṃ na hoti, patiṭṭhānaṭṭhena vatthu na hoti, paccayaṭṭhena āyatanaṃ na hoti, kāraṇaṭṭhena adhikaraṇaṃ na hoti. Sañcetanāmūlakañhi ajjhattaṃ sukhadukkhaṃ uppajjeyya, sā sañcetanā etesaṃ viruhanādīnaṃ atthānaṃ abhāvena tassa sukhadukkhassa neva khettaṃ, na vatthu na āyatanaṃ, na adhikaraṇaṃ hotīti. Imasmiṃ sutte vedanādīsu sukhadukkhameva kathitaṃ, tañca kho vipākamevāti. Pañcamaṃ.
第六经《优波婆那经》本身内容很浅显。不过这里讲的只是轮回的苦。第六。巴利
Chaṭṭhaṃ upavāṇasuttaṃ uttānameva. Ettha pana vaṭṭadukkhameva kathitanti. Chaṭṭhaṃ.
第7经《缘经》的注释巴利
7. Paccayasuttavaṇṇanā
27-28 27-28. 在第七经中,按照顺序解说时,取最后一句来说:“诸比丘,什么是老死?”等等。这样了知缘,就是依苦谛来了知缘。缘的集起等,也应当只依集谛等来理解。具见者,就是具足道见的人。见成就,是它的同义词。已来到这正法,就是已来到道之正法。见,就是只见道之正法。以有学智,就是只以道智。以有学明,就是只以道明。入法流,就是只入名为道之法流。圣者,就是已超越凡夫地的人。有决择慧,就是具足决择慧的人。触甘露门而住:甘露就是涅槃,它的门就是圣道;触证圣道之后而安住。第八经义理浅显明白。第七经、第八经。巴利
27-28. Sattame paṭipāṭiyā vuttesu pariyosānapadaṃ gahetvā katamañca, bhikkhave, jarāmaraṇantiādi vuttaṃ. Evaṃ paccayaṃ pajānātīti evaṃ dukkhasaccavasena paccayaṃ jānāti. Paccayasamudayādayopi samudayasaccādīnaṃyeva vasena veditabbā. Diṭṭhisampannoti maggadiṭṭhiyā sampanno. Dassanasampannoti tasseva vevacanaṃ. Āgato imaṃ saddhammanti maggasaddhammaṃ āgato. Passatīti maggasaddhammameva passati. Sekkhena ñāṇenāti maggañāṇeneva. Sekkhāya vijjāyāti maggavijjāya eva. Dhammasotaṃ samāpannoti maggasaṅkhātameva dhammasotaṃ samāpanno. Ariyoti puthujjanabhūmiṃ atikkanto. Nibbedhikapaññoti nibbedhikapaññāya samannāgato. Amatadvāraṃ āhaccatiṭṭhatīti amataṃ nāma nibbānaṃ, tassa dvāraṃ ariyamaggaṃ āhacca tiṭṭhatīti. Aṭṭhamaṃ uttānameva. Sattamaaṭṭhamāni.
《沙门婆罗门经》的注释巴利
9. Samaṇabrāhmaṇasuttavaṇṇanā
29-30 29-30. 第九经是依照诵经比丘们的意愿而说的。因为他们把前缀“parī”加进去之后,在被人解说时就能够通达领会。第九。巴利
29-30. Navamaṃ akkharabhāṇakānaṃ bhikkhūnaṃ ajjhāsayena vuttaṃ. Te hi parīti upasaggaṃ pakkhipitvā vuccamāne paṭivijjhituṃ sakkonti. Navamaṃ.
第十经里,一切都很清楚。在这两部经中,只讲了四圣谛的通达。第十经。巴利
Dasame sabbaṃ uttānameva. Imesu dvīsu suttesu catusaccapaṭivedhova kathito. Dasamaṃ.
迦拉罗刹帝利品巴利
4. Kaḷārakhattiyavaggo
《已生经》的注释巴利
1. Bhūtasuttavaṇṇanā
31 31. 在《迦罗罗刹帝利品》的第一经中,“阿耆多所问”是指阿耆多青年所问的问题。“已数法”是指已经了知、衡量、确定的法。“有学”是指七种有学。“众多”是针对那七个人而说“众多”。“于此”是指在这教法中。“贤善者”:所谓贤善就是智慧,因为具足智慧所以称为贤善者。他请求说:“您是智者,请说。”“行仪”是指生活方式、行为方式、活动范围、住处、修行方式。“君”是对世尊的称呼。“我向您请问有学、已数法者及诸漏尽者的行道,尊者,您是智者,请为我开示。”这是此处的大意。巴利
31. Kaḷārakhattiyavaggassa paṭhame ajitapañheti ajitamāṇavena pucchitapañhe. Saṅkhātadhammāseti saṅkhātadhammā vuccanti ñātadhammā tulitadhammā tīritadhammā. Sekkhāti satta sekkhā. Puthūti teyeva satta jane sandhāya puthūti vuttaṃ. Idhāti imasmiṃ sāsane. Nipakoti nepakkaṃ vuccati paññā, tāya samannāgatattā nipako, tvaṃ paṇḍito pabrūhīti yācati. Iriyanti vuttiṃ ācāraṃ gocaraṃ vihāraṃ paṭipattiṃ. Mārisāti bhagavantaṃ ālapati. Sekkhānañca saṅkhātadhammānañca khīṇāsavānañca paṭipattiṃ mayā pucchito paṇḍita, mārisa, mayhaṃ kathehīti ayamettha saṅkhepattho.
默然指:为什么直到被问了第三次,他还是默然不语?是对问题有疑惑,还是对意乐有疑惑?其实是对意乐有疑惑,并非对问题。据说他这样想:导师想让我为他讲说有学与无学所应到达的修行之道,而这可以从蕴、界、处、缘起等许多方面来解说。我该怎样讲说,才能契合导师的意乐呢?这时导师思惟:除了我之外,在持钵游行的弟子中,论智慧没有能比得上舍利弗的。我问他问题,问到第三次,他还是默然。他是在对问题疑惑,还是对意乐疑惑?随后了知他是对意乐有疑惑。于是为了给他指出解说问题的门径,便说:舍利弗,你看见这是已生吗?巴利
Tuṇhī ahosīti kasmā yāva tatiyaṃ puṭṭho tuṇhī ahosi? Kiṃ pañhe kaṅkhati, udāhu ajjhāsayeti? Ajjhāsaye kaṅkhati, no pañhe. Evaṃ kirassa ahosi – ‘‘satthā maṃ sekkhāsekkhānaṃ āgamanīyapaṭipadaṃ kathāpetukāmo; sā ca khandhavasena dhātuvasena āyatanavasena paccayākāravasenāti bahūhi kāraṇehi sakkā kathetuṃ. Kathaṃ kathento nu kho satthu ajjhāsayaṃ gahetvā kathetuṃ sakkhissāmī’’ti? Atha satthā cintesi – ‘‘ṭhapetvā maṃ añño pattaṃ ādāya caranto sāvako nāma paññāya sāriputtasamo natthi. Ayampi mayā pañhaṃ puṭṭho yāva tatiyaṃ tuṇhī eva. Pañhe nu kho kaṅkhati, udāhu ajjhāsaye’’ti. Atha ‘‘ajjhāsaye’’ti ñatvā pañhakathanatthāya nayaṃ dadamāno bhūtamidanti, sāriputta, passasīti āha.
这里,“已生”是指已经生起、已经形成的东西,这是对五蕴的称呼。导师这样提示舍利弗:“舍利弗,你依五蕴来解说这个问题吧。”尊者得到了这个提示后,解答这个问题就像站在岸边的人眼前展开一片开阔的大海一样,以百种方式、千种方式清楚地呈现出来。于是他回答说:“这是已生”等等。其中,“这是已生”指这个已经形成的五蕴。“以正慧看见”是指与观智相应的道智,正确地看见。“已行道”是指从持戒开始,一直到阿拉汉道,为了厌离等目的而行道。为什么开始说“此食生”?因为这五蕴依食而住,所以为了显示它名为食生,便开始了这段论释。这样,以这种方式也说明了有学道。“此食灭”是指那些食的灭。为什么开始说这个?因为那五蕴由食灭而灭,所以为了显示它名为食灭生,便开始了这段论释。这样,以这种方式也说明了有学道。“厌离”等一切应当知道是原因语。“无取著而解脱”是指不以四种取著执取任何事物,从而解脱。“善哉,善哉”是指以此随喜尊者的解答,自己也同样解答,于是又说“这是已生”等等。第一。巴利
Tattha bhūtanti jātaṃ nibbattaṃ, khandhapañcakassetaṃ nāmaṃ. Iti satthā ‘‘pañcakkhandhavasena, sāriputta, imaṃ pañhaṃ kathehī’’ti therassa nayaṃ deti. Sahanayadānena pana therassa tīre ṭhitapurisassa vivaṭo ekaṅgaṇo mahāsamuddo viya nayasatena nayasahassena pañhabyākaraṇaṃ upaṭṭhāsi. Atha naṃ byākaronto bhūtamidanti, bhantetiādimāha. Tattha bhūtamidanti idaṃ nibbattaṃ khandhapañcakaṃ. Sammappaññāya passatīti saha vipassanāya maggapaññāya sammā passati. Paṭipanno hotīti sīlato paṭṭhāya yāva arahattamaggā nibbidādīnaṃ atthāya paṭipanno hoti. Tadāhārasambhavanti idaṃ kasmā ārabhi? Etaṃ khandhapañcakaṃ āhāraṃ paṭicca ṭhitaṃ, tasmā taṃ āhārasambhavaṃ nāma katvā dassetuṃ idaṃ ārabhi. Iti imināpi pariyāyena sekkhapaṭipadā kathitā hoti. Tadāhāranirodhāti tesaṃ āhārānaṃ nirodhena. Idaṃ kasmā ārabhi? Tañhi khandhapañcakaṃ āhāranirodhā nirujjhati, tasmā taṃ āhāranirodhasambhavaṃ nāma katvā dassetuṃ idaṃ ārabhi. Iti imināpi pariyāyena sekkhasseva paṭipadā kathitā. Nibbidāti ādīni sabbāni kāraṇavacanānīti veditabbāni. Anupādā vimuttoti catūhi upādānehi kañci dhammaṃ agahetvā vimutto. Sādhu sādhūti iminā therassa byākaraṇaṃ sampahaṃsetvā sayampi tatheva byākaronto puna ‘‘bhūtamida’’ntiādimāhāti. Paṭhamaṃ.
《咖喇拉经》的注释巴利
2. Kaḷārasuttavaṇṇanā
32 32. 第二经中,“迦罗罗刹帝利”是那位长老的名字。不过他的牙齿黄褐色,而且长得不整齐,所以被称为“迦罗罗”。“退转于低劣”是指为了低劣的在家人身份而退回去。“未得安息”是说:他确实没有获得安息、依靠和立足之处,这是在表明他肯定没有证得三道和三果。如果他证得了那些,就不会舍弃学处而退转于低劣。这是长老的本意。“贤友,我不疑惑”是说:“贤友,对于是否已获得安息,我并不疑惑。”因为长老以声闻波罗蜜智为依靠,所以他不疑惑。而“贤友,未来”这一句,是在问他是否证得阿拉汉果,也就是问:“你们未来的结生已经打开,还是尚未打开?”“贤友,我不疑惑”这句话,是长老表明自己对此没有疑惑。巴利
32. Dutiye kaḷārakhattiyoti tassa therassa nāmaṃ. Dantā panassa kaḷārā visamasaṇṭhānā, tasmā ‘‘kaḷāro’’ti vuccati. Hīnāyāvattoti hīnassa gihibhāvassa atthāya nivatto. Assāsamalatthāti assāsaṃ avassayaṃ patiṭṭhaṃ na hi nūna alattha, tayo magge tīṇi ca phalāni nūna nālatthāti dīpeti. Yadi hi tāni labheyya, na sikkhaṃ paccakkhāya hīnāyāvatteyyāti ayaṃ therassa adhippāyo. Na khvāhaṃ, āvusoti ahaṃ kho, āvuso, ‘‘assāsaṃ patto, na patto’’ti na kaṅkhāmi. Therassa hi sāvakapāramīñāṇaṃ avassayo, tasmā so na kaṅkhati. Āyatiṃ panāvusoti iminā ‘‘āyatiṃ paṭisandhi tumhākaṃ ugghāṭitā, na ugghāṭitā’’ti arahattappattiṃ pucchati. Na khvāhaṃ, āvuso, vicikicchāmīti iminā thero tattha vicikicchābhāvaṃ dīpeti.
他前往世尊那里,意思是“我要把这件听闻的缘由禀告世尊”,于是就去了。“已记说正智”,就是记说证得了阿罗汉果。“生已尽”,并不是长老自己这样记说的,而是这位长老满心欢喜、生起净信,这样把词句加上去说的。“吩咐一位比丘”,是导师听了之后心里想:“舍利弗沉稳而深邃,他不会因为什么原因就这样记说。不过,这个问题会被简要地回答。我把他叫来,让他解答这个问题吧。”于是便吩咐了一位比丘。巴利
Yena bhagavā tenupasaṅkamīti ‘‘imaṃ sutakāraṇaṃ bhagavato ārocessāmī’’ti upasaṅkami. Aññā byākatāti arahattaṃ byākataṃ. Khīṇā jātīti na therena evaṃ byākatā, ayaṃ pana thero tuṭṭho pasanno evaṃ padabyañjanāni āropetvā āha. Aññataraṃ bhikkhuṃ āmantesīti taṃ sutvā satthā cintesi – ‘‘sāriputto dhīro gambhīro. Na so kenaci kāraṇena evaṃ byākarissati. Saṃkhittena pana pañho byākato bhavissati. Pakkosāpetvā naṃ pañhaṃ byākarāpessāmī’’ti aññataraṃ bhikkhuṃ āmantesi.
“舍利弗,假如你……”这里,世尊这样问,是为了让他把证悟说出来。世尊心想:“他不会凭自己的习惯就宣说证悟。我先问他这个问题,他一边解说,一边就会把证悟说出来。”
“贤友,生以什么为缘”意思是:贤友,所谓的生,是以什么为缘?当那个缘灭尽时,在生的缘已灭尽的当下,就可知道被称为生的这个果也已经灭尽了。
在这里,长老并不是对问题有疑惑,而是对世尊的内心意图有疑惑。据说他当时这样想:“所谓证悟,可以用‘渴爱已灭尽’‘取已灭尽’‘有已灭尽’‘缘已灭尽’‘烦恼已灭尽’等许多理由来回答,可是要怎样解说,才能把握导师的内心意图呢?”巴利
Sace taṃ sāriputtāti idaṃ bhagavā ‘‘na esa attano dhammatāya aññaṃ byākarissati, pañhametaṃ pucchissāmi, taṃ kathentova aññaṃ byākarissatī’’ti aññaṃ byākarāpetuṃ evaṃ pucchi. Yaṃnidānāvuso, jātīti, āvuso, ayaṃ jāti nāma yaṃpaccayā, tassa paccayassa khayā khīṇasmiṃ jātiyā paccaye jātisaṅkhātaṃ phalaṃ khīṇanti viditaṃ. Idhāpi ca thero pañhe akaṅkhitvā ajjhāsaye kaṅkhati. Evaṃ kirassa ahosi – ‘‘aññā nāma taṇhā khīṇā, upādānaṃ khīṇaṃ, bhavo khīṇo, paccayo khīṇo, kilesā khīṇātiādīhi bahūhi kāraṇehi sakkā byākātuṃ, kathaṃ kathento pana satthu ajjhāsayaṃ gahetuṃ sakkhissāmī’’ti.
他虽然对世尊的心意仍有疑惑,但并没有把问题搁在一边,而是直接依缘起的方式作答。导师也正希望他以缘起的方式作答,所以他在回答的同时就把握住了世尊的心意。他当下就知道:“我已经把握住导师的心意了。”于是,这个问题的解答以百种方式、千种方式在他心中呈现。不过,因为世尊又进一步提问,所以应当知道,世尊是对那个解答表示随喜的。巴利
Kiñcāpi evaṃ ajjhāsaye kaṅkhati, pañhaṃ pana aṭṭhapetvāva paccayākāravasena byākāsi. Satthāpi paccayākāravaseneva byākarāpetukāmo, tasmā esa byākarontova ajjhāsayaṃ gaṇhi. Tāvadeva ‘‘gahito me satthu ajjhāsayo’’ti aññāsi. Athassa nayasatena nayasahassena pañhabyākaraṇaṃ upaṭṭhāsi. Yasmā pana bhagavā uttari pañhaṃ pucchati, tasmā tena taṃ byākaraṇaṃ anumoditanti veditabbaṃ.
为什么又要引出“如何了知你……”这个问题呢?是为了让他在自己擅长的领域里作狮子吼。据说,长老曾在须卡那卡塔列那洞门口,当世尊为长爪游方者讲说《受取受经》时,他手拿棕榈叶扇为导师扇风,站在一旁,总摄三种受,从而证得了声闻波罗蜜智。这就是他擅长的领域。世尊知道他会安住在这个领域里作狮子吼,所以特意问了他这个问题。无常,是因为存在之后又归于不存在,所以叫无常。凡无常者即是苦,在这里,乐受在持续时是乐,在变异时是苦;苦受在持续时是苦,在变异时是乐;不苦不乐受在觉知时是乐,在不觉知时是苦。不过,从变异的边际来看,一切受都成了苦。了知,是因为这样了知三种受都是苦,所以表明在这种情况下渴爱不会生起。巴利
Kathaṃjānato pana teti idaṃ kasmā ārabhi? Savisaye sīhanādaṃ nadāpetuṃ. Thero kira sūkaranikhātaleṇadvāre dīghanakhaparibbājakassa vedanāpariggahasutte kathiyamāne tālavaṇṭaṃ gahetvā satthāraṃ bījayamāno ṭhito tisso vedanā pariggahetvā sāvakapāramīñāṇaṃ adhigato, ayamassa savisayo. Imasmiṃ savisaye ṭhito sīhanādaṃ nadissatīti naṃ sandhāya satthā idaṃ pañhaṃ pucchi. Aniccāti hutvā abhāvaṭṭhena aniccā. Yadaniccaṃ taṃ dukkhanti ettha kiñcāpi sukhā vedanā ṭhitisukhā vipariṇāmadukkhā, dukkhā vedanā ṭhitidukkhā vipariṇāmasukhā, adukkhamasukhā ñāṇasukhā aññāṇadukkhā, vipariṇāmakoṭiyā pana sabbāva dukkhā nāma jātā. Viditanti yasmā evaṃ vedanāttayaṃ dukkhanti viditaṃ, tasmā yā tattha taṇhā, sā na upaṭṭhāsīti dasseti.
“善哉,善哉”是世尊对长老能够辨别诸受的随喜赞叹。因为长老虽然并没有被直接告知受是一种、两种、三种或四种,却按照世尊所说的方式,自己了知了受有三种区分,所以世尊为了随喜他,才这样说。“于苦中”这句,世尊是出于这样的意图说的:“舍利弗,你用‘由于这个原因,渴爱不会在诸受中生起’来回答,这回答得很好。不过,你在分别‘三种受’时,说得太详细了;其实你即使只回答‘于苦中’,也同样回答得很好。因为只要了知‘凡有感受,皆是苦’,渴爱就不会在诸受中停留。”巴利
Sādhusādhūti therassa vedanāparicchedajānane sampahaṃsanaṃ. Thero hi vedanā ekāti vā dve tisso catassoti vā avuttepi vuttanayena tāsaṃ tissoti paricchedaṃ aññāsi, tena taṃ bhagavā sampahaṃsanto evamāha. Dukkhasminti idaṃ bhagavā iminā adhippāyena āha – ‘‘sāriputta, yaṃ tayā ‘iminā kāraṇena vedanāsu taṇhā na upaṭṭhāsī’ti byākataṃ, taṃ subyākataṃ. ‘Tisso vedanā’ti vibhajantena pana te atippapañco kato, taṃ ‘dukkhasmi’nti byākarontenapi hi te subyākatameva bhaveyya. Yaṃkiñci vedayitaṃ, taṃ dukkhanti ñātamattepi hi vedanāsu taṇhā na tiṭṭhati’’.
“如何解脱”是什么意思呢?就是问:是哪些解脱?你是通过哪一种解脱而宣称已证得正智?所谓“内解脱”,是指以内解脱,也就是通过把握内在诸行而证得阿罗汉果。这里应当了解有四种情况:向内倾注而向内出起、向内倾注而向外出起、向外倾注而向外出起、向外倾注而向内出起。因为,心向内倾注之后,也还是应当观察外在的诸法;心向外倾注之后,也还是应当观察内在的诸法。因此,有的比丘把智慧投向内在诸行,确定它们之后,又转向外在;把握了外在之后,再转回内在。当他在观照内在诸行时,道就出起。这就叫作向内倾注而向内出起。有的比丘把智慧投向内在诸行,确定它们之后,转向外在。当他在观照外在诸行时,道就出起。这就叫作向内倾注而向外出起。有的比丘把智慧投向外在诸行,确定它们之后,转向内在;把握了内在之后,再转向外在。当他在观照外在诸行时,道就出起。这就叫作向外倾注而向外出起。有的比丘把智慧投向外在诸行,确定它们之后,转向内在。当他在观照内在诸行时,道就出起。这就叫作向外倾注而向内出起。那位长老为了表明“我通过把握内在诸行,在确定它们的时候,以道的出起证得了阿罗汉果”,所以说道:“贤友,我是以内解脱……”巴利
Kathaṃ vimokkhāti katarā vimokkhā, katarena vimokkhena tayā aññā byākatāti attho? Ajjhattaṃ vimokkhāti ajjhattavimokkhena, ajjhattasaṅkhāre pariggahetvā pattaarahattenāti attho. Tattha catukkaṃ veditabbaṃ – ajjhattaṃ abhiniveso ajjhattaṃ vuṭṭhānaṃ, ajjhattaṃ abhiniveso bahiddhā vuṭṭhānaṃ, bahiddhā abhiniveso bahiddhā vuṭṭhānaṃ, bahiddhā abhiniveso ajjhattaṃ vuṭṭhānanti. Ajjhattañhi abhinivesitvā bahiddhādhammāpi daṭṭhabbāyeva, bahiddhā abhinivesitvā ajjhattadhammāpi. Tasmā koci bhikkhu ajjhattaṃ saṅkhāresu ñāṇaṃ otāretvā te vavatthapetvā bahiddhā otāreti, bahiddhāpi pariggahetvā puna ajjhattaṃ otāreti, tassa ajjhatta saṅkhāre sammasanakāle maggavuṭṭhānaṃ hoti. Iti ajjhattaṃ abhiniveso ajjhattaṃ vuṭṭhānaṃ nāma. Koci ajjhattaṃ saṅkhāresu ñāṇaṃ otāretvā te vavatthapetvā bahiddhā otāreti, tassa bahiddhā saṅkhāre sammasanakāle maggavuṭṭhānaṃ hoti. Iti ajjhattaṃ abhiniveso bahiddhā vuṭṭhānaṃ nāma. Koci bahiddhā saṅkhāresu ñāṇaṃ otāretvā, te vavatthapetvā ajjhattaṃ otāreti, ajjhattampi pariggahetvā puna bahiddhā otāreti, tassa bahiddhā saṅkhāre sammasanakāle maggavuṭṭhānaṃ hoti. Iti bahiddhā abhiniveso bahiddhā vuṭṭhānaṃ nāma. Koci bahiddhā saṅkhāresu ñāṇaṃ otāretvā te vavatthapetvā ajjhattaṃ otāreti, tassa ajjhattasaṅkhāre sammasanakāle maggavuṭṭhānaṃ hoti. Iti bahiddhā abhiniveso ajjhattaṃ vuṭṭhānaṃ nāma. Tatra thero ‘‘ajjhattasaṅkhāre pariggahetvā tesaṃ vavatthānakāle maggavuṭṭhānena arahattaṃ pattosmī’’ti dassento ajjhattaṃ vimokkhā khvāhaṃ, āvusoti āha.
“由一切取的灭尽”,就是指四种取全部灭尽。“我这样具念而住”,意思是我以那种方式具足正念而安住。“像具念者那样而住”,意思是以那种方式,具足正念而安住的我。“诸漏不流注”,对于眼所见的诸色等,那些通过六门在六种所缘上流注、漏出、相续运转的欲漏、有漏等诸漏,不再流注,也不再增长,也就是说它们不会在我心中生起。“也不轻视自己”,就是我不轻视自己。这就说明他已经断除了慢心。这样一来,这种了知就变得清净而澄明。巴利
Sabbupādānakkhayāti sabbesaṃ catunnampi upādānānaṃ khayena. Tathā sato viharāmīti tenākārena satiyā samannāgato viharāmi. Yathā sataṃ viharantanti yenākārena maṃ satiyā samannāgataṃ viharantaṃ. Āsavā nānussavantīti cakkhuto rūpe savanti āsavanti sandanti pavattantīti evaṃ chahi dvārehi chasu ārammaṇesu savanadhammā kāmāsavādayo āsavā nānussavanti nānuppavaḍḍhanti, yathā me na uppajjantīti attho. Attānañca nāvajānāmīti attānañca na avajānāmi. Iminā omānapahānaṃ kathitaṃ. Evañhi sati pajānanā pasannā hoti.
“沙门”是指佛陀沙门。对于这些漏,我不怀疑,也就是说,对于它们,我不会这样怀疑:“哪个是欲漏,哪个是有漏,哪个是见漏,哪个是无明漏?”——不会从各自具体形态的区分上怀疑;也不会这样怀疑:“有四种漏”——不会从数量界定上怀疑。“它们已被我断除,我不疑惑”:它们已被我断除,我不会对此生起疑惑。世尊说这段话,是为了指出:“即使你这样回答,也算回答得好;但如果你说‘贤友,我以内解脱……’等等,那就说得太繁琐了。”巴利
Samaṇenāti buddhasamaṇena. Tesvāhaṃ na kaṅkhāmīti tesu ahaṃ ‘‘kataro kāmāsavo, kataro bhavāsavo, kataro diṭṭhāsavo, kataro avijjāsavo’’ti evaṃ sarūpabhedatopi, ‘‘cattāro āsavā’’ti evaṃ gaṇanaparicchedatopi na kaṅkhāmi. Te me pahīnāti na vicikicchāmīti te mayhaṃ pahīnāti vicikicchaṃ na uppādemi. Idaṃ bhagavā ‘‘evaṃ byākarontenapi tayā subyākataṃ bhaveyya ‘ajjhattaṃ vimokkhā khvāhaṃ, āvuso’tiādīni pana te vadantena atippapañco kato’’ti dassento āha.
从座位上起身,进入精舍:也就是从铺设好的殊胜佛座上起身,走进精舍里面的香室,而当时大众还没有散去。为什么?因为佛陀在说法还没结束、大众还没散去的时候,从座位上起身进入香室,要么是为了赞叹某个人,要么是为了赞叹法。如果是为赞叹人而进去,导师会这样想:“我简略地宣说了纲要,但没有详细展开这个法。领受法义的比丘们会记下来,然后去亲近阿难或迦旃延请教,他们会用我的智慧来对照解说,之后那些领受法义的人又会回来问我。那时我就赞叹这些人说:‘比丘们,阿难说得好,迦旃延说得好。就算你们来问我这个道理,我也会作出完全一样的解说。’这样我就赞叹了这些人。他们因此生起恭敬心,比丘们就会去亲近他们,而他们也会在义和法上引导那些比丘,那些比丘受到引导后,圆满三学,最终灭尽众苦。”巴利
Uṭṭhāyāsanā vihāraṃ pāvisīti paññattavarabuddhāsanato uṭṭhahitvā vihāraṃ antomahāgandhakuṭiṃ pāvisi asambhinnāya eva parisāya. Kasmā? Buddhā hi aniṭṭhitāya desanāya asambhinnāya parisāya uṭṭhāyāsanā gandhakuṭiṃ pavisantā puggalathomanatthaṃ vā pavisanti dhammathomanatthaṃ vā. Tattha puggalathomanatthaṃ pavisanto satthā evaṃ cintesi – ‘‘imaṃ mayā saṃkhittena uddesaṃ uddiṭṭhaṃ vitthārena ca avibhattaṃ dhammapaṭiggāhakā bhikkhū uggahetvā ānandaṃ vā kaccāyanaṃ vā upasaṅkamitvā pucchissanti, te mayhaṃ ñāṇena saṃsandetvā kathessanti, tatopi dhammapaṭiggāhakā puna maṃ pucchissanti. Tesamahaṃ ‘sukathitaṃ, bhikkhave, ānandena, sukathitaṃ kaccāyanena, maṃ cepi tumhe etamatthaṃ puccheyyātha, ahampi naṃ evameva byākareyya’nti evaṃ te puggale thomessāmi. Tato tesu gāravaṃ janetvā bhikkhū upasaṅkamissanti, tepi bhikkhū atthe ca dhamme ca niyojessanti, te tehi niyojitā tisso sikkhā paripūretvā dukkhassantaṃ karissantī’’ti.
或者,他心里也可能这样想:“我离开之后,他会施展自己的威力,那时我也同样赞叹他。比丘们听到我的赞叹,生起恭敬心,就会觉得应当去亲近他,应当听受并相信他的话,这会给他们带来长久的利益和安乐。”他为了赞叹法而走进去时,就像在《法嗣经》里所思考的那样思考。在那里,他是这样想的:“我进入精舍后,一边呵责以财物为继承的人,一边赞叹以法为继承的舍利弗,他正坐在这大众中开示法。这样,我们两人以同一意乐、同一智慧所说的开示,就会变得最崇高、最受尊重,像石板伞盖一样。”巴利
Atha vā panassa evaṃ hoti – ‘‘esa mayi pakkante attano ānubhāvaṃ karissati, atha naṃ ahampi tatheva thomessāmi, taṃ mama thomanaṃ sutvā gāravajātā bhikkhū imaṃ upasaṅkamitabbaṃ, vacanañcassa sotabbaṃ saddhātabbaṃ maññissanti, taṃ tesaṃ bhavissati dīgharattaṃ hitāya sukhāyā’’ti dhammathomanatthaṃ pavisanto evaṃ cintesi yathā dhammadāyādasutte cintesi. Tatra hissa evaṃ ahosi – ‘‘mayi vihāraṃ paviṭṭhe āmisadāyādaṃ garahanto dhammadāyādañca thomento imissaṃyeva parisati nisinno sāriputto dhammaṃ desessati, evaṃ dvinnampi amhākaṃ ekajjhāsayāya matiyā desitā ayaṃ desanā aggā ca garukā ca bhavissati pāsāṇacchattasadisā’’ti.
在这里,世尊想称赞、彰显舍利弗尊者,把他树立起来,为了赞叹这个人,就从座位上起身,进了精舍。要知道,在这种情况下,世尊其实是在座位上就消失不见,以心念进入精舍的。因为如果他用身体走过去,所有大众都会围着世尊一起跟去,而大众一旦散开一次,就很难再重新聚集起来。所以世尊以看不见的身体,只以心念进入。巴利
Idha pana āyasmantaṃ sāriputtaṃ ukkaṃsetvā pakāsetvā ṭhapetukāmo puggalathomanatthaṃ uṭṭhāyāsanā vihāraṃ pāvisi. Īdisesu ṭhānesu bhagavā nisinnāsaneyeva antarahito cittagatiyā vihāraṃ pavisatīti veditabbo. Yadi hi kāyagatiyā gaccheyya, sabbā parisā bhagavantaṃ parivāretvā gaccheyya, sā ekavāraṃ bhinnā puna dussannipātā bhaveyyāti bhagavā adissamānena kāyena cittagatiyā eva pāvisi.
世尊这样进入精舍之后,尊者舍利弗想发出与世尊心意完全相应的狮子吼。那时,世尊刚离开不久,尊者舍利弗就对比丘们说:“‘先前未了知’:就是指将要被问到的这个问题,之前我不知道、不了解。‘第一个问题’:就是‘舍利弗,如果有人这样问你:“贤友舍利弗,你是以怎样的知、怎样的见,而能记说‘生已尽’呢?”’这就是第一个问题。‘迟缓’:为了了解导师的心意而显得迟缓,不迅速。‘随喜第一个问题’:就是在问第二个问题‘贤友舍利弗,生以什么为缘?’时,随喜了那个已经解答的第一个问题——‘贤友,生以……为缘’。巴利
Evaṃ paviṭṭhe pana bhagavati bhagavato adhippāyānurūpameva sīhanādaṃ naditukāmo tatra kho āyasmā sāriputto acirapakkantassa bhagavato bhikkhū āmantesi. Pubbe appaṭisaṃviditanti idaṃ nāma pucchissatīti pubbe mayā aviditaṃ aññātaṃ. Paṭhamaṃ pañhanti, ‘‘sace taṃ, sāriputta, evaṃ puccheyyuṃ kathaṃ jānatā pana tayā, āvuso sāriputta, kathaṃ passatā aññā byākatā khīṇā jātī’’ti imaṃ paṭhamaṃ pañhaṃ. Dandhāyitattanti satthu āsayajānanatthaṃ dandhabhāvo asīghatā. Paṭhamaṃ pañhaṃ anumodīti, ‘‘jāti panāvuso sāriputta, kiṃnidānā’’ti imaṃ dutiyaṃ pañhaṃ pucchanto, ‘‘yaṃnidānāvuso, jātī’’ti evaṃ vissajjitaṃ paṭhamaṃ pañhaṃ anumodi.
“于是心生此念”:世尊随喜之后,凭百种理趣、千种理趣,这个问题以单一面向的方式变得清晰明了,因此生起此念。“即使整日,我也能为世尊解说此义”:即使被问一整天,我也能以不同的词句,为世尊解说这缘起之义。“便前往世尊那里”:据说他这样想:“这位长老发出了广大的狮子吼,此事理由充分,我应当去禀告十力者。”因此便前往世尊那里。巴利
Etadahosīti bhagavatā anumodite nayasatena nayasahassena pañhassa ekaṅgaṇikabhāvena pākaṭībhūtattā etaṃ ahosi. Divasampāhaṃ bhagavato etamatthaṃ byākareyyanti sakaladivasampi ahaṃ bhagavato etaṃ paṭiccasamuppādatthaṃ puṭṭho sakaladivasampi aññamaññehi padabyañjanehi byākareyyaṃ. Yena bhagavā tenupasaṅkamīti evaṃ kirassa ahosi – ‘‘thero uḷārasīhanādaṃ nadati, sukāraṇaṃ etaṃ, dasabalassa naṃ ārocessāmī’’ti. Tasmā yena bhagavā tenupasaṅkami.
比丘们,对于舍利弗来说,这里所说的“法界”,指的是能清楚展示缘起模式、足以显现其开展状态的声闻波罗蜜智。因为声闻的波罗蜜智,和一切知智是同一走向的。就像诸佛对过去、未来、现在的一切法,都在一切知智中清清楚楚地显现出来;同样,这位长老的声闻波罗蜜智,也能了知声闻智所行境中的一切法。第二。巴利
Sā hi bhikkhu sāriputtassa dhammadhātūti ettha dhammadhātūti paccayākārassa vivaṭabhāvadassanasamatthaṃ sāvakapāramīñāṇaṃ. Sāvakānañhi sāvakapāramīñāṇaṃ sabbaññutaññāṇagatikameva hoti. Yathā buddhānaṃ atītānāgatapaccuppannā dhammā sabbaññutaññāṇassa pākaṭā honti, evaṃ therassa sāvakapāramīñāṇaṃ sabbepi sāvakañāṇassa gocaradhamme jānātīti. Dutiyaṃ.
3. 《智事经》的注释巴利
3. Ñāṇavatthusuttavaṇṇanā
33 第三,“听那个”——就是听那个关于智的事的开示。这里说的“智事”,应当理解为智本身就是智事。在“于老死智”等四种当中,第一种适合有四种智:闻所成智、思察智、证得智、观察智;第二种也是这样。第三种则除去思察智,只有三种;第四种也是这样。因为在出世间法中,确实没有思察这回事。在“于生智”等当中,也是同样的道理。“以此法”——就是以此四谛法,或者以此道智法。巴利
33. Tatiye taṃ suṇāthāti taṃ ñāṇavatthudesanaṃ suṇātha. Ñāṇavatthūnīti cettha ñāṇameva ñāṇavatthūti veditabbaṃ. Jarāmaraṇe ñāṇantiādīsu catūsu paṭhamaṃ savanamayañāṇaṃ sammasanañāṇaṃ paṭivedhañāṇaṃ paccavekkhaṇañāṇanti catubbidhaṃ vaṭṭati, tathā dutiyaṃ. Tatiyaṃ pana ṭhapetvā sammasanañāṇaṃ tividhameva hoti, tathā catutthaṃ. Lokuttaradhammesu hi sammasanaṃ nāma natthi. Jātiyā ñāṇantiādīsupi eseva nayo. Iminā dhammenāti iminā catusaccadhammena vā maggañāṇadhammena vā.
在“以所见”等说法中,“以所见”是指以智眼看见。“以所知”是指以智慧了知。“无时的”是指不经过任何时间、在证悟之后立刻产生果报。“已得”是指已经证得。“已深入”是指以智慧进入、以智慧穿透。“于过去未来运用理趣”是指依照“凡有……”这样的方式,对过去和未来运用理趣。在这里,并不能用四谛之法或道智之法对过去未来运用理趣,而是以道智证悟四谛之后,随后生起的称为观察智。应当知道,是以那种智来运用理趣。“已通达”是指已证知、了知。“如同我现在”是指如同我现在依四谛了知。“随顺智”是指随顺之智,随法智而行的智,这是观察智的名称。“于法智”是指道智。在这个经中,说的是漏尽者的有学地。第三。巴利
Diṭṭhenātiādīsu diṭṭhenāti ñāṇacakkhunā diṭṭhena. Viditenāti paññāya viditena. Akālikenāti kiñci kālaṃ anatikkamitvā paṭivedhānantaraṃyeva phaladāyakena. Pattenāti adhigatena. Pariyogāḷhenāti pariyogāhitena paññāya anupaviṭṭhena. Atītānāgate nayaṃ netīti ‘‘ye kho kecī’’tiādinā nayena atīte ca anāgate ca nayaṃ neti. Ettha ca na catusaccadhammena vā maggañāṇadhammena vā sakkā atītānāgate nayaṃ netuṃ, catusacce pana maggañāṇena paṭividdhe parato paccavekkhaṇañāṇaṃ nāma hoti. Tena nayaṃ netīti veditabbā. Abbhaññaṃsūti abhiaññaṃsu jāniṃsu. Seyyathāpāhaṃ, etarahīti yathā ahaṃ etarahi catusaccavasena jānāmi. Anvaye ñāṇanti anuaye ñāṇaṃ, dhammañāṇassa anugamane ñāṇaṃ, paccavekkhaṇañāṇassetaṃ nāmaṃ. Dhamme ñāṇanti maggañāṇaṃ. Imasmiṃ sutte khīṇāsavassa sekkhabhūmi kathitā hoti. Tatiyaṃ.
第四部 第二智事经的注释巴利
4. Dutiyañāṇavatthusuttavaṇṇanā
34 第四段。“七十七”是指七个七。据说那些比丘是擅长文句的诵持者,当用丰富的文句为他们宣说时,他们就能洞察证悟,所以是随顺他们的意乐而说这部经。“法住智”就是对缘相的智。缘相因为是诸法生起与安住的原因,所以称为法住;对它的智就是法住智,这也是那六种智的同义语。“灭尽法”就是具有趣向灭尽的性质。“坏灭法”就是具有趣向坏灭的性质。“离贪法”就是具有离染的性质。“止灭法”就是具有止息灭去的性质。“七十七”是指在每一处作七种观察,在十一处作这样的观察,就形成七十七。在这部经中讲述了随观与反随观。第四经结束。巴利
34. Catutthe sattasattarīti satta ca sattari ca. Byañjanabhāṇakā kira te bhikkhū, bahubyañjanaṃ katvā vuccamāne paṭivijjhituṃ sakkonti, tasmā tesaṃ ajjhāsayena idaṃ suttaṃ vuttaṃ. Dhammaṭṭhitiñāṇanti paccayākāre ñāṇaṃ. Paccayākāro hi dhammānaṃ pavattiṭṭhitikāraṇattā dhammaṭṭhitīti vuccati, ettha ñāṇaṃ dhammaṭṭhitiñāṇaṃ, etasseva chabbidhassa ñāṇassetaṃ adhivacanaṃ. Khayadhammanti khayagamanasabhāvaṃ. Vayadhammanti vayagamanasabhāvaṃ. Virāgadhammanti virajjanasabhāvaṃ. Nirodhadhammanti nirujjhanasabhāvaṃ. Sattasattarīti ekekasmiṃ satta satta katvā ekādasasu padesu sattasattari. Imasmiṃ sutte vipassanāpaṭivipassanā kathitā. Catutthaṃ.
第五,无明为缘经的注释。巴利
5. Avijjāpaccayasuttavaṇṇanā
35 第五段。“集起存在”:导师就在这里把说法停了下来。为什么?为了给那位持邪见的人一个开口的机会。因为在那个大众当中,有一个心怀挑剔、想要责难的邪见者,他会提出问题,到时候我要为他解答——就是为了给他这个机会,导师才把说法停在这里。“不是合适的提问”就是不合宜的提问,意思是这是个糟糕的问题。难道“尊者,什么是老死?”这样问不算问得好吗?虽然这本身问得好,可是就像在一个价值十万金的金钵里盛满美食,却在上面放了一小团粪,整钵食物就都成了必须扔掉的脏东西;同样地,“那么,这老死是谁的?”这一带着执著有情之论的说法,就像那团粪一样,让整个提问都变成了糟糕的问题,正如那食物变成了脏东西一般。巴利
35. Pañcame samudayo hotīti satthā idheva desanaṃ osāpesi. Kiṃkāraṇāti? Diṭṭhigatikassa okāsadānatthaṃ. Tassañhi parisati upārambhacitto diṭṭhigatiko atthi, so pañhaṃ pucchissati, athassāhaṃ vissajjessāmīti tassa okāsadānatthaṃ desanaṃ osāpesi. No kallo pañhoti ayutto pañho. Duppañho esoti attho. Nanu ca ‘‘katamaṃ nu kho, bhante, jarāmaraṇa’’nti? Idaṃ supucchitanti. Kiñcāpi supucchitaṃ, yathā pana satasahassagghanike suvaṇṇathāle vaḍḍhitassa subhojanassa matthake āmalakamattepi gūthapiṇḍe ṭhapite sabbaṃ bhojanaṃ dubbhojanaṃ hoti chaḍḍetabbaṃ, evameva ‘‘kassa ca panidaṃ jarāmaraṇa’’nti? Iminā sattūpaladdhivādapadena gūthapiṇḍena taṃ bhojanaṃ dubbhojanaṃ viya ayampi sabbo duppañhova jātoti.
“梵行住”就是指圣道住。“命即是身”:谁持有这种见解,他就会执取:“命被断灭时,身就被断灭;身被断灭时,命就被断灭。”他这样执取时,那个见解因为执取了“有情被断灭”,所以就叫断灭见。但如果他执取“只有诸行生起和灭去”,那就会是教法范围内的正见。而这个圣道,是在灭除轮回、截断轮回时生起的;如果断灭见所执取的那种情形真的成立,那轮回不用修这道就已经灭尽了,修这道就变得毫无意义。因此说“梵行住不存在”。巴利
Brahmacariyavāsoti ariyamaggavāso. Taṃ jīvaṃ taṃ sarīranti yassa hi ayaṃ diṭṭhi, so ‘‘jīve ucchijjamāne sarīraṃ ucchijjati, sarīre ucchijjante jīvitaṃ ucchijjatī’’ti gaṇhāti. Evaṃ gaṇhato sā diṭṭhi ‘‘satto ucchijjatī’’ti gahitattā ucchedadiṭṭhi nāma hoti . Sace pana saṅkhārāva uppajjanti ceva nirujjhanti cāti gaṇheyya, sāsanāvacarā sammādiṭṭhi nāma bhaveyya. Ariyamaggo ca nāmeso vaṭṭaṃ nirodhento vaṭṭaṃ samucchindanto uppajjati , tadeva taṃ vaṭṭaṃ ucchedadiṭṭhiyā gahitākārassa sambhave sati vināva maggabhāvanāya nirujjhatīti maggabhāvanā niratthakā hoti. Tena vuttaṃ ‘‘brahmacariyavāso na hotī’’ti.
在第二种解释里,如果有人持有“命是一回事,身是另一回事”这样的见,他就会执取:“身就在这里断灭,命并不断灭,命就像笼子里的鸟一样,想飞到哪里就飞到哪里。”这样执取时,这个见因为执取了“命从此世去到后世”,所以就叫常见。可是,圣道是为了让三界的轮回翻转、止息才生起的;只要还有一个行是恒常、稳固、永恒的,那么即使圣道已经生起,也不可能让轮回翻转,修习圣道就成了没有意义的事。因此说:“比丘若持有‘命是一回事,身是另一回事’的见,梵行住就不存在。”巴利
Dutiyanaye aññaṃ jīvaṃ aññaṃ sarīranti yassa ayaṃ diṭṭhi, so ‘‘sarīraṃ idheva ucchijjati, na jīvitaṃ, jīvitaṃ pana pañjarato sakuṇo viya yathāsukhaṃ gacchatī’’ti gaṇhāti. Evaṃ gaṇhato sā diṭṭhi ‘‘imasmā lokā jīvitaṃ paralokaṃ gata’’nti gahitattā sassatadiṭṭhi nāma hoti. Ayañca ariyamaggo tebhūmakavaṭṭaṃ vivaṭṭento uppajjati, so ekasaṅkhārepi nicce dhuve sassate sati uppannopi vaṭṭaṃ vivaṭṭetuṃ na sakkotīti maggabhāvanā niratthakā hoti. Tena vuttaṃ ‘‘aññaṃ jīvaṃ aññaṃ sarīranti vā bhikkhu diṭṭhiyā sati brahmacariyavāso na hotī’’ti.
“歪曲的”等等,全都是邪见的说法。因为邪见以穿刺正见的方式像针一样刺人,又障碍自己,所以叫“歪曲的”;因为不随顺正见、与正见对立而生起,所以叫“偏离的”;因为有时执取断灭、有时执取常住,所以称为种种动摇、种种翻腾。“已被做成多罗树桩”就是像多罗树桩一样被做成了,意思是:就像被砍掉顶梢的多罗树不能再生长,又像连根拔起的多罗树,只剩下树桩所在的位置那样,被做成了不再生长的状态。“已被做成无有”就是已被弄成不存在。第五。巴利
Visūkāyikānītiādi sabbaṃ micchādiṭṭhivevacanameva. Sā hi sammādiṭṭhiyā vinivijjhanaṭṭhena visūkamiva attānaṃ āvaraṇato visūkāyikaṃ, sammādiṭṭhiṃ ananuvattitvā tassā virodhena pavattanato visevitaṃ, kadāci ucchedassa kadāci sassatassa gahaṇato virūpaṃ phanditaṃ vipphanditanti vuccati. Tālāvatthukatānīti tālavatthu viya katāni, puna aviruhaṇaṭṭhena matthakacchinnatālo viya samūlaṃ tālaṃ uddharitvā tassa patiṭṭhitaṭṭhānaṃ viya ca katānīti attho. Anabhāvaṃkatānīti anuabhāvaṃ katānīti. Pañcamaṃ.
第二无明缘经的注释巴利
6. Dutiyaavijjāpaccayasuttavaṇṇanā
36 第六段。“比丘们,或者有人会这样说”:在那大众当中,有一个持邪见的人想要提问,可是他生性没有自信,没办法站起来向十力者提问。所以导师顺着他的心意,自己主动提出问题并作答,才说了这番话。第六段。巴利
36. Chaṭṭhe iti vā, bhikkhave, yo vadeyyāti tassaṃ parisati diṭṭhigatiko pañhaṃ pucchitukāmo atthi, so pana avisāradadhātuko uṭṭhāya dasabalaṃ pucchituṃ na sakkoti, tasmā tassa ajjhāsayena sayameva pucchitvā vissajjento satthā evamāha. Chaṭṭhaṃ.
第七经《非汝等经》的注释巴利
7. Natumhasuttavaṇṇanā
37 第七段。“不是你们的”:因为有了“我”,才会有“我所”。可是“我”本身根本不存在,所以世尊说“不是你们的”。“也不是别人的”:所谓“别人”,是指其他众生的“我”;如果那个“我”存在,才可能说属于别人,但它同样不存在,所以世尊说“也不是别人的”。“比丘们,这是旧业”:这并不是说它本身就是旧业,而是说这个身体是由旧业所产生的,所以按照缘起的习惯说法这样讲。“所造作的”等话,也是依照业的习惯说法,为了和前文的性质保持一致而说的。这里的意思是:“所造作的”应当理解为由各种条件所造成;“所筹划的”应当理解为以思为根据、以思为根本;“所感受的”应当理解为感受的对象或基础。第七段结束。巴利
37. Sattame na tumhākanti attani hi sati attaniyaṃ nāma hoti. Attāyeva ca natthi, tasmā ‘‘na tumhāka’’nti āha. Napi aññesanti añño nāma paresaṃ attā, tasmiṃ sati aññesaṃ nāma siyā, sopi natthi, tasmā ‘‘napi aññesa’’nti āha. Purāṇamidaṃ, bhikkhave, kammanti nayidaṃ purāṇakammameva, purāṇakammanibbatto panesa kāyo, tasmā paccayavohārena evaṃ vutto. Abhisaṅkhatantiādi kammavohārasseva vasena purimaliṅgasabhāgatāya vuttaṃ, ayaṃ panettha attho – abhisaṅkhatanti paccayehi katoti daṭṭhabbo. Abhisañcetayitanti cetanāvatthuko cetanāmūlakoti daṭṭhabbo. Vedaniyanti vedaniyavatthūti daṭṭhabbo. Sattamaṃ.
第八经《思经》的注释巴利
8. Cetanāsuttavaṇṇanā
38 38. 第八经的注释。“比丘们,他思惟什么”(yañca, bhikkhave, ceteti):意思是,他思惟那个思,令它转起。“他筹划什么”(yañca pakappeti):他筹划那个筹划,令它转起。“他随眠什么”(yañca anuseti):他随眠那个随眠,令它转起。这里,“他思惟”指的是三地中善与不善的思;“他筹划”指的是在八种与贪俱行的心中,由渴爱和邪见所产生的种种妄想;“他随眠”指的是以俱生分和亲依止分,摄取了与那十二种思相应的随眠。“这成为所缘”:当这些思等法生起时,由于无法阻止业识的产生,这思等法的集合就成了缘。这里所说的“所缘”,指的就是缘。“为了识的住立”:为了让业识安住。“当有所缘时”:当那个缘存在时。“识便得以立足”:那个业识便有了立足之处。“当识在那里立足时”:当那个业识立足之时。“便增长”:业被快速推动,从而有能力牵引结生,在新生起的根基上成长。“再有新的生命产生”:即所谓“再有”的再生。巴利
38. Aṭṭhame yañca, bhikkhave, cetetīti yaṃ cetanaṃ ceteti, pavattetīti attho. Yañca pakappetīti yaṃ pakappanaṃ pakappeti, pavatteticceva attho. Yañca anusetīti yañca anusayaṃ anuseti, pavatteticceva attho. Ettha ca cetetīti tebhūmakakusalākusalacetanā gahitā, pakappetīti aṭṭhasu lobhasahagatacittesu taṇhādiṭṭhikappā gahitā, anusetīti dvādasannaṃ cetanānaṃ sahajātakoṭiyā ceva upanissayakoṭiyā ca anusayo gahito. Ārammaṇametaṃ hotīti (cetanādidhammajāte sati kammaviññāṇassa uppattiyā avāritattā) etaṃ cetanādidhammajātaṃ paccayo hoti. Paccayo hi idha ārammaṇanti adhippetā. Viññāṇassa ṭhitiyāti kammaviññāṇassa ṭhitatthaṃ. Ārammaṇe satīti tasmiṃ paccaye sati. Patiṭṭhā viññāṇassa hotīti tassa kammaviññāṇassa patiṭṭhā hoti. Tasmiṃ patiṭṭhite viññāṇeti tasmiṃ kammaviññāṇe patiṭṭhite. Virūḷheti kammaṃ javāpetvā paṭisandhiākaḍḍhanasamatthatāya nibbattamūle jāte. Punabbhavābhinibbattīti punabbhavasaṅkhātā abhinibbatti.
比丘们,如果他不思惟:这句话说的是三地思不再生起的刹那。如果他不筹划:这句话说的是渴爱和邪见的妄想不再生起的刹那。但如果仍然随眠:这里说的是在三地果报、少许唯作以及色法中,随眠以尚未断除的方式被摄取。这成为所缘:只要随眠还在,因为无法阻止业识的生起,这随眠的集合本身就是缘。巴利
Noce, bhikkhave, cetetīti iminā tebhūmakacetanāya appavattanakkhaṇo vutto. No ce pakappetīti iminā taṇhādiṭṭhikappānaṃ appavattanakkhaṇo. Atha ce anusetīti iminā tebhūmakavipākesu parittakiriyāsu rūpeti ettha appahīnakoṭiyā anusayo gahito. Ārammaṇametaṃhotīti anusaye sati kammaviññāṇassa uppattiyā avāritattā etaṃ anusayajātaṃ paccayova hoti.
在“不思惟也不筹划”等句中,第一句否定的是三地的善与不善思;第二句否定的是八种心当中的渴爱与邪见;第三句否定的是,在前述那些法当中以“尚未断除”的状态而潜伏的随眠。巴利
No ceva cetetītiādīsu paṭhamapade tebhūmakakusalākusalacetanā nivattā, dutiyapade aṭṭhasu cittesu taṇhādiṭṭhiyo, tatiyapade vuttappakāresu dhammesu yo appahīnakoṭiyā anusayito anusayo, so nivatto.
在这里,为了断除迷惑,还应当了解这样一组四句分别:他思惟、他筹划、他潜在;他思惟、他不筹划、他潜在;他不思惟、他不筹划、他潜在;他不思惟、他不筹划、他不潜在。其中,第一门显示了诸法的区分。在第二门里,“他思惟”涵盖了三地的善思和四种不善思;“他不筹划”排除了八种心中的渴爱和邪见;“他潜在”则涵盖了三地善法中以亲依止方式存在的潜在烦恼,以及四种不善思中以俱生方式和亲依止方式存在的潜在烦恼。在第三门里,“他不思惟”排除了三地的善与不善;“他不筹划”排除了八种心中的渴爱和邪见;“他潜在”则排除经中所说的情形之后,涵盖了三地善、不善、果报、唯作以及色界法中,以尚未断除的方式通过亲依止而存在的潜在烦恼。第四门与前面相似。巴利
Apicettha asammohatthaṃ ceteti pakappeti anuseti, ceteti na pakappeti anuseti, na ceteti na pakappeti anuseti, na ceteti na pakappeti na anusetīti idampi catukkaṃ veditabbaṃ. Tattha paṭhamanaye dhammaparicchedo dassito. Dutiyanaye cetetīti tebhūmakakusalacetanā ceva catasso ca akusalacetanā gahitā. Na pakappetīti aṭṭhasu cittesu taṇhādiṭṭhiyo nivattā. Anusetīti tebhūmakakusale upanissayakoṭiyā, catūsu akusalacetanāsu sahajātakoṭiyā ceva upanissayakoṭiyā ca anusayo gahito. Tatiyanaye na cetetīti tebhūmakakusalākusalaṃ nivattaṃ, na pakappetīti aṭṭhasu cittesu taṇhādiṭṭhiyo nivattā, anusetīti sutte āgataṃ vāretvā tebhūmakakusalākusalavipākakiriyārūpesu appahīnakoṭiyā upanissayo gahito. Catutthanayo purimasadisova.
“它无安住时”(tadappatiṭṭhite):指在那位(阿罗汉)身上无安住时。“它无增长时”(avirūḷhe):指业在速行转起之后,因不能牵引结生,所以尚未生出根本。那么这里说的是什么?应当说,这是阿罗汉道的作用,也是漏尽者所作之事,也可以称为九种出世间法。而在这里,识与未来后有之间有一个连接,受与渴爱之间有一个连接,有与生之间有一个连接。第八。巴利
Tadappatiṭṭhiteti tasmiṃ appatiṭṭhite. Avirūḷheti kammaṃ javāpetvā paṭisandhiākaḍḍhanasamatthatāya anibbattamūle. Ettha pana kiṃ kathitanti? Arahattamaggassa kiccaṃ, khīṇāsavassa kiccakaraṇantipi navalokuttaradhammātipi vattuṃ vaṭṭati. Ettha ca viññāṇassa ceva āyatiṃ punabbhavassa ca antare eko sandhi, vedanātaṇhānamantare eko, bhavajātīnamantare ekoti. Aṭṭhamaṃ.
第九《第二思经》注释巴利
9. Dutiyacetanāsuttavaṇṇanā
39 第九:在识与名色之间有一个连接,在受与渴爱之间有一个连接,在有与生之间有一个连接。第九经结束。巴利
39. Navame viññāṇanāmarūpānaṃ antare eko sandhi, vedanātaṇhānamantare eko, bhavajātīnamantare ekoti. Navamaṃ.
第十《第三思经》的注释巴利
10. Tatiyacetanāsuttavaṇṇanā
40 第十经:“倾向”就是渴爱。它对于可爱的色等对象,以倾向的作用而被称为“倾向”。“来处成为去处”,意思是:在来处就有去处——当业、业相或趣相现前时,识就以结生的方式有了去处。“死与再生”,意思是:当识面对结生境域时,既然有了去处,从此处死去就称为死,在那里再生就称为再生,这就是死与再生。如此,在这部经中,仅就渴爱的倾向与来去之间,说了一个连结。第十经结束。巴利
40. Dasame natīti taṇhā. Sā hi piyarūpesu rūpādīsu namanaṭṭhena ‘‘natī’’ti vuccati. Āgati gati hotīti āgatimhi gati hoti, āgate paccupaṭṭhite kamme vā kammanimitte vā gahinimitte vā paṭisandhivasena viññāṇassa gati hoti. Cutūpapātoti evaṃ viññāṇassa āgate paṭisandhivisaye gatiyā sati ito cavanasaṅkhātā cuti, tatthūpapattisaṅkhāto upapātoti ayaṃ cutūpapāto nāma hoti. Evaṃ imasmiṃ sutte natiyā ca āgatigatiyā ca antare ekova sandhi kathitoti. Dasamaṃ.
《五怖畏经》的注释巴利
1. Pañcaverabhayasuttavaṇṇanā
41 41. 在《居士品》的第一经里,“当”就是“那时”的意思。“怖畏与怨”指的是带来怖畏和怨恨的思心所。“以入流支”方面,入流支有两种:一种是还在前行阶段、能导向证得入流果的,也就是经里说的“亲近善士、听闻正法、如理作意、法随法行”(《长部》3.311);另一种是已经获得功德、证得入流果并安住其中的人所具备的支分,也就是入流者的支分,这是指“对佛陀具有不动摇的净信”等四种法。这里指的是后一种。“圣”是指无过咎、无可指责。“理”是指了知缘生而住之智,亦是缘起。正如所说:“理称为缘起,圣八支道也称为理。”以慧是指以相续生起的观慧。“善见”是指以相续生起之见而善见。巴利
41. Gahapativaggassa paṭhame yatoti yadā. Bhayāni verānīti bhayaveracetanāyo. Sotāpattiyaṅgehīti duvidhaṃ sotāpattiyā aṅgaṃ, (sotāpattiyā ca aṅgaṃ,) yaṃ pubbabhāge sotāpattipaṭilābhāya saṃvattati, ‘‘sappurisasaṃsevo saddhammassavanaṃ yonisomanasikāro dhammānudhammappaṭipattī’’ti (dī. ni. 3.311) evaṃ āgataṃ, paṭiladdhaguṇassa ca sotāpattiṃ patvā ṭhitassa aṅgaṃ, yaṃ sotāpannassa aṅgantipi vuccati, buddhe aveccappasādādīnaṃ etaṃ adhivacanaṃ. Idamidha adhippetaṃ. Ariyoti niddoso nirupārambho. Ñāyoti paṭiccasamuppannaṃ ñatvā ṭhitañāṇampi paṭiccasamuppādopi. Yathāha – ‘‘ñāyo vuccati paṭiccasamuppādo, ariyopi aṭṭhaṅgiko maggo ñāyo’’ti. Paññāyāti aparāparaṃ uppannāya vipassanāpaññāya. Sudiṭṭho hotīti aparāparaṃ uppajjitvā dassanavasena suṭṭhu diṭṭho.
“我已灭尽地狱”等说法中,因为未来不会再在那里投生,所以说“我的地狱已灭尽”,因此他就是“已灭尽地狱的人”。这个道理适用于所有同类情况。“入流者”:已经进入圣道之流。“不退堕法”:其本性不会堕入恶趣。“必定者”:由称为初道的正性决定而成为必定。“至正觉彼岸者”:更高的三道称为正觉,正觉是他最终的去处,因此他就是“至正觉彼岸者”,意思是说他必将现证那正觉。巴利
Khīṇanirayotiādīsu āyatiṃ tattha anuppajjanatāya khīṇo nirayo mayhanti so ahaṃ khīṇanirayo. Esa nayo sabbattha. Sotāpannoti maggasotaṃ āpanno. Avinipātadhammoti na vinipātasabhāvo . Niyatoti paṭhamamaggasaṅkhātena sammattaniyāmena niyato. Sambodhiparāyanoti uttarimaggattayasaṅkhāto sambodhi paraṃ ayanaṃ mayhanti sohaṃ sambodhiparāyano, taṃ sambodhiṃ avassaṃ abhisambujjhanakoti attho.
“因为杀生”是指以杀生这种行为作为原因。“怖畏与怨”在含义上是一回事。而这个“怨”有两种:外在的怨和内在的怨。比如,一个人的父亲被别人杀了,他心想:“听说就是这个人杀了我的父亲,我也要杀掉他。”于是拿着锋利的刀到处寻找。在他内心生起的这种怀有怨恨的思,就叫外在的怨。而另一个人心想:“听说这个人要杀我,正在到处找我,我得先下手杀了他。”这样生起的思,就叫内在的怨。这两种还只是属于今生今世的。再说,当那个人看到自己投生到地狱中,地狱狱卒拿起燃烧的铁棒,生起“我要打他”的思——这对那个人来说,就是来世的外在怨。而那个人自己生起“这狱卒无缘无故要来打我,我得先打他”的思,这就是他来世的内在怨。其中,外在的怨在注释书里称为“人怨”。“苦与忧”在含义上也是一回事。在这里如此,在其余文句中也是一样,应当以这样的方式理解怨的生起:“这个人偷了我的东西”“这个人侵犯了我的妻子”“这个人说了谎,破坏了我的利益”“因为饮酒沉醉而做了这样那样的事”等等。以已证得、不可动摇的净信。以圣者所喜爱的五戒。因为那些戒是圣者所喜爱、所珍爱的。即使投生到别的存在中,圣者也不会舍弃它们,所以称为“圣者所喜爱的”。这里其余应当说明的内容,全部都已经在《清净道论》随念的解说中讲过了。第一。巴利
Pāṇātipātapaccayāti pāṇātipātakammakāraṇā. Bhayaṃ veranti atthato ekaṃ. Verañca nāmetaṃ duvidhaṃ hoti bāhiraṃ ajjhattikanti. Ekena hi ekassa pitā mārito hoti, so cintesi ‘‘etena kira me pitā mārito, ahampi taṃyeva māressāmī’’ti nisitaṃ satthaṃ ādāya carati. Yā tassa abbhantare uppannaveracetanā, idaṃ bāhiraṃ veraṃ nāma. Yā pana itarassa ‘‘ayaṃ kira maṃ māressāmīti carati, ahameva naṃ paṭhamataraṃ māressāmī’’ti cetanā uppajjati, idaṃ ajjhattikaṃ veraṃ nāma. Idaṃ tāva ubhayampi diṭṭhadhammikameva. Yā pana taṃ niraye uppannaṃ disvā ‘‘etaṃ paharissāmī’’ti jalitaṃ ayamuggaraṃ gaṇhato nirayapālassa cetanā uppajjati, idamassa samparāyikaṃ bāhiraveraṃ. Yā cassa ‘‘ayaṃ niddosaṃ maṃ paharissāmīti āgacchati, ahameva naṃ paṭhamataraṃ paharissāmī’’ti cetanā uppajjati, idamassa samparāyikaṃ ajjhattaveraṃ. Yaṃ panetaṃ bāhiraveraṃ, taṃ aṭṭhakathāyaṃ ‘‘puggalavera’’nti vuttaṃ. Dukkhaṃ domanassanti atthato ekameva. Yathā cettha, evaṃ sesapadesupi ‘‘iminā mama bhaṇḍaṃ haṭaṃ , mayhaṃ dāresu cārittaṃ āpannaṃ, musā vatvā attho bhaggo, surāmadamattena idaṃ nāma kata’’ntiādinā nayena veruppatti veditabbā. Aveccappasādenāti adhigatena acalappasādena. Ariyakantehīti pañcahi sīlehi. Tāni hi ariyānaṃ kantāni piyāni. Bhavantaragatāpi ariyā tāni na vijahanti, tasmā ‘‘ariyakantānī’’ti vuccanti. Sesamettha yaṃ vattabbaṃ siyā, taṃ sabbaṃ visuddhimagge anussatiniddese vuttameva. Paṭhamaṃ.
第二部五怖畏经的注释巴利
2. Dutiyapañcaverabhayasuttavaṇṇanā
42 在第二经里,唯一的差别只是对比丘们所说的内容这一点。第二。巴利
42. Dutiye bhikkhūnaṃ kathitabhāvamattameva viseso. Dutiyaṃ.
3. 《苦经》的注释巴利
3. Dukkhasuttavaṇṇanā
43 第三经中,“苦”是指轮回之苦。“集”有两种:刹那集和缘集。观见缘集的比丘,也观见刹那集;观见刹那集的比丘,也观见缘集。“灭”也有两种:毕竟灭和坏灭。观见毕竟灭的人,也观见坏灭;观见坏灭的人,也观见毕竟灭。“我将开示”:意思是,我将开示这轮回之苦的集与灭,也就是它的生起与坏灭,你们要听。“缘”:是依所依和所缘的方式作为条件。“三者和合而有触”:就是三者和合时便有触。“诸比丘,这就是苦之集”:这就是轮回之苦的生起。“灭”:就是坏灭。这样,轮回之苦就破碎了,不再有结生。第三经结束。巴利
43. Tatiye dukkhassāti vaṭṭadukkhassa. Samudayanti dve samudayā khaṇikasamudayo ca paccayasamudayo ca. Paccayasamudayaṃ passantopi bhikkhu khaṇikasamudayaṃ passati, khaṇikasamudayaṃ passantopi paccayasamudayaṃ passati. Atthaṅgamopi accantatthaṅgamo bhedatthaṅgamoti duvidho. Accantatthaṅgamaṃ passantopi bhedatthaṅgamaṃ passati, bhedatthaṅgamaṃ passantopi accantatthaṅgamaṃ passati. Desessāmīti idaṃ vaṭṭadukkhassa samudayaatthaṅgamaṃ nibbattibhedaṃ nāma desessāmi, taṃ suṇāthāti attho. Paṭiccāti nissayavasena ceva ārammaṇavasena ca paccayaṃ katvā. Tiṇṇaṃ saṅgati phassoti tiṇṇaṃ saṅgatiyā phasso. Ayaṃ kho, bhikkhave, dukkhassa samudayoti ayaṃ vaṭṭadukkhassa nibbatti nāma. Atthaṅgamoti bhedo. Evañhi vaṭṭadukkhaṃ bhinnaṃ hoti appaṭisandhiyaṃ. Tatiyaṃ.
第4经 世间经的注释巴利
4. Lokasuttavaṇṇanā
44 第四经里说的“世间”,指的是行世间。这里的不同之处就在这里。第四经结束。巴利
44. Catutthe lokassāti saṅkhāralokassa. Ayamettha viseso. Catutthaṃ.
《亲属经》的注释巴利
5. Ñātikasuttavaṇṇanā
45 45. 第五部经的注释。“亲属”(ñātike)指两位亲属所在的村庄。“砖瓦堂”(giñjakāvasathe)指用砖建成的大殿堂。“法门”(dhammapariyāya)指法的因由。“近闻处”(upassuti)指靠近听闻的地方,意思是到了那个位置就能听到世尊的声音,他就站在那里。据说他是为了打扫香室的庭院而来,放下自己的事务,站在那里听世尊说法的声音。“看见了”(addasā):据说那时世尊从一开始就在作意缘起,当他这样思维“这个依这个缘而生,那个依那个缘而起”时,整个有顶天都变得通彻无碍。导师放下作意,转而以言语诵出,顺着前后的关联完成了开示。然后他又想:“有没有人听到了这个法门呢?”当他这样观察时,就看见了那位比丘。因此说“世尊看见了”。巴利
45. Pañcame ñātiketi dvinnaṃ ñātakānaṃ gāme. Giñjakāvasatheti iṭṭhakāhi kate mahāpāsāde. Dhammapariyāyanti dhammakāraṇaṃ. Upassutīti upassutiṭṭhānaṃ, yaṃ ṭhānaṃ upagatena sakkā hoti bhagavato saddaṃ sotuṃ, tattha ṭhitoti attho. So kira gandhakuṭipariveṇasammajjanatthaṃ āgato attano kammaṃ pahāya bhagavato dhammaghosaṃ suṇanto aṭṭhāsi. Addasāti tadā kira bhagavato āditova paccayākāraṃ manasikarontassa ‘‘idaṃ iminā paccayena hoti, idaṃ iminā’’ti āvajjato yāva bhavaggā ekaṅgaṇaṃ ahosi, satthā manasikāraṃ pahāya vacasā sajjhāyaṃ karonto yathānusandhinā desanaṃ niṭṭhapetvā, ‘‘api nu kho imaṃ dhammapariyāyaṃ koci assosī’’ti āvajjento taṃ bhikkhumaddasa. Tena vuttaṃ ‘‘addasā kho bhagavā’’ti.
“听见了吗”意思是:确实听见了吗?或者,“听见了”是指我们说话时对方回答“听见了”的那种用法。“你要学习”等句子里,听了之后默不作声地把内容练熟,就叫作“学习”。把字句前后连贯起来,通过言语反复练习,就叫作“遍学”。通过这两种方式把内容练到纯熟、能够记牢在心,就叫作“持”。与义理相应,是指依于道理。“初梵行之始”,是指道之梵行的开端,是基础和所依。这样,在这三部经里,说的都是轮回与还灭。第五。巴利
Assosinoti assosi nu. Atha vā assosi noti amhākaṃ bhāsantānaṃ assosīti. Uggaṇhāhītiādīsu sutvā tuṇhībhūtova paguṇaṃ karonto uggaṇhāti nāma. Padānupadaṃ ghaṭetvā vācāya paricitaṃ karonto pariyāpuṇāti nāma. Ubhayathāpi paguṇaṃ ādhārappattaṃ karonto dhāreti nāma. Atthasaṃhitoti kāraṇanissito. Ādibrahmacariyakoti maggabrahmacariyassa ādi patiṭṭhānabhūto. Iti tīsupi imesu suttesu vaṭṭavivaṭṭameva kathitaṃ. Pañcamaṃ.
第六部 某婆罗门经的注释巴利
6. Aññatarabrāhmaṇasuttavaṇṇanā
46 46. 第六经中,“某位”是指一位名字不为人知的婆罗门。第六经。巴利
46. Chaṭṭhe aññataroti nāmavasena apākaṭo aññataro brāhmaṇo. Chaṭṭhaṃ.
第7篇 生闻经的注解巴利
7. Jāṇussoṇisuttavaṇṇanā
47 47. 在第七经中,“生闻”这个称呼是因为他的职位而得来的,他是一位拥有八十亿财富的大国师。第七经结束。巴利
47. Sattame jāṇussoṇīti ṭhānantaravasena evaṃladdhanāmo asītikoṭivibhavo mahāpurohito. Sattamaṃ.
第八部《顺世论者经》的注释巴利
8. Lokāyatikasuttavaṇṇanā
48 第八经。“顺世论者”是指对名为《顺世论》的诡辩之书已经练熟了的人。“这是第一顺世论”,就是最初的顺世论。而“顺世论”是指世间的延伸,是愚痴凡夫世间的延伸;应当理解,人们以为它广大而深奥,其实只是一种渺小、浅薄的邪见。问“单一”,是指同一种性质,也就是问是否只有一种恒常不变的性质。问“种种”,是指与前面的性质不同的种种性质,也就是暗指:先前是天、人等,后来就不存在了,这是就断灭而问。在这里应当知道,“一切存在”“一切同一”这两种是常见,“一切不存在”“一切种种”这两种是断见。第八经。巴利
48. Aṭṭhame lokāyatikoti vitaṇḍasatthe lokāyate kataparicayo. Jeṭṭhametaṃ lokāyatanti paṭhamaṃ lokāyataṃ. Lokāyatanti ca lokasseva āyataṃ, bālaputhujjanalokassa āyataṃ, mahantaṃ gambhīranti upadhāritabbaṃ parittaṃ bhāvaṃ diṭṭhigataṃ. Ekattanti ekasabhāvaṃ, niccasabhāvamevāti pucchati. Puthuttanti purimasabhāvena nānāsabhāvaṃ, devamanussādibhāvena paṭhamaṃ hutvā pacchā na hotīti ucchedaṃ sandhāya pucchati. Evamettha ‘‘sabbamatthi, sabbamekatta’’nti imā dvepi sassatadiṭṭhiyo, ‘‘sabbaṃ natthi, sabbaṃ puthutta’’nti imā dve ucchedadiṭṭhiyoti veditabbā. Aṭṭhamaṃ.
第九经《圣弟子经》的注释巴利
9. Ariyasāvakasuttavaṇṇanā
49 第九经。“为何呢”这一句,是在显示疑惑生起的情形。“集起”就是生起的意思。第九经。巴利
49. Navame kiṃ nu khoti saṃsayuppattiākāradassanaṃ. Samudayatīti uppajjati. Navamaṃ.
第十部《圣弟子经》的注释巴利
10. Dutiyaariyasāvakasuttavaṇṇanā
50 第十部。这两种理趣在这里是合在一起说的。它和前面那部的差别就在这里,其余部分完全相同。第十部终。巴利
50. Dasame dvepi nayā ekato vuttā. Idameva purimena nānattaṃ, sesaṃ tādisamevāti. Dasamaṃ.
《审察经》的注释巴利
1. Parivīmaṃsanasuttavaṇṇanā
51 在〈苦品〉第一经中,“审察”的意思是反复观察。为什么在说了老死是“种种、多样”之后,却只取老死呢?因为一旦取老死,就已经取了一切苦。就像抓住一个人的发髻,这个人就等于被抓住了;同样,取老死就等于取了一切苦。所以,先像展示一个沐浴后站着的人那样,展示一切苦,说出“世间生起的这种种种种、多样的苦”,然后就像抓发髻一样,取老死。巴利
51. Dukkhavaggassa paṭhame parivīmaṃsamānoti upaparikkhamāno. Jarāmaraṇanti kasmā jarāmaraṇaṃ ekameva ‘‘anekavidhaṃ nānappakāraka’’nti vatvā gahitanti ce? Tasmiṃ gahite sabbadukkhassa gahitattā. Yathā hi cūḷāya gahite purise so puriso gahitova hoti, evaṃ jarāmaraṇe gahite sabbadukkhaṃ gahitameva hoti. Tasmā ‘‘yaṃ kho idaṃ anekavidhaṃ nānappakārakaṃ dukkhaṃ loke uppajjatī’’ti nhatvā ṭhitaṃ purisaṃ viya sabbadukkhaṃ dassetvā taṃ cūḷāya gaṇhanto viya jarāmaraṇaṃ gaṇhi.
「适合走向老死灭尽之道」的意思是:以与老死灭尽相契合的方式,也就是因为无烦恼、清净,而与老死灭尽相似,并走向它。「如此行道」的意思是:就像被称为「如此行道者」那样,他如此修行。「随法行者」的意思是:他修习随顺涅槃之法、随顺修行之法,并圆满它。「为苦灭尽而行道」的意思是:从持戒开始,为了灭尽老死之苦而修行。「为行灭」的意思是:为了灭尽行之苦。到这里,已经开示了直至阿拉汉果的教法。巴利
Jarāmaraṇanirodhasāruppagāminīti jarāmaraṇanirodhassa sāruppabhāvena nikkilesatāya parisuddhatāya sadisāva hutvā gāminīti attho. Tathā paṭipanno ca hotīti yathā taṃ paṭipannoti vuccati, evaṃ paṭipanno hoti. Anudhammacārīti nibbānadhammaṃ anugataṃ paṭipattidhammaṃ carati, pūretīti attho. Dukkhakkhayāya paṭipannoti sīlaṃ ādiṃ katvā jarāmaraṇadukkhassa nirodhatthāya paṭipanno. Saṅkhāranirodhāyāti saṅkhāradukkhassa nirodhatthāya. Ettāvatā yāva arahattā desanā kathitā.
现在,开示了阿拉汉果的省察和常住之后,按理开示就该结束了,那为什么还要引出“入于无明”这一句呢?是为了显示漏尽者已经超越了轮回之苦。另外,当重新提起轮回、宣说还灭的时候,在场还有应当被唤醒的众生,要知道这也是随顺他们的意乐才引出这一句的。这里,“入于无明”是指进入、到达、具足了无明。“男子士夫”是指男子就是士夫。这两个词都是在说世俗言说。因为对佛陀们来说,有世俗言说和究竟义言说两种教说。其中,说“众生、人、男子、士夫、帝沙、那伽”这样的,叫世俗言说;说“诸蕴、诸界、诸处”这样的,叫究竟义言说。佛陀们即使宣说究竟义,也不舍弃世俗言说;无论是世俗言说还是究竟义言说,他们说的都是真实。因此有偈颂说:巴利
Idāni arahattaphalapaccavekkhaṇaṃ satatavihārañca dassetvā desanā nivattetabbā siyā, tathā akatvā avijjāgatoti idaṃ kasmā gaṇhātīti? Khīṇāsavassa samatikkantavaṭṭadukkhadassanatthaṃ . Apica puna vaṭṭaṃ ārabhitvā vivaṭṭe kathiyamāne bujjhanakasatto cettha atthi, tassa ajjhāsayavasenāpi idaṃ gaṇhātīti veditabbo. Tattha avijjāgatoti avijjāya gato upagato samannāgato. Purisapuggaloti purisoyeva puggalo. Ubhayenāpi sammutikathaṃ katheti. Buddhānañhi sammutikathā paramatthakathāti dve kathā honti. Tattha ‘‘satto naro puriso puggalo tisso nāgo’’ti evaṃ pavattā sammutikathā nāma. ‘‘Khandhā dhātuyo āyatanānī’’ti evaṃ pavattā paramatthakathā nāma. Paramatthaṃ kathentāpi sammutiṃ amuñcitvā kathenti. Te sammutiṃ kathentāpi paramatthaṃ kathentāpi saccameva kathenti. Teneva vuttaṃ –
正等觉者、说法者中最胜的人,宣说了两种真实。
世俗和究竟这两种真实,第三种是找不到的。
约定俗成的说法是真实的,是世间共许的根据;
胜义言说就是真实,是诸法的真实相。巴利
‘‘Duve saccāni akkhāsi, sambuddho vadataṃ varo; Sammutiṃ paramatthañca, tatiyaṃ nūpalabbhati; Saṅketavacanaṃ saccaṃ, lokasammutikāraṇaṃ; Paramatthavacanaṃ saccaṃ, dhammānaṃ bhūtalakkhaṇa’’nti.
如果造作福行,就是指造作由十三种思组成的福行。“造作”就是去做。识成为趣向福的,是说业识被福业所牵引、与福业相应;果报识则被福的果报所牵引。“如果造作非福行”,就是指造作由十二种思组成的非福行。“如果造作不动行”,就是指造作由四种思组成的不动行。“识成为趣向不动的”,是说业识被不动业所牵引,果报识则被不动的果报所牵引。在这里,因为已经包含了三种业行,所以十二支的缘起模式也就一并被含摄了。到此为止,展示的就是轮回。巴利
Puññaṃce saṅkhāranti terasacetanābhedaṃ puññābhisaṅkhāraṃ. Abhisaṅkharotīti karoti. Puññūpagaṃ hoti viññāṇanti kammaviññāṇaṃ kammapuññena upagataṃ sampayuttaṃ hoti, vipākaviññāṇaṃ vipākapuññena. Apuññaṃ ce saṅkhāranti dvādasacetanābhedaṃ apuññābhisaṅkhāraṃ abhisaṅkharoti. Āneñjaṃ ce saṅkhāranti catucetanābhedaṃ āneñjābhisaṅkhāraṃ. Āneñjūpagaṃ hoti viññāṇanti kammāneñjena kammaviññāṇaṃ, vipākāneñjena vipākaviññāṇaṃ upagataṃ hoti. Ettha ca tividhassa kammābhisaṅkhārassa gahitattā dvādasapadiko paccayākāro gahitova hoti. Ettāvatā vaṭṭaṃ dassitaṃ.
现在,为了说明还灭,世尊说了“因此,诸比丘……”这一段。其中,“无明”是指对四圣谛的无知。“明”是指阿罗汉道智。在这里应当这样理解:先断了无明之后,明才生起。就像在四分的黑夜里,灯火点燃时黑暗就被消除一样,明生起时,无明就被断除。“于世间不执取任何事物”是指对世间的任何法都不执取、不紧抓。“不执取便不恐惧”的意思是:不执取、不紧抓的人,不会因渴爱而恐惧,也不会因怖畏而恐惧——也就是不渴爱、不害怕。“各自亲自”是指自己、靠自己而般涅槃,不是靠他人的力量。巴利
Idāni vivaṭṭaṃ dassento yato kho, bhikkhavetiādimāha. Tattha avijjāti catūsu saccesu aññāṇaṃ. Vijjāti arahattamaggañāṇaṃ. Ettha ca paṭhamameva avijjāya pahīnāya vijjā uppajjati. Yathā pana caturaṅgepi tame rattiṃ padīpujjalena andhakāro pahīyati, evaṃ vijjuppādā avijjāya pahānaṃ veditabbaṃ. Na kiñci loke upādiyatīti loke kiñci dhammaṃ na gaṇhāti na parāmasati. Anupādiyaṃ na paritassatīti anupādiyanto agaṇhanto neva taṇhāparitassanāya, na bhayaparitassanāya paritassati, na taṇhāyati na bhāyatīti attho. Paccattaññevāti sayameva attanāva parinibbāyati, na aññassa ānubhāvena.
世尊为什么开始说“若乐受”这一句呢?是为了先显示漏尽者的省察智,再显示他持续安住的状态。“不耽着”是指不被渴爱吞没、不被它牢牢抓住。那么,为什么又说到苦受呢?难道也有对苦受感到欢喜的人吗?是的,确实有。因为一个对乐受欢喜的人,就可以说是在对苦受欢喜:当他遇到苦时,就会渴望乐,而且乐受本身也有变坏之苦。“以身为边界”是指以身限定,只要五门的身还在运作,那时生起的五门受就是这个意思。“以命为边界”是指以寿命限定,只要生命还在延续,那时生起的意门受就是这个意思。巴利
Sosukhaṃ ce vedananti idaṃ kasmā ārabhi? Khīṇāsavassa paccavekkhaṇañāṇaṃ dassetvā satatavihāraṃ dassetuṃ ārabhi. Anajjhositāti taṇhāya gilitvā pariniṭṭhapetvā agahitā. Atha dukkhavedanā kasmā vuttā, kiṃ tampi abhinandanto atthīti? Āma atthi. Sukhaṃ abhinandantoyeva hi dukkhaṃ abhinandati nāma dukkhaṃ patvā sukhaṃ patthanato sukhassa ca vipariṇāmadukkhatoti. Kāyapariyantikanti kāyaparicchinnaṃ, yāva pañcadvārakāyo pavattati, tāva pavattaṃ pañcadvārikavedananti attho. Jīvitapariyantikanti jīvitaparicchinnaṃ . Yāva jīvitaṃ pavattati, tāva pavattaṃ manodvārikavedananti attho.
在这里,五门受是后来才生起,却先灭掉;意门受是最先生起,后来才灭掉。因为意门受在结生的那一刹那,就已经依托在心所依处色上了。五门受在生命活动过程中,是依五门而运作的。在生命早期,也就是二十岁左右的时候,五门受因为贪染、嗔恨、愚痴而变得非常强盛;到五十岁时,处于平稳状态;从六十岁开始衰退,到八九十岁时,就变得很微弱了。那时候,即使有人对同伴说“我们长久以来一起坐、一起躺”,对方也会说“我不记得了”。对于极其明显的色等所缘,他们也会说“我们看不见、听不见”,“不知道是好闻还是难闻,是好吃还是不好吃,是硬还是软”。这样一来,他们的五门受已经坏灭了,只有意门受还在运作。而意门受也逐渐衰退,到临终时,只依着心脏处而运作。只要这个意门受还在运作,就说有情还活着;当它不再运作时,就说有情已经死了、灭去了。巴利
Tattha pañcadvārikavedanā pacchā uppajjitvā paṭhamaṃ nirujjhati, manodvārikavedanā paṭhamaṃ uppajjitvā pacchā nirujjhati. Sā hi paṭisandhikkhaṇe vatthurūpasmiṃyeva patiṭṭhāti. Pañcadvārikā pavatte pañcadvāravasena pavattamānā paṭhamavaye vīsativassakāle rajjanadussanamuyhanavasena adhimattā balavatī hoti, paṇṇāsavassakāle ṭhitā hoti, saṭṭhivassakālato paṭṭhāya parihāyamānā asītinavutivassakāle mandā hoti. Tadā hi sattā ‘‘cirarattaṃ ekato nisīdimhā nipajjimhā’’ti vadantepi ‘‘na sañjānāmā’’ti vadanti. Adhimattānipi rūpādiārammaṇāni ‘‘na passāma na suṇāma’’, ‘‘sugandhaṃ duggandhaṃ vā sāduṃ asāduṃ vā thaddhaṃ mudukanti vā na jānāmā’’ti vadanti. Iti nesaṃ pañcadvārikavedanā bhaggā hoti, manodvārikāva pavattati. Sāpi anupubbena parihāyamānā maraṇasamaye hadayakoṭiṃyeva nissāya pavattati. Yāva panesā pavattati, tāva satto jīvatīti vuccati. Yadā nappavattati, tadā mato niruddhoti vuccati.
这个道理应当用池塘来比喻说明。巴利
Svāyamattho vāpiyā dīpetabbo –
就像有人造一个具备五条水道的池塘。最初下雨时,水从五条水道流进来,先把池塘里的坑洼灌满;雨一再地下,水道被灌满后,水漫开来,覆盖半由旬那么大的范围,水就停在那里,又从各处渗流。然后,打开排水管,在田里耕作时,水就流出去;到了庄稼成熟的时候,水流出去了,水减少了,人们就会说“我们去捉鱼吧”。再过几天,水只留在坑洼里。只要水还在那些坑洼里,人们就认为“大池塘里有水”。可是当那里的水断了,就说“池塘里没有水”。应当这样来理解这个比喻。巴利
Yathā hi puriso pañcaudakamaggasampannaṃ vāpiṃ kareyya, paṭhamaṃ deve vuṭṭhe pañcahi udakamaggehi udakaṃ pavisitvā antovāpiyaṃ āvāṭe pūreyya, punappunaṃ deve vassante udakamagge pūretvā gāvutaḍḍhayojanamattaṃ ottharitvā udakaṃ tiṭṭheyya tato tato vissandamānaṃ, atha niddhamanatumbe vivaritvā khettesu kamme kariyamāne udakaṃ nikkhamantaṃ, sassapākakāle (udakaṃ nikkhamantaṃ,) udakaṃ parihīnaṃ ‘‘macche gaṇhāmā’’ti vattabbataṃ āpajjeyya, tato katipāhena āvāṭesuyeva udakaṃ saṇṭhaheyya. Yāva pana taṃ āvāṭesu hoti, tāva ‘‘mahāvāpiyaṃ udakaṃ atthī’’ti saṅkhaṃ gacchati. Yadā pana tattha chijjati, tadā ‘‘vāpiyaṃ udakaṃ natthī’’ti vuccati, evaṃsampadamidaṃ veditabbaṃ.
就像最初下雨时,雨水顺着五条水道流进坑洞、把坑洞灌满的那个阶段,对应的是刚结生的那一刹那,意门受依止于心所依处色而安住的时候。雨继续下、五条水道都被灌满的那个阶段,对应的是生命流转中五门受持续生起的时候。水漫到半由旬、一由旬那么广的范围,对应的是在人生第一阶段、大约二十岁时,这种受因为贪染等而变得极其强烈有力。池塘灌满了水、水还没往外流、就这么满着待着的阶段,对应的是五十岁时这种受平稳安住的时候。排水管打开、田里开始干活、水往外流的时候,对应的是从六十岁开始,这种受衰退。水退了、水道里只剩一点点水的时候,对应的是八九十岁时,五门受变得微弱。水只留在坑洞里的时候,对应的是依止心脏色法的边际,意门受还在生起的时候。只要坑洞里哪怕还有一点点水,就可以说“池塘里有水”;同样地,只要那种受还在生起,就说“有情还活着”。可是,就像坑洞里的水断了,就说“池塘里没水了”,当意门受不再生起的时候,就说“有情死了”。经里就是针对这种受才说“感受寿边际之受”。巴利
Paṭhamaṃ deve vassante pañcahi maggehi udake pavisante āvāṭānaṃ pūraṇakālo viya hi paṭhamameva paṭisandhikkhaṇe manodvārikavedanāya vatthurūpe patiṭṭhitakālo, punappunaṃ deve vassante pañcannaṃ maggānaṃ pūritakālo viya pavatte pañcadvārikavedanāya pavattikālo, gāvutaḍḍhayojanamattaṃ ajjhottharaṇaṃ viya paṭhamavaye vīsativassakāle rajjanādivasena tassā adhimattabalavabhāvo, yāva vāpito udakaṃ na niggacchati, tāva pūrāya vāpiyā ṭhitakālo viya paññāsavassakāle tassā ṭhitakālo, niddhamanatumbesu vivaṭesu kammante kariyamāne udakassa nikkhamanakālo viya saṭṭhivassakālato paṭṭhāya tassā parihāni, udake bhaṭṭhe udakamaggesu parittodakassa ṭhitakālo viya asītinavutivassakāle pañcadvārikavedanāya mandakālo, āvāṭesuyeva udakassa patiṭṭhānakālo viya hadayavatthukoṭiṃ nissāya manodvārikavedanāya pavattikālo, āvāṭesu parittepi udake sati ‘‘vāpiyaṃ udakaṃ atthī’’ti vattabbakālo viya yāva sā pavattati, tāva ‘‘satto jīvatī’’ti vuccati. Yathā pana āvāṭesu udake chinne ‘‘natthi vāpiyaṃ udaka’’nti vuccati, evaṃ manodvārikavedanāya appavattamānāya ‘‘satto mato’’ti vuccati. Imaṃ vedanaṃ sandhāya vuttaṃ ‘‘jīvitapariyantikaṃ vedanaṃ vediyamāno’’ti.
身体坏灭,就是身体崩解。寿命穷尽之后,就是从命根断绝以后。就在这里,是说不再以结生的方式投生到别处,而就在此处。将变得清凉,是说那些在生命流转中因挣扎动荡而起的扰动都已止息,成为清凉、不再生起的法。诸身,是指由诸界构成的身体。将残留,是指会成为剩余下来的部分。巴利
Kāyassa bhedāti kāyassa bhedena. Jīvitapariyādānā uddhanti jīvitakkhayato uddhaṃ. Idhevāti paṭisandhivasena parato agantvā idheva. Sītībhavissantīti pavattivipphandadaratharahitāni sītāni appavattanadhammāni bhavissanti. Sarīrānīti dhātusarīrāni. Avasissantīti avasiṭṭhāni bhavissanti.
“陶匠的窑”是指陶匠烧制器皿的地方。“应当放置”是指会把它放在那里。“瓦片”是指连同口沿连成一体的陶罐碎片。“应当残留”是指会留在那里。同样地,这里应当把譬喻和所比喻的义理对应起来:炽热的陶匠窑应当看作三有,陶匠应当看作修行瑜伽的行者,从窑中取出陶器用的棍棒应当看作阿拉汉道智,平整的地面应当看作无为的涅槃地基。用棍棒把热陶罐拉出来、放在平整地面上的那一刻,应当看作:已经开始修观的行者,在观照色法七组、非色法七组时,他的业处修习变得纯熟、清晰显现,遇到像那样适宜的时节等条件,在一座之中增长观智,证得最高的果——阿拉汉果,从四种恶趣中拔除自身,然后以果等至安住在无为的涅槃地基上。然而,漏已尽的人就像那个热陶罐,并不会在证得阿拉汉果的当天就般涅槃,而是为了延续教法传承,住世五十年或六十年,直到最后心识生起,已执受的五蕴坏灭,才以无余涅槃界般涅槃。那时,就像陶罐留下瓦片一样,只剩下非执受的身体。经文说“他了知身体将残留下来”,这是为了策励漏已尽者继续用功而说的。巴利
Kumbhakārapākāti kumbhakārassa bhājanapacanaṭṭhānato. Paṭisisseyyāti ṭhapeyya. Kapallānīti saha mukhavaṭṭiyā ekābaddhāni kumbhakapallāni. Avasisseyyunti tiṭṭheyyuṃ. Evameva khoti ettha idaṃ opammasaṃsandanaṃ – ādittakumbhakārapāko viya hi tayo bhavā daṭṭhabbā, kumbhakāro viya yogāvacaro, pākato kumbhakārabhājanānaṃ nīharaṇadaṇḍako viya arahattamaggañāṇaṃ, samo bhūmibhāgo viya asaṅkhataṃ nibbānatalaṃ, daṇḍakena uṇhakumbhaṃ ākaḍḍhitvā same bhūmibhāge kumbhassa ṭhapitakālo viya āraddhavipassakassa rūpasattakaṃ arūpasattakaṃ vipassantassa kammaṭṭhāne ca paguṇe vibhūte upaṭṭhahamāne tathārūpaṃ utusappāyādiṃ labhitvā ekāsane nisinnassa vipassanaṃ vaḍḍhetvā aggaphalaṃ arahattaṃ patvā catūhi apāyehi attabhāvaṃ uddharitvā phalasamāpattivasena asaṅkhate nibbānatale ṭhitakālo daṭṭhabbo. Khīṇāsavo pana uṇhakumbho viya arahattappattadivaseyeva na parinibbāti, sāsanappaveṇiṃ pana ghaṭayamāno paṇṇāsasaṭṭhivassāni ṭhatvā carimakacittappattiyā upādiṇṇakakkhandhabhedā anupādisesāya nibbānadhātuyā parinibbāti. Athassa kumbhassa viya kapallāni anupādiṇṇakasarīrāneva avasissantīti. Sarīrāni avasissantīti pajānātīti idaṃ pana khīṇāsavassa anuyogāropanatthaṃ vuttaṃ.
“识应被了知”,意思是结生识应被了知。“善哉,善哉”,这是在随喜赞叹长老们的回答。“正是如此”,即当三种行不存在时结生识不显现等,同样如此。“应信解”,意思是获得那称为决意的信解。“这就是苦的尽头”,这即是轮回之苦的尽头,这是它的界限,也就是涅槃。第一。巴利
Viññāṇaṃ paññāyethāti paṭisandhiviññāṇaṃ paññāyetha. Sādhu sādhūti therānaṃ byākaraṇaṃ sampahaṃsati. Evametanti yadetaṃ tividhe abhisaṅkhāre asati paṭisandhiviññāṇassa appaññāṇantiādi, evameva etaṃ. Adhimuccathāti sanniṭṭhānasaṅkhātaṃ adhimokkhaṃ paṭilabhatha. Esevanto dukkhassāti ayameva vaṭṭadukkhassa anto ayaṃ paricchedo, yadidaṃ nibbānanti. Paṭhamaṃ.
2. 取经的注释巴利
2. Upādānasuttavaṇṇanā
52 52. 在第二部经中,“于应取者”是指四种取的缘,也就是三界的一切法。“观味者”是指正在随观乐味的人。“于此”是指在那个火堆中。“以此为食”是指以那个为缘。“此为取”只是它的另一个说法。同样地,这里应当这样理解:火堆就像三有,也就是三界轮回;燃火的人就像依赖轮回的愚痴凡夫;投入干草、牛粪等,就像观味者的凡夫由于渴爱等,通过六门造作善业和不善业。当干草、牛粪等烧尽后,又反复投入它们,使火堆增长,就像愚痴凡夫一次又一次地起身,反复造作前面所说的业,从而一次又一次地产生轮回之苦。巴利
52. Dutiye upādāniyesūti catunnaṃ upādānānaṃ paccayesu tebhūmakadhammesu. Assādānupassinoti assādaṃ anupassantassa. Tatrāti tasmiṃ aggikkhandhe. Tadāhāroti taṃpaccayo. Tadupādānoti tasseva vevacanaṃ. Evamevakhoti ettha aggikkhandho viya hi tayo bhavā, tebhūmakavaṭṭantipi etadeva, aggijaggakapuriso viya vaṭṭanissito bālaputhujjano, sukkhatiṇagomayādipakkhipanaṃ viya assādānupassino puthujjanassa taṇhādivasena chahi dvārehi kusalākusalakammakaraṇaṃ. Tiṇagomayādīsu khīṇesu punappunaṃ tesaṃ pakkhipanena aggikkhandhassa vaḍḍhanaṃ viya bālaputhujjanassa uṭṭhāya samuṭṭhāya yathāvuttakammāyūhanena aparāparaṃ vaṭṭadukkhanibbattanaṃ.
不该时不时地投入干草等物。一个希望他得到好处的人会这样对他说:朋友,你为什么一次又一次地起身,把草捆成把,把干草和木柴装满篮子,又投入干牛粪来烧这堆火呢?难道你这样做能有什么长进吗?朋友,这是我们家传下来的做法,可我这样做不但没有长进,哪里谈得上长进呢?我守着这堆火,既没法洗澡,也没法吃饭,还不能躺下休息。既然如此,朋友,你弄这没意义的火做什么?来吧,你把带来的这些草之类的东西丢在这里,它们自己就会烧掉。你呢,有个地方有一口清凉水的莲池,你去那里洗个澡,用花、香、涂香打扮自己,穿好下衣,披好上衣,穿上鞋子,进城去,登上最殊胜的宫殿,打开窗户,在大街上光彩照人地坐着,专心一意,安住在快乐里。你坐在那里的时候,那些草之类的东西烧完了,这火自然就会熄灭。那人就照这样做了。同样地,他坐在那里时,那火因为燃料耗尽,自然就熄灭了。就是针对这个,才说了不该时不时地投入干草等物这番话。巴利
Na kālena kālaṃ sukkhāni ceva tiṇāni pakkhipeyyāti tañhi koci atthakāmo evaṃ vadeyya – ‘‘bho kasmā uṭṭhāya samuṭṭhāya kalāpe bandhitvā sukkhatiṇakaṭṭhānaṃ pacchiyañca pūretvā sukkhagomayāni pakkhipanto etaṃ aggiṃ jālesi? Api nu te atthi itonidānaṃ kāci vaḍḍhīti? Vaṃsāgatametaṃ bho amhākaṃ, itonidānaṃ pana me avaḍḍhiyeva, kuto vaḍḍhi? Ahañhi imaṃ aggiṃ jagganto neva nhāyituṃ na bhuñjituṃ na nipajjituṃ labhāmīti. Tena hi bho kiṃ te iminā niratthakena aggijālanena? Ehi tvaṃ etāni ābhatāni tiṇādīni ettha nikkhipa, tāni sayameva jhāyissanti, tvaṃ pana asukasmiṃ ṭhāne sītodakā pokkharaṇī atthi, tattha nhatvā, mālāgandhavilepanehi attānaṃ maṇḍetvā sunivattho supārutova pādukāhi nagaraṃ pavisitvā pāsādavaramāruyha vātapānaṃ vivaritvā mahāvīthiyaṃ virocamāno nisīda ekaggo sukhasamappito hutvā, tattha te nisinnassa tiṇādīnaṃ khayena sayameva ayaṃ aggi appaṇṇattibhāvaṃ gamissatī’’ti. So tathā kareyya. Tatheva ca tattha nisinnassa so aggi upādānakkhayena appaṇṇattibhāvaṃ gaccheyya. Idaṃ sandhāyetaṃ ‘‘na kālena kāla’’ntiādi vuttaṃ.
同样地,在这里应当这样把譬喻和意义对应起来:正在燃烧的四十担柴的大火堆,应当看作三界轮回;看守火的人,应当看作依止轮回的修行者;想让他得益的那个人,应当看作正自觉者;那个人给他的教导,就像如来对比丘开示关于三界诸法的业处,说:“来,比丘,对三界诸法要厌离,这样你就能从轮回之苦中解脱。”那个人按照教导去做,后来坐在殿堂里的时刻,就像修行者接受了善逝的教导,进入空寂之处,对三界诸法建立观,逐渐获得适合的饮食等资具,在一个座位上坐定,最终安立在最高果位。那个人因为沐浴、涂香等,身体洁净、装饰庄严,坐在那里时专一喜乐现前的时刻,就像修行者在圣道的水池里,用道智之水好好沐浴,洗净烦恼污垢,穿上惭与愧的衣服,涂上戒的涂香,用阿罗汉果的庄严装饰自身,佩戴解脱的花鬘,穿上神足的鞋子,进入涅槃城,登上法殿,在念处的大街上光辉闪耀,以涅槃为所缘,进入果等至而坐。再说,那个人坐在那里时,因为草等燃料耗尽,火堆消失不见,应当看作诸漏已尽者住到寿命终结,由于所执取的诸蕴坏灭,以无余涅槃界般涅槃,大轮回彻底止息。第二。巴利
Evameva khoti ettha pana idaṃ opammasaṃsandanaṃ – cattālīsāya kaṭṭhavāhānaṃ jalamāno mahāaggikkhandho viya hi tebhūmakavaṭṭaṃ daṭṭhabbaṃ, aggijagganakapuriso viya vaṭṭasannissitako yogāvacaro, atthakāmo puriso viya sammāsambuddho, tena purisena tassa dinnaovādo viya tathāgatena ‘‘ehi tvaṃ, bhikkhu, tebhūmakadhammesu nibbinda, evaṃ vaṭṭadukkhā muccissasī’’ti tassa tebhūmakadhammesu kammaṭṭhānassa kathitakālo, tassa purisassa yathānusiṭṭhaṃ paṭipajjitvā pāsāde nisinnakālo viya yogino sugatovādaṃ sampaṭicchitvā suññāgāraṃ paviṭṭhassa tebhūmakadhammesu vipassanaṃ paṭṭhapetvā anukkamena yathānurūpaṃ āhārasappāyādiṃ labhitvā, ekāsane nisinnassa aggaphale patiṭṭhitakālo, tassa nhānavilepanādīhi sudhotamaṇḍitakāyattā tasmiṃ nisinnassa ekaggasukhasamappitakālo viya yogino ariyamaggapokkharaṇiyaṃ maggañāṇodakena sunhātasudhotakilesamalassa hirottappasāṭake nivāsetvā sīlavilepanānulittassa arahattamaṇḍanena attabhāvaṃ maṇḍetvā vimuttipupphadāmaṃ piḷandhitvā iddhipādapādukā āruyha nibbānanagaraṃ pavisitvā dhammapāsādaṃ āruyha satipaṭṭhānamahāvīthiyaṃ virocamānassa nibbānārammaṇaṃ phalasamāpattiṃ appetvā nisinnakālo. Tassa pana purisassa tasmiṃ nisinnassa tiṇādīnaṃ khayena aggikkhandhassa appaṇṇattigamanakālo viya khīṇāsavassa yāvatāyukaṃ ṭhatvā upādiṇṇakakkhandhabhedena anupādisesāya nibbānadhātuyā parinibbutassa mahāvaṭṭavūpasamo daṭṭhabbo. Dutiyaṃ.
3. 结经的注释巴利
3. Saṃyojanasuttavaṇṇanā
53 在第三经的注释中,“于诸结的缘”是指十种结的缘。“应燃”就是应当让它燃烧。“应注油、应添灯芯”是说,为了照料灯火,要拿着大油壶和大灯芯盘,一直站在近处,油用完了就添油,灯芯烧尽了就添灯芯。这里剩下的内容和譬喻的对应,应当依照前面说过的方式来了知。第三。巴利
53. Tatiye saṃyojaniyesūti dasannaṃ saṃyojanānaṃ paccayesu. Jhāyeyyāti jaleyya. Telaṃ āsiñceyya vaṭṭiṃ upasaṃhareyyāti dīpapaṭijagganatthaṃ telabhājanañca mahantañca vaṭṭikapālaṃ gahetvā samīpe niccaṃ ṭhitova tele khīṇe telaṃ āsiñceyya, vaṭṭiyā khīṇāya vaṭṭiṃ upasaṃhareyya. Sesamettha saddhiṃ opammasaṃsandanena purimanayeneva veditabbaṃ. Tatiyaṃ.
第四部《第二结经》的注释巴利
4. Dutiyasaṃyojanasuttavaṇṇanā
54 第四经中,先说了譬喻,然后才说明含义。其余部分与此相同。第四。巴利
54. Catutthe upamaṃ paṭhamaṃ katvā pacchā attho vutto. Sesaṃ tādisameva. Catutthaṃ.
《大树经》的注释巴利
5. Mahārukkhasuttavaṇṇanā
55 第五项:“向上输送养分”,就是把地界的味道和水界的味道往上送。因为养分被送上去,在高达百掌的大树嫩芽尖端,就像一滴滴水珠那样,形成滋润的液体停留在那里。这里譬喻的对应是这样的:大树,譬喻三界轮回;树根,譬喻六处;从树根向上输送养分,譬喻从六门造业而向上;因为养分已经升上去,大树能一直站到劫灭之时,譬喻依赖轮回的愚痴凡夫,从六门不断造业,使轮回一再增长,因此长久存在。巴利
55. Pañcame uddhaṃ ojaṃ abhiharantīti pathavīrasañca āporasañca upari āropenti. Ojāya āropitattā hatthasatubbedhassa rukkhassa aṅkuraggesu bindubindūni viya hutvā sineho tiṭṭhati. Idaṃ panettha opammasaṃsandanaṃ – mahārukkho viya hi tebhūmakavaṭṭaṃ, mūlāni viya āyatanāni, mūlehi ojāya ārohanaṃ viya chahi dvārehi kammārohanaṃ, ojāya abhiruḷhattā mahārukkhassa yāvakappaṭṭhānaṃ viya vaṭṭanissitabālaputhujjanassa chahi dvārehi kammaṃ āyūhantassa aparāparaṃ vaṭṭassa vaḍḍhanavasena dīgharattaṃ ṭhānaṃ.
“锄头和篮子”,就是锄头以及装东西的篮子。“应当砍成一段一段”,就是把大大小小的部分一截一截地砍断。这里譬喻的对应关系是:大树,譬喻三界轮回;想毁掉那棵树的人,譬喻瑜伽行者;锄头,譬喻智慧;篮子,譬喻定;砍树的斧头,譬喻智慧;树根被砍断的时候,譬喻瑜伽行者从师长那里取得业处后作意的智慧;砍成一段一段的时候,譬喻对四大的简要作意;劈开的时候,譬喻对四十二身分的详细作意;弄成碎片的时候,譬喻依所造色以及以色蕴为所缘的识,通过这些来把握名色;切断树根,譬喻为那名色寻求其缘;在风和阳光下晒干后用火焚烧的时候,譬喻逐渐增长观,得到某种适合的条件,业处清晰地现前时,独坐结跏趺坐,修习沙门法而证得最高果位;烧成灰的时候,譬喻证得阿罗汉果那天尚未般涅槃者的住寿期间;被大风吹散、被河水冲走,譬喻所执取的五蕴坏灭后,在无余涅槃界般涅槃者的轮回止息。第五。巴利
Kuddālapiṭakanti kuddālañceva pacchibhājanañca. Khaṇḍākhaṇḍikaṃ chindeyyāti khuddakamahantāni khaṇḍākhaṇḍāni karonto chindeyya. Idaṃ panettha opammasaṃsandanaṃ – idhāpi hi mahārukkho viya tebhūmakavaṭṭaṃ, rukkhaṃ nāsetukāmo puriso viya yogāvacaro, kuddālo viya ñāṇaṃ, pacchi viya samādhi, rukkhacchedanapharasu viya ñāṇaṃ, rukkhassa mūle chinnakālo viya yogino ācariyasantike kammaṭṭhānaṃ gahetvā manasikarontassa paññā, khaṇḍākhaṇḍikaṃ chindanakālo viya saṅkhepato catunnaṃ mahābhūtānaṃ manasikāro, phālanaṃ viya dvecattālīsāya koṭṭhāsesu vitthāramanasikāro, sakalikaṃ sakalikaṃ karaṇakālo viya upādārūpassa ceva rūpakkhandhārammaṇassa viññāṇassa cāti imesaṃ vasena nāmarūpapariggaho, mūlānaṃ upacchedanaṃ viya tasseva nāmarūpassa paccayapariyesanaṃ, vātātape visosetvā agginā ḍahanakālo viya anupubbena vipassanaṃ vaḍḍhetvā aññataraṃ sappāyaṃ labhitvā kammaṭṭhāne vibhūte upaṭṭhahamāne ekapallaṅke nisinnassa samaṇadhammaṃ karontassa aggaphalappatti, masikaraṇaṃ viya arahattappattadivaseyeva aparinibbāyantassa yāvatāyukaṃ ṭhita kālo, mahāvāte opunanaṃ nadiyā pavāhanaṃ viya ca upādiṇṇakakkhandhabhedena anupādisesāya nibbānadhātuyā parinibbutassa vaṭṭavūpasamo veditabbo. Pañcamaṃ.
第二大树经的注释巴利
6. Dutiyamahārukkhasuttavaṇṇanā
56 第六个解释里,也是先说了譬喻,然后才说明含义,差别就在这里。第六。巴利
56. Chaṭṭhepi upamaṃ paṭhamaṃ vatvā pacchā attho vutto, idameva nānattaṃ. Chaṭṭhaṃ.
幼树经的注释巴利
7. Taruṇarukkhasuttavaṇṇanā
57-59 57-59. 第七个譬喻中,“幼树”指还没有结果的树。“应当环剥”意思是应当清理。“应当给土”意思是把又硬又粗的土去掉,再放入混合了柔软牛粪粉的甜土。“增长”意思是达到增长之后,该开花的就开花,该结果的就得果。这里有一个譬喻的对应关系:幼树好比三地的轮回,护树的人好比依止轮回的凡夫,根、果等相续不断好比通过身、语、意三门积集善业和不善业,树达到增长好比凡夫通过三门造业,使轮回一再地运转。反过来,还灭也应当按照前面所说的道理来理解。第八和第九个譬喻含义浅显明白。第七个等也是如此。巴利
57-59. Sattame taruṇoti ajātaphalo. Palimajjeyyāti sodheyya. Paṃsuṃ dadeyyāti thaddhapharusapaṃsuṃ haritvā mudugomayacuṇṇamissaṃ madhurapaṃsuṃ pakkhipeyya. Vuddhinti vuddhiṃ āpajjitvā pupphūpago pupphaṃ, phalūpago phalaṃ gaṇheyya. Idaṃ panettha opammasaṃsandanaṃ – taruṇarukkho viya hi tebhūmakavaṭṭaṃ, rukkhajaggako puriso viya vaṭṭanissito puthujjano, mūlaphalasantānādīni viya tīhi dvārehi kusalākusalakammāyūhanaṃ, rukkhassa vuḍḍhiāpajjanaṃ viya puthujjanassa tīhi dvārehi kammaṃ āyūhato aparāparaṃ vaṭṭappavatti. Vivaṭṭaṃ vuttanayeneva veditabbaṃ. Aṭṭhamanavamāni uttānatthāneva. Sattamādīni.
第10章 因缘经的注释巴利
10. Nidānasuttavaṇṇanā
60 第十处。“住在俱卢国”:所谓“俱卢”,是因为复数词形而得到这个名称的地方。有一个叫“甘马思昙马”的集镇,是俱卢国的一个集镇;把它作为乞食的村庄,这就是意思。“具寿”是亲切的称呼,也是尊敬的称呼。“阿难”是那位长老的名字。“坐在一边”:阿难尊者避开六种坐姿的过失,在朝向世尊右膝的地方,进入六色佛光之中,就像浸入清净的漆汁,又像披上金布,又像走进红色毛毯的帷帐中,作为法的库藏者而坐。因此说“坐在一边”。巴利
60. Dasame kurūsu viharatīti kurūti evaṃ bahuvacanavasena laddhavohāre janapade viharati. Kammāsadhammaṃ nāma kurūnaṃ nigamoti evaṃnāmako kurūnaṃ nigamo, taṃ gocaragāmaṃ katvāti attho. Āyasmāti piyavacanametaṃ garuvacanametaṃ. Ānandoti tassa therassa nāmaṃ. Ekamantaṃ nisīdīti cha nisajjadose vivajjento dakkhiṇajāṇumaṇḍalassa abhimukhaṭṭhāne chabbaṇṇānaṃ buddharasmīnaṃ anto pavisitvā pasannalākhārasaṃ vigāhanto viya suvaṇṇapaṭaṃ pārupanto viya rattakambalavitānamajjhaṃ pavisanto viya dhammabhaṇḍāgāriko āyasmā ānando nisīdi. Tena vuttaṃ ‘‘ekamantaṃ nisīdī’’ti.
那么,这位具寿是在什么时间、因为什么原因去亲近世尊的呢?是在傍晚时分,为了请问缘起而去的。据说那一天,这位具寿为了摄受族姓,挨家挨户地托钵,就像在每家每户放下千袋金钱一样,在甘马思昙马镇乞食。乞食回来、吃完饭之后,他先照料世尊的日常事务;等世尊进入香室后,他顶礼世尊,回到自己白天住的地方,又为弟子们安排事务。弟子们离开后,他打扫白天住的房间,铺好皮垫,用水壶里的水把手脚弄凉,然后盘腿坐下,进入入流果的等至。接着,到了预定的时间,他从等至中出来,把智慧转向缘起。他从“无明缘行”开始,从头推到尾,从尾推到头,从两头推向中间,又从中间推向两头,这样把十二支的缘起反复观察了三遍。他这样观察时,缘起变得非常清楚,就像极其浅显易懂一样显现在他面前。于是他心想:“这缘起被一切诸佛说为甚深,而且显现也甚深。可对我这个只具有部分智慧的声闻来说,它却像浅显易懂一样清楚显现。是只有我觉得它浅显,还是别人也这样觉得呢?我应该把自己能这样体悟的原因禀告世尊。”于是他从座位上起来,抖净皮垫,带着它,在傍晚时分前去亲近世尊。因此才说:“在傍晚时分,为了请问缘起而前去亲近。”巴利
Kāya pana velāya kena kāraṇena ayamāyasmā bhagavantaṃ upasaṅkamantoti? Sāyanhavelāya paccayākārapañhaṃ pucchanakāraṇena. Taṃ divasaṃ kira ayamāyasmā kulasaṅgahatthāya gharadvāre gharadvāre sahassabhaṇḍikaṃ nikkhipanto viya kammāsadhammaṃ piṇḍāya caritvā piṇḍapātapaṭikkanto satthu vattaṃ dassetvā satthari gandhakuṭiṃ paviṭṭhe satthāraṃ vanditvā attano divāṭṭhānaṃ gantvā antevāsikesu vattaṃ dassetvā paṭikkantesu divāṭṭhānaṃ paṭisammajjitvā cammakkhaṇḍaṃ paññapetvā udakatumbato udakena hatthapāde sītalaṃ katvā pallaṅkaṃ ābhujitvā nisinno sotāpattiphalasamāpattiṃ samāpajjitvā. Atha paricchinnakālavasena samāpattito vuṭṭhāya paccayākāre ñāṇaṃ otāresi. So ‘‘avijjāpaccayā saṅkhārā’’tiādito paṭṭhāya antaṃ, antato paṭṭhāya ādiṃ, ubhayantato paṭṭhāya majjhaṃ, majjhato paṭṭhāya ubho ante pāpento tikkhattuṃ dvādasapadaṃ paccayākāraṃ sammasi. Tassevaṃ sammasantassa paccayākāro vibhūto hutvā uttānakuttānako viya upaṭṭhāsi. Tato cintesi – ‘‘ayaṃ paccayākāro sabbabuddhehi gambhīro ceva gambhīrāvabhāso cāti kathito, mayhaṃ kho pana padesañāṇe ṭhitassa sāvakassa sato uttāno viya vibhūto pākaṭo hutvā upaṭṭhāti, mayhaṃyeva nu kho esa uttānako viya upaṭṭhāti, udāhu aññesampīti attano upaṭṭhānakāraṇaṃ satthu ārocessāmī’’ti nisinnaṭṭhānato uṭṭhāya cammakkhaṇḍaṃ papphoṭetvā ādāya sāyanhasamaye bhagavantaṃ upasaṅkami. Tena vuttaṃ – ‘‘sāyanhavelāyaṃ paccayākārapañhaṃ pucchanakāraṇena upasaṅkamanto’’ti.
“极其深奥”这句话里,“极其”这个词表示超出了衡量的范围。超出了衡量的范围而深,就是“极其深奥”的意思。“显现为深奥”的意思是:它本身就是深奥的,同时又显现出来,也就是能被看见。有的水本身浅,却显现得深,就像因为烂树叶而变成黑色的陈水。那水虽然只有膝盖那么深,看起来却像有百人叠起来那么深。有的水本身深,却显现得浅,就像宝珠般清澈明亮的水。那水虽然有百人叠起来那么深,看起来却像只有膝盖那么深。有的水本身浅,显现得也浅,就像钵等容器里的水。有的水本身深,显现得也深,就像以须弥山为底的大海水。水本身就有这四种情况。但缘起不是这样。因为缘起既深奥,又显现为深奥,只得到这一种情况。虽然它是这样的,但对我来说却显得极其浅显。于是他便表达自己的惊叹:“尊者,这真是稀有!尊者,这真是奇特!”这样问完问题后,就默然坐下了。巴利
Yāva gambhīroti ettha yāvasaddo pamāṇātikkame. Atikkamma pamāṇaṃ gambhīro, atigambhīroti attho. Gambhīrāvabhāsoti gambhīrova hutvā avabhāsati, dissatīti attho. Ekañhi uttānameva gambhīrāvabhāsaṃ hoti pūtipaṇṇarasavasena kāḷavaṇṇaṃ purāṇaudakaṃ viya. Tañhi jāṇuppamāṇampi sataporisaṃ viya dissati. Ekaṃ gambhīraṃ uttānāvabhāsaṃ hoti maṇibhāsaṃ vippasannaudakaṃ viya. Tañhi sataporisampi jāṇuppamāṇaṃ viya khāyati. Ekaṃ uttānaṃ uttānāvabhāsaṃ hoti pātiādīsu udakaṃ viya. Ekaṃ gambhīraṃ gambhīrāvabhāsaṃ hoti sinerupādakamahāsamudde udakaṃ viya. Evaṃ udakameva cattāri nāmāni labhati. Paṭiccasamuppāde panetaṃ natthi. Ayañhi gambhīro ca gambhīrāvabhāso cāti ekameva nāmaṃ labhati . Evarūpo samānopi atha ca pana me uttānakuttānako viya khāyati, tadidaṃ acchariyaṃ, bhante, abbhutaṃ, bhanteti evaṃ attano vimhayaṃ pakāsento pañhaṃ pucchitvā tuṇhībhūto nisīdi.
世尊听了他的话,心想:“阿难说缘起浅显,就好像想伸手去抓有顶天,好像想劈开须弥山取出里面的核,好像不用船就想横渡大海,好像想翻转大地去取地味——这问题是佛陀的境界。好,我来给他讲说这缘起有多深。”于是说了“千万不要这样想”等话。巴利
Bhagavā tassa vacanaṃ sutvā ‘‘ānando bhavaggagahaṇāya hatthaṃ pasārento viya sineruṃ bhinditvā miñjaṃ nīharituṃ vāyamamāno viya vinā nāvāya mahāsamuddaṃ taritukāmo viya pathaviṃ parivattetvā pathavojaṃ gahetuṃ vāyamamāno viya buddhavisayaṃ pañhaṃ attano uttānuttānanti vadati, handassa gambhīrabhāvaṃ ācikkhāmī’’ti cintetvā mā hevantiādimāha.
这里,“mā heva”中的“he”只是一个语气助词,意思是“不要这样说”。而“不要这样说”这句话,世尊既是在鼓励阿难尊者,也是在提醒他别轻慢。其中鼓励的意思是:阿难,你智慧广大、见解明利,所以对你来说,甚深的缘起也显得好像很浅显。但对其他人来说,不能认为它也浅显,它确实是甚深的,而且显现出来的样子也是甚深的。巴利
Tattha mā hevanti ha-kāro nipātamattaṃ, evaṃ mā bhaṇīti attho. ‘‘Mā heva’’nti ca idaṃ vacanaṃ bhagavā āyasmantaṃ ānandaṃ ussādentopi bhaṇati apasādentopi. Tattha ussādentopīti, ānanda, tvaṃ mahāpañño visadañāṇo, tena te gambhīropi paṭiccasamuppādo uttānako viya khāyati, aññesaṃ panesa uttānakoti na sallakkhetabbo, gambhīroyeva ca so gambhīrāvabhāso ca.
这里用四个比喻来说明。据说,有个大力士连续六个月享用美味饮食,训练有素,每逢节日集会时都练习搬举搏击石。有一次他去战场,途中有人把一块搏击石指给他看。他问:“这是什么?”对方说:“这是搏击石。”他说:“拿来。”别人说:“我们举不动。”他就亲自走过去,说:“这东西的重心在哪里?”然后用双手举起两块石头,像扔游戏球一样扔出去,走了。在这里,搏击石对这位大力士来说是轻的,但不能因此就说它对别人也是轻的。就像这位连续六个月享用美味饮食的大力士一样,具寿阿难是历经十万劫圆满修集愿行的。正如大力士因为力气大,搏击石对他显得轻;同样,长老因为智慧广大,缘起对他显得浅显。但不能说缘起对别人也浅显。巴利
Tattha catasso upamā vadanti – cha māse subhojanarasapuṭṭhassa kira katayogassa mahāmallassa samajjasamaye katamallapāsāṇaparicayassa yuddhabhūmiṃ gacchantassa antarā mallapāsāṇaṃ dassesuṃ. So ‘‘kiṃ eta’’nti āha. Mallapāsāṇoti. Āharatha nanti. ‘‘Ukkhipituṃ na sakkomā’’ti vutte sayaṃ gantvā ‘‘kuhiṃ imassa bhāriyaṭṭhāna’’nti vatvā dvīhi hatthehi dve pāsāṇe ukkhipitvā kīḷāguḷe viya khipitvā agamāsi. Tattha mallassa mallapāsāṇo lahukoti na aññesampi lahukoti vattabbo. Cha māse subhojanarasapuṭṭho mallo viya hi kappasatasahassaṃ abhinīhārasampanno āyasmā ānando. Yathā mallassa mahābalatāya mallapāsāṇo lahuko, evaṃ therassa mahāpaññatāya paṭiccasamuppādo uttānoti vattabbo, so aññesaṃ uttānoti na vattabbo.
在大海里,有一种叫“提弥”的大鱼,身长两百由旬;叫“提弥伽罗”的,身长三百由旬;叫“提弥罗宾伽罗”的,身长五百由旬;还有阿难、提弥难陀、阿阇诃罗、大提弥这四种,身长一千由旬。这里是用提弥罗宾伽罗来作说明。据说,它只要晃动右耳,五百由旬范围内的海水就会动荡;晃动左耳、尾巴、头部也一样。而当它同时晃动两只耳朵、用尾巴拍打、又反复摆动头部开始嬉戏时,七八百由旬范围内的海水就会像被放进容器里架到灶上烧一样沸腾起来。在一百由旬左右的地方,海水甚至盖不住它的背。它可能会这样说:“人们都说这大海很深,到底哪里深了?我连能盖住背的水都找不到。”所以,对生为提弥罗宾伽罗这样庞大身躯的众生来说,大海是浅的,但不能因此就说对其他小鱼来说大海也是浅的;同样,对有智慧的长老来说,缘起是浅显的,但不能因此就说对其他人来说缘起也是浅显的。金翅鸟王身长一百五十由旬。它的右翼长五十由旬,左翼也一样;尾羽长六十由旬,脖子长三十由旬,嘴长九由旬,脚长十二由旬。当它要展示金翅鸟的风力时,七八百由旬的地方都不够用。它可能会这样说:“人们都说虚空无边,到底哪里无边了?我连展开翅膀之风的地方都找不到。”所以,对生为金翅鸟王这样庞大身躯的众生来说,虚空是有限的,但不能因此就说对其他小鸟来说虚空也是有限的;同样,对有智慧的长老来说,缘起是浅显的,但不能因此就说对其他人来说缘起也是浅显的。巴利
Mahāsamudde ca timi nāma mahāmaccho dviyojanasatiko, timiṅgalo tiyojanasatiko, timirapiṅgalo pañcayojanasatiko, ānando timinando ajjhāroho mahātimīti ime cattāro yojanasahassikā. Tattha timirapiṅgaleneva dīpenti. Tassa kira dakkhiṇakaṇṇaṃ cālentassa pañcayojanasate padese udakaṃ calati, tathā vāmakaṇṇaṃ, tathā naṅguṭṭhaṃ, tathā sīsaṃ. Dve pana kaṇṇe cāletvā naṅguṭṭhena paharitvā sīsaṃ aparāparaṃ katvā kīḷituṃ āraddhassa sattaṭṭhayojanasate ṭhāne bhājane pakkhipitvā uddhane āropitaṃ viya udakaṃ pakkuthati. Yojanasatamatte padese udakaṃ piṭṭhiṃ chādetuṃ na sakkoti. So evaṃ vadeyya – ‘‘ayaṃ mahāsamuddo gambhīroti vadanti, kutassa gambhīratā, mayaṃ piṭṭhimattacchādanampi udakaṃ na labhāmā’’ti. Tattha kāyūpapannassa timirapiṅgalassa mahāsamuddo uttānoti aññesañca khuddakamacchānaṃ uttānoti na vattabbo, evameva ñāṇūpapannassa therassa paṭiccasamuppādo uttānoti aññesampi uttānoti na vattabbo. Supaṇṇarājā ca diyaḍḍhayojanasatiko hoti. Tassa dakkhiṇapakkho paññāsayojaniko hoti, tathā vāmapakkho, piñchavaṭṭi ca saṭṭhiyojanikā, gīvā tiṃsayojanikā, mukhaṃ navayojanaṃ, pādā dvādasayojanikā, tasmiṃ supaṇṇavātaṃ dassetuṃ āraddhe sattaṭṭhayojanasataṃ ṭhānaṃ nappahoti. So evaṃ vadeyya – ‘‘ayaṃ ākāso anantoti vadanti, kutassa anantatā, mayaṃ pakkhavātappattharaṇokāsampi na labhāmā’’ti. Tattha kāyūpapannassa supaṇṇarañño ākāso parittoti aññesañca khuddakapakkhīnaṃ parittoti na vattabbo, evameva ñāṇūpapannassa therassa paṭiccasamuppādo uttānoti aññesampi uttānoti na vattabbo.
罗睺阿修罗王从脚底到头顶,高四千八百由旬。他两臂之间宽一千二百由旬,身体厚度六百由旬,手掌脚掌各三百由旬,嘴也是三百由旬,一节手指五十由旬,两眉之间也是五十由旬,额头三百由旬,头九百由旬。他进入大海时,深水只到他的膝盖。他可能会这样说:“人们都说这大海很深。深在哪里?我连没过膝盖的水都找不到。”在这里,对于生为如此庞大身躯的罗睺来说,大海是浅的,但不能因此就说对其他人大海也是浅的。同样,对于具足智慧的长老来说,缘起是浅显的,但不能因此就说对其他人缘起也是浅显的。世尊正是针对这个道理才说:“阿难,不要这样!阿难,不要这样!”巴利
Rāhu asurindo pana pādantato yāva kesantā yojanānaṃ cattāri sahassāni aṭṭha ca satāni honti. Tassa dvinnaṃ bāhānaṃ antare dvādasayojanasatikaṃ, bahalattena chayojanasatikaṃ, hatthapādatalāni tiyojanasatikāni, tathā mukhaṃ, ekaṅgulipabbaṃ paññāsayojanaṃ, tathā bhamukantaraṃ, nalāṭaṃ tiyojanasatikaṃ, sīsaṃ navayojanasatikaṃ. Tassa mahāsamuddaṃ otiṇṇassa gambhīraṃ udakaṃ jāṇuppamāṇaṃ hoti. So evaṃ vadeyya – ‘‘ayaṃ mahāsamuddo gambhīroti vadanti. Kutassa gambhīratā? Mayaṃ jāṇuppaṭicchādanamattampi udakaṃ na labhāmā’’ti. Tattha kāyūpapannassa rāhuno mahāsamuddo uttānoti aññesañca uttānoti na vattabbo. Evameva ñāṇūpapannassa therassa paṭiccasamuppādo uttānoti aññesampi uttānoti na vattabbo. Etamatthaṃ sandhāya bhagavā mā hevaṃ, ānanda, mā hevaṃ, ānandāti āha.
这位长老确实因为四个原因,才觉得甚深的缘起是浅显的。哪四个呢?就是:过去积累的善根已经成熟、曾经在外道门下住过、已经证得入流果、以及广学多闻。巴利
Therassa hi catūhi kāraṇehi gambhīro paṭiccasamuppādo uttānoti upaṭṭhāsi. Katamehi catūhi? Pubbūpanissayasampattiyā titthavāsena sotāpannatāya bahussutabhāvenāti.
据说,从那时起十万劫之后,世间出现了一位导师,名叫莲华上。他的都城叫天鹅城,父亲是国王阿难,母亲是王后善慧,菩萨则叫上王子。他在儿子出生那天就进行了大出家,出家后专心精勤修行,逐渐证得了一切知智,说出“多生轮回”的优陀那,在菩提座上度过了七天,然后心想“我要把脚踏在大地上”,就把脚伸了出来。这时大地裂开,升起一朵巨大的莲花。那莲花的外瓣有九十肘长,花蕊有三十肘,花房有十二肘,花粉有九罐那么多。巴利
Ito kira satasahassime kappe padumuttaro nāma satthā loke uppajji. Tassa haṃsavatī nāma nagaraṃ ahosi, ānando nāma rājā pitā, sumedhā nāma devī mātā, bodhisatto uttarakumāro nāma ahosi. So puttassa jātadivase mahābhinikkhamanaṃ nikkhamma pabbajitvā padhānamanuyutto anukkamena sabbaññutaṃ patvā, ‘‘anekajātisaṃsāra’’nti udānaṃ udānetvā sattāhaṃ bodhipallaṅke vītināmetvā ‘‘pathaviyaṃ pādaṃ ṭhapessāmī’’ti pādaṃ abhinīhari. Atha pathaviṃ bhinditvā mahantaṃ padumaṃ uṭṭhāsi. Tassa dhurapattāni navutihatthāni, kesaraṃ tiṃsahatthaṃ, kaṇṇikā dvādasahatthā, navaghaṭappamāṇā reṇu ahosi.
导师的身高是五十八肘,两臂张开有十八肘宽,额头五肘宽,手和脚各有十一肘长。当他用十一肘长的脚踩上十二肘宽的花房时,花粉扬起,升到五十八肘高的地方,然后纷纷落下,就像撒开的红色砒霜粉末一样铺满各处。因为这件事,世尊就以“莲华上”这个名字为人所知。他有两位上首弟子,名叫提维罗和善生;两位上首女弟子,名叫无量和无等;侍者名叫善意。莲华上佛世尊为了摄受父王,在十万比丘的围绕下,住在天鹅城的王都。巴利
Satthā pana ubbedhato aṭṭhapaññāsahattho ahosi, tassa ubhinnaṃ bāhānamantaraṃ aṭṭhārasahatthaṃ, nalāṭaṃ pañcahatthaṃ, hatthapādā ekādasahatthā. Tassa ekādasahatthena pādena dvādasahatthāya kaṇṇikāya akkantamattāya navaghaṭappamāṇā reṇu uṭṭhāya aṭṭhapaññāsahatthaṃ padesaṃ uggantvā okiṇṇamanosilācuṇṇaṃ viya paccokiṇṇaṃ. Tadupādāya bhagavā ‘‘padumuttaro’’tveva paññāyittha. Tassa devilo ca sujāto ca dve aggasāvakā ahesuṃ, amitā ca asamā ca dve aggasāvikā, sumano nāma upaṭṭhāko. Padumuttaro bhagavā pitusaṅgahaṃ kurumāno bhikkhusatasahassaparivāro haṃsavatiyā rājadhāniyā vasati.
他还有个弟弟,名叫善意王子。国王把距天鹅城一百二十由旬的封地赐给了他。他有时会回来拜见父王和导师。后来有一天,边境发生了叛乱。善意派人送信给国王。国王回话说:“孩子,我当初为什么把你安置在那里?”他平息了盗贼之后,又派人送信给国王说:“大王,地方已经平定了。”国王很高兴,说:“让我儿子快点回来。”他有大约一千名大臣。他在路上和这些人商量:“父王高兴的话,如果给我一个恩惠,我该求什么呢?”这时有些人对他说:“求大象、求马、求封地、求七宝。”另一些人说:“你们是大地之主的儿子,财富对你们来说并不难得,就算得到了这一切,终究还是要全部舍弃才能走,只有福德是唯一能带走的。所以大王赐恩惠的时候,你应当求供养莲华上佛世尊三个月的恩惠。”他说:“你们才是我的善知识。我自己并没有这个念头,是你们让我生起的,我就这么办。”于是他回去礼敬父王,被父王拥抱、亲吻头顶,父王说:“孩子,我给你一个恩惠。”他便说:“大王,我想以四种资具供养世尊三个月,让这一生不白白度过,请把这个恩惠赐给我。”父王说:“孩子,这不行,换别的恩惠吧。”他说:“大王,刹帝利说话没有两种,就请给我这个,我不要别的。”父王说:“孩子,佛陀的心意很难揣测,如果世尊不愿意,就算是我给的,又有什么用呢?”他说:“好,大王,我去了解世尊的心意。”于是去了精舍。巴利
Kaniṭṭhabhātā panassa sumanakumāro nāma. Tassa rājā haṃsavatito vīsayojanasate bhogaṃ adāsi. So kadāci āgantvā pitarañca satthārañca passati. Athekadivasaṃ paccanto kupito. Sumano rañño sāsanaṃ pesesi. Rājā ‘‘tvaṃ mayā, tāta, kasmā ṭhapito’’ti paṭipesesi. So core vūpasametvā ‘‘upasanto, deva, janapado’’ti rañño pesesi. Rājā tuṭṭho ‘‘sīghaṃ mama putto āgacchatū’’ti āha. Tassa sahassamattā amaccā honti. So tehi saddhiṃ antarāmagge mantesi – ‘‘mayhaṃ pitā tuṭṭho sace me varaṃ deti, kiṃ gaṇhāmī’’ti? Atha naṃ ekacce ‘‘hatthiṃ gaṇhatha, assaṃ gaṇhatha, janapadaṃ gaṇhatha, sattaratanāni gaṇhathā’’ti āhaṃsu. Apare ‘‘tumhe pathavissarassa puttā, na tumhākaṃ dhanaṃ dullabhaṃ, laddhampi cetaṃ sabbaṃ pahāya gamanīyaṃ, puññameva ekaṃ ādāya gamanīyaṃ, tasmā deve varaṃ dadamāne temāsaṃ padumuttaraṃ bhagavantaṃ upaṭṭhātuṃ varaṃ gaṇhathā’’ti. So ‘‘tumhe mayhaṃ kalyāṇamittā nāma, mametaṃ cittaṃ natthi, tumhehi pana uppāditaṃ, evaṃ karissāmī’’ti, gantvā pitaraṃ vanditvā pitarā āliṅgetvā, matthake cumbitvā ‘‘varaṃ te, putta, demī’’ti vutte ‘‘icchāmahaṃ, mahārāja, bhagavantaṃ temāsaṃ catūhi paccayehi upaṭṭhahanto jīvitaṃ avañjhaṃ kātuṃ, idaṃ me varaṃ dehī’’ti āha. Na sakkā, tāta, aññaṃ varehīti. Deva, khattiyānaṃ nāma dvekathā natthi, etameva me dehi, na mamaññena atthoti. Tāta, buddhānaṃ nāma cittaṃ dujjānaṃ, sace bhagavā na icchissati, mayā dinnampi kiṃ bhavissatīti? ‘‘Sādhu, deva, ahaṃ bhagavato cittaṃ jānissāmī’’ti vihāraṃ gato.
那时,世尊吃完饭,就进了香室。王子来到圆亭里比丘们聚集的地方。比丘们问他:“王子,你为什么来?”他说:“来见世尊,请让我见见世尊。”比丘们说:“王子,我们不能想什么时候见导师就什么时候见。”他问:“尊者,那谁能呢?”他们说:“王子,是善意长老。”他问:“尊者,长老在哪里?”问清长老坐的地方,就过去顶礼长老,说:“尊者,我想见世尊,请让我见见世尊。”长老说:“来吧,王子。”就拉着他的手,让他站在香室的院子里,自己上了香室。世尊问他:“善意,你为什么来?”他说:“尊者,王子来见世尊。”世尊说:“那就铺个座位吧,比丘。”长老铺好座位。世尊在铺好的座位上坐下。王子顶礼世尊,问候世尊。世尊问:“王子,你什么时候来的?”他说:“尊者,在您进香室的时候。比丘们对我说‘我们不能想什么时候见世尊就什么时候见’,就把我送到长老那里。长老只说了一句话,就让我见到了。尊者,我想长老在您的教法里一定很受宠爱吧。”世尊说:“是的,王子,这位比丘在我的教法里确实受宠爱。”王子问:“尊者,在佛陀的教法里,要怎么做才能受宠爱呢?”世尊说:“布施、持戒、行布萨,王子。”王子又说:“我也想像长老那样,在佛陀的教法里受宠爱。请答应我在这里安居三个月。”世尊看了看,知道“他来是有意义的”,就说:“王子,如来喜欢住在安静的地方。”王子说:“世尊知道了,善逝知道了。”又说:“尊者,我先回去建寺院,我派人来请时,请您与十万比丘一同前来。”得到世尊答应后,他回到父亲那里,说:“父王,世尊已经答应我了。我派人来的时候,请您把世尊送去。”他顶礼父亲,就出发了,每由旬建一座寺院,走了一百二十由旬的路。到了自己的城里,他寻找建寺院的地方,看到一位名叫善生的居士的园林,用十万金买下,又花了十万金建寺院。在那里,他为世尊建了香室,为其他比丘建了住的地方和白天休息的地方,有洞窟、凉亭,还建好了围墙和门楼。然后派人到父亲那里说:“我的事已经办好了,请把世尊送来。”巴利
Tena ca samayena bhattakiccaṃ niṭṭhāpetvā bhagavā gandhakuṭiṃ paviṭṭho hoti. So maṇḍalamāḷe sannisinnānaṃ bhikkhūnaṃ santikaṃ agamāsi. Te naṃ āhaṃsu – ‘‘rājaputta kasmā āgatosī’’ti? Bhagavantaṃ dassanāya, dassetha me bhagavantanti. ‘‘Na mayaṃ, rājaputta, icchiticchitakkhaṇe satthāraṃ daṭṭhuṃ labhāmā’’ti. Ko pana, bhante, labhatīti? Sumanatthero nāma rājaputtāti. So ‘‘kuhiṃ bhante thero’’ti? Therassa nisinnaṭṭhānaṃ pucchitvā gantvā vanditvā – ‘‘icchāmahaṃ, bhante, bhagavantaṃ passituṃ, dassetha me bhagavanta’’nti āha. Thero ‘‘ehi, rājaputtā’’ti taṃ gahetvā gandhakuṭipariveṇe ṭhapetvā gandhakuṭiṃ āruhi. Atha naṃ bhagavā ‘‘sumana, kasmā āgatosī’’ti āha. Rājaputto, bhante, bhagavantaṃ dassanāya āgatoti. Tena hi bhikkhu āsanaṃ paññapehīti. Thero āsanaṃ paññapesi. Nisīdi bhagavā paññatte āsane. Rājaputto bhagavantaṃ vanditvā paṭisanthāraṃ akāsi, ‘‘kadā āgatosi rājaputtā’’ti? Bhante, tumhesu gandhakuṭiṃ paviṭṭhesu, bhikkhū pana ‘‘na mayaṃ icchiticchitakkhaṇe bhagavantaṃ daṭṭhuṃ labhāmā’’ti maṃ therassa santikaṃ pāhesuṃ, thero pana ekavacaneneva dassesi, thero, bhante, tumhākaṃ sāsane vallabho maññeti. Āma, rājakumāra, vallabho esa bhikkhu mayhaṃ sāsaneti. Bhante, buddhānaṃ sāsane kiṃ katvā vallabho hotīti? Dānaṃ datvā sīlaṃ samādiyitvā uposathakammaṃ katvā, kumārāti. Bhagavā ahampi thero viya buddhasāsane vallabho hotukāmo, temāsaṃ me vassāvāsaṃ adhivāsethāti. Bhagavā, ‘‘atthi nu kho gatena attho’’ti oloketvā ‘‘atthī’’ti disvā ‘‘suññāgāre kho, rājakumāra, tathāgatā abhiramantī’’ti āha. Kumāro ‘‘aññātaṃ bhagavā, aññātaṃ sugatā’’ti vatvā – ‘‘ahaṃ, bhante, purimataraṃ gantvā vihāraṃ kāremi, mayā pesite bhikkhusatasahassena saddhiṃ āgacchathā’’ti paṭiññaṃ gahetvā pitu santikaṃ gantvā, ‘‘dinnā me, deva, bhagavatā paṭiññā, mayā pahite tumhe bhagavantaṃ peseyyāthā’’ti pitaraṃ vanditvā nikkhamitvā yojane yojane vihāraṃ kāretvā vīsayojanasataṃ addhānaṃ gato. Gantvā attano nagare vihāraṭṭhānaṃ vicinanto sobhanassa nāma kuṭumbikassa uyyānaṃ disvā satasahassena kiṇitvā satasahassaṃ vissajjetvā vihāraṃ kāresi. Tattha bhagavato gandhakuṭiṃ, sesabhikkhūnañca rattiṭṭhānadivāṭṭhānatthāya kuṭileṇamaṇḍape kārāpetvā pākāraparikkhepaṃ dvārakoṭṭhakañca niṭṭhāpetvā pitu santikaṃ pesesi ‘‘niṭṭhitaṃ mayhaṃ kiccaṃ, satthāraṃ pahiṇathā’’ti.
国王请世尊吃完饭,说道:世尊,善意的事已经办好了,他正盼着您来。于是世尊在十万比丘的簇拥下,每走一由旬就在沿途的精舍里住下,一路前行。王子听说导师来了,就远迎一由旬,用香、花等供养,把世尊迎进精舍后——巴利
Rājā bhagavantaṃ bhojetvā ‘‘bhagavā sumanassa kiccaṃ niṭṭhitaṃ, tumhākaṃ āgamanaṃ paccāsīsatī’’ti. Bhagavā satasahassabhikkhuparivāro yojane yojane vihāresu vasamāno agamāsi. Kumāro ‘‘satthā āgacchatī’’ti sutvā yojanaṃ paccuggantvā gandhamālādīhi pūjayamāno vihāraṃ pavesetvā –
我花十万钱把它买下,又花十万钱把它建起来;
大牟尼,请接受这座名叫“美丽”的园林。巴利
‘‘Satasahassena me kītaṃ, satasahassena māpitaṃ; Sobhanaṃ nāma uyyānaṃ paṭiggaṇha, mahāmunī’’ti. –
他让人把精舍献了出来。在入雨安居那天,他做了布施,又把自己的儿女和大臣们叫来,说道:“导师从远方来到我们这里。佛陀们向来是以法为重,不以利养为重。所以这三个月里,我只穿两件下衣,受持十戒,就住在这里。你们也要用同样的方式,为十万位漏尽者提供三个月的供养。”巴利
Vihāraṃ niyyātesi. So vassūpanāyikadivase dānaṃ datvā attano puttadāre ca amacce ca pakkosāpetvā āha –‘‘satthā amhākaṃ santikaṃ dūrato āgato, buddhā ca nāma dhammagarunova, nāmisagarukā. Tasmā ahaṃ imaṃ temāsaṃ dve sāṭake nivāsetvā dasa sīlāni samādiyitvā idheva vasissāmi, tumhe khīṇāsavasatasahassassa imināva nīhārena temāsaṃ dānaṃ dadeyyāthā’’ti.
他住在与善意长老的住处同一区域的地方,看到长老对世尊所做的一切侍奉之后,心想:“在这个地方,这位长老是世尊唯一最亲近的人,我应当发愿得到他那样的位置。”于是在自恣日临近时,他进入村庄,连续七天大行布施,到第七天,在十万比丘面前摆好三衣,礼敬世尊之后,说道:“尊者,自从我在路上每隔一由旬建造寺院以来,所修的一切福德,我不是为了求帝释天的成就、魔的成就或梵天的成就,而是为了发愿成为佛陀的侍者。因此,世尊,愿我未来也能像善意长老一样,成为某位佛陀的侍者。”说完便五体投地,礼敬之后俯伏在地。世尊观察:“这位善男子的心量很大,能不能实现呢?”知道“未来从今以后十万劫,将会有一位名叫乔达摩的佛陀出现于世,他将成为那位佛陀的侍者。”于是说道:巴利
So sumanattherassa vasanaṭṭhānasabhāgeyeva ṭhāne vasanto yaṃ thero bhagavato vattaṃ karoti, taṃ sabbaṃ disvā, ‘‘imasmiṃ ṭhāne ekantavallabho esa thero, etasseva ṭhānantaraṃ patthetuṃ vaṭṭatī’’ti cintetvā, upakaṭṭhāya pavāraṇāya gāmaṃ pavisitvā sattāhaṃ mahādānaṃ datvā sattame divase bhikkhūsatasahassassa pādamūle ticīvaraṃ ṭhapetvā bhagavantaṃ vanditvā, ‘‘bhante, yadetaṃ mayā magge yojanantarikavihārakārāpanato paṭṭhāya puññaṃ kataṃ, taṃ neva sakkasampattiṃ, na mārabrahmasampattiṃ patthayantena, buddhassa pana upaṭṭhākabhāvaṃ patthentena kataṃ. Tasmā ahampi bhagavā anāgate sumanatthero viya ekassa buddhassa upaṭṭhāko homī’’ti pañcapatiṭṭhitena patitvā vanditvā nipanno. Bhagavā ‘‘mahantaṃ kulaputtassa cittaṃ, ijjhissati nu kho, no’’ti olokento , ‘‘anāgate ito satasahassime kappe gotamo nāma buddho uppajjissati, tasseva upaṭṭhāko bhavissatī’’ti ñatvā –
愿你想要的和盼望的一切都能实现;
愿一切意图都圆满,就像十五的月亮一样。巴利
‘‘Icchitaṃ patthitaṃ tuyhaṃ, sabbameva samijjhatu; Sabbe pūrentu saṅkappā, cando pannaraso yathā’’ti. –
世尊这样说。王子听了以后,心想:“佛陀说话是不会有前后不一致的。”第二天,他就拿起那位世尊的钵和袈裟,像是一路紧跟在后面走着。他在那尊佛出世的时代,布施了十万年,死后转生到天界;到了迦叶佛的时代,他又向一位正在乞食的长老供养上衣,用来承接钵,以此作供养。后来他再次转生天界,从天界死后,成为波罗奈国王,为八位独觉佛建造了树叶屋,安置在宝石台座上,并以四种资具供养了一万年。这些都是众所周知的事迹。巴利
Āha. Kumāro sutvā ‘‘buddhā nāma advejjhakathā hontī’’ti dutiyadivaseyeva tassa bhagavato pattacīvaraṃ gahetvā piṭṭhito piṭṭhito gacchanto viya ahosi. So tasmiṃ buddhuppāde vassasatasahassaṃ dānaṃ datvā sagge nibbattitvā kassapabuddhakālepi piṇḍāya carato therassa pattaggahaṇatthaṃ uttarisāṭakaṃ datvā pūjaṃ akāsi. Puna sagge nibbattitvā tato cuto bārāṇasirājā hutvā aṭṭhannaṃ paccekabuddhānaṃ paṇṇasālāyo kāretvā maṇiādhārake upaṭṭhapetvā catūhi paccayehi dasavassasahassāni upaṭṭhānaṃ akāsi. Etāni pākaṭaṭṭhānāni.
他在百千劫中一直做布施,后来和我们的菩萨一起投生到兜率天。从那里命终后,投生到甘露饭释迦王的家中结生。世尊渐渐出家,证得正自觉后,第一次回到迦毗罗卫。当世尊要从那里离开时,王族王子们为了随侍世尊而出家,他就和拔提等人一起离开,在世尊身边出家。不久之后,他在具寿满慈子面前听了法,证得入流果。就这样,这位具寿过去世的亲依止已经具足。由于这种过去世亲依止的具足,甚深的缘起在他面前也显得浅显易懂。巴利
Kappasatasahassaṃ pana dānaṃ dadamānova amhākaṃ bodhisattena saddhiṃ tusitapure nibbattitvā tato cuto amitodanasakkassa gehe paṭisandhiṃ gahetvā anupubbena katābhinikkhamano sammāsambodhiṃ patvā paṭhamagamanena kapilavatthuṃ āgantvā tato nikkhamante bhagavati bhagavato parivāratthaṃ rājakumāresu pabbajantesu bhaddiyādīhi saddhiṃ nikkhamitvā bhagavato santike pabbajitvā nacirasseva āyasmato puṇṇassa mantāṇiputtassa santike dhammakathaṃ sutvā sotāpattiphale patiṭṭhahi. Evamesa āyasmā pubbūpanissayasampanno, tassimāya pubbūpanissayasampattiyā gambhīropi paṭiccasamuppādo uttānako viya upaṭṭhāsi.
所谓“住在师长跟前”,说的是在师长面前学习、听闻、请教、记持。这位长老在这方面极其清净。因此,即使甚深的缘起,在他面前也显得浅显易懂。而且,对入流者来说,缘起的行相本来就是浅显地呈现的,这位尊者正是入流者。对于多闻的人来说,就像在四肘宽的小屋里点着灯时,床和椅子都看得清清楚楚一样,名色的分别对他们来说十分明了,而这位尊者又是多闻者中第一。所以,凭着他多闻的素质,甚深的缘起行相也显得浅显易懂。缘起因四种甚深而甚深,那种甚深性在《清净道论》中已经详细解说了。而这一切甚深,对这位长老来说都显得浅显。因此,世尊为了策励阿难尊者,说了“不要这样说”等话。这里的意思是:阿难,你智慧广大、智慧明净,所以对你来说,甚深的缘起也显得浅显。因此,你不要这样说:“这缘起是只对我一个人显得浅显,还是对别人也这样?”巴利
Titthavāsoti pana garūnaṃ santike uggahaṇasavanaparipucchanadhāraṇāni vuccanti. So therassa ativiya parisuddho. Tenāpissāyaṃ gambhīropi uttānako viya upaṭṭhāsi. Sotāpannānañca nāma paccayākāro uttānako hutvā upaṭṭhāti, ayañca āyasmā sotāpanno. Bahussutānaṃ catuhatthe ovarake padīpe jalamāne mañcapīṭhaṃ viya nāmarūpaparicchedo pākaṭo hoti, ayañca āyasmā bahussutānaṃ aggo. Iti bāhusaccabhāvenapissa gambhīropi paccayākāro uttānako viya upaṭṭhāsi. Paṭiccasamuppādo catūhi gambhīratāhi gambhīro. Sā panassa gambhīratā visuddhimagge vitthāritāva. Sā sabbāpi therassa uttānakā viya upaṭṭhāsi. Tena bhagavā āyasmantaṃ ānandaṃ ussādento mā hevantiādimāha. Ayañhettha adhippāyo – ānanda, tvaṃ mahāpañño visadañāṇo, tena te gambhīropi paṭiccasamuppādo uttānako viya khāyati. Tasmā ‘‘mayhameva nu kho esa uttānako viya hutvā upaṭṭhāti, udāhu aññesampī’’ti mā evaṃ avaca.
至于所说的“令人不满”,这里的意思是:阿难,你不该说“然而这缘起对我来说显得极为浅显”。如果它对你确实显得如此浅显,那你为什么没有凭自身的法性成为入流者,而要依靠我给的教导才通达入流道呢?阿难,涅槃本身才是甚深的,而缘起之理却变得浅显了,那你为什么不把粗重的欲贪结、瞋结,以及粗重的欲贪随眠、瞋随眠这四种烦恼彻底断除,证得一来果呢?为什么不把同样微细的这四种烦恼彻底断除,证得不来果呢?为什么不把色贪等五结,以及慢随眠、有贪随眠、无明随眠这八种烦恼彻底断除,证得阿罗汉果呢?又为什么不像舍利弗、目犍连那样,在十万劫又一个阿僧祇劫中圆满诸波罗蜜,证悟声闻波罗蜜智呢?为什么不像诸独觉佛那样,在十万劫又两个阿僧祇劫中圆满诸波罗蜜,证悟独觉菩提智呢?如果这缘起在你那里确实完全显得浅显,那你为什么不像诸佛那样,在十万劫又四个、八个或十六个阿僧祇劫中圆满诸波罗蜜,证得一切知智呢?难道你对这些殊胜的证悟毫无希求吗?看看你错得有多离谱!你明明是安住在声闻智位的人,却把这极其甚深的缘起说成“对我来说显得浅显”。你这句话,与诸佛的教导是相违背的。一个这样的比丘,竟然说出与诸佛教导相违背的话,这是不应该的。阿难,难道不是我为了通达这缘起,努力修行,经过了十万劫又四个阿僧祇劫吗?为了通达缘起,我没有哪一次布施没有做过,没有哪一种波罗蜜没有圆满过。当我心想“今天我要通达缘起”,以毫不懈怠的心摧伏魔军时,这大地连两指宽都没有动摇;同样,在初夜时分成就宿命通,中夜时分成就天眼通。而在后夜时分,在黎明强有力的时刻,当我刚刚见到“无明以九种方式成为诸行的缘”时,一万个世界界域就像被铁锤敲击的铜盘一样,发出千百种回响,又像风吹莲叶上的水珠一样震动起来。阿难,这缘起就是如此甚深,而且显现为甚深。阿难,由于对此法不觉悟……不能超越。巴利
Yaṃ pana vuttaṃ ‘‘apasādento’’ti, tatthāyamadhippāyo – ānanda, ‘‘atha ca pana me uttānakuttānako viya khāyatī’’ti mā hevaṃ avaca. Yadi hi te esa uttānakuttānako viya khāyati, kasmā tvaṃ attano dhammatāya sotāpanno nāhosi, mayā dinnanaye ṭhatvā sotāpattimaggaṃ paṭivijjhi? Ānanda , idaṃ nibbānameva gambhīraṃ, paccayākāro pana uttānako jāto, atha kasmā oḷārikaṃ kāmarāgasaṃyojanaṃ paṭighasaṃyojanaṃ oḷārikaṃ kāmarāgānusayaṃ paṭighānusayanti ime cattāro kilese samugghātetvā sakadāgāmiphalaṃ na sacchikarosi, teyeva aṇusahagate cattāro kilese samugghātetvā anāgāmiphalaṃ na sacchikarosi, rūparāgādīni pañca saṃyojanāni, mānānusayaṃ bhavarāgānusayaṃ avijjānusayanti ime aṭṭha kilese samugghātetvā arahattaṃ na sacchikarosi? Kasmā vā satasahassakappādhikaṃ ekaṃ asaṅkhyeyyaṃ pūritapāramino sāriputtamoggallānā viya sāvakapāramīñāṇaṃ na paṭivijjhasi, satasahassakappādhikāni dve asaṅkhyeyyāni pūritapāramino paccekabuddhā viya ca paccekabodhiñāṇaṃ na paṭivijjhasi? Yadi vā te sabbathāva esa uttānako hutvā upaṭṭhāsi. Atha kasmā satasahassakappādhikāni cattāri aṭṭha soḷasa vā asaṅkhyeyyāni pūritapāramino buddhā viya sabbaññutaññāṇaṃ na sacchikarosi? Kiṃ anatthikosi etehi visesādhigamehi? Passa yāva ca te aparaddhaṃ, tvaṃ nāma sāvakapadesañāṇe ṭhito atigambhīraṃ paccayākāraṃ ‘‘uttānako viya me upaṭṭhātī’’ti vadasi. Tassa te idaṃ vacanaṃ buddhānaṃ kathāya paccanīkaṃ hoti. Tādisena nāma bhikkhunā buddhānaṃ kathāya paccanīkaṃ kathetabbanti na yuttametaṃ. Nanu mayhaṃ, ānanda, imaṃ paccayākāraṃ paṭivijjhituṃ vāyamantasseva kappasatasahassādhikāni cattāri asaṅkhyeyyāni atikkantāni. Paccayākārapaṭivijjhanatthāya ca pana me adinnadānaṃ nāma natthi, apūritapāramī nāma natthi. ‘‘Ajja paccayākāraṃ paṭivijjhissāmī’’ti pana me nirussāhaṃ viya mārabalaṃ vidhamantassa ayaṃ mahāpathavī dvaṅgulamattampi nākampi, tathā paṭhamayāme pubbenivāsaṃ, majjhimayāme dibbacakkhuṃ sampādentassa. Pacchimayāme pana me balavapaccūsasamaye, ‘‘avijjā saṅkhārānaṃ navahi ākārehi paccayo hotī’’ti diṭṭhamatteyeva dasasahassilokadhātu ayadaṇḍena ākoṭitakaṃsathālo viya viravasataṃ viravasahassaṃ muñcamānā vātāhate paduminipaṇṇe udakabindu viya pakampittha. Evaṃ gambhīro cāyaṃ, ānanda, paṭiccasamuppādo gambhīrāvabhāso ca, etassa, ānanda, dhammassa ananubodhā…pe… nātivattatīti.
这个法的,就是这缘起法的。由于不觉悟,就是以了知遍知的方式不了悟。由于不通达,就是以审察遍知和断遍知的方式不通达。变成像纠缠的线团一样,就是像织线一样纠缠不清。就好比一条放置不当、被老鼠咬断的织工用线,到处都乱成一团,想用“这是线头,这是线尾”的办法,或者把线头对线头、线尾对线尾地接起来,都很困难。同样,众生在这缘起模式上失足、混乱、纠缠,没办法把缘起模式理直。在这里,织线如果靠个人的努力,也许还能理直;可是除了两位菩萨以外,其他任何众生都没办法靠自己的法性把缘起模式理直。又好比一团乱线,浇上酸粥、用刷子拍打之后,到处结成小球、打成死结;同样,这些众生在诸缘上失足,没办法把缘起理直,就依着六十二种邪见结成小球、打成死结。因为凡是执取邪见的人,全都是没办法把缘起理直的。巴利
Etassa dhammassāti etassa paccayadhammassa. Ananubodhāti ñātapariññāvasena ananubujjhanā. Appaṭivedhāti tīraṇappahānapariññāvasena appaṭivijjhanā. Tantākulakajātāti tantaṃ viya ākulajātā. Yathā nāma dunnikkhittaṃ mūsikacchinnaṃ pesakārānaṃ tantaṃ tahiṃ tahiṃ ākulaṃ hoti, ‘‘idaṃ aggaṃ, idaṃ mūla’’nti aggena vā aggaṃ, mūlena vā mūlaṃ samānetuṃ dukkaraṃ hoti. Evameva sattā imasmiṃ paccayākāre khalitā ākulā byākulā honti , na sakkonti paccayākāraṃ ujuṃ kātuṃ. Tattha tantaṃ paccattapurisakāre ṭhatvā sakkāpi bhaveyya ujuṃ kātuṃ, ṭhapetvā pana dve bodhisatte añño satto attano dhammatāya paccayākāraṃ ujuṃ kātuṃ samattho nāma natthi. Yathā pana ākulaṃ tantaṃ kañjiyaṃ datvā kocchena pahaṭaṃ tattha tattha guḷakajātaṃ hoti gaṇṭhibaddhaṃ, evamime sattā paccayesu pakkhalitvā paccaye ujuṃ kātuṃ asakkontā dvāsaṭṭhidiṭṭhigatavasena guḷakajātā honti gaṇṭhibaddhā. Ye hi keci diṭṭhiyo sannissitā, sabbe te paccayaṃ ujuṃ kātuṃ asakkontāyeva.
“鸟结”是指织工用的酸粥线。所谓“鸟”,是一种小鸟,也有人说是指这种鸟的巢。因为这两样东西都乱成一团,想用线头对线头、线尾对线尾来理顺都很困难,所以应当按前面说的方式来理解。巴利
Kulāgaṇṭhikajātāti kulāgaṇṭhikaṃ vuccati pesakārakañjiyasuttaṃ. Kulā nāma sakuṇikā, tassā kulāvakotipi eke. Yathā hi tadubhayampi ākulaṃ aggena vā aggaṃ, mūlena vā mūlaṃ samānetuṃ dukkaranti purimanayeneva yojetabbaṃ.
像文阇草和波波阇草一样,意思是变得像文阇草、像波波阇草那样。就好比那些草被捣碎后搓成绳子,绳子用旧了掉在某个地方,再拿起那些草,想分清“这是草尖、这是草根”,用草尖对接草尖、用草根对接草根,是很难做到的。不过,靠个人的努力,那还是有可能把它理顺的。然而,除了两位菩萨以外,再没有别的众生能靠自身的法性把缘起理顺。同样,这些众生没办法把缘起理顺,就因恶见而纠结成一团,无法超越恶趣、恶道、堕落和轮回。巴利
Muñjapabbajabhūtāti muñjatiṇaṃ viya pabbajatiṇaṃ viya ca bhūtā tādisā jātā. Yathā hi tāni tiṇāni koṭṭetvā katarajju jiṇṇakāle katthaci patitaṃ gahetvā tesaṃ tiṇānaṃ ‘‘idaṃ aggaṃ, idaṃ mūla’’nti aggena vā aggaṃ, mūlena vā mūlaṃ samānetuṃ dukkaraṃ, tampi paccattapurisakāre ṭhatvā sakkā bhaveyya ujuṃ kātuṃ, ṭhapetvā pana dve bodhisatte añño satto attano dhammatāya paccayākāraṃ ujuṃ kātuṃ samattho nāma natthi, evamayaṃ pajā paccayaṃ ujuṃ kātuṃ asakkontī diṭṭhigatavasena gaṇṭhikajātā hutvā apāyaṃ duggatiṃ vinipātaṃ saṃsāraṃ nātivattati.
在这里,“恶趣”指的是地狱、畜生道、饿鬼界和阿修罗众。所有这些都称为“恶趣”,因为那里没有所谓增长繁荣的“财”;同样,因为那是痛苦所去之处,所以叫“恶道”;因为是从幸福的圆满状态中堕落而生的,所以叫“堕落”。而另一个,即轮回,则——巴利
Tattha apāyoti nirayatiracchānayonipettivisayaasurakāyā. Sabbepi hi te vaḍḍhisaṅkhātassa ayassa abhāvato ‘‘apāyo’’ti vuccati, tathā dukkhassa gatibhāvato duggati, sukhasamussayato vinipatitattā vinipāto. Itaro pana –
诸蕴的次第,以及诸界与诸处;
不断流转、从未中断,这就叫作轮回。巴利
‘‘Khandhānañca paṭipāṭi, dhātuāyatanāna ca; Abbhocchinnaṃ vattamānā, saṃsāroti pavuccati’’.
这一切,他全都无法超越、无法越过,只是从死到结生,又从结生到死,就这样一次又一次地执取死与结生,在三有、四生、五趣、七识住、九众生居之中不断流转,就像被大风抛掷的船,又像套在轭上的牛,不停地打转。世尊就是为了让阿难尊者心生厌离,才说了这一切。这里剩下的内容,和前面所说的一样。第十。巴利
Taṃ sabbampi nātivattati nātikkamati, atha kho cutito paṭisandhiṃ, paṭisandhito cutinti evaṃ punappunaṃ cutipaṭisandhiyo gaṇhamānā tīsu bhavesu catūsu yonīsu pañcasu gatīsu sattasu viññāṇaṭṭhitīsu navasu sattāvāsesu mahāsamudde vātakkhittā nāvā viya yante yuttagoṇo viya ca paribbhamatiyeva. Iti sabbametaṃ bhagavā āyasmantaṃ ānandaṃ apasādento āha. Sesamettha vuttanayamevāti. Dasamaṃ.
无闻者经的注释巴利
1. Assutavāsuttavaṇṇanā
61 61. 在《大品》第一经的注释中,“无闻”是指对蕴、界、处、缘起、念处等法没有学习、没有提问、没有抉择。“凡夫”则是因为能生起种种不同的烦恼等,所以叫凡夫。正如这样说:“凡夫就是生起众多烦恼的人”,这一切应当详细展开。再者,因为凡夫涵盖了无数、背离圣法、行为低劣的人,所以叫凡夫;或者说,这类人各自单独算作一个,与具足戒、闻等功德的圣者们分隔开来,所以叫凡夫。这样,用“无闻凡夫”这两个词,就是指那些——巴利
61. Mahāvaggassa paṭhame assutavāti khandhadhātuāyatanapaccayākārasatipaṭṭhānādīsu uggahaparipucchāvinicchayarahito. Puthujjanoti puthūnaṃ nānappakārānaṃ kilesādīnaṃ jananādikāraṇehi puthujjano. Vuttañhetaṃ – ‘‘puthu kilese janentīti puthujjanā’’ti sabbaṃ vitthāretabbaṃ. Apica puthūnaṃ gaṇanapathamatītānaṃ ariyadhammaparammukhānaṃ nīcadhammasamācārānaṃ janānaṃ antogadhattāpi puthujjano, puthu vā ayaṃ visuṃyeva saṅkhaṃ gato, visaṃsaṭṭho sīlasutādiguṇayuttehi ariyehi janoti puthujjano. Evametehi ‘‘assutavā puthujjano’’ti dvīhipi padehi ye te –
太阳族的佛陀说过,凡夫有两种:
盲凡夫是一种,善凡夫是另一种,这就是所说的“凡夫”。巴利
‘‘Duve puthujjanā vuttā, buddhenādiccabandhunā; Andho puthujjano eko, kalyāṇeko puthujjano’’ti. (mahāni. 94); –
已经说过两种凡夫,其中这里指的是盲凡夫。“于此”是指现在当下能亲眼看到的这个身体。“四大所造”是说由四大种构成的身体,也就是由四大种产生、由四大种所成的,这就是它的意思。“厌离”就是厌倦。“离欲”就是不贪染。“解脱”就是想要解脱。“积集”就是增长。“损减”就是衰退。“执取”就是生起。“弃舍”就是坏灭。巴利
Dve puthujjanā vuttā, tesu andhaputhujjano gahito. Imasminti paccuppannapaccakkhakāyaṃ dasseti. Cātumahābhūtikasminti catumahābhūtakāye catumahābhūtehi nibbatte catumahābhūtamayeti attho. Nibbindeyyāti ukkaṇṭheyya. Virajjeyyāti na rajjeyya. Vimucceyyāti muccitukāmo bhaveyya. Ācayoti vuḍḍhi. Apacayoti parihāni. Ādānanti nibbatti. Nikkhepananti bhedo.
“因此”是说:因为人们能知道这四种情况——增长、衰减、出生、坏灭,所以是以它们为原因的,这就是这句话的意思。就这样,世尊在四大所成的身体上,把色法说成是不应执取的对象,而把无色法说成是应执取的对象。为什么?因为那些比丘对色的执取又强又重,所以世尊为了让他们看清对色的执取其实是不该执取的对象,从而把它排除掉,好让他们在无色法上站稳脚跟,才这样说。巴利
Tasmāti yasmā ime cattāro vuḍḍhihāninibbattibhedā paññāyanti, tasmā taṃkāraṇāti attho. Iti bhagavā cātumahābhūtike kāye rūpaṃ pariggahetuṃ ayuttarūpaṃ katvā arūpaṃ pariggahetuṃ yuttarūpaṃ karoti. Kasmā? Tesañhi bhikkhūnaṃ rūpasmiṃ gāho balavā adhimatto, tena tesaṃ rūpe gāhassa pariggahetabbarūpataṃ dassetvā nikkaḍḍhanto arūpe patiṭṭhāpanatthaṃ evamāha.
“心”等等这些,全都是“意处”的名称。因为它以心为依处、以心为行境、又与相应的心法一同生起,所以称为“心”;以思量的作用称为“意”;以了知的作用称为“识”。“不能”就是没有能力。“执取”是指被渴爱吞没、牢牢抓住。“执为我所”是指以渴爱的我所感,执取“这是我的”。“被谬执”是指以邪见执取、抓住。“这是我的”,是渴爱的执取,由此执取了一百零八种渴爱行相。“我是这个”,是慢的执取,由此执取了九种慢。“这是我的自我”,是见的执取,由此执取了六十二种邪见。“所以”,是因为这样长久以来一直被执取,所以无法厌离。巴利
Cittantiādi sabbaṃ manāyatanasseva nāmaṃ. Tañhi cittavatthutāya cittagocaratāya sampayuttadhammacittatāya ca cittaṃ, mananaṭṭhena mano, vijānanaṭṭhena viññāṇanti vuccati. Nālanti na samattho. Ajjhositanti taṇhāya gilitvā pariniṭṭhapetvā gahitaṃ. Mamāyitanti taṇhāmamattena mama idanti gahitaṃ. Parāmaṭṭhanti diṭṭhiyā parāmasitvā gahitaṃ. Etaṃ mamāti taṇhāgāho, tena aṭṭhasatataṇhāvicaritaṃ gahitaṃ hoti. Esohamasmīti mānagāho, tena nava mānā gahitā honti. Eso me attāti diṭṭhigāho, tena dvāsaṭṭhi diṭṭhiyo gahitā honti. Tasmāti yasmā evaṃ dīgharattaṃ gahitaṃ, tasmā nibbindituṃ na samattho.
“诸比丘,宁愿……”世尊为什么这样说呢?起初,他们已把色当成不适合执取的对象,把无色当成适合执取的对象。后来,世尊知道“那些比丘已经脱离了执取色,转而执取无色”,为了去除他们对无色的执取,便开始了这次开示。其中,“认为是我”就是执取为“我”。“更久”是指一百年以上。可是世尊为什么这样说呢?难道真的存在能持续一百年以上的色吗?初时生起的色到不了中时,中时生起的色到不了后时;食前生起的色到不了食后,食后生起的色到不了初夜,初夜生起的色到不了中夜,中夜生起的色到不了后夜。同样,行走时生起的色到不了站立,站立时生起的色到不了坐下,坐下时生起的色到不了躺卧。即使在同一种姿势里,抬脚时生起的色到不了前移,前移时生起的色到不了越过,越过时生起的色到不了放下,放下时生起的色到不了安置,安置时生起的色到不了停止。就在每一个阶段、每一个环节上,诸行像撒在热陶器上的芝麻一样噼啪爆裂而坏灭。这是真的。然而,就像一盏燃烧的灯,火焰生起后并不越过那一段段灯芯的位置,就在那里一一坏灭,可是由于相续连接的关系,仍被称为“整夜燃烧的灯”。同样,这里也是依据相续,把这个身体显示得好像能这样长久地存在。巴利
Varaṃ, bhikkhaveti idaṃ kasmā āha? Paṭhamañhi tena rūpaṃ pariggahetuṃ ayuttarūpaṃ kataṃ, arūpaṃ yuttarūpaṃ, atha ‘‘tesaṃ bhikkhūnaṃ rūpato gāho nikkhamitvā arūpaṃ gato’’ti ñatvā taṃ nikkaḍḍhituṃ imaṃ desanaṃ ārabhi. Tattha attato upagaccheyyāti attāti gaṇheyya. Bhiyyopīti vassasatato uddhampi. Kasmā pana bhagavā evamāha? Kiṃ atirekavassasataṃ tiṭṭhamānaṃ rūpaṃ nāma atthi? Nanu paṭhamavaye pavattaṃ rūpaṃ majjhimavayaṃ na pāpuṇāti, majjhimavaye pavattaṃ pacchimavayaṃ, purebhatte pavattaṃ pacchābhattaṃ, pacchābhatte pavattaṃ paṭhamayāmaṃ, paṭhamayāme pavattaṃ majjhimayāmaṃ, majjhimayāme pavattaṃ pacchimayāmaṃ na pāpuṇāti? Tathā gamane pavattaṃ ṭhānaṃ, ṭhāne pavattaṃ nisajjaṃ, nisajjāya pavattaṃ sayanaṃ na pāpuṇāti. Ekairiyāpathepi pādassa uddharaṇe pavattaṃ atiharaṇaṃ, atiharaṇe pavattaṃ vītiharaṇaṃ, vītiharaṇe pavattaṃ vossajjanaṃ, vossajjane pavattaṃ sannikkhepanaṃ, sannikkhepane pavattaṃ sannirujjhanaṃ na pāpuṇāti, tattha tattheva odhi odhi pabbaṃ pabbaṃ hutvā tattakapāle pakkhittatilā viya paṭapaṭāyantā saṅkhārā bhijjantīti? Saccametaṃ. Yathā pana padīpassa jalato jātā taṃ taṃ vaṭṭippadesaṃ anatikkamitvā tattha tattheva bhijjati, atha ca pana paveṇisambandhavasena sabbarattiṃ jalito padīpoti vuccati, evamidhāpi paveṇivasena ayampi kāyo evaṃ ciraṭṭhitiko viya katvā dassito.
“在夜里和白天”,就是在夜间和在白天。这里的“夜”和“白天”用的是属格形式,表达的是处所的意思。“另一个生起,另一个灭去”是说:在夜里生起和灭去的,与在白天生起和灭去的,是彼此不同的。不能理解成:一个生起,而另一个还没生起的就灭去了。“在夜里和白天”这句话,是截取前面相续中的一小段,按照相续的方式来说的。但实际上,没有任何一个心能够持续一整夜或一整天。因为在一次弹指之间,就有无数百千俱胝的心生起。这在《弥兰陀问经》中也说过:巴利
Rattiyā ca divasassa cāti rattimhi ca divase ca. Bhummatthe hetaṃ sāmivacanaṃ. Aññadeva uppajjati, aññaṃ nirujjhatīti yaṃ rattiṃ uppajjati ca nirujjhati ca, tato aññadeva divā uppajjati ca nirujjhati cāti attho. Aññaṃ uppajjati, anuppannameva aññaṃ nirujjhatīti evaṃ pana attho na gahetabbo. ‘‘Rattiyā ca divasassa cā’’ti idaṃ purimapaveṇito parittakaṃ paveṇiṃ gahetvā paveṇivaseneva vuttaṃ, ekarattiṃ pana ekadivasaṃ vā ekameva cittaṃ ṭhātuṃ samatthaṃ nāma natthi. Ekasmiñhi accharākkhaṇe anekāni cittakoṭisatasahassāni uppajjanti. Vuttampi cetaṃ milindapañhe –
大王,如果把一百车稻谷,再加上半车、七阿曼那稻谷和两瓶,用来计算一次弹指间生起的心,这些稻谷也会耗尽、用光。巴利
‘‘Vāhasataṃ kho, mahārāja , vīhīnaṃ, aḍḍhacūḷañca vāhā, vīhisattambaṇāni, dve ca tumbā, ekaccharākkhaṇe pavattassa cittassa ettakā vīhī lakkhaṃ ṭhapīyamānā parikkhayaṃ pariyādānaṃ gaccheyyu’’nti.
“在林野中”就是指在大森林里。它松开一根树枝,又抓住另一根;松开这根,又抓住那根——用这个来说明:它并不是找不到可抓的树枝才下到地面,而是在那片大森林里游荡时,一直都是一根接一根地抓着树枝前行。这就是所要显示的义理。巴利
Pavaneti mahāvane. Taṃ muñcitvā aññaṃ gaṇhāti, taṃ muñcitvā aññaṃ gaṇhātīti iminā na so gaṇhitabbasākhaṃ alabhitvā bhūmiṃ otarati. Atha kho tasmiṃ mahāvane vicaranto taṃ taṃ sākhaṃ gaṇhantoyeva caratīti ayamattho dassito.
“同样地”在这里是譬喻的对应:应当知道,所缘之林就像大林;在所缘林中生起的心,就像在大林中游荡的猴子;对所缘的贪着,就像抓住树枝。正如那只在林间游荡的猴子,放下这根树枝,又抓住那根树枝;同样地,这颗在所缘林中游荡的心,有时取色所缘而生起,有时取声等当中的某一种,有时取过去的,有时取未来的或现在的,同样地,有时取内的,有时取外的。又正如那只在林间游荡的猴子,不能说它抓不到树枝就下来坐在地上——它总是抓住某一根带叶的树枝才坐下;同样地,也不能说这颗在所缘林中游荡的心没有取得所缘就生起——应当知道,它必定是取了某一种所缘才生起。到这里,世尊已经把执取从色法移开,安立在无色法上;又从无色法移开,安立在色法上。巴利
Evameva khoti ettha idaṃ opammasaṃsandanaṃ – araññamahāvanaṃ viya hi ārammaṇavanaṃ veditabbaṃ. Tasmiṃ vane vicaraṇamakkaṭo viya ārammaṇavane uppajjanakacittaṃ. Sākhāgahaṇaṃ viya ārammaṇe lubbhanaṃ. Yathā so araññe vicaranto makkaṭo taṃ taṃ sākhaṃ pahāya taṃ taṃ sākhaṃ gaṇhāti, evamidaṃ ārammaṇavane vicarantaṃ cittampi kadāci rūpārammaṇaṃ gahetvā uppajjati, kadāci saddādīsu aññataraṃ, kadāci atītaṃ, kadāci anāgataṃ vā paccuppannaṃ vā, tathā kadāci ajjhattaṃ, kadāci bāhiraṃ. Yathā ca so araññe vicaranto makkaṭo sākhaṃ alabhitvā oruyha bhūmiyaṃ nisinnoti na vattabbo, ekaṃ pana paṇṇasākhaṃ gahetvāva nisīdati, evameva ārammaṇavane vicarantaṃ cittampi ekaṃ olubbhārammaṇaṃ alabhitvā uppannanti na vattabbaṃ, ekajātiyaṃ pana ārammaṇaṃ gahetvāva uppajjatīti veditabbaṃ. Ettāvatā ca pana bhagavatā rūpato nīharitvā arūpe gāho patiṭṭhāpito, arūpato nīharitvā rūpe.
现在,为了把这两边都一并拔除,世尊开始了这段开示:“诸比丘,对此,多闻圣弟子……”这个义理应当用毒蛇咬伤的譬喻来说明:据说,有一个人被毒蛇咬了,一位善巧的医师赶来,想为他除毒,就让他呕吐,然后翻转咒语“下金翅鸟,上龙”,把毒往上引。当他知道毒已经升到眼睛部位时,心想:“从现在起我不让它再往上升,就让它停在被咬的地方。”于是又翻转咒语“上金翅鸟,下龙”,用烟熏耳朵,用棍子敲打,把毒降下来,让它停在被咬的地方。当他知道毒已经停在那里,就用解药膏把毒揉散,给他沐浴,说“愿你安乐”,然后随心离去。巴利
Idāni taṃ ubhayato nikkaḍḍhitukāmo tatra, bhikkhave, sutavā ariyasāvakoti desanaṃ ārabhi. Ayaṃ panattho āsīvisadaṭṭhūpamāya dīpetabbo – eko kira puriso āsīvisena daṭṭho, athassa visaṃ harissāmīti cheko bhisakko āgantvā vamanaṃ kāretvā heṭṭhā garuḷo, upari nāgoti mantaṃ parivattetvā visaṃ upari āropesi. So yāva akkhippadesā āruḷhabhāvaṃ ñatvā ‘‘ito paraṃ abhiruhituṃ na dassāmi, daṭṭhaṭṭhāneyeva ṭhapessāmī’’ti upari garuḷo, heṭṭhā nāgoti mantaṃ parivattetvā kaṇṇe dhumetvā daṇḍakena paharitvā visaṃ otāretvā daṭṭhaṭṭhāneyeva ṭhapesi. Tatrassa ṭhitabhāvaṃ ñatvā agadalepena visaṃ nimmathetvā nhāpetvā ‘‘sukhī hohī’’ti vatvā yenakāmaṃ pakkāmi.
在这里,就像被毒蛇咬伤后毒在体内安住的阶段,这些比丘对诸色过度执取的时期也是这样;善巧的医师好比如来;用咒语把毒往上引的阶段,就像如来把那些比丘对诸色的执取移除,安置在无色上;不让已经升到眼部的毒再往上走,而是靠咒力让它降下来,放回被咬的地方,就像导师把那些比丘对无色的执取移除,安置在诸色上。对于停留在被咬处的毒,用药膏研磨化解,就像为了从两边移除执取而开始这次开示的时期,应当这样理解。其中,“厌恶则离染”说的是道;“由离染则解脱”说的是果;“于解脱……”等说的是省察。第一。巴利
Tattha āsīvisena daṭṭhassa kāye visapatiṭṭhānaṃ viya imesaṃ bhikkhūnaṃ rūpe adhimattagāhakālo, cheko bhisakko viya tathāgato, mantaṃ parivattetvā upari visassa āropitakālo viya tathāgatena tesaṃ bhikkhūnaṃ rūpato gāhaṃ nīharitvā arūpe patiṭṭhāpitakālo, yāva akkhippadesā āruḷhavisassa upari abhiruhituṃ adatvā puna mantabalena otāretvā daṭṭhaṭṭhāneyeva ṭhapanaṃ viya satthārā tesaṃ bhikkhūnaṃ arūpato gāhaṃ nīharitvā rūpe patiṭṭhāpitakālo. Daṭṭhaṭṭhāne ṭhitassa visassa agadalepena nimmathanaṃ viya ubhayato gāhaṃ nīharaṇatthāya imissā desanāya āraddhakālo veditabbo. Tattha nibbindaṃ virajjatīti iminā maggo kathito, virāgā vimuccatīti phalaṃ, vimuttasmintiādinā paccavekkhaṇā. Paṭhamaṃ.
第二 无闻者经注释巴利
2. Dutiyaassutavāsuttavaṇṇanā
62 62. 在第二经中,“会带来乐受的”指乐受的缘。“触”指眼触等。难道眼触不是乐受的缘吗?从俱生缘来说不是,但从亲依止缘来说,它对于速行受是缘,这句话就是针对这个说的。耳触等也应同样理解。“同类的”指同属该类、与它相似,意思是与那个触相随顺。“会带来苦受的”等,应按照前面所说的方式理解。“通过摩擦与聚合”指通过摩擦和聚合,也就是通过摩擦和集合的意思。“热”指暖的状态。不应理解为火生起、火星喷出,而只是“热”这一状态的别名。其中,“两木片”指两根火钻木。其中,下面的钻木好比依处,上面的钻木好比所缘,摩擦好比触,暖界好比受。第二经。巴利
62. Dutiye sukhavedaniyanti sukhavedanāya paccayaṃ. Phassanti cakkhusamphassādiṃ. Nanu ca cakkhusamphasso sukhavedanāya paccayo na hotīti? Sahajātapaccayena na hoti, upanissayapaccayena pana javanavedanāya hoti , taṃ sandhāyetaṃ vuttaṃ. Sotasamphassādīsupi eseva nayo. Tajjanti tajjātikaṃ tassāruppaṃ, tassa phassassa anurūpanti attho. Dukkhavedaniyantiādi vuttanayeneva veditabbaṃ. Saṅghaṭṭanasamodhānāti saṅghaṭṭanena ceva samodhānena ca, saṅghaṭṭanasampiṇḍanenāti attho. Usmāti uṇhākāro. Tejo abhinibbattatīti aggicuṇṇo nikkhamatīti na gahetabbaṃ, usmākārasseva pana etaṃ vevacanaṃ. Tattha dvinnaṃ kaṭṭhānanti dvinnaṃ araṇīnaṃ. Tattha adhoaraṇī viya vatthu, uttarāraṇī viya ārammaṇaṃ, saṅghaṭṭanaṃ viya phasso, usmādhātu viya vedanā. Dutiyaṃ.
3. 《子肉喻经》的注释巴利
3. Puttamaṃsūpamasuttavaṇṇanā
63 63. 在第三经里,“诸比丘,有四种食”等话,解释方式和前面说的一样。不过,因为这部经是依一个具体事缘而说的,所以我先把那个事缘讲出来,然后在这里逐句解释。那么,这部经是依什么事缘而说的呢?是依利养和恭敬。据说,世尊那时得到了极大的利养和恭敬,这跟一位在四大阿僧祇劫中圆满布施波罗蜜的佛陀是相称的。就像从四面八方涌起双倍的大云,汇成巨大洪流一样,一切波罗蜜仿佛聚在一起说:“我们要在这一生中显现果报”,于是便产生了利养和恭敬的巨大洪流。刹帝利、婆罗门等人手持饮食、车乘、衣服、花鬘、香、涂香等,从各处前来,到处寻找世尊:“佛陀在哪里?世尊在哪里?人天导师、人中之雄、人中狮子在哪里?”他们甚至用几百辆车载着资具前来,却找不到安置的地方,于是在四周车辕挨着车辕地站着、跟着,就像盲者林婆罗门等人那样。这一切都应按照《犍度》和各部经典中所说的方式来理解。巴利
63. Tatiye cattārome, bhikkhave, āhārātiādi vuttanayameva. Yasmā panassa aṭṭhuppattiko nikkhepo, tasmā taṃ dassetvāvettha anupubbapadavaṇṇanaṃ karissāmi. Katarāya pana idaṃ aṭṭhuppattiyā nikkhittanti? Lābhasakkārena. Bhagavato kira mahālābhasakkāro uppajji, yathā taṃ cattāro asaṅkhyeyye pūritadānapāramīsañcayassa. Sabbadisāsu hissa yamakamahāmegho vuṭṭhahitvā mahoghaṃ viya sabbapāramiyo ‘‘ekasmiṃ attabhāve vipākaṃ dassāmā’’ti sampiṇḍitā viya lābhasakkāramahoghaṃ nibbattayiṃsu. Tato tato annapānayānavatthamālāgandhavilepanādihatthā khattiyabrāhmaṇādayo āgantvā, ‘‘kahaṃ buddho, kahaṃ bhagavā, kahaṃ devadevo narāsabho purisasīho’’ti? Bhagavantaṃ pariyesanti. Sakaṭasatehipi paccaye āharitvā okāsaṃ alabhamānā samantā gāvutappamāṇampi sakaṭadhurena sakaṭadhuraṃ āhacca tiṭṭhanti ceva anuppavattanti ca andhakavindabrāhmaṇādayo viya. Sabbaṃ khandhake tesu tesu suttesu ca āgatanayena veditabbaṃ.
就像世尊那样,比丘僧团也是如此。关于这一点,经中已经说过:巴利
Yathā bhagavato, evaṃ bhikkhusaṅghassāpi. Vuttañcetaṃ –
那时,世尊受到恭敬、尊重、敬重、供养、敬奉,是衣、钵食、坐卧具、病缘医药资具的获得者。比丘僧团也同样受到恭敬……中略……是资具的获得者。巴利
‘‘Tena kho pana samayena bhagavā sakkato hoti garukato mānito pūjito apacito lābhī cīvara-piṇḍapāta-senāsana-gilāna-paccaya-bhesajja-parikkhārānaṃ. Bhikkhusaṅghopi kho sakkato hoti…pe… parikkhārāna’’nti (udā. 14; saṃ. ni. 2.70).
同样地,准陀,如今在这世间出现的任何僧团或团体,准陀,我看不到有另一个僧团能像这个准陀的比丘僧团一样,达到如此顶尖的利养和顶尖的名声。巴利
Tathā ‘‘yāvatā kho, cunda, etarahi saṅgho vā gaṇo vā loke uppanno, nāhaṃ, cunda, aññaṃ ekasaṅghampi samanupassāmi evaṃ lābhaggayasaggapattaṃ yatharivāyaṃ, cunda, bhikkhusaṅgho’’ti (dī. ni. 3.176).
世尊和僧团所得到的利养与恭敬,汇合在一起,就像两条大河的河水一样,变得不可估量。那时,导师独自静处,心里想:“过去诸佛也有过这样的大利养与恭敬,未来诸佛也会如此。那么,现在的比丘们,能不能以摄取食物的念与正知,保持平等心,没有贪欲,来受用食物呢?还是不能呢?”巴利
Svāyaṃ bhagavato ca saṅghassa ca uppanno lābhasakkāro ekato hutvā dvinnaṃ mahānadīnaṃ udakaṃ viya appameyyo ahosi. Atha satthā rahogato cintesi – ‘‘mahālābhasakkāro atītabuddhānampi evarūpo ahosi, anāgatānampi evarūpo bhavissati . Kiṃ nu kho bhikkhū āhārapariggāhakena satisampajaññena samannāgatā majjhattā nicchandarāgā hutvā āhāraṃ paribhuñjituṃ sakkonti, na sakkontī’’ti?
他看见有些刚出家的善男子,没有先省察就受用食物。看到之后,他心里这样想:“我用了四大阿僧祇劫再加十万劫圆满诸波罗蜜,并不是为了衣服等资具,而是为了最上的果位——阿罗汉果。这些比丘在我身边出家,也不是为了衣服等资具而出家,正是为了阿罗汉果。可他们现在却把没价值的东西当成有价值的,把没有意义的东西当成有意义的。”这样,他心中生起了对法的警策。接着他想:“如果能够制定的话,这种不省察就受用食物的行为,应该被制定为第五条波罗夷。但不可能这样做,因为这是众生长期惯行的情形。不过,我要像宣说第五条波罗夷那样宣说它,使他们将之视同第五条波罗夷,从而为他们立一面法的镜子、一种守护、一条界限。未来的比丘若能一再忆念它,就会先省察再受用四种资具。”由于这个因缘,他开示了这部《子肉喻经》。其中“诸比丘,有四种食”等句,含义如前所说。巴利
So addasa ekacce adhunā pabbajite kulaputte apaccavekkhitvā āhāraṃ paribhuñjamāne. Disvānassa etadahosi – ‘‘mayā kappasatasahassādhikāni cattāri asaṅkhyeyyāni pāramiyo pūrentena na cīvarādihetu pūritā, uttamaphalassa pana arahattassatthāya pūritā. Imepi bhikkhū mama santike pabbajantā na cīvarādihetu pabbajitā, arahattasseva pana atthāya pabbajitā. Te idāni asārameva sāraṃ anatthameva ca atthaṃ karontī’’ti evamassa dhammasaṃvego udapādi. Tato cintesi – ‘‘sace pañcamaṃ pārājikaṃ paññapetuṃ sakkā abhavissa, apaccavekkhitāhāraparibhogo pañcamaṃ pārājikaṃ katvā paññapetabbo bhaveyya. Na pana sakkā evaṃ kātuṃ, dhuvapaṭisevanaṭṭhānañhetaṃ sattānaṃ. Yathā pana kathite pañcamaṃ pārājikaṃ viya naṃ passissanti. Evaṃ dhammādāsaṃ saṃvaraṃ mariyādaṃ ṭhapessāmi, yaṃ āvajjitvā āvajjitvā anāgate bhikkhū cattāro paccaye paccavekkhitvā paribhuñjissantī’’ti. Imāya aṭṭhuppattiyā imaṃ puttamaṃsūpamasuttantaṃ nikkhipi. Tattha cattārome, bhikkhave, āhārātiādi heṭṭhā vuttatthameva.
世尊详细解释了四种食之后,现在为了说明它们各自的过患,才这样问道:诸比丘,抟食应当怎样看待呢?其中,夫妇就是妻子和丈夫。少量的行粮,是指盒饭、炒米粉、甜食等当中随便哪一种少量的旅途干粮。旷野之道,就是成为旷野的道路,或者旷野中的道路。旷野有五种:贼旷野、猛兽旷野、非人旷野、无水旷野、缺食旷野。这当中,有盗贼危险的地方,就是贼旷野。有狮子、老虎等猛兽的地方,就是猛兽旷野。有大神力夜叉女等非人带来危险的地方,就是非人旷野。没有水可以喝或洗澡的地方,就是无水旷野。连嚼的、吃的都没有,甚至少许块茎之类也找不到的地方,就叫缺食旷野。而五种危险全都具备的地方,那就纯粹是旷野了。不过,有些旷野走一天、两天、三天就能过去,这里说的不是那种。这里指的是无水、缺食、长达一百由旬的旷野。在那样旷野中的道路。他们会踏上,是指被饥饿的恐惧、疾病的恐惧和王难的恐惧所逼迫的人们,心里想着:走过这片旷野之后,我们就能在如法国王没有灾患的国土里安乐地生活了,于是踏上这条路。巴利
Cattāro pana āhāre vitthāretvā idāni tesu ādīnavaṃ dassetuṃ kathañca, bhikkhave, kabaḷīkāro āhāro daṭṭhabbotiādimāha? Tattha jāyampatikāti jāyā ceva pati ca. Parittaṃ sambalanti puṭabhattasattumodakādīnaṃ aññataraṃ appamattakaṃ pātheyyaṃ. Kantāramagganti kantārabhūtaṃ maggaṃ, kantāre vā maggaṃ. Kantāranti corakantāraṃ vāḷakantāraṃ amanussakantāraṃ nirudakakantāraṃ appabhakkhakantāranti pañcavidhaṃ. Tesu yattha corabhayaṃ atthi , taṃ corakantāraṃ. Yattha sīhabyagghādayo vāḷā atthi, taṃ vāḷakantāraṃ. Yattha balavāmukhayakkhiniādīnaṃ amanussānaṃ vasena bhayaṃ atthi, taṃ amanussakantāraṃ. Yattha pātuṃ vā nhāyituṃ vā udakaṃ natthi, taṃ nirudakakantāraṃ. Yattha khāditabbaṃ vā bhuñjitabbaṃ vā antamaso kandamūlādimattampi natthi, taṃ appabhakkhakantāraṃ nāma. Yattha panetaṃ pañcavidhampi bhayaṃ atthi, taṃ kantārameva. Taṃ panetaṃ ekāhadvīhatīhādivasena nittharitabbampi atthi, na taṃ idha adhippetaṃ. Idha pana nirudakaṃ appabhakkhaṃ yojanasatikakantāraṃ adhippetaṃ. Evarūpe kantāre maggaṃ. Paṭipajjeyyunti chātakabhayena ceva rogabhayena ca rājabhayena ca upaddutā paṭipajjeyyuṃ ‘‘etaṃ kantāraṃ nittharitvā dhammikassa rañño nirupaddave raṭṭhe sukhaṃ vasissāmā’’ti maññamānā.
所谓“独子”,是指被人抱在怀里、应当怜惜、身体还很柔嫩的独生子。“干肉片和肉串”:从肉厚的地方取来,叫干肉片;从连着骨头、连着筋的地方取来,叫肉串,就是这个意思。“他们会折磨”:意思是他们会捶打。“我们的独子在哪里?”这是他们哀哭的方式。巴利
Ekaputtakoti ukkhipitvā gahito anukampitabbayutto athirasarīro ekaputtako. Vallūrañca soṇḍikañcāti ghanaghanaṭṭhānato gahetvā vallūraṃ, aṭṭhinissitasirānissitaṭṭhānāni gahetvā sūlamaṃsañcāti attho. Paṭipiseyyunti pahareyyuṃ. Kahaṃ ekaputtakāti ayaṃ tesaṃ paridevanākāro.
这里则依真实义理,从开头简要解释其含义:据说,有一对夫妻带着儿子,只带了很少的干粮,走上了一条一百由旬长的荒野之路。他们走了五十由旬后,干粮吃完了,被饥饿和口渴折磨,就坐在一处稀疏的树荫下。那时,丈夫对妻子说:“贤妻,从这里往四周五十由旬内,没有村庄,也没有集镇。所以,男人该做的许多事,比如耕田、放牛等等,我现在已经做不了了。来吧,你把我杀了,吃一半肉,另一半做成干粮,带着儿子走出荒野。”接着,妻子也对他说:“夫君,女人该做的许多事,比如纺线等等,我现在也做不了了。来吧,你把我杀了,吃一半肉,另一半做成干粮,带着儿子走出荒野。”接着,丈夫又对她说:“贤妻,如果女人死了,那就是两个人都会死。因为年幼无知的孩子离开母亲就活不了。如果我们两个都活着,以后还能再有孩子。不如现在就杀了这孩子,拿他的肉,走出荒野。”于是,母亲对儿子说:“孩子,到父亲那里去。”孩子就走了过去。那时,父亲心想:“我为了养育这个孩子,耕田、放牛等等,吃了不少苦。我下不了手杀儿子,你自己去杀你的儿子吧。”于是他说:“孩子,到你母亲那里去。”孩子就走了过去。那时,母亲也想:“我盼着有个儿子,向牛、向狗、向鬼神祈祷等等,已经吃了不少苦,更何况怀着他、生养他呢?我下不了手杀儿子。”于是她说:“孩子,还是到你父亲那里去吧。”就这样,他在父母两人之间来回走着,就死了。他们看见他死了,悲痛哭泣,然后按前面说的那样,拿他的肉吃了,继续上路。巴利
Ayaṃ panettha bhūtamatthaṃ katvā ādito paṭṭhāya saṅkhepato atthavaṇṇanā – dve kira jāyampatikā puttaṃ gahetvā parittena pātheyyena yojanasatikaṃ kantāramaggaṃ paṭipajjiṃsu. Tesaṃ paññāsayojanāni gantvā pātheyyaṃ niṭṭhāsi, te khuppipāsāturā viraḷacchāyāyaṃ nisīdiṃsu. Tato puriso bhariyaṃ āha – ‘‘bhadde ito samantā paññāsayojanāni gāmo vā nigamo vā natthi. Tasmā yaṃ taṃ purisena kātabbaṃ bahumpi kasigorakkhādikammaṃ, na dāni sakkā taṃ mayā kātuṃ, ehi maṃ māretvā upaḍḍhamaṃsaṃ khāditvā upaḍḍhaṃ pātheyyaṃ katvā puttena saddhiṃ kantāraṃ nittharāhī’’ti. Puna sāpi taṃ āha – ‘‘sāmi mayā dāni yaṃ taṃ itthiyā kātabbaṃ bahumpi suttakantanādikammaṃ, taṃ kātuṃ na sakkā, ehi maṃ māretvā upaḍḍhamaṃsaṃ khāditvā upaḍḍhaṃ pātheyyaṃ katvā puttena saddhiṃ kantāraṃ nittharāhī’’ti. Puna sopi taṃ āha – ‘‘bhadde mātugāmamaraṇena dvinnaṃ maraṇaṃ paññāyati . Na hi mando kumāro mātarā vinā jīvituṃ sakkoti. Yadi pana mayaṃ jīvāma. Puna dārakaṃ labheyyāma. Handa dāni puttakaṃ māretvā, maṃsaṃ gahetvā kantāraṃ nittharāmā’’ti. Tato mātā puttamāha – ‘‘tāta, pitusantikaṃ gacchā’’ti, so agamāsi. Athassa pitā, ‘‘mayā ‘puttakaṃ posessāmī’ti kasigorakkhādīhi anappakaṃ dukkhamanubhūtaṃ, na sakkomi ahaṃ puttaṃ māretuṃ, tvaṃyeva tava puttaṃ mārehī’’ti vatvā, ‘‘tāta mātusantikaṃ gacchā’’ti āha. So agamāsi. Athassa mātāpi, ‘‘mayā puttaṃ patthentiyā govatakukkuravatadevatāyācanādīhipi tāva anappakaṃ dukkhamanubhūtaṃ, ko pana vādo kucchinā pariharantiyā? Na sakkomi ahaṃ puttaṃ māretu’’nti vatvā ‘‘tāta, pitusantikameva gacchā’’ti āha. Evaṃ so dvinnamantarā gacchantoyeva mato. Te taṃ disvā paridevitvā vuttanayena maṃsāni gahetvā khādantā pakkamiṃsu.
他们吃这儿子肉,是因为有九种原因使它成为令人厌恶的,所以既不是为了嬉戏玩乐,也不是为了陶醉自大,不是为了打扮,也不是为了装饰,唯一的目的就是渡过旷野。是哪九种原因使它令人厌恶呢?因为它是同族之肉、是亲属之肉、是儿子之肉、是爱子之肉、是幼嫩之肉、是生肉、是未煮成熟食的肉、是没有加盐的肉、是没有用火烤过的肉。他们吃这儿子肉时,因为有这九种原因而感到厌恶,所以不是带着贪恋、怀着贪求的心去吃,而是安住在中舍的状态中,以没有欲贪的方式去受用。他们不是把附着在骨头、筋、皮上的部分剔除掉,只挑取最肥厚的肉来吃,而是手碰到哪块肉就吃哪块肉。他们不是吃到饱足、塞满喉咙,而是每天只吃一点点,仅仅维持生命而已。他们不是互相吝啬地吃,而是以远离吝啬垢染、完全清净的心来吃。他们不是糊里糊涂地吃,以为“我们在吃别的什么野兽肉或孔雀肉之类的”,而是清楚知道这就是爱子之肉而吃。他们不是怀着“啊,但愿我们能再吃到这样的儿子肉”的希求而吃,而是超越了那种希求而吃。他们不是想“吃这么多走过旷野,剩下的路程过了以后,再配上盐、酸味等来吃”,因此储存起来,而是在旷野快要走完时,心想“免得大众看到”,就把肉埋进地里,或者用火烧掉。他们不是想“别人不能像我们这样吃到这样的儿子肉”,因此生起傲慢或自负,而是摧伏了傲慢、摧伏了自负而吃。他们不是嫌弃说“这肉没盐、没酸味、没烤过、臭烘烘的”,然后厌恶地吃,而是超越了嫌弃而吃。他们不是互相轻视说“这是你的份,这是我的份,你的儿子,我的儿子”,而是和合、欢喜融洽地吃。导师观察到他们这样以无欲贪等方式受用,为了让比丘僧众也认可这件事,便说:“比丘们,你们怎么想?他们难道是为了嬉戏玩乐才吃食物的吗?”等等。其中“为了嬉戏玩乐”等语句,在《清净道论》中已有详细解释。“旷野”是指已经走完、只剩下残余路程的旷野。巴利
Tesaṃ so puttamaṃsāhāro navahi kāraṇehi paṭikūlattā neva davāya hoti, na madāya, na maṇḍanāya, na vibhūsanāya, kevalaṃ kantāranittharaṇatthāyeva hoti. Katamehi navahi kāraṇehi paṭikūloti ce? Sajātimaṃsatāya ñātimaṃsatāya puttamaṃsatāya piyaputtamaṃsatāya taruṇamaṃsatāya āmakamaṃsatāya abhogamaṃsatāya aloṇatāya adhūpitatāyāti. Evañhi te navahi kāraṇehi paṭikūlaṃ taṃ puttamaṃsaṃ khādantā na sārattā giddhamānasā hutvā khādiṃsu, majjhattabhāveyeva pana nicchandarāgaparibhoge ṭhitā khādiṃsu. Na aṭṭhinhārucammanissitaṭṭhānāni apanetvā thūlathūlaṃ varamaṃsameva khādiṃsu, hatthasampattaṃ maṃsameva pana khādiṃsu. Na yāvadatthaṃ kaṇṭhappamāṇaṃ katvā khādiṃsu, thokaṃ thokaṃ pana ekadivasaṃ yāpanamattameva khādiṃsu. Na aññamaññaṃ maccharāyantā khādiṃsu, vigatamaccheramalena pana parisuddheneva cetasā khādiṃsu. Na aññaṃ kiñci migamaṃsaṃ vā moramaṃsādīnaṃ vā aññataraṃ khādāmāti sammūḷhā khādiṃsu, piyaputtamaṃsabhāvaṃ pana jānantāva khādiṃsu. Na ‘‘aho vata mayaṃ punapi evarūpaṃ puttamaṃsaṃ khādeyyāmā’’ti patthanaṃ katvā khādiṃsu, patthanaṃ pana vītivattāva hutvā khādiṃsu. Na ‘‘ettakaṃ kantāre khāditvā avasiṭṭhaṃ kantāraṃ atikkamma loṇambilādīhi yojetvā khādissāmā’’ti sannidhiṃ akaṃsu, kantārapariyosāne pana ‘‘pure mahājano passatī’’ti bhūmiyaṃ vā nikhaṇiṃsu, agginā vā jhāpayiṃsu. Na ‘‘koci añño amhe viya evarūpaṃ puttamaṃsaṃ khādituṃ na labhatī’’ti mānaṃ vā dappaṃ vā akaṃsu, nihatamānā pana nihatadappā hutvā khādiṃsu. ‘‘Kiṃ iminā aloṇena anambilena adhūpitena duggandhenā’’ti na hīḷetvā khādiṃsu, hīḷanaṃ pana vītivattā hutvā khādiṃsu . Na ‘‘tuyhaṃ bhāgo mayhaṃ bhāgo tava putto mama putto’’ti aññamaññaṃ atimaññiṃsu. Samaggā pana sammodamānā hutvā khādiṃsu. Imaṃ nesaṃ evarūpaṃ nicchandarāgādiparibhogaṃ sampassamāno satthā bhikkhusaṅghampi taṃ kāraṇaṃ anujānāpento taṃ kiṃ maññatha, bhikkhave, api nu te davāya vā āhāraṃ āhāreyyuntiādimāha. Tattha davāya vātiādīni visuddhimagge (visuddhi. 1.18) vitthāritāneva. Kantārassāti nittiṇṇāvasesassa kantārassa.
正是如此。应当以九种厌恶性来看待,把食物看作像爱子之肉一样,这就是这里的含义。是哪九种呢?就是前往的厌恶性等。观察前往的厌恶性时,也是在遍取抟食;观察遍求的厌恶性时,观察受用、贮藏、住处、未熟、已熟、手污、流泄的厌恶性时,也是在遍取抟食。而这些都是前往的厌恶性等,在《清净道论》解说食厌恶性的部分中已经详细说明了。因此,应当依照这九种厌恶性,把食物看作爱子之肉一样来受用。巴利
Evameva khoti navannaṃ pāṭikulyānaṃ vasena piyaputtamaṃsasadiso katvā daṭṭhabboti attho. Katamesaṃ navannaṃ? Gamanapāṭikulyatādīnaṃ. Gamanapāṭikulyataṃ paccavekkhantopi kabaḷīkārāhāraṃ pariggaṇhāti, pariyesanapāṭikulyataṃ paccavekkhantopi, paribhoganidhānaāsayaparipakkāparipakkasammakkhaṇanissandapāṭikulyataṃ paccavekkhantopi, tāni panetāni gamanapāṭikulyatādīni visuddhimagge (visuddhi. 1.294) āhārapāṭikulyatāniddese vitthāritāneva. Iti imesaṃ navannaṃ pāṭikulyānaṃ vasena puttamaṃsūpamaṃ katvā āhāro paribhuñjitabbo.
就像那对夫妻吃自己厌恶的爱子之肉时,并不是带着贪恋、满心贪求地去吃,而是安住在中舍的状态中,以没有欲贪的方式去吃;同样,也应当以没有欲贪的方式受用食物。又像他们并没有把附着在骨头、筋腱、皮上的肉剔除掉,只挑最粗最肥的肉来吃,而是手碰到什么就吃什么;同样,不应像用手背把干饭、酸败的菜肴推开那样挑拣,不应像鹌鹑或鸡那样划定一块地方只啄那里的食物,也不应像有人从各处挑出混着酥油、肉等的好东西来吃,而应像狮子一样,按顺序一段一段地吃。巴利
Yathā te jāyampatikā pāṭikulyaṃ piyaputtamaṃsaṃ khādantā na sārattā giddhamānasā hutvā khādiṃsu, majjhattabhāveyeva nicchandarāgaparibhoge ṭhitā khādiṃsu, evaṃ nicchandarāgaparibhogaṃ katvā paribhuñjitabbo. Yathā ca te na aṭṭhinhārucammanissitaṃ apanetvā thūlathūlaṃ varamaṃsameva khādiṃsu, hatthasampattameva pana khādiṃsu, evaṃ sukkhabhattamandabyañjanādīni piṭṭhihatthena apaṭikkhipitvā vaṭṭakena viya kukkuṭena viya ca odhiṃ adassetvā tato tato sappimaṃsādisaṃsaṭṭhavarabhojanaṃyeva vicinitvā abhuñjantena sīhena viya sapadānaṃ paribhuñjitabbo.
就像他们并没有随所欲求地吃到喉咙那么满,而是每天只吃一点点,仅仅够维持下去;同样,吃饭时也不能像那些“食至手”之类的婆罗门中的某些人那样,随所欲求地吃到撑满肚子,而应该像法将(舍利弗)那样,留下四五口饭的余地再吃。据说,他在四十五年间一直如此安住,曾发出狮子吼说:“我哪怕一天也没有吃到在饭后会引起吐酸气/泛酸的程度。”他这样说时,诵出了这首偈:巴利
Yathā ca te na yāvadatthaṃ kaṇṭhappamāṇaṃ khādiṃsu, thokaṃ thokaṃ pana ekekadivasaṃ yāpanamattameva khādiṃsu, evameva āharahatthakādibrāhmaṇānaṃ aññatarena viya yāvadatthaṃ udarāvadehakaṃ abhuñjantena catunnaṃ pañcannaṃ vā ālopānaṃ okāsaṃ ṭhapetvāva dhammasenāpatinā viya paribhuñjitabbo. So kira pañcacattālīsa vassāni tiṭṭhamāno ‘‘pacchābhatte ambiluggārasamuṭṭhāpakaṃ katvā ekadivasampi āhāraṃ na āhāresi’’nti vatvā sīhanādaṃ nadanto imaṃ gāthamāha –
不吃四五口饭,就喝水;
这足以让一位志向坚定的比丘住得安稳舒适。巴利
‘‘Cattāro pañca ālope, abhutvā udakaṃ pive; Alaṃ phāsuvihārāya, pahitattassa bhikkhuno’’ti. (theragā. 983);
就像他们吃东西时彼此不悭吝,而是以远离了悭吝垢秽、完全清净的心来吃;同样,得到钵食之后,不应悭吝,应当安住于和敬法而受用:如果有人要全部,我就全部给他;如果有人要一半,我就给一半;如果还有剩下的,我自己受用。又像他们吃东西时,并不是迷迷糊糊地以为“我们在吃别的什么鹿肉或孔雀肉之类”,而是清楚知道那是爱子之肉才吃;同样,得到钵食之后,不应生起“我在吃、我在吞”这种执著自我的迷乱,而应断除迷乱,这样受用:抟食并不知道“我在增长四大所成的身体”,身体也不知道“抟食在增长我”。应当这样舍弃迷乱而受用。而且,应当以正念正知、毫不迷乱地受用。巴利
Yathā ca te na aññamaññaṃ maccharāyantā khādiṃsu, vigatamalamaccherena pana parisuddheneva cetasā khādiṃsu, evameva piṇḍapātaṃ labhitvā amaccharāyitvā ‘‘imaṃ sabbaṃ gaṇhantassa sabbaṃ dassāmi, upaḍḍhaṃ gaṇhantassa upaḍḍhaṃ, sace gahitāvaseso bhavissati, attanā paribhuñjissāmī’’ti sāraṇīyadhamme ṭhiteneva paribhuñjitabbo. Yathā ca te na ‘‘aññaṃ kiñci mayaṃ migamaṃsaṃ vā moramaṃsādīnaṃ vā aññataraṃ khādāmā’’ti sammūḷhā khādiṃsu, piyaputtamaṃsabhāvaṃ pana jānantāva khādiṃsu, evameva piṇḍapātaṃ labhitvā ‘‘ahaṃ khādāmi bhuñjāmī’’ti attūpaladdhisammohaṃ anuppādetvā ‘‘kabaḷīkārāhāro na jānāti ‘cātumahābhūtikakāyaṃ vaḍḍhemī’ti, kāyopi na jānāti ‘kabaḷīkārāhāro maṃ vaḍḍhetī’’’ti, evaṃ sammohaṃ pahāya paribhuñjitabbo. Satisampajaññavasenāpi cesa asammūḷheneva hutvā paribhuñjitabbo.
就像他们并不是怀着“啊,真希望我们还能再吃到这样的爱子肉”这种渴求去吃,而是已经超越了渴求才去吃;同样地,得到精美食物时,不要生起“啊,真希望我明天、后天也能得到这样的食物”;得到粗劣食物时,也不要生起“今天不像昨天那样得到精美食物”的渴求或懊悔。应当没有贪爱地——巴利
Yathā ca te na ‘‘aho vata mayaṃ punapi evarūpaṃ puttamaṃsaṃ khādeyyāmā’’ti patthanaṃ katvā khādiṃsu, patthanaṃ pana vītivattāva hutvā khādiṃsu, evameva paṇītabhojanaṃ laddhā ‘aho vatāhaṃ svepi punadivasepi evarūpaṃ labheyyaṃ’, lūkhaṃ vā pana laddhā ‘‘hiyyo viya me ajja paṇītabhojanaṃ na laddha’’nti patthanaṃ vā anusocanaṃ vā akatvā nittaṇhena –
我不追悔过去,也不期盼未来;
靠当下所得来维持生活,由此色身才得以清净明净。巴利
‘‘Atītaṃ nānusocāmi, nappajappāmināgataṃ; Paccuppannena yāpemi, tena vaṇṇo pasīdatī’’ti. (jā. 2.22.90) –
忆念这份教诫时,应当怀着“我就靠当下现有的来维持生活”这样的心态去受用。巴利
Imaṃ ovādaṃ anussarantena ‘‘paccuppanneneva yāpessāmī’’ti paribhuñjitabbo.
他们并没有这样囤积:“在旷野里吃这么多,剩下的等越过旷野之后,配上咸酸等调料再吃。”而是在旷野的尽头,因为想到“前面会有很多人看见”,就把它们埋进地里,或者用火烧掉。同样地——巴利
Yathā ca te na ‘‘ettakaṃ kantāre khāditvā avasiṭṭhaṃ kantāraṃ atikkamma loṇambilādīhi yojetvā khādissāmā’’ti sannidhiṃ akaṃsu, kantārapariyosāne pana ‘‘pure mahājano passatī’’ti bhūmiyaṃ vā nikhaṇiṃsu, agginā vā jhāpayiṃsu, evameva –
对于食物和饮品,
嚼食和衣服之类的物品,
得到之后,不该囤积起来。
得不到这些东西时,也不该害怕。巴利
‘‘Annānamatho pānānaṃ, Khādanīyānaṃ athopi vatthānaṃ; Laddhā na sannidhiṃ kayirā, Na ca parittase tāni alabhamāno’’ti. (su. ni. 930); –
忆念这份教诫时,无论从四种资具中得到什么,都只从中取够维持自己生存的量,剩下的分给同梵行者,避免积存,然后才受用。就像他们并没有生起“没有人能像我们这样吃到这种儿子肉”的慢或骄,而是灭除了慢与骄才吃;同样,得到殊胜的食物时,也不应生起“我是袈裟、饮食等利养的获得者”这样的慢或骄。应当省察:“出家不是为了袈裟等,而是为了证得阿拉汉果”,灭除慢与骄之后才受用。巴利
Imaṃ ovādaṃ anussarantena catūsu paccayesu yaṃ yaṃ labhati, tato tato attano yāpanamattaṃ gahetvā, sesaṃ sabrahmacārīnaṃ vissajjetvā sannidhiṃ parivajjantena paribhuñjitabbo. Yathā ca te na ‘‘koci añño amhe viya evarūpaṃ puttamaṃsaṃ khādituṃ na labhatī’’ti mānaṃ vā dappaṃ vā akaṃsu, nihatamānā pana nihatadappā hutvā khādiṃsu, evameva paṇītabhojanaṃ labhitvā ‘‘ahamasmi lābhī cīvarapiṇḍapātādīna’’nti na māno vā dappo vā kātabbo. ‘‘Nāyaṃ pabbajjā cīvarādihetu, arahattahetu panāyaṃ pabbajjā’’ti paccavekkhitvā nihatamānadappeneva paribhuñjitabbo.
就像他们并没有鄙视地说“这没盐、没酸味、没熏过,臭烘烘的”,然后不吃,而是放下了鄙视照样吃;同样,比丘拿到团食后,不能鄙视团食说“这跟马料牛食一样粗糙没味道,扔到狗盆里去吧”,也不能鄙视施主说“谁会吃这个?拿去喂乌鸦和狗吧”——巴利
Yathā ca te ‘‘kiṃ iminā aloṇena anambilena adhūpitena duggandhenā’’ti hīḷetvā na khādiṃsu, hīḷanaṃ pana vītivattā hutvā khādiṃsu, evameva piṇḍapātaṃ labhitvā ‘‘kiṃ iminā assagoṇabhattasadisena lūkhena nirasena, suvānadoṇiyaṃ taṃ pakkhipathā’’ti evaṃ piṇḍapātaṃ vā ‘‘ko imaṃ bhuñjissati, kākasunakhādīnaṃ dehī’’ti evaṃ dāyakaṃ vā ahīḷentena –
他手持钵盂四处行走,明明不是哑巴,却被当成哑巴。
不要轻视微少的布施,也不要瞧不起布施的人。巴利
‘‘Sa pattapāṇi vicaranto, amūgo mūgasammato; Appaṃ dānaṃ na hīḷeyya, dātāraṃ nāvajāniyā’’ti. (su. ni. 718); –
忆念这份教诫的人,应当这样受用它。就像他们不说“这是你的份,这是我的份”“这是你的儿子,这是我的儿子”而互相轻视,而是和合、欢喜地一起吃;同样,得到团食之后,如果有人这样认为持戒的同梵行者:“谁会给你们这些人食物呢?你们毫无理由地在门槛间跌绊、四处漫游,连生母也不会认为该给你们食物,而我们却在所到之处得到殊胜的衣等物”,从而轻视持戒的同梵行者,针对此而说:巴利
Imaṃ ovādaṃ anussarantena paribhuñjitabbo. Yathā ca te na ‘‘tuyhaṃ bhāgo, mayhaṃ bhāgo, tava putto mama putto’’ti aññamaññaṃ atimaññiṃsu, samaggā pana, sammodamānā hutvā khādiṃsu, evamevaṃ piṇḍapātaṃ labhitvā yathā ekacco ‘‘ko tumhādisānaṃ dassati nikkāraṇā ummāresu pakkhalantānaṃ āhiṇḍantānaṃ vijātamātāpi vo dātabbaṃ na maññati, mayaṃ pana gatagataṭṭhāne paṇītāni cīvarādīni labhāmā’’ti sīlavante sabrahmacārī atimaññati, yaṃ sandhāya vuttaṃ –
他被利养、恭敬和名声压倒,心完全被控制,就看不起其他那些品行端正的比丘。比丘们,这对那个愚痴的人来说,长久以来只会带来损害和痛苦。巴利
‘‘So tena lābhasakkārasilokena abhibhūto pariyādiṇṇacitto aññe pesale bhikkhū atimaññati. Tañhi tassa, bhikkhave, moghapurisassa hoti dīgharattaṃ ahitāya dukkhāyā’’ti (saṃ. ni. 2.161).
应当这样:不轻视任何人,和一切同梵行者在一起,和合、欢喜融洽地受用。巴利
Evaṃ kañci anatimaññitvā sabbehi sabrahmacārīhi saddhiṃ samaggena sammodamānena hutvā paribhuñjitabbaṃ.
已经以三种遍知——知遍知、审察遍知、断遍知——遍知了。怎样遍知呢?在这里,比丘了知:所谓段食,从有依处的角度来说,是食素第八法所成的色法;食素第八法所成的色法在哪里碰撞呢?在舌净色上;舌净色依靠什么?依靠四大种。这样,食素第八法所成的色法、舌净色以及它们的诸缘——四大种,这些法就叫色蕴;正在执取它们时生起的以触为第五的诸法,就是四种非色蕴。这样,这一切五蕴,简要来说,就只是名色。他了知这些法之后,从自相上确定它们,然后寻找它们的缘,顺逆地观察缘起。到此为止,他通过段食这个入口,如实见到了有缘的名色,所以段食就以知遍知而被遍知了。他就在那有缘的名色上安立无常、苦、无我三相,依七种随观来思惟。到此为止,他就以被称为通达三相的思惟智的审察遍知而被遍知了。当他以不还道,通过离欲贪来遍知那名色时,就以断遍知而被遍知了。巴利
Pariññāteti ñātapariññā tīraṇapariññā pahānapariññāti imāhi tīhi pariññāhi pariññāte. Kathaṃ? Idha bhikkhu ‘‘kabaḷīkārāhāro nāma ayaṃ savatthukavasena ojaṭṭhamakarūpaṃ hoti, ojaṭṭhamakarūpaṃ kattha paṭihaññati? Jivhāpasāde, jivhāpasādo kinnissito? Catumahābhūtanissito. Iti ojaṭṭhamakaṃ jivhāpasādo tassa paccayāni mahābhūtānīti ime dhammā rūpakkhandho nāma, taṃ pariggaṇhato uppannā phassapañcamakā dhammā cattāro arūpakkhandhā. Iti sabbepime pañcakkhandhā saṅkhepato nāmarūpamattaṃ hotī’’ti pajānāti. So te dhamme sarasalakkhaṇato vavatthapetvā tesaṃ paccayaṃ pariyesanto anulomapaṭilomaṃ paṭiccasamuppādaṃ passati. Ettāvatānena kabaḷīkārāhāramukhena sappaccayassa nāmarūpassa yāthāvato diṭṭhattā kabaḷīkārāhāro ñātapariññāya pariññāto hoti. So tadeva sappaccayaṃ nāmarūpaṃ aniccaṃ dukkhaṃ anattāti tīṇi lakkhaṇāni āropetvā sattannaṃ anupassanānaṃ vasena sammasati. Ettāvatānena so tilakkhaṇapaṭivedhasammasanañāṇasaṅkhātāya tīraṇapariññāya pariññāto hoti. Tasmiṃyeva nāmarūpe chandarāgāvakaḍḍhanena anāgāmimaggena parijānatā pahānapariññāya pariññāto hotīti.
所谓“与五欲功德相应的贪”,就是指由五种欲乐对象所生起的贪已经被遍知。在这里,有三种遍知:一种遍知、一切遍知、根遍知。什么是一种遍知?如果一位比丘在舌门遍知了对单一味道的渴爱,那么由五欲功德所生的贪就已经被遍知了。为什么?因为那贪就是在这里生起的。那渴爱在眼门生起时,就叫色贪;在耳门等生起时,就叫声贪等等。就像一个小偷在五条路上作案,如果在一条路上抓住他、砍下他的头,五条路就都安全了;同样,当舌门对味道的渴爱被遍知时,由五欲功德所生的贪就被遍知了。这就叫一种遍知。巴利
Pañcakāmaguṇikoti pañcakāmaguṇasambhavo rāgo pariññāto hoti. Ettha pana tisso pariññā ekapariññā sabbapariññā mūlapariññāti. Katamā ekapariññā? Yo bhikkhu jivhādvāre ekarasataṇhaṃ parijānāti, tena pañcakāmaguṇiko rāgo pariññātova hotīti. Kasmā? Tassāyeva tattha uppajjanato. Sāyeva hi taṇhā cakkhudvāre uppannā rūparāgo nāma hoti, sotadvārādīsu uppannā saddarāgādayo. Iti yathā ekasseva corassa pañcamagge hanato ekasmiṃ magge gahetvā sīse chinne pañcapi maggā khemā honti, evaṃ jivhādvāre rasataṇhāya pariññātāya pañcakāmaguṇiko rāgo pariññāto hotīti ayaṃ ekapariññā nāma.
什么是“一切遍知”?在放进钵里的团食中,仅仅同一团食里,就能找到由五种欲乐所生的贪。怎么找到呢?先看它清净的色泽,就有色贪;热酥油倒进去时发出“噼啪噼啪”的声音,或者嚼着那样硬的食物时发出“咯吱咯吱”的声音,享受那个声音,就有声贪。享受茴香等香味时,就有香贪;因为味道甘美,就有味贪。感受柔软食物的触感而享受它,就有触贪。这样,用正念正知把握这食物,以没有贪欲、没有贪染的方式受用它时,那一切贪就都被遍知了。这就叫作“一切遍知”。巴利
Katamā sabbapariññā? Patte pakkhittapiṇḍapātasmiñhi ekasmiṃyeva pañcakāmaguṇikarāgo labbhati. Kathaṃ? Parisuddhaṃ tāvassa vaṇṇaṃ olokayato rūparāgo hoti, uṇhe sappimhi tattha āsiñcante paṭapaṭāti saddo uṭṭhahati, tathārūpaṃ khādanīyaṃ vā khādantassa murumurūti saddo uppajjati, taṃ assādayato saddarāgo. Jīrakādivasagandhaṃ assādentassa gandharāgo, sādurasavasena rasarāgo. Mudubhojanaṃ phassavantanti assādayato phoṭṭhabbarāgo. Iti imasmiṃ āhāre satisampajaññena pariggahetvā nicchandarāgaparibhogena paribhutte sabbopi so pariññāto hotīti ayaṃ sabbapariññā nāma.
什么是根遍知?段食就是五欲之贪的根本。为什么?因为有了段食,贪才会生起。据说在婆罗门提瑟怖畏时期,整整十二年里,夫妻之间连亲昵的念头都没有。为什么?因为食物匮乏。等怖畏平息之后,方圆百由旬的铜掌岛,因为孩子们纷纷举行诞生庆典,变成了一片喜庆景象。就这样,当作为根本的食物被遍知时,五欲之贪也就被遍知了,这就叫根遍知。巴利
Katamā mūlapariññā? Pañcakāmaguṇikarāgassa hi kabaḷīkārāhāro mūlaṃ. Kasmā? Tasmiṃ sati tassuppattito . Brāhmaṇatissabhaye kira dvādasa vassāni jāyampatikānaṃ upanijjhānacittaṃ nāma nāhosi. Kasmā? Āhāramandatāya. Bhaye pana vūpasante yojanasatiko tambapaṇṇidīpo dārakānaṃ jātamaṅgalehi ekamaṅgalo ahosi. Iti mūlabhūte āhāre pariññāte pañcakāmaguṇiko rāgo pariññātova hotīti ayaṃ mūlapariññā nāma.
没有那个结缚,因为与那贪一起被断除,所以已断除,因此不存在。这样,这一开示一直说到不来道为止。然而,“不应仅以此为止”,应当依这些色法等,在五蕴中不断增长观修,直到阿拉汉果而说,才算恰当。第一食结束。巴利
Natthi taṃ saṃyojananti tena rāgena saddhiṃ pahānekaṭṭhatāya pahīnattā natthi. Evamayaṃ desanā yāva anāgāmimaggā kathitā. ‘‘Ettakena pana mā vosānaṃ āpajjiṃsū’’ti etesaṃyeva rūpādīnaṃ vasena pañcasu khandhesu vipassanaṃ vaḍḍhetvā yāva arahattā kathetuṃ vaṭṭatīti. Paṭhamāhāro (niṭṭhito).
第二食(触食)中,“无皮”是指从蹄子开始直到角根,全身的皮都被剥掉了,颜色像一堆紧叔迦花。为什么不拿象、马、牛等其他比喻,偏偏用无皮母牛来比喻呢?是为了表明它无力忍受。因为女人对生起的苦受,没办法忍耐、没办法承受;同样,为了显示触食软弱无力,就取了和这相似的比喻。“墙”是指石墙之类。所谓“依墙而住的有情”,是指蜘蛛、蝙蝠、地鼠等。“依树而住的有情”,是指蜥蜴之类的小动物。“依水而住的有情”,是指鱼、鳄鱼等。“依虚空而住的有情”,是指虻、蚊、乌鸦、鹞等。“咬食”是指撕裂后咬食。它在那各个地方,看到以那各处为依止的根本的有情咬食之怖畏,既不想要自己的恭敬、尊重,也不想要按摩背部、揉擦身体、温水等;同样,比丘看到以触食为根本的烦恼有情咬食之怖畏,对三界触无所欲求。巴利
Dutiye niccammāti khurato paṭṭhāya yāva siṅgamūlā sakalasarīrato uddālitacammā kiṃsukarāsivaṇṇā. Kasmā pana aññaṃ hatthiassagoṇādiupamaṃ agahetvā niccammagāvūpamā gahitāti? Titikkhituṃ asamatthabhāvadīpanatthaṃ. Mātugāmo hi uppannaṃ dukkhavedanaṃ titikkhituṃ adhivāsetuṃ na sakkoti, evameva phassāhāro abalo dubbaloti dassanatthaṃ sadisameva upamaṃ āhari. Kuṭṭanti silākuṭṭādīnaṃ aññataraṃ. Kuṭṭanissitā pāṇā nāma uṇṇanābhisarabūmūsikādayo. Rukkhanissitāti uccāliṅgapāṇakādayo. Udakanissitāti macchasuṃsumārādayo. Ākāsanissitāti ḍaṃsamakasakākakulalādayo. Khādeyyunti luñcitvā khādeyyuṃ. Sā tasmiṃ tasmiṃ ṭhāne taṃ taṃṭhānasannissayamūlikaṃ pāṇakhādanabhayaṃ sampassamānā neva attano sakkārasammānaṃ, na piṭṭhiparikammasarīrasambāhanauṇhodakāni icchati, evameva bhikkhu phassāhāramūlakaṃ kilesapāṇakakhādanabhayaṃ sampassamāno tebhūmakaphassena anatthiko hoti.
比丘们,“触食已被遍知”,是指以三种遍知而遍知。这里也有三种遍知。其中,如实见到有因缘的名色——“触是行蕴,与它相应的受是受蕴,想是想蕴,心是识蕴,它们的依处和所缘是色蕴”——这是知遍知。就在这同一个名色上安立三相,然后依七种随观,从无常等方面去衡量、去抉择——这是度遍知。而对这同一个名色,拔除欲贪的阿拉汉道——这是断遍知。“三受”:当触食以这三种遍知被遍知时,由于三受以触为根本、与触相应,所以三受也就同样被遍知了。这样,依触食,教法一直讲到了阿拉汉果。第二食(触食)。巴利
Phasse, bhikkhave, āhāre pariññāteti tīhi pariññāhi pariññāte. Idhāpi tisso pariññā. Tattha ‘‘phasso saṅkhārakkhandho , taṃsampayuttā vedanā vedanākkhandho, saññā saññākkhandho, cittaṃ viññāṇakkhandho, tesaṃ vatthārammaṇāni rūpakkhandho’’ti evaṃ sappaccayassa nāmarūpassa yāthāvato dassanaṃ ñātapariññā. Tattheva tilakkhaṇaṃ āropetvā sattannaṃ anupassanānaṃ vasena aniccādito tulanaṃ tīraṇapariññā. Tasmiṃyeva pana nāmarūpe chandarāganikkaḍḍhano arahattamaggo pahānapariññā. Tisso vedanāti evaṃ phassāhāre tīhi pariññāhi pariññāte tisso vedanā pariññātāva honti tammūlakattā taṃsampayuttattā ca. Iti phassāhāravasena desanā yāva arahattā kathitā. Dutiyāhāro.
在第三项中,“炭坑”是指炭火的坑。“坑”这个词,既指堆,也指洞穴。巴利
Tatiye aṅgārakāsūti aṅgārānaṃ kāsu. Kāsūti rāsipi vuccati āvāṭopi.
另一些人掉进炭火坑里,
人们哭泣着,身体被烧焦;
车夫啊,看到之后,恐惧确实抓住了我。
我问你,摩得利,天车御者。巴利
‘‘Aṅgārakāsuṃ apare phuṇanti, Narā rudantā paridaḍḍhagattā; Bhayañhi maṃ vindati sūta disvā, Pucchāmi taṃ mātali devasārathī’’ti. (jā. 2.22.462); –
在这里,那个“堆”被说成是“坑”。巴利
Ettha rāsi ‘‘kāsū’’ti vutto.
车夫啊,你为什么这么急急忙忙地挖坑呢?巴利
‘‘Kinnu santaramānova, kāsuṃ khanasi sārathī’’ti? (Jā. 2.22.3). –
这里说的就是那个火坑。这里指的也正是它。“超过人高”是说比一般人还高,大约有五肘尺。“无焰无烟”这个说法,是在显示它极其炽热。因为如果有火焰或烟,就会有风吹起,灼热就不会那么大;当火焰和烟都没有时,因为没有风,灼热就变得极大。“应远离”是说应当远远地避开它。巴利
Ettha āvāṭo. Idhāpi ayameva adhippeto. Sādhikaporisāti atirekaporisā pañcaratanappamāṇā. Vītaccikānaṃ vītadhūmānanti etenassa mahāpariḷāhataṃ dasseti. Jālāya vā hi dhūme vā sati vāto samuṭṭhāti, pariḷāho mahā na hoti, tadabhāve vātābhāvato pariḷāho mahā hoti. Ārakāvassāti dūreyeva bhaveyya.
“正是如此”在这里是譬喻的对应:应当把三界轮回看成就像炭火坑一样。想活命的那个人,就像执著轮回的愚痴凡夫。两个大力士,就像善业和不善业。他们抓住那个人的两条手臂、把他拖向炭火坑的时候,就像凡夫正在造业的时刻。因为业正在被造作的时候,就说它已经在牵引结生了。以炭火坑为因的苦,应当理解为就像以业为因的轮回之苦。巴利
Evamevakhoti ettha idaṃ opammasaṃsandanaṃ – aṅgārakāsu viya hi tebhūmakavaṭṭaṃ daṭṭhabbaṃ. Jīvitukāmo puriso viya vaṭṭanissito bālaputhujjano. Dve balavanto purisā viya kusalākusalakammaṃ. Tesaṃ taṃ purisaṃ nānābāhāsu gahetvā aṅgārakāsuṃ upakaḍḍhanakālo viya puthujjanassa kammāyūhanakālo. Kammañhi āyūhiyamānameva paṭisandhiṃ ākaḍḍhati nāma. Aṅgārakāsunidānaṃ dukkhaṃ viya kammanidānaṃ vaṭṭadukkhaṃ veditabbaṃ.
“已被遍知”是指被三种遍知所遍知。不过,这里遍知的连接方式,应当依照在“触”那里所说的方式来理解。“三渴爱”就是欲爱、有爱、非有爱,这些都被遍知了。为什么呢?因为意思食是以渴爱为根的。因还没有被断除时,果是不会被断除的。这样,通过意思食这一项,开示也一直讲到了阿拉汉果。这是第三食。巴利
Pariññāteti tīhi pariññāhi pariññāte. Pariññāyojanā panettha phasse vuttanayeneva veditabbā. Tisso taṇhāti kāmataṇhā bhavataṇhā vibhavataṇhāti imā pariññātā honti. Kasmā? Taṇhāmūlakattā manosañcetanāya. Na hi hetumhi appahīne phalaṃ pahīyati. Iti manosañcetanāhāravasenapi yāva arahattā desanā kathitā. Tatiyāhāro.
第四项中,“有罪行的人”指造作恶行、犯过失的人。“那个人怎么样了?”是在问:那个人变成了什么样子?他还能不能活下去?“大王,他照样活着”——就像从前那样,现在也还是那样活着。巴利
Catutthe āgucārinti pāpacāriṃ dosakārakaṃ. Kathaṃ so purisoti so puriso kathaṃbhūto, kiṃ yāpeti, na yāpetīti pucchati? Tatheva deva jīvatīti yathā pubbe, idānipi tatheva jīvati.
“正是如此”这句话,在这里也是同样的譬喻对应:应当把业看作国王,把依着轮回的愚痴凡夫看作那个有罪的人,把三百支矛看作结生识,把国王下令“用三百支矛刺他”的那一刻,看作业之王抓住依着轮回的凡夫、把他投入结生的时刻。其中,虽然结生识就像那三百支矛,但矛本身并没有痛苦,苦是从被矛刺中后伤口所生起的;同样,结生时也没有痛苦,可是结生一旦发生,在生命延续过程中所感受的异熟苦,就像被矛刺中后以伤口为根源生起的那份苦一样。巴利
Evamevakhoti idhāpi idaṃ opammasaṃsandanaṃ – rājā viya hi kammaṃ daṭṭhabbaṃ, āgucārī puriso viya vaṭṭasannissito bālaputhujjano, tīṇi sattisatāni viya paṭisandhiviññāṇaṃ, āgucāriṃ purisaṃ ‘‘tīhi sattisatehi hanathā’’ti raññā āṇattakālo viya kammaraññā vaṭṭasannissitaputhujjanaṃ gahetvā paṭisandhiyaṃ pakkhipanakālo. Tattha kiñcāpi tīṇi sattisatāni viya paṭisandhiviññāṇaṃ, sattīsu pana dukkhaṃ natthi, sattīhi pahaṭavaṇamūlakaṃ dukkhaṃ, evameva paṭisandhiyampi dukkhaṃ natthi, dinnāya pana paṭisandhiyā pavatte vipākadukkhaṃ sattipahaṭavaṇamūlakaṃ dukkhaṃ viya hoti.
“已被遍知”:就是通过三种遍知而被遍知。这里遍知的应用方式,也应当依照在“触食”部分已经讲过的方法来理解。“名色”:就是以识为缘而生起的名色。因为当识被遍知时,名色也就随之被遍知了,因为名色以识为根本,并且与识同时生起。这样,借助识食这一角度,开示也一直讲到了阿拉汉果为止。第四食。第三。巴利
Pariññāteti tīheva pariññāhi pariññāte. Idhāpi pariññāyojanā phassāhāre vuttanayeneva veditabbā. Nāmarūpanti viññāṇapaccayā nāmarūpaṃ. Viññāṇasmiñhi pariññāte taṃ pariññātameva hoti tammūlakattā sahuppannattā ca. Iti viññāṇāhāravasenapi yāva arahattā desanā kathitāti. Catutthāhāro. Tatiyaṃ.
第4篇《有贪经》的注释巴利
4. Atthirāgasuttavaṇṇanā
64 64. 在第四首偈颂里,“贪”等词都是贪爱的不同名称。它因为具有染着的性质,所以叫“贪”;因为具有欢喜的性质,所以叫“喜”;因为具有渴求的性质,所以叫“渴爱”。“识在那里安住、生长”:这是说业推动速行心生起之后,由于它有能力牵引结生,所以既安住又生长。“在……中”是位格,指三地轮转中的处所;或者也可以说,前面每一句里的这个位格都泛指一切处。“在那里,有诸行的增长”:这是针对安住于这种异熟轮转中的人,指那些能成为未来轮转之因的诸行而说的。“在那里,有未来再有的转起”:意思是说,在某个地方,未来将有再有的转起。巴利
64. Catutthe rāgotiādīni lobhasseva nāmāni. So hi rañjanavasena rāgo, nandanavasena nandī, taṇhāyanavasena taṇhāti vuccati. Patiṭṭhitaṃ tattha viññāṇaṃ virūḷhanti kammaṃ javāpetvā paṭisandhiākaḍḍhanasamatthatāya patiṭṭhitañceva virūḷhañca. Yatthāti tebhūmakavaṭṭe bhummaṃ, sabbattha vā purimapurimapade etaṃ bhummaṃ. Atthi tattha saṅkhārānaṃ vuddhīti idaṃ imasmiṃ vipākavaṭṭe ṭhitassa āyativaṭṭahetuke saṅkhāre sandhāya vuttaṃ. Yattha atthi āyatiṃ punabbhavābhinibbattīti yasmiṃ ṭhāne āyatiṃ punabbhavābhinibbatti atthi.
“正是这样”在这里是譬喻的对应:带资粮的业,就像染工和画师;三地轮转,就像木板、墙壁和布匹。正如染工和画师在干净的木板等上面画出图像,带资粮的业也在诸有中产生出色。其中,就像不善巧的画师画出的色丑陋、难看、令人不悦,同样,有人以与智不相应的心来造业,那个业在产生色时,不给予眼等诸根的圆满,而是产生出丑陋、难看、连父母也不喜欢的色。反过来,就像善巧的画师画出的色美好、好看、令人悦意,同样,有人以与智相应的心来造业,那个业在产生色时,给予眼等诸根的圆满,产生出如纯金般美好、好看、像精心装饰过一样的色。巴利
Evameva khoti ettha idaṃ opammasaṃsandanaṃ – rajakacittakārā viya hi sahakammasambhāraṃ kammaṃ, phalakabhittidussapaṭā viya tebhūmakavaṭṭaṃ. Yathā rajakacittakārā parisuddhesu phalakādīsu rūpaṃ samuṭṭhāpenti, evameva sasambhārakakammaṃ bhavesu rūpaṃ samuṭṭhāpeti. Tattha yathā akusalena cittakārena samuṭṭhāpitaṃ rūpaṃ virūpaṃ hoti dussaṇṭhitaṃ amanāpaṃ, evameva ekacco kammaṃ karonto ñāṇavippayuttena cittena karoti, taṃ kammaṃ rūpaṃ samuṭṭhāpentaṃ cakkhādīnaṃ sampattiṃ adatvā dubbaṇṇaṃ dussaṇṭhitaṃ mātāpitūnampi amanāpaṃ rūpaṃ samuṭṭhāpeti. Yathā pana kusalena cittakārena samuṭṭhāpitaṃ rūpaṃ surūpaṃ hoti susaṇṭhitaṃ manāpaṃ, evameva ekacco kammaṃ karonto ñāṇasampayuttena cittena karoti, taṃ kammaṃ rūpaṃ samuṭṭhāpentaṃ cakkhādīnaṃ sampattiṃ datvā suvaṇṇaṃ susaṇṭhitaṃ alaṅkatapaṭiyattaṃ viya rūpaṃ samuṭṭhāpeti.
在这里,还要把食和识合在一起看,这样食与名色之间就有一个连接点;把异熟的运作方式和名色合在一起看,这样名色与行之间就有一个连接点;而行与未来有之间也有一个连接点,应当这样理解。巴利
Ettha ca āhāraṃ viññāṇena saddhiṃ saṅkhipitvā āhāranāmarūpānaṃ antare eko sandhi, vipākavidhiṃ nāmarūpena saṅkhipitvā nāmarūpasaṅkhārānaṃ antare eko sandhi, saṅkhārānañca āyatibhavassa ca antare eko sandhīti veditabbo.
“尖顶屋”是指只取一根主椽建成的房子。“重阁讲堂”是指取两根主椽建成的讲堂。这里“正是这样”的意思是:漏尽者的业应当理解为像太阳光线一样。太阳光线是存在的,但它仅仅因为没有可安立的基础,才被称为“无安住”;而漏尽者的业则是因为根本不存在,所以才是“无安住”。他确实还有身体等,但由这些所造的业不能称为善或不善,只是停留在单纯的行为上,不产生果报。因此,他的业正是因为不存在,才被称为“无安住”。第四。巴利
Kūṭāgāranti ekakaṇṇikaṃ gāhāpetvā kataṃ agāraṃ. Kūṭāgārasālāti dve kaṇṇike gahetvā katasālā. Evameva khoti ettha khīṇāsavassa kammaṃ sūriyarasmisamaṃ veditabbaṃ. Sūriyarasmi pana atthi, sā kevalaṃ patiṭṭhāya abhāvena appatiṭṭhā nāma jātā, khīṇāsavassa kammaṃ natthitāya eva appatiṭṭhaṃ. Tassa hi kāyādayo atthi, tehi pana katakammaṃ kusalākusalaṃ nāma na hoti, kiriyamatte ṭhatvā avipākaṃ hoti. Evamassa kammaṃ natthitāya eva appatiṭṭhaṃ nāma jātanti. Catutthaṃ.
第五 城经的注释巴利
5. Nagarasuttavaṇṇanā
65 65. 在第五个部分,“名色存在时则有识”这里,本来也应该说“行存在时则有识”以及“无明存在时则有行”,但这两句都没有说。为什么呢?因为无明和行属于第三有(过去有),观照不会和它们一起运作。因为大人(佛陀)是立足于现在的五蕴而深入用功的。巴利
65. Pañcame nāmarūpe kho sati viññāṇanti ettha ‘‘saṅkhāresu sati viññāṇa’’nti ca ‘‘avijjāya sati saṅkhārā’’ti ca vattabbaṃ bhaveyya, tadubhayampi na vuttaṃ. Kasmā? Avijjāsaṅkhārā hi tatiyo bhavo, tehi saddhiṃ ayaṃ vipassanā na ghaṭīyati. Mahāpuriso hi paccuppannapañcavokāravasena abhiniviṭṭhoti.
难道说,如果没有见到无明和行,佛陀就不能出现吗?确实不能。不过,从有、取、爱这些角度来说,它们已经被见到了。就像有人追踪一只蜥蜴,看到它钻进洞里,便跟着下去,挖开它钻进去的地方,抓住蜥蜴就走了,不会再去挖别的地方。为什么不挖呢?因为那里什么都没有。同样,这位大人像那个追踪蜥蜴的人一样,坐在菩提座上,从老死开始一路探寻“这个的因是什么,那个的因是什么”,一直找到名色法的因,再往前找名色的因,只见到识。于是他意识到“以五蕴有的范围来说,观照的运作到这里就是尽头了”,就把观照转回来。再往前,就像挖开洞后空无一物的那个地方,无明和行这两者虽然存在,但因为已经被下面的观照所涵盖,不再能单独作为观照的对象,所以他就不再执取它们了。巴利
Nanu ca avijjāsaṅkhāresu adiṭṭhesu na sakkā buddhena bhavitunti. Saccaṃ na sakkā, iminā pana te bhavaupādānataṇhāvasena diṭṭhāva. Tasmā yathā nāma godhaṃ anubandhanto puriso taṃ kūpaṃ paviṭṭhaṃ disvā otaritvā paviṭṭhaṭṭhānaṃ khaṇitvā godhaṃ gahetvā pakkameyya, na parabhāgaṃ khaneyya , kasmā? Kassaci natthitāya. Evaṃ mahāpurisopi godhaṃ anubandhanto puriso viya bodhipallaṅke nisinno jarāmaraṇato paṭṭhāya ‘‘imassa ayaṃ paccayo, imassa ayaṃ paccayo’’ti pariyesanto yāva nāmarūpadhammānaṃ paccayaṃ disvā tassapi paccayaṃ pariyesanto viññāṇameva addasa. Tato ‘‘ettako pañcavokārabhavavasena sammasanacāro’’ti vipassanaṃ paṭinivattesi, parato tucchakūpassa abhinnaṭṭhānaṃ viya avijjāsaṅkhāradvayaṃ atthi, tadetaṃ heṭṭhā vipassanāya gahitattā pāṭiyekkaṃ sammasanūpagaṃ na hotīti na aggahesi.
“回转”就是返回。那么,这里说的回转是哪种识呢?是结生识和观识。其中,结生识是从缘上返回,观识是从所缘上返回。这两种都不超出名色,不会跑到名色之外去。在“到此为止,或生……”等句子里,意思是:当识作为名色的缘、名色作为识的缘,两者互为缘时,仅仅凭这一点,就会有生、有再生。因为除此之外,还能有什么别的会生、会再生呢?难道不正是这本身在生、在再生吗?巴利
Paccudāvattatīti paṭinivattati. Katamaṃ panettha viññāṇaṃ paccudāvattatīti? Paṭisandhiviññāṇampi vipassanāviññāṇampi. Tattha paṭisandhiviññāṇaṃ paccayato paṭinivattati, vipassanāviññāṇaṃ ārammaṇato. Ubhayampi nāmarūpaṃ nātikkamati, nāmarūpato paraṃ na gacchati. Ettāvatā jāyetha vātiādīsu viññāṇe nāmarūpassa paccaye honte, nāmarūpe viññāṇassa paccaye honte, dvīsupi aññamaññapaccayesu hontesu ettakena jāyetha vā upapajjetha vā. Ito hi paraṃ kimaññaṃ jāyetha vā upapajjetha vā, nanu etadeva jāyati ca upapajjati cāti?
像这样,连同前后相续的死与结生一起显示了五句之后,为了再次说明“到此为止”所说的含义,便说:“也就是以名色为缘而有识,以识为缘而有名色。”此后,又依照顺观缘起的规律,为了显示以“以识为缘而有名色”为根本的未来六处和老死,就说了“以名色为缘而有六处”等。巴利
Evaṃ saddhiṃ aparāparacutipaṭisandhīhi pañca padāni dassetvā puna taṃ ettāvatāti vuttamatthaṃ niyyātento yadidaṃ nāmarūpapaccayā viññāṇaṃ, viññāṇapaccayā nāmarūpanti vatvā tato paraṃ anulomapaccayākāravasena viññāṇapaccayā nāmarūpamūlakaṃ āyatijarāmaraṇaṃ dassetuṃ nāmarūpapaccayā saḷāyatanantiādimāha.
“直路”只是“道”的另一种说法。“高耸有墙”是说:因为从护城河那边高高隆起,所以叫“高耸”,也就是具备城墙基址的意思。“可爱”是说:四周四座城门之内,种种货物都很丰足,所以可爱。“令建造”是说:派遣众人去让他们居住。“当令建造”就是说让人居住。建造的时候,先派遣十八俱胝人,问:“满了吗?”回答:“还没满。”就再派遣五家。再问,回答“还没满”,就再派遣五十五家。再问,回答“还没满”,就再派遣三十家。再问,回答“还没满”,就再派遣一千家。再问,回答“还没满”,就再派遣十一万家。再问,回答“还没满”,就再派遣八万四千家。再问“满了吗?”时,他应该这样说:“大王,您在说什么呢?这么大的城怎么会拥挤?用这种方法派人,是不可能填满的。不过可以让人敲鼓巡行宣告:‘我们这座城具备这样那样的丰足,谁想住在这里,就随自己心意来吧,会得到这样那样的照顾。’”他应该这样做。于是人们听说了这座城的种种好处和能得到的照顾,就从四面八方聚集而来,把城填满。后来这座城变得繁荣又富庶。针对这一点,才说“后来这座城变得繁荣又富庶”等等。巴利
Añjasanti maggasseva vevacanaṃ. Uddhāpavantanti āpato uggatattā uddhāpanti laddhavohārena pākāravatthunā samannāgataṃ. Ramaṇīyanti samantā catunnaṃ dvārānaṃ abbhantare ca nānābhaṇḍānaṃ sampattiyā ramaṇīyaṃ. Māpehīti mahājanaṃ pesetvā vāsaṃ kārehi. Māpeyyāti vāsaṃ kāreyya. Kārento ca paṭhamaṃ aṭṭhārasa manussakoṭiyo pesetvā ‘‘sampuṇṇa’’nti pucchitvā ‘‘na tāva sampuṇṇa’’nti vutte aparāni pañcakulāni peseyya. Puna pucchitvā ‘‘na tāva sampuṇṇa’’nti vutte aparāni pañcapaññāsakulāni peseyya. Puna pucchitvā ‘‘na tāva sampuṇṇa’’nti vutte aparāni tiṃsa kulāni peseyya. Puna pucchitvā ‘‘na tāva sampuṇṇa’’nti vutte aparaṃ kulasahassaṃ peseyya. Puna pucchitvā ‘‘na tāva sampuṇṇa’’nti vutte aparāni ekādasanahutāni kulāni peseyya. Puna pucchitvā ‘‘na tāva sampuṇṇa’’nti vutte aparāni caturāsītikulasahassāni peseyya. Puna ‘‘sampuṇṇa’’nti pucchite, ‘‘mahārāja, kiṃ vadesi? Mahantaṃ nagaraṃ asambādhaṃ, iminā nayena kulāni pesetvā na sakkā pūretuṃ, bheriṃ pana carāpetvā ‘amhākaṃ nagaraṃ imāya ca imāya ca sampattiyā sampannaṃ, ye tattha vasitukāmā, yathāsukhaṃ gacchantu, imañcimañca parihāraṃ labhissantī’ti nagarassa ceva vaṇṇaṃ lokassa ca parihāralābhaṃ ghosāpethā’’ti vadeyya. So evaṃ kareyya. Tato manussā nagaraguṇañceva parihāralābhañca sutvā sabbadisāhi samosaritvā nagaraṃ pūreyyuṃ. Taṃ aparena samayena iddhañceva assa phītañca. Taṃ sandhāya tadassa nagaraṃ aparena samayena iddhañceva phītañcātiādi vuttaṃ.
在这里,“繁荣”是指圆满、丰足。“富庶”是指一切成就都盛开。“众人所知”是指被很多人知道,或者对众人有利益。也写作“众人”。“人众杂沓”是指被人群挤满,密密麻麻,没有空隙。“达到增长广大”是指既达到增长又达到广大,既达到最殊胜的地位又达到广博的规模,意思是说,它成为一万个轮围界中最上等的城市。巴利
Tattha iddhanti samiddhaṃ subhikkhaṃ. Phītanti sabbasampattīhi pupphitaṃ. Bāhujaññanti bahūhi ñātabbaṃ, bahujanānaṃ hitaṃ vā. ‘‘Bahujana’’ntipi pāṭho. Ākiṇṇamanussanti manussehi ākiṇṇaṃ nirantaraṃ phuṭṭhaṃ. Vuḍḍhivepullappattanti vuḍḍhippattañceva vepullappattañca, seṭṭhabhāvañceva vipulabhāvañca pattaṃ, dasasahassacakkavāḷe agganagaraṃ jātanti attho.
“正如这样”这句话,在这里是用来配合譬喻说明的:应当把那位在旷野森林中行走的人,看作是从燃灯佛足下开始、一路圆满诸波罗蜜的大士。就像那个人见到前人走过的路,应当看作是大士逐步坐上菩提座之前,先见到八支观道。就像那个人沿着那条单人小道走,后来见到大道,应当看作是大士以更高的观修习到圆熟时,见到出世间道。就像那个人顺着路走,在前方见到城市,应当看作是如来见到涅槃城。不过,这里的城外之城是别人见到的,是别人建成给人居住的;涅槃城则是导师亲自见到、亲自安住的。就像那个人见到四座城门的时候,应当看作是如来见到四道的时候。就像他通过四座城门进入城市的时候,应当看作是如来通过四道进入涅槃的时候。就像他在城市里清点整理货物的时候,应当看作是如来以省察智清点整理五十多种善法的时候。就像为了在城市里建房子而寻找家族的那段时间,应当看作是导师从果定出来、观察应受调教众生的那段时间。就像那个人请求的国王见到一位大财主,应当看作是大梵天请求世尊后,世尊见到憍陈如长老。就像国王把大财主叫来,派他说“你去城里安顿居住”的时候,应当看作是世尊在午后走了十八由旬的路,在阿沙荼月满月日进入波罗奈的仙人堕处,以长老为身证而说法的时候。就像大财主带着十八俱胝人入住城市的时候,应当看作是如来转法轮时,长老和十八俱胝梵天一起安立在入流果的时候——涅槃城就这样第一次有人入住。接着问“城市住满了吗”,回答“还没有”,于是从五户人家开始,一直到派出八万四千户——就像这样,应当看作是如来从第五天起宣说《无我相经》等,从五比丘开始,然后是耶舍为首的五十五位善男子、三十位贤众、一千位旧结发外道、以频婆娑罗为首的十一万人、在《墙外随喜》时的八万四千人——把这么多人引入圣道、送往涅槃城的时候。接着,用那种方式城市还没住满时,就让人击鼓巡行,宣扬城市的美好,宣告各户能得到的照顾和利益——就像这样,应当看作是说法师们在每月八日各处坐下,宣扬涅槃的殊胜,以及证得涅槃者度越生死旷野等的利益。然后,就像人们从四面八方前来汇集到城市,应当看到:无量的善男子在各处听闻法谈后,从各处出来,从出家开始,依随顺之道而行,汇归于涅槃。巴利
Evamevakhoti ettha idaṃ opammasaṃsandanaṃ – araññapavane caramānapuriso viya hi dīpaṅkarapādamūlato paṭṭhāya pāramiyo pūrayamāno mahāpuriso daṭṭhabbo, tassa purisassa pubbakehi manussehi anuyātamaggadassanaṃ viya mahāsattassa anupubbena bodhipallaṅke nisinnassa pubbabhāge aṭṭhaṅgikassa vipassanāmaggassa dassanaṃ, purisassa taṃ ekapadikamaggaṃ anugacchato aparabhāge mahāmaggadassanaṃ viya mahāsattassa uparivipassanāya ciṇṇante lokuttaramaggadassanaṃ, purisassa teneva maggena gacchato purato nagaradassanaṃ viya tathāgatassa nibbānanagaradassanaṃ, bahinagaraṃ panettha aññena diṭṭhaṃ, aññena manussavāsaṃ kataṃ, nibbānanagaraṃ satthā sayameva passi, sayaṃ vāsamakāsi. Tassa purisassa catunnaṃ dvārānaṃ diṭṭhakālo viya tathāgatassa catunnaṃ maggānaṃ diṭṭhakālo, tassa catūhi dvārehi nagaraṃ paviṭṭhakālo viya tathāgatassa catūhi maggehi nibbānaṃ paviṭṭhakālo, tassa nagarabbhantare bhaṇḍavavatthānakālo viya tathāgatassa paccavekkhaṇañāṇena paropaṇṇāsakusaladhammavavatthānakālo. Nagarassa agārakaraṇatthaṃ kulapariyesanakālo viya satthu phalasamāpattito vuṭṭhāya veneyyasatte volokanakālo, tena purisena yācitassa rañño ekaṃ mahākuṭumbikaṃ diṭṭhakālo viya mahābrahmunā yācitassa bhagavato aññāsikoṇḍaññattheraṃ diṭṭhakālo, rañño mahākuṭumbikaṃ pakkosāpetvā ‘‘nagaravāsaṃ karohī’’ti pahitakālo viya bhagavato ekasmiṃ pacchābhatte aṭṭhārasayojanamaggaṃ gantvā āsāḷhipuṇṇamadivase bārāṇasiyaṃ isipatanaṃ pavisitvā theraṃ kāyasakkhiṃ katvā dhammaṃ desitakālo, mahākuṭumbikena aṭṭhārasa purisakoṭiyo gahetvā nagaraṃ ajjhāvuṭṭhakālo viya tathāgatena dhammacakke pavattite therassa aṭṭhārasahi brahmakoṭīhi saddhiṃ sotāpattiphale patiṭṭhitakālo, evaṃ nibbānanagaraṃ paṭhamaṃ āvāsitaṃ, tato sampuṇṇaṃ nagaranti pucchitvā na tāvāti vutte pañca kulāni ādiṃ katvā yāva caturāsītikulasahassapesanaṃ viya tathāgatassa pañcamadivasato paṭṭhāya anattalakkhaṇasuttādīni desetvā pañcavaggiye ādiṃ katvā yasapamukhā pañcapaṇṇāsa kulaputtā, tiṃsa bhaddavaggiyā, sahassapurāṇajaṭilā, bimbisārapamukhāni ekādasapurisanahutāni, tirokuṭṭānumodane caturāsītisahassānīti ettakassa janassa ariyamaggaṃ otāretvā nibbānanagaraṃ pesitakālo, atha tena nayena nagare apūriyamāne bheriṃ carāpetvā nagarassa vaṇṇaghosanaṃ kulānaṃ parihāralābhaghosanaṃ viya ca māsassa aṭṭha divase tattha tattha nisīditvā dhammakathikānaṃ nibbānavaṇṇassa ceva nibbānappattānaṃ jātikantārādinittharaṇānisaṃsassa ca ghosanaṃ, tato sabbadisāhi āgantvā manussānaṃ nagarasamosaraṇaṃ viya tattha tattha dhammakathaṃ sutvā tato tato nikkhamitvā pabbajjaṃ ādiṃ katvā anulomapaṭipadaṃ paṭipannānaṃ aparimāṇānaṃ kulaputtānaṃ nibbānasamosaraṇaṃ daṭṭhabbaṃ.
“古道”指的是圣八支道。这条圣道在《自恣经》(相应部1.215)里,因为还没有生起的缘故,被称为“未生起的道”;在这部经里,因为不再被使用的缘故,被称为“古道”。“梵行”指的是包含三学的整个教法。“繁荣”指的是以禅那之乐而圆满、丰足。“富庶”指的是以神通为庄严而兴盛。“广布”就是传播得很广。“众人所知”就是被很多人所知道。“乃至天人皆所善说”:意思是,在一万轮围界之内,只要天与人所在的范围所及,如来都善加宣说、善加教导。第五。巴利
Purāṇaṃ magganti ariyaṃ aṭṭhaṅgikaṃ maggaṃ. Ayañhi ariyamaggo pavāraṇasutte (saṃ. ni. 1.215) avattamānakaṭṭhena ‘‘anuppannamaggo’’ti vutto, imasmiṃ sutte avaḷañjanaṭṭhena ‘‘purāṇamaggo’’ti. Brahmacariyanti sikkhattayasaṅgahaṃ sakalasāsanaṃ. Iddhanti jhānassādena samiddhaṃ subhikkhaṃ. Phītanti abhiññābharaṇehi pupphitaṃ. Vitthārikanti vitthiṇṇaṃ. Bāhujaññanti bahujanaviññeyyaṃ. Yāva devamanussehisuppakāsitanti yāva dasasahassacakkavāḷe devamanussehi paricchedo atthi, etasmiṃ antare suppakāsitaṃ sudesitaṃ tathāgatenāti. Pañcamaṃ.
《审察经》的注释巴利
6. Sammasasuttavaṇṇanā
66 第六段里,世尊为什么招呼(比丘们)呢?因为在他面前出现了一种微细、触及三相的法教。据说在那个地方,人们有因、有智慧;那里的食物柔软细滑,吃了的人智慧会增长,所以能够通达深奥、触及三相的法义。正因为这样,世尊就在那里宣说了《大念处》《大因缘》《不动利益》,以及《相应部》里的《小因缘》等其他甚深经典。“你们要审察”:就是“你们审察了吗?”“向内审察”:指的是向内对诸缘进行审察。“那位比丘不能令世尊满意”:因为世尊想让他依缘起的理路来回答,他却没有那样回答,反而以三十二分身来回答,没能把握世尊的意趣。巴利
66. Chaṭṭhe āmantesīti kasmā āmantesi? Yasmāssa sukhumā tilakkhaṇāhatā dhammadesanā upaṭṭhāsi. Tasmiṃ kira janapade manussā sahetukā paññavanto. Siniddhāni kirettha bhojanāni, tānisevato janassa paññā vaḍḍhati, te gambhīraṃ tilakkhaṇāhataṃ dhammakathaṃ paṭivijjhituṃ samatthā honti. Teneva bhagavā dīghamajjhimesu mahāsatipaṭṭhānāni (dī. ni. 2.372 ādayo) mahānidānaṃ (dī. ni. 2.95 ādayo), āneñjasappāyaṃ (ma. ni. 3.66 ādayo), saṃyuttake cūḷanidānādisuttanti evamādīni aññāni gambhīrāni suttāni tattheva kathesi. Sammasatha noti sammasatha nu. Antaraṃ sammasanti abbhantaraṃ paccayasammasanaṃ. Na so bhikkhu bhagavato cittaṃ ārādhesīti paccayākāravasena byākārāpetukāmassa bhagavato tathā abyākaritvā dvattiṃsākāravasena byākaronto ajjhāsayaṃ gahetuṃ nāsakkhi.
“说此”是指:这次开示并没有顺着法义的脉络展开,为了令开示顺着法义的脉络展开,所以说了这句话。“那么,阿难,你们听”这一句,是在整个三藏的佛语中独一无二、不与其他地方重复的文句,因为在别处从未这样说过。“依的因”:就是五取蕴的因。这里所说的“依”,特指五取蕴。“生起”:就是产生。“止住”:就是随着一再流转而安住。巴利
Etadavocāti desanā yathānusandhiṃ na gatā, desanāya yathānusandhigamanatthaṃ etadavoca. Tenahānanda, suṇāthāti idaṃ tepiṭake buddhavacane asambhinnapadaṃ. Aññattha hi evaṃ vuttaṃ nāma natthi. Upadhinidānanti khandhupadhinidānaṃ. Khandhapañcakañhettha upadhīti adhippetaṃ. Uppajjatīti jāyati. Nivisatīti punappunaṃ pavattivasena patiṭṭhahati.
世间中那些可爱、令人愉悦的事物,也就是在世间具有可爱性质、甘甜性质的东西。在“眼是世间”等说法里,众生以“这是我的”的方式紧紧执着眼等诸根,安住在自己的成就中,认为自己的眼——按照在镜子等物中取相的方式——是极清净的五净色,就像黄金宫殿里打开的宝狮窗一样;认为耳就像银制的水槽或腰带上的细线一样;把名为“高鼻”的鼻子,想成像是旋制好的雌黄棒;把舌想成像是层层叠叠的红色毛毯,柔软、滑润、甘美;把身想成像是秫秸秆,又像是黄金拱门;把意想成是别人的意无法相比的、殊胜广大的东西。巴利
Yaṃ kho loke piyarūpaṃ sātarūpanti yaṃ lokasmiṃ piyasabhāvañceva madhurasabhāvañca. Cakkhuṃ loketiādīsu lokasmiñhi cakkhādīsu mamattena abhiniviṭṭhā sattā sampattiyaṃ patiṭṭhitā attano cakkhuṃ ādāsādīsu nimittaggahaṇānusārena vippasannapañcapasādaṃ suvaṇṇavimāne ugghāṭitamaṇisīhapañjaraṃ viya maññanti, sotaṃ rajatapanāḷikaṃ viya pāmaṅgasuttaṃ viya ca maññanti, tuṅganāsāti laddhavohāraṃ ghānaṃ vaṭṭetvā ṭhapitaharitālavaṭṭiṃ viya maññanti, jivhaṃ rattakambalapaṭalaṃ viya mudusiniddhamadhurarasadaṃ maññanti, kāyaṃ sālalaṭṭhiṃ viya suvaṇṇatoraṇaṃ viya ca maññanti, manaṃ aññesaṃ manena asadisaṃ uḷāraṃ maññanti.
“视为常”就是他们把它看成常。其余几句也是同样的理解方式。“未能从苦中解脱”是说他们没能从整个轮回之苦中解脱出来。“将会看见”就是将会见到。“Āpānīyakaṃsa”是酒杯的名字。不过,因为人们在这里饮酒,所以称为“āpānīya”(饮料盆)。它既是饮料盆,又是金属盆,所以叫“āpānīyakaṃsa”。这是盛酒和酒渣的盆的名字。但依据“具足色泽”等说法,这里说的是盛在盆中的饮料本身。“为暑热所逼”就是被暑热压迫。“被暑热所侵袭”就是被暑热触及、跟随。对于正在喝的人来说,那饮料会因为色泽等优点而令他满意,或者会遍满全身,使喜悦生起并持续。“不加审察”就是不加观察。巴利
Niccato addakkhunti niccanti addasaṃsu. Sesapadesupi eseva nayo. Na parimucciṃsu dukkhasmāti sakalasmāpi vaṭṭadukkhā na parimucciṃsu. Dakkhissantīti passissanti. Āpānīyakaṃsoti sarakassa nāmaṃ. Yasmā panettha āpaṃ pivanti, tasmā ‘‘āpānīyo’’ti vuccati. Āpānīyo ca so kaṃso cāti āpānīyakaṃso. Surāmaṇḍasarakassetaṃ nāmaṃ. ‘‘Vaṇṇasampanno’’tiādivacanato pana kaṃse ṭhitapānameva evaṃ vuttaṃ. Ghammābhitattoti ghammena abhitatto. Ghammaparetoti ghammena phuṭṭho, anugatoti attho. Pivato hi kho taṃ chādessatīti pivantassa taṃ pānīyaṃ vaṇṇādisampattiyā ruccissati, sakalasarīraṃ vā pharitvā tuṭṭhiṃ uppādayamānaṃ ṭhassati. Appaṭisaṅkhāti apaccavekkhitvā.
“正是如此”在这里是用譬喻来对应说明:世间可爱、可悦的所缘,应当看作饮料盆;被暑热逼恼的人,应当看作依止轮回的凡夫;用饮料盆来邀请别人的人,应当看作以世间可爱、可悦的所缘来引诱人的人;向饮酒者说明饮料盆的好处和过患的那个人,应当看作老师、亲教师等善知识。就像那个回头告知的人,向那人说明了饮料盆的优点和过患;同样,老师或亲教师也为比丘讲说五种欲功德中的乐味以及从中出离。巴利
Evameva khoti ettha idaṃ opammasaṃsandanaṃ – āpānīyakaṃso viya hi loke piyarūpaṃ sātarūpaṃ ārammaṇaṃ daṭṭhabbaṃ, ghammābhitattapuriso viya vaṭṭanissito puthujjano, āpānīyakaṃsena nimantanapuriso viya loke piyarūpena sātarūpena ārammaṇena nimantakajano, āpānīyakaṃse sampattiñca ādīnavañca ārocento āpānakamanusso viya ācariyupajjhāyādiko kalyāṇamitto. Yatheva hi tassa purisassa apalokitamanusso āpānīyakaṃse guṇañca ādīnavañca āroceti, evameva ācariyo vā upajjhāyo vā bhikkhuno pañcasu kāmaguṇesu assādañca nissaraṇañca katheti.
在这里,就像有人在谈到饮料盆的好处和过患之后,那个人只因为喜欢颜色好看等优点,一时冲动,心想“就算会死,以后再说吧”,就匆匆不加考虑地喝了,结果遭受死亡或濒死的痛苦。同样地,比丘,对五种欲乐,通过看见等方式生起的喜悦只是乐味,而过患无论现世还是来世都很多,种类也各不相同。欲乐乐味少、苦多、烦恼多。老师或亲教师这样讲了利益和过患之后,又教诫说:“你应当修行沙门之道,守护根门,饮食知量,勤修警寤。”即使受到这样的教诫,他因为心被乐味束缚,还是说“如果真有过患,以后再说吧”,轻慢老师和亲教师,舍弃诵习、请问等义务和修行,谈论世间利益的话题,因为想享受欲乐而舍弃学处,还俗回家。此后他造作种种恶行,在破墙行窃等时候被人抓住,说“这是贼”,送到国王面前。在这一生就遭受砍断手足等刑罚,来世又在四恶趣中承受大苦。巴利
Tattha yathā āpānīyakaṃsamhi guṇe ca ādīnave ca ārocite so puriso piyavaṇṇādisampadāyameva sañjātavego ‘‘sace maraṇaṃ bhavissati, pacchā jānissāmī’’ti sahasā appaṭisaṅkhāya taṃ pivitvā maraṇaṃ vā maraṇamattaṃ vā dukkhaṃ nigacchati, evameva, bhikkhu, ‘‘pañcasu kāmaguṇesu dassanādivasena uppannasomanassamattameva assādo, ādīnavo pana diṭṭhadhammikasamparāyiko bahu nānappakāro, appassādā kāmā bahudukkhā bahupāyāsā’’ti evaṃ ācariyupajjhāyehi ānisaṃsañca ādīnavañca kathetvā – ‘‘samaṇapaṭipadaṃ paṭipajja, indriyesu guttadvāro bhava bhojane mattaññū jāgariyaṃ anuyutto’’ti evaṃ ovaditopi assādabaddhacittatāya ‘‘sace vuttappakāro ādīnavo bhavissati, pacchā jānissāmī’’ti ācariyupajjhāye apasādetvā uddesaparipucchādīni ceva vattapaṭipattiñca pahāya lokāmisakathaṃ kathento kāme paribhuñjitukāmatāya sikkhaṃ paccakkhāya hīnāyāvattati. Tato duccaritāni pūrento sandhicchedanādikāle ‘‘coro aya’’nti gahetvā rañño dassito idheva hatthapādādichedanaṃ patvā samparāye catūsu apāyesu mahādukkhaṃ anubhoti.
用饮用水来去除,是指用凉水来去除。用凝乳浆,是指只用凝乳浆。用咸炒粉饮,是指加了盐的炒粉饮料。用盐醋饮,是指把各种谷物、果实、嫩芽等放进去,做成所谓的盐醋饮,然后用它来去除。巴利
Pānīyena vā vinetunti sītena vārinā harituṃ. Dadhimaṇḍakenāti dadhimaṇḍanamattena. Bhaṭṭhaloṇikāyāti saloṇena sattupānīyena. Loṇasovīrakenāti sabbadhaññaphalakaḷīrādīni pakkhipitvā loṇasovīrakaṃ nāma karonti, tena.
这里的譬喻对应关系是这样的:应当把还在依赖轮回的时期的修行者,看成被暑热逼恼的人;那个人经过思量后,舍弃饮水用的盆,用水等解除口渴,这就好比比丘依止师长和亲教师的教导,守护六门等,逐步修习观禅,最终证得阿罗汉果;四种饮料就好比四条道;喝了其中某一种饮料,解除了酒后的焦渴,快乐地想去哪里就去哪里,同样,漏尽者饮下四道之饮,灭尽渴爱,前往从未到过的涅槃方向,这个时刻应当如此理解。第六。巴利
Opammasaṃsandanaṃ panettha – ghammābhitattapuriso viya vaṭṭasannissitakāle yogāvacaro daṭṭhabbo, tassa purisassa paṭisaṅkhā āpānīyakaṃsaṃ pahāya pānīyādīhi pipāsassa vinodanaṃ viya bhikkhuno ācariyupajjhāyānaṃ ovāde ṭhatvā chadvārādīni pariggahetvā anukkamena vipassanaṃ vaḍḍhentassa arahattaphalādhigamo, pānīyādīni cattāri pānāni viya hi cattāro maggā, tesu aññataraṃ pivitvā surāpipāsitaṃ vinodetvā sukhino yena kāmaṃ gamanaṃ viya khīṇāsavassa catumaggapānaṃ pivitvā taṇhaṃ vinodetvā agatapubbaṃ nibbānadisaṃ gamanakālo veditabbo. Chaṭṭhaṃ.
《芦束经》的注释巴利
7. Naḷakalāpīsuttavaṇṇanā
67 在第七经中,“朋友,究竟是为了什么”——他为什么这样问?他想:“被这样一问,他会怎么回答呢?”这是为了了解长老的心意倾向。另外,过去有两位上首弟子曾经判定过这个问题,为了让未来的比丘们也能知道,所以他也这样问。“现在才为我”——长老说这句话,是因为前面说“识是名色的缘”,现在也同样说“名色是识的缘”,所以这样说。“芦苇束”——这里并不是拿铁束之类的东西来作比喻,而是为了显示识与名色两者都无力、脆弱,才引用了这个比喻。巴利
67. Sattame kinnu kho, āvusoti kasmā pucchati? ‘‘Evaṃ puṭṭho kathaṃ nu kho byākareyyā’’ti. Therassa ajjhāsayajānanatthaṃ. Apica atīte dve aggasāvakā imaṃ pañhaṃ vinicchayiṃsūti anāgate bhikkhū jānissantītipi pucchati. Idāneva kho mayanti idaṃ thero yassa nāmarūpassa viññāṇaṃ paccayoti vuttaṃ, tadeva nāmarūpaṃ viññāṇassa paccayoti vuttattā āha . Naḷakalāpiyoti idha pana ayakalāpādivasena upamaṃ anāharitvā viññāṇanāmarūpānaṃ abaladubbalabhāvadassanatthaṃ ayaṃ upamā ābhatā.
“灭存在”这句话,是在这个程度上,按照缘所生的五蕴有来作的开示。所谓“以三十六种事”,是指在下面已经解答的十二个方面中,每一个方面各有三种,合起来就是三十六种因由。在这里,第一种是说法者的功德,第二种是修行实践,第三种是修行实践的果。其中,通过第一种方式说明了开示的圆满,通过第二种说明了有学地,通过第三种说明了无学地。第七。巴利
Nirodho hotīti ettake ṭhāne paccayuppannapañcavokārabhavavasena desanā kathitā. Chattiṃsāya vatthūhīti heṭṭhā vissajjitesu dvādasasu padesu ekekasmiṃ tiṇṇaṃ tiṇṇaṃ vasena chattiṃsāya kāraṇehi. Ettha ca paṭhamo dhammakathikaguṇo, dutiyā paṭipatti, tatiyaṃ paṭipattiphalaṃ. Tattha paṭhamanayena desanāsampatti kathitā, dutiyena sekkhabhūmi, tatiyena asekkhabhūmīti. Sattamaṃ.
第八部 憍赏弥经的注释巴利
8. Kosambisuttavaṇṇanā
68 第八个问题里,“除了这些之外”的意思是:有些人是因为相信别人,就把对方说的话当成真的,认定“这就是事实”。另一些人则是坐下来自己琢磨,觉得某个理由合自己的心意,就凭这份好感认定“这是真的”。还有人想:“从很久以前就有这样的传说,这事肯定是真的”,于是靠传闻来认定。另一个人在思考时,心里浮现出一个理由,就顺着“大概是这样”的思路反复推敲,然后认定“这是真的”。还有人在思考中生起一种见解,他顺着这个见解去反复审察那个理由,觉得满意了,就说“这是真的”,靠对见解的审察和认可来认定。但长老把这些理由全都否定了,转而追问亲身现证的智慧,说道:“贤友木西罗,除了这些,靠信仰……”这里“除了这些之外”,就是把信仰等理由放在一边、不依靠它们的意思。“有之灭尽即是涅槃”:五取蕴的灭尽就是涅槃。巴利
68. Aṭṭhame aññatrevāti ekacco hi parassa saddahitvā yaṃ esa bhaṇati, taṃ bhūtanti gaṇhāti. Aparassa nisīditvā cintentassa yaṃ kāraṇaṃ ruccati, so ‘‘atthi eta’’nti ruciyā gaṇhāti. Eko ‘‘cirakālato paṭṭhāya evaṃ anussavo atthi, bhūtameta’’nti anussavena gaṇhāti. Aññassa vitakkayato ekaṃ kāraṇaṃ upaṭṭhāti, so ‘‘attheta’’nti ākāraparivitakkena gaṇhāti. Aparassa cintayato ekā diṭṭhi uppajjati, yāyassa taṃ kāraṇaṃ nijjhāyantassa khamati, so ‘‘attheta’’nti diṭṭhinijjhānakkhantiyā gaṇhāti. Thero pana pañcapi etāni kāraṇāni paṭikkhipitvā paccakkhañāṇena paṭividdhabhāvaṃ pucchanto aññatreva, āvuso musila, saddhāyātiādimāha. Tattha aññatrevāti saddhādīni kāraṇāni ṭhapetvā, vinā etehi kāraṇehīti attho. Bhavanirodho nibbānanti pañcakkhandhanirodho nibbānaṃ.
“他保持沉默”是说:那位长老已经漏尽,而我没有说“我是漏尽者”或“我不是”,就只是沉默。那罗陀尊者为什么对帕维塔尊者说这番话呢?据说他心里这样想:“‘有的灭尽就叫涅槃’这个问题,即使是有学的人也应该知道;但这位长老却把那位长老当成无学,我要让他明白这个道理。”所以才说了这番话。巴利
Tuṇhī ahosīti thero khīṇāsavo, ahaṃ pana khīṇāsavoti vā na vāti vā avatvā tuṇhīyeva ahosi. Āyasmā nārado āyasmantaṃ paviṭṭhaṃ etadavocāti kasmā avoca? So kira cintesi – ‘‘bhavanirodho nibbānaṃ nāmāti sekhehipi jānitabbo pañho esa, ayaṃ pana thero imaṃ theraṃ asekhabhūmiyā kāreti, imaṃ ṭhānaṃ jānāpessāmī’’ti etaṃ avoca.
“以正慧善见”:这是说,以与观智相应的道慧而善见。“而我不说我是阿罗汉”:因为还住于不来道,所以表明自己不是阿罗汉。他如今所生起的“有灭即涅槃”这个智,是不属于十九种观察智的观察智。“水井”:指深二十肘或三十肘的饮用水井。“取水器”:指舀水用的器具。“水即是智”:就像站在岸边观看的人会生起“那是水”的智。“而不能以身触”:虽然看见了水,却不能把水取出来,以身触水而安住。正如在井中看见水,是不来者看见涅槃;如同被热逼恼的人,是不来者;如同取水器,是阿罗汉道。就像被热逼恼的人在井中看见水,不来者也以观察智了知“上面还有阿罗汉果”。“然而,如同那人因为没有取水器,虽然看见水却不能取出来以身触水;不来者也因为没有阿罗汉道,不能以涅槃为所缘而进入阿罗汉果定安住。第八。巴利
Sammappaññāyasudiṭṭhanti saha vipassanāya maggapaññāya suṭṭhu diṭṭhaṃ. Na camhi arahanti anāgāmimagge ṭhitattā arahaṃ na homīti dīpeti. Yaṃ panassa idāni ‘‘bhavanirodho nibbāna’’nti ñāṇaṃ, taṃ ekūnavīsatiyā paccavekkhaṇañāṇehi vimuttaṃ paccavekkhaṇañāṇaṃ. Udapānoti vīsatiṃsahatthagambhīro pānīyakūpo. Udakavārakoti udakaussiñcanavārako. Udakanti hi kho ñāṇaṃ assāti tīre ṭhitassa olokayato evaṃ ñāṇaṃ bhaveyya. Na ca kāyena phusitvāti udakaṃ pana nīharitvā kāyena phusitvā viharituṃ na sakkuṇeyya. Udapāne udakadassanaṃ viya hi anāgāmino nibbānadassanaṃ, ghammābhitattapuriso viya anāgāmī, udakavārako viya arahattamaggo, yathā ghammābhitattapuriso udapāne udakaṃ passati. Evaṃ anāgāmī paccavekkhaṇañāṇena ‘‘upari arahattaphalasamayo nāma atthī’’ti jānāti. Yathā pana so puriso udakavārakassa natthitāya udakaṃ nīharitvā kāyena phusituṃ na labhati, evaṃ anāgāmī arahattamaggassa natthitāya nibbānaṃ ārammaṇaṃ katvā arahattaphalasamāpattiṃ appetvā nisīdituṃ na labhati. Aṭṭhamaṃ.
第9经《近行经》的注释巴利
9. Upayantisuttavaṇṇanā
69 第九经的注释中,“向上涌”是指在水量增加时向上流。“大河”是指恒河、耶牟那河等大河流。“令增长”是使其上涨,也就是增长、充满的意思。“无明向上涌”是指无明向上增长时,能够成为诸行的缘。“令诸行增长”是令诸行上涨、增长。所有词句的含义都应这样理解。“退落”是指退去、消减。“无明退落”是指无明退去、消减时,不能成为诸行的缘。“令诸行退落”是令诸行退去。各句都应如此类推。第九。巴利
69. Navame upayantoti udakavaḍḍhanasamaye upari gacchanto. Mahānadiyoti gaṅgāyamunādikā mahāsaritāyo. Upayāpetīti upari yāpeti, vaḍḍheti pūretīti attho. Avijjā upayantīti avijjā upari gacchantī saṅkhārānaṃ paccayo bhavituṃ sakkuṇantī. Saṅkhāre upayāpetīti saṅkhāre upari yāpeti vaḍḍheti. Evaṃ sabbapadesu attho veditabbo. Apayantoti apagacchanto osaranto. Avijjā apayantīti avijjā apagacchamānā osaramānā upari saṅkhārānaṃ paccayo bhavituṃ na sakkuṇantīti attho. Saṅkhāre apayāpetīti saṅkhāre apagacchāpeti. Esa nayo sabbapadesu. Navamaṃ.
第10章 须深经的注释巴利
10. Susimasuttavaṇṇanā
70 第十经中,被敬重:被一切天和人从心里看重,就像石伞盖一样。被推崇:被以敬意喜爱。被供养:以四种资具供养而被恭敬。被礼敬:以谦下的行为而被恭敬。人们见到导师后,会从象肩等高座下来让路,从肩头取下布,从座位起身,顶礼膜拜。这样,他便成为他们所称的被礼敬者。殊希摩:是一位名叫殊希摩、精通吠陀支分的聪明游方行者。来吧,你:据说,他们当时这样想:沙门乔达摩并非靠出身、种姓等而获得最高的利养,但他却是最杰出的诗人,以超群的文才为弟子们编撰偈颂并教授。弟子们学了之后,便向信众讲说随顺的谈话、随喜的赞叹,以及音韵的讽诵等。那些信众心生欢喜,便拿出供养。如果我们也能略懂一些沙门乔达摩所知的法,再把我们自己的见解掺进去,去向信众宣说,这样我们或许也能成为得到供养的人。那么,有谁在沙门乔达摩跟前出家后,能最快学会呢?他们这样想过之后,看出殊希摩有能力,便走到他面前,这样对他说了。巴利
70. Dasame garukatoti sabbehi devamanussehi pāsāṇacchattaṃ viya cittena garukato. Mānitoti manena piyāyito. Pūjitoti catupaccayapūjāya pūjito. Apacitoti nīcavuttikaraṇena apacito. Satthārañhi disvā manussā hatthikkhandhādīhi otaranti maggaṃ denti, aṃsakūṭato sāṭakaṃ apanenti, āsanato vuṭṭhahanti vandanti. Evaṃ so tehi apacito nāma hoti. Susimoti evaṃnāmako vedaṅgesu kusalo paṇḍitaparibbājako. Ehi tvanti tesaṃ kira etadahosi – ‘‘samaṇo gotamo na jātigottādīni āgamma lābhaggappatto jāto, kaviseṭṭho panesa uttamakavitāya sāvakānaṃ ganthaṃ bandhitvā deti, taṃ te uggaṇhitvā upaṭṭhākānaṃ upanisinnakathampi anumodanampi sarabhaññampīti evamādīni kathenti, te tesaṃ pasannā lābhaṃ upasaṃharanti. Sace mayaṃ yaṃ samaṇo gotamo jānāti, tato thokaṃ jāneyyāma, attano samayaṃ tattha pakkhipitvā mayampi upaṭṭhākānaṃ katheyyāma, tato etehi lābhitarā bhaveyyāma. Ko nu kho samaṇassa gotamassa santike pabbajitvā khippameva uggaṇhituṃ sakkhissatī’’ti. Te evaṃ cintetvā ‘‘susimo paṭibalo’’ti disvā taṃ upasaṅkamitvā evamāhaṃsu.
须深便前往阿难尊者那里。为什么前往呢?据说他当时这样想:我到底该到谁面前,才能尽快得到这个法?接着他又想:沙门乔达摩地位尊贵、威德深重,一向严谨自律,不是随便什么时候都能去亲近的。而且还有许多刹帝利等各类人也去拜访沙门乔达摩,那个时候也挤不上去。在他的弟子当中,舍利弗智慧广大,在观慧方面被列为第一;大目犍连在禅定方面被列为第一;大迦叶在持头陀行的人中被列为第一,阿那律在天眼通的人中被列为第一,满慈子在说法的人中被列为第一,优波离长老在持律的人中被列为第一。而这位阿难,博学多闻,持守三藏,导师在各处所说的法,他都能汇集起来宣讲,他在五个方面被列为第一,获得了八种殊胜的认可,具备四种稀有难得的品质。如果我到他跟前,应该能很快得到法。因此,须深便前往阿难尊者那里。巴利
Yenāyasmā ānando tenupasaṅkamīti kasmā upasaṅkami? Evaṃ kirassa ahosi, ‘‘kassa nu kho santikaṃ gantvā ahaṃ imaṃ dhammaṃ khippaṃ laddhuṃ sakkhissāmī’’ti? Tato cintesi – ‘‘samaṇo gotamo garu tejussado niyamamanuyutto, na sakkā akāle upasaṅkamituṃ, aññepi bahū khattiyādayo samaṇaṃ gotamaṃ upasaṅkamanti, tasmimpi samaye na sakkā upasaṅkamituṃ. Sāvakesupissa sāriputto mahāpañño vipassanālakkhaṇamhi etadagge ṭhapito, mahāmoggallāno samādhilakkhaṇasmiṃ etadagge ṭhapito, mahākassapo dhutaṅgadharesu anuruddho dibbacakkhukesu, puṇṇo mantāṇiputto dhammakathikesu, upālitthero vinayadharesu etadagge ṭhapito, ayaṃ pana ānando bahussuto tipiṭakadharo, satthāpissa tattha tattha kathitaṃ dhammaṃ āharitvā katheti, pañcasu ṭhānesu etadagge ṭhapito, aṭṭhannaṃ varānaṃ lābhī, catūhi acchariyabbhutadhammehi samannāgato, tassa samīpaṃ gato khippaṃ dhammaṃ laddhuṃ sakkhissāmī’’ti. Tasmā yenāyasmā ānando tenupasaṅkami.
阿难为什么不自己给他剃度,而要带他去见世尊呢?据说阿难当时是这样想的:这个人在外道时期,独自宣称“我是导师”而四处游化,如果他出家之后,为了破坏教法,可能会拉拢徒众。而且我实在不了解他的内心志向,导师应该会知道。因此,阿难就带着他,前往世尊那里。
“那么,阿难,让殊希摩出家吧。”据说世尊当时这样想:这个游方者在做外道的时候,宣称“我是独修的导师”而游化,现在却说“我想在这里修梵行”。他到底是对我生起了信心,还是对我的弟子们生起了信心,还是对我或我的弟子们所说的法生起了信心呢?世尊观察到他对任何一处都没有真正的信心,于是又想:这个人是为了盗取我教法中的法而出家的。这样看来,他出家的动机不纯,那他的修行结果会怎样呢?世尊观察后知道:他虽然是为了“盗法”而出家,但只需不久,精进用功,就能证得阿罗汉果。知道这一点后,世尊便说:“那么,阿难,让殊希摩出家吧。”巴利
Yenabhagavā tenupasaṅkamīti kasmā sayaṃ apabbājetvā upasaṅkami? Evaṃ kirassa ahosi – ‘‘ayaṃ titthiyasamaye pāṭiyekko ‘ahaṃ satthā’ti paṭijānanto carati, pabbajitvā sāsanassa alābhāyapi parisakkeyya. Na kho panassāhaṃ ajjhāsayaṃ ājānāmi, satthā jānissatī’’ti. Tasmā taṃ ādāya yena bhagavā tenupasaṅkami. Tenahānanda, susimaṃ pabbājethāti satthā kira cintesi – ‘‘ayaṃ paribbājako titthiyasamaye ‘ahaṃ pāṭiyekko satthā’ti paṭijānamāno carati, ‘idha maggabrahmacariyaṃ carituṃ icchāmī’ti kira vadati. Kiṃ nu kho mayi pasanno, udāhu mayhaṃ sāvakesu, udāhu mayhaṃ vā mama sāvakānaṃ vā dhammakathāya pasanno’’ti? Athassa ekaṭṭhānepi pasādābhāvaṃ ñatvā, ‘‘ayaṃ mama sāsane dhammaṃ thenessāmīti pabbajati. Itissa āgamanaṃ aparisuddhaṃ; nipphatti nu kho kīdisā’’ti? Olokento ‘‘kiñcāpi ‘dhammaṃ thenessāmī’ti pabbajati, katipāheneva pana ghaṭetvā arahattaṃ gaṇhissatī’’ti ñatvā ‘‘tenahānanda, susimaṃ pabbājethā’’ti āha.
“他宣告了正智”:据说,那些比丘在世尊面前领受了业处,然后就在三个月的雨安居期间安住。就在那三个月的雨安居里,他们努力精进、持续用功,证得了阿拉汉果。他们心想:“我们要把所证得的功德禀告世尊。”于是在自恣仪式结束后,他们收拾好坐卧处,来到世尊面前,各自禀告了自己所证得的功德。这段话就是针对这件事说的。“正智”是阿拉汉果的名称。“宣告”就是禀告的意思。“他听闻了”:据说他竖起耳朵、专心倾听,依次走到那些比丘各自所在的地方,想听他们各种谈话。“他前往那些比丘那里”:他为什么前去?据说,他听到这件事后,心里这样想:“在这教法里,所谓的‘正智’,一定是最殊胜、最精华的所在,大概就像师长秘传的口诀一样。我去问一问,就能弄明白了。”所以他便前去了。巴利
Aññā byākatā hotīti te kira bhikkhū satthu santike kammaṭṭhānaṃ gahetvā temāsaṃ vassaṃ vasantā tasmiṃyeva antotemāse ghaṭentā vāyamantā arahattaṃ paṭilabhiṃsu. Te ‘‘paṭiladdhaguṇaṃ satthu ārocessāmā’’ti pavāritapavāraṇā senāsanaṃ saṃsāmetvā satthu santikaṃ āgantvā attano paṭiladdhaguṇaṃ ārocesuṃ. Taṃ sandhāyetaṃ vuttaṃ. Aññāti arahattassa nāmaṃ. Byākatāti ārocitā. Assosīti so kira ohitasoto hutvā tesaṃ tesaṃ bhikkhūnaṃ ṭhitaṭṭhānaṃ gacchati taṃ taṃ kathaṃ suṇitukāmo. Yena te bhikkhū tenupasaṅkamīti kasmā upasaṅkami? Taṃ kirassa pavattiṃ sutvā etadahosi – ‘‘aññā nāma imasmiṃ sāsane paramappamāṇaṃ sārabhūtā ācariyamuṭṭhi maññe bhavissati, pucchitvā naṃ jānissāmī’’ti. Tasmā upasaṅkami.
“种种”就是多种多样。“神变类”就是神通变化的类别。“显现与隐没”是指把显现变成隐没,把隐没变成显现,问的是:你们能做到吗?“穿墙”是指墙的另一边。另外两个词也是同样的道理。“出没”是指从地里涌出和潜入地里。“结跏趺坐”是指盘腿而坐。“像鸟一样”问的是:能不能坐着或飞着过去?“有翅膀的鸟”是指带翅膀的鸟。这里只是简略说明,关于这种神变以及后面天耳等内容的详细注释方法,应该按照《清净道论》里所说的来理解。巴利
Anekavihitanti anekavidhaṃ. Iddhividhanti iddhikoṭṭhāsaṃ. Āvibhāvaṃ tirobhāvanti āvibhāvaṃ gahetvā tirobhāvaṃ, tirobhāvaṃ gahetvā āvibhāvaṃ kātuṃ sakkothāti pucchati. Tirokuṭṭanti parakuṭṭaṃ. Itarapadadvayepi eseva nayo. Ummujjanimujjanti ummujjanañca nimujjanañca. Pallaṅkenāti pallaṅkabandhanena. Kamathāti nisīdituṃ vā gantuṃ vā sakkothāti pucchati? Pakkhī sakuṇoti pakkhayutto sakuṇo. Ayamettha saṅkhepo, vitthārato pana imassa iddhividhassa, ito paresaṃ dibbasotādīnañca vaṇṇanānayo visuddhimagge vuttanayena veditabboti.
“寂静的解脱”:因为支分寂静、所缘寂静,所以称为寂静的无色界解脱。“以身触证”:以名身触证、获得。“贤友,我们是慧解脱者”:这是说,贤友,我们是审察者、纯观行者,仅以智慧而解脱。“贤友须深,你应了知,或你不了知”:他们为什么这样说呢?据说他们当时心想:“我们没办法把握他的心意来为他说法,但只要他去问十力者,就能没有疑惑了。”“法住智”:就是观智,它先产生。“于涅槃之智”:指观行达到顶点时所转起的道智,它后产生。所以世尊这样说。巴利
Santā vimokkhāti aṅgasantatāya ceva ārammaṇasantatāya ca santā āruppavimokkhā. Kāyena phusitvāti nāmakāyena phusitvā paṭilabhitvā. Paññāvimuttā kho mayaṃ, āvusoti, āvuso, mayaṃ nijjhānakā sukkhavipassakā paññāmatteneva vimuttāti dasseti. Ājāneyyāsi vā tvaṃ, āvuso susima, na vā tvaṃ ājāneyyāsīti kasmā evamāhaṃsu? Evaṃ kira nesaṃ ahosi – ‘‘mayaṃ imassa ajjhāsayaṃ gahetvā kathetuṃ na sakkhissāma, dasabalaṃ pana pucchitvā nikkaṅkho bhavissatī’’ti. Dhammaṭṭhitiñāṇanti vipassanāñāṇaṃ, taṃ paṭhamataraṃ uppajjati. Nibbāne ñāṇanti vipassanāya ciṇṇante pavattamaggañāṇaṃ, taṃ pacchā uppajjati. Tasmā bhagavā evamāha.
“你应了知”等语,为什么这样说呢?是为了显示即使没有定,智慧也能这样生起。这里要表达的意思是:须深,道或果并不是定的直接果报,不是定的利益,不是定的最终成就;而是观的直接果报,是观的利益,是观的最终成就。因此,不论你了知还是不了知,事实上都是法住智在先,于涅槃之智在后。巴利
Ājāneyyāsi vātiādi kasmā vuttaṃ? Vināpi samādhiṃ evaṃ ñāṇuppattidassanatthaṃ. Idañhi vuttaṃ hoti – susima, maggo vā phalaṃ vā na samādhinissando, na samādhiānisaṃso, na samādhissa nipphatti, vipassanāya paneso nissando, vipassanāya ānisaṃso, vipassanāya nipphatti, tasmā jāneyyāsi vā tvaṃ, na vā tvaṃ jāneyyāsi, atha kho dhammaṭṭhitiñāṇaṃ pubbe, pacchā nibbāne ñāṇanti.
这时,世尊知道他已经具备了证悟的能力,便为他开示三转法轮的法,问道:“须深,你认为怎样?色是常还是无常?”等等。在那番开示结束时,这位长老便证得了阿罗汉果。接着,世尊为了进一步勘问他,又说道:“须深,‘以生为缘而有老死’,你看到了吗?”等等。那么,为什么又提起“须深,而你……”这句话呢?是为了显明那些审察型、纯观比丘们的境界。这里的用意是:须深,不仅你一人是审察者、纯观者,这些比丘也都是如此。其余内容在各处都已清楚明了。第十。巴利
Idānissa paṭivedhabhabbataṃ ñatvā teparivaṭṭaṃ dhammadesanaṃ desento taṃ kiṃ maññasi, susima? Rūpaṃ niccaṃ vā aniccaṃ vātiādimāha? Te parivaṭṭadesanāvasāne pana thero arahattaṃ patto. Idānissa anuyogaṃ āropento jātipaccayā jarāmaraṇanti, susima, passasītiādimāha. Api pana tvaṃ, susimāti idaṃ kasmā ārabhi? Nijjhānakānaṃ sukkhavipassakabhikkhūnaṃ pākaṭakaraṇatthaṃ. Ayañhettha adhippāyo – na kevalaṃ tvameva nijjhānako sukkhavipassako, etepi bhikkhū evarūpāyevāti. Sesaṃ sabbattha pākaṭamevāti. Dasamaṃ.
第八 沙门婆罗门品巴利
8. Samaṇabrāhmaṇavaggo
《老死经》等的注释巴利
1. Jarāmaraṇasuttādivaṇṇanā
71-72 在《沙门婆罗门品》中,针对老、死等每一个词各自单独成经,共说了十一部经,这些经的意思都很浅显易懂。巴利
71-72. Samaṇabrāhmaṇavagge jarāmaraṇādīsu ekekapadavasena ekekaṃ katvā ekādasa suttāni vuttāni, tāni uttānatthānevāti.
第九 中间省略品巴利
9. Antarapeyyālaṃ
《导师经》等的注释巴利
1. Satthusuttādivaṇṇanā
73 从这以后,有十二个叫作“中间略说品”的部分,是以“应当寻求导师”等说法展开的。它们全都是根据那些以各种方式觉悟的应受调伏众生的意乐而说的。其中,“导师”:无论是佛陀还是声闻弟子,凡是依靠他而获得道智的,就称为导师,这样的导师应当去寻求。“应当修学”:三种修学都应当去做。在“瑜伽”等词当中,“瑜伽”指努力实践;“欲”指想做善事的善法欲;“精勤”指能承受一切的最强精进;“不退”指不退缩;“热忱”指烧除烦恼的精进;“不断”指持续不断的修习;“念”指藉由老死等方式把握四谛之念;“正知”指那样的智慧;“不放逸”指在谛之修习上的不放逸。其余在各处都已浅显明了。巴利
73. Ito paraṃ ‘‘satthā pariyesitabbo’’tiādinayappavattā dvādasa antarapeyyālavaggā nāma honti. Te sabbepi tathā tathā bujjhanakānaṃ veneyyapuggalānaṃ ajjhāsayavasena vuttā. Tattha satthāti buddho vā hotu sāvako vā, yaṃ nissāya maggañāṇaṃ labhati, ayaṃ satthā nāma, so pariyesitabbo. Sikkhā karaṇīyāti tividhāpi sikkhā kātabbā. Yogādīsu yogoti payogo. Chandoti kattukamyatākusalacchando. Ussoḷhīti sabbasahaṃ adhimattavīriyaṃ. Appaṭivānīti anivattanā. Ātappanti kilesatāpanavīriyameva. Sātaccanti satatakiriyaṃ. Satīti jarāmaraṇādivasena catusaccapariggāhikā sati. Sampajaññanti tādisameva ñāṇaṃ. Appamādoti saccabhāvanāya appamādo. Sesaṃ sabbattha uttānamevāti.